You are on page 1of 644

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge

Enterprise Customer Training Manual

Huawei Enterprise Training&Certification Department

2015

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

CONTENTS
1

Huawei Training & Certification Service Overview ............................................................. 18


1.1

Introduce Huawei Training & Certification Service ............................................................. 18


1.1.1

ICT Convergence Training & Certification Solution .................................................... 18

1.1.2

Huawei Training Service ............................................................................................. 18

1.1.3 Help customer successfully deploy, operate and optimize Huawei products and
solutions ................................................................................................................................... 19

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.1.4

Learning Path .............................................................................................................. 20

1.1.5

Huawei's Career Certification ...................................................................................... 21

1.1.6

Training Instructors ...................................................................................................... 22

1.1.7

Training Methods ......................................................................................................... 22

Huawei World Wide Learning Center ................................................................................. 23


1.2.1

China Global Training Center (CGTC) ........................................................................ 23

1.2.2

Malaysia Global Training Center (MGTC) ................................................................... 24

General Terms and Conditions ........................................................................................... 25


1.3.1

Validity ......................................................................................................................... 25

1.3.2

Training Application ..................................................................................................... 25

1.3.3

Training Cancellation Terms ........................................................................................ 25

1.3.4

Training location .......................................................................................................... 25

1.3.5

Training Service Language ......................................................................................... 26

1.3.6

Training Quality Assurance ......................................................................................... 26

1.3.7

Other Services for Trainee .......................................................................................... 26

1.3.8

Intellectual Property Right ........................................................................................... 27

Huawei online learning center (Learning Website) ............................................................ 28


1.4.1

How to register for a website account? ....................................................................... 28

1.4.2

How to get online learning resource? ......................................................................... 28

1.4.3

Frequently-Used Functions on Learning Website....................................................... 29

Enterprise Network Training Solution ................................................................................. 30


2.1

Training Path ...................................................................................................................... 30


2.1.1

Routing and Switching Certification Training Path ...................................................... 30

2.1.2

WLAN Certification Training Path ............................................................................... 31

2.1.3

Security Certification Training Path ............................................................................. 32

2.1.4

Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Path .................................... 33

2.1.5

IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path .................................................. 34

2.1.6

NE Routers Training Path ........................................................................................... 35

2.1.7

AR G3 Routers Training Path ..................................................................................... 36

2.1.8

AR Industrial Router Training Path ............................................................................. 37

2.1.9

Campus Network Switch (S series) Training Path ...................................................... 38

2.1.10

S12700 Agile Switch Training Path ...................................................................... 39

2.1.11

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Training Path ....................... 40

2.1.12

WLAN (AC/ACU/AP) Training Path ..................................................................... 41

2.1.13

MSCG(ME60) Training Path ................................................................................ 42

-1-

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

2.1.14

PTN Product Training Path .................................................................................. 43

2.1.15

Enterprise NMS eSight-IP Training Path ............................................................. 44

2.1.16

Agile Controller Training Path .............................................................................. 45

2.1.17

AnyOffice Training Path ....................................................................................... 46

2.1.18

Enterprise Network Design Training Path............................................................ 47

2.1.19

Firewall Training Path .......................................................................................... 48

2.1.20

Security Management Software Training Path .................................................... 49

2.1.21

Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path ............................................... 50

2.1.22

Anti-DDoS Defense System Training Path .......................................................... 51

2.1.23

UMA System Training Path .................................................................................. 52

2.2

Required Training Programs .............................................................................................. 53

2.3

Training Programs .............................................................................................................. 59

2.4

Routing and Switching Career Certification Training Programs ........................................ 59


2.4.1

HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device Training ............................... 59

2.4.2

HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device Training (Fast-track) ........... 60

2.4.3

HCNP-R&S Training .................................................................................................... 61

2.4.4

HCNP-R&S Training (Fast-Track) ............................................................................... 62

2.4.5

HCIE-R&S training ...................................................................................................... 63

2.5

WLAN Career Certification Training Programs .................................................................. 64


2.5.1

2.6

HCNA-WLAN-IEBW Implementing Enterprise Basic WLAN Training ........................ 64

Security Career Certification Training Programs................................................................ 66


2.6.1

HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training ....................... 66

2.6.2

HCNP-Security Training .............................................................................................. 67

2.7

Routing and Switching Specialist Certification Training Programs .................................... 69


2.7.1

2.8

HCS-Field-R&S Training ............................................................................................. 69

WLAN Specialist Certification Training Programs .............................................................. 71


2.8.1

2.9

HCS-Field-WLAN Training .......................................................................................... 71

IP Technology Fundamental Training Programs ................................................................ 74


2.9.1

IP Network Technology Fundamental Training ........................................................... 74

2.9.2

Huawei VRP System Training ..................................................................................... 75

2.9.3

Enterprise LAN Technology Training ........................................................................... 76

2.9.4

Enterprise WAN Technology Training ......................................................................... 78

2.9.5

Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training ................................................................. 79

2.10

IP Network Advanced Technology Training................................................................. 81

2.10.1

Enterprise IP Multicast Technology Training ........................................................ 81

2.10.2

Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training .............................................................. 82

2.10.3

Enterprise MPLS VPN Technology Training ........................................................ 84

2.10.4

Enterprise MPLS TE Technology Training ........................................................... 86

2.10.5

Enterprise QoS Technology Training ................................................................... 87

2.10.6

Enterprise HA Technology Training...................................................................... 89

2.10.7

Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training ................................................................... 90

2.11

NE40E-X Router Training Programs ........................................................................... 91

-2-

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

2.11.1

NE40E-X Router Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 91

2.11.2

NE40E-X Router Essential Operation and Maintenance Training ...................... 92

2.11.3

NE40E-X Router Advanced Operation and Commissioning Training ................. 94

2.12

NE20E-S Router Training Programs ........................................................................... 96

2.12.1

NE20E-S Router Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 96

2.12.2

NE20E-S Router Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................... 97

2.13

NE05E&08E Router Training Programs ..................................................................... 99

2.13.1

NE05E&08E Router Installation and Commissioning Training............................ 99

2.13.2

NE05E&08E Router Operation and Maintenance Training ............................... 100

2.14

AR G3 Router Training Programs ............................................................................. 102

2.14.1

AR G3 Router Installation and Commissioning Training ................................... 102

2.14.2

AR G3 Router Essential Operation and Maintenance Training ......................... 103

2.14.3

AR G3 Router Advanced Operation and Commissioning Training ................... 105

2.15

AR SOHO Router Training Programs ....................................................................... 107

2.15.1

AR SOHO Router Installation and Commissioning Training ............................. 107

2.15.2

AR SOHO Routers Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 108

2.16

AR Industrial Router Training Programs ....................................................................110

2.16.1

AR Series Industrial Router Installation and Commissioning Training ...............110

2.16.2

AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training .................. 111

2.16.3

AMI Solution Training ..........................................................................................113

2.17

Campus Network Switch (S series) Training .............................................................114

2.17.1

Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training ......114

2.17.2

Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training ......115

2.17.3
Training

Campus Network Switch (S series) Essential Operation and Maintenance


............................................................................................................................116

2.17.4
Training

Campus Network Switches(S series) Advanced Operation and Maintenance


............................................................................................................................118

2.18

S12700 Agile Switch Training ................................................................................... 120

2.18.1

S12700 Agile Switch Installation and Commissioning Training ......................... 120

2.18.2

S12700 Agile Switch Essential Operation and Maintenance Training .............. 121

2.18.3

S12700 Agile Switch Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training ............. 123

2.19

Data Center Switch(CE Series)Training Programs ................................................... 125

2.19.1
Training

Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Installation and Commissioning


........................................................................................................................... 125

2.19.2
Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Essential Operation and
Maintenance Training ............................................................................................................. 126
2.19.3
Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Advanced Operation and
Maintenance Training ............................................................................................................. 128
2.20

WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs ................................................................... 130

2.20.1

WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training ............................................... 130

2.20.2

WLAN Essential Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................... 131

2.20.3

WLAN Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 132

-3-

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

2.20.4
2.21

WLAN Planning & Optimization Training ........................................................... 133


MSCG(ME60) Training Programs ............................................................................. 136

2.21.1

ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training ................................................. 136

2.21.2

ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................ 137

2.21.3

ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training ............................................... 139

2.21.4

ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training.......................................................... 140

2.21.5

iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training ......................................... 141

2.22

PTN Products Training Programs ............................................................................. 142

2.22.1

PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training ................................... 142

2.22.2

PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training ................................................... 143

2.22.3

PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................................................. 144

2.22.4

PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training ................................................... 146

2.22.5

PTN Network Planning and Design Training ..................................................... 147

2.23

Enterprise NMS eSight-IP Training Programs .......................................................... 148

2.23.1

eSight-IP Enterprise NMS Operation and Maintenance Training ...................... 148

2.23.2

eSight-IP WLAN Management Training ............................................................. 149

2.23.3

eSight-IP MPLS VPN Management Training ..................................................... 150

2.23.4

eSight-IP MPLS Tunnel Management Training ................................................. 151

2.23.5

eSight-IP SLA Management Training ................................................................ 152

2.23.6

eSight-IP IPSec VPN Management Training ..................................................... 153

2.23.7

eSight-IP Smart Reporter Management Training .............................................. 154

2.23.8

eSight-IP NTA(Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training....................... 155

2.23.9

eSight-IP Terminal Resources Management Training ....................................... 156

2.23.10

eSight-IP SecureCenter Management Training ................................................. 157

2.23.11

eSight-IP LogCenter Management Training ...................................................... 158

2.23.12

eSight Agile Features TrainingSVF&iPCA.................................................. 159

2.24
2.24.1
2.25
2.25.1
2.26

Agile Controller Training Programs ........................................................................... 160


Agile Controller Operation & Maintenance Training .......................................... 160
AnyOffice Training Programs .................................................................................... 161
Anyoffice Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................ 161
Enterprise Network Design Training Programs......................................................... 162

2.26.1

Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training .................................................... 162

2.26.2

Enterprise Campus Network Design Training ................................................... 163

2.26.3

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training ............................................................. 164

2.26.4

Data Center Network Design Training ............................................................... 165

2.27
2.27.1
2.28

Security Technology Fundamental Training .............................................................. 166


Firewall Technology Fundamental Training ....................................................... 166
Security Advance Technology Training ..................................................................... 167

2.28.1

Firewall VPN Technology Training ..................................................................... 167

2.28.2

Firewall UTM(Unified Threat Management) Technology Training ..................... 168

2.28.3

Firewall Reliability &Attack Defense Technology Training ................................. 169

2.29

USG2000/5000 Firewall Training .............................................................................. 170

-4-

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

2.29.1

USG2000/5000 Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 170

2.29.2

USG2000/5000 Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................... 171

2.30

USG6000 Next Generation Firewall Training ............................................................ 173

2.30.1

USG6000 Installation and Commissioning Training .......................................... 173

2.30.2

USG6000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training................................ 174

2.30.3

USG6000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 176

2.31

USG9000 High-end Firewall Training ....................................................................... 177

2.31.1

USG9000 Installation and Commissioning Training .......................................... 177

2.31.2

USG9000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training................................ 178

2.31.3

USG9000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 180

2.32

SVN(Security Virtual Network) Training .................................................................... 181

2.32.1

SVN Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................. 181

2.32.2

SVN Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................ 182

2.33

ASG( Application Security Gateway) Training .......................................................... 183

2.33.1

ASG Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................. 183

2.33.2

ASG Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................................ 184

2.34

Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training ............................................................. 185

2.34.1

NIP Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................... 185

2.34.2

NIP Operation and Maintenance Training ......................................................... 186

2.35

Security Management Software Training .................................................................. 187

2.35.1
2.36

Anti-DDoS Defense System Training ........................................................................ 188

2.36.1
2.37

Anti-DDoS Defense System Operation and Maintenance Training .................. 188


UMA System Training ................................................................................................ 189

2.37.1
2.38

UMA System Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 189


Security Planning and Design Training ..................................................................... 190

2.38.1
3

Policy Center Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 187

Firewall Planning and Design Training .............................................................. 190

Enterprise UC&C Training Solution .................................................................................. 191


3.1

Training Path .................................................................................................................... 191


3.1.1

UC Career Certification Training Path....................................................................... 191

3.1.2

CC Career Certification Training Path....................................................................... 192

3.1.3

VC Career Certification Training Path ....................................................................... 193

3.1.4

Huawei eSpace IPT System Training Path ............................................................... 194

3.1.5

Huawei eSpace UC System Training Path ............................................................... 195

3.1.6

CC Operation and Maintenance Training Path ......................................................... 196

3.1.7

Video Conference Product Training Path.................................................................. 197

3.2

Required Training Programs ............................................................................................ 198

3.3

Training Programs ............................................................................................................ 200

3.4

UC Career Certification Training Programs ..................................................................... 200

3.5

3.4.1

HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication Administration ....... 200

3.4.2

HCNP-UC (Fast-Track) Implementing Huawei Unified Communication Solutions .. 202

CC Career Certification Training Programs ..................................................................... 205

-5-

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

3.5.1
3.6

HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center Administration Training ...... 205

VC Career Certification Training Programs ...................................................................... 207


3.6.1

HCNA-VC Training .................................................................................................... 207

3.6.2

HCNP-VC Training .................................................................................................... 208

3.7

IVS Specialist Certification Training ................................................................................. 210


3.7.1

3.8

HCS-Field-IVS Training ............................................................................................. 210

Huawei eSpace IPT System Training ................................................................................211


3.8.1

Huawei eSpace IPT System Configuration and Operation Training..........................211

3.8.2

Huawei eSpace IPT System Troubleshooting Training ............................................ 213

3.9

Huawei eSpace UC System Training ............................................................................... 214


3.9.1

3.10

Huawei eSpace UC System Configuration and Operation Training ......................... 214


CC General Training Programs ................................................................................. 217

3.10.1
3.11

Contact Center Management and Monitoring Training ..................................... 217


CC Contact Center Operation and Maintenance Training ........................................ 218

3.11.1

Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation Training


........................................................................................................................... 218

3.11.2
Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation
Training (Including Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation)
Training
........................................................................................................................... 220
3.12

eSpace VTM System Training .................................................................................. 222

3.12.1
3.13

eSpace VTM Basic Operation and Maintenance Training ................................ 222


VC Operation and Maintenance Training .................................................................. 224

3.13.1
Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC/RSE) Operation and
Maintenance Training ............................................................................................................. 224
3.13.2
Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced Features Operation
and Maintenance Training...................................................................................................... 226
3.13.3
3.14

Huawei eSpace IVS System Training ....................................................................... 228

3.14.1

Huawei IVS System Operation and Maintenance Training ............................... 228

3.14.2

VCM Intelligent Analysis System Deployment and Management Training ....... 230

3.15

TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance Training ............................ 227

Enterprise Network Management System eSight-UCC Training .............................. 231

3.15.1

eSight-UCC Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 231

3.15.2

eSight-UCC UC Business Management Training.............................................. 233

3.15.3

eSight-UCC TP&VC Business Management Training ....................................... 234

3.15.4

eSight-UCC IVS Business Management Training ............................................. 235

Enterprise IT Training Courses ......................................................................................... 237


4.1

Training Path .................................................................................................................... 237


4.1.1

Storage Career Certification Training Path ............................................................... 237

4.1.2

Cloud Computing Certification Training Path ............................................................ 238

4.1.3

Server Specialist Certification Training Path ............................................................. 239

4.1.4

Data Center Specialist Certification Training Path .................................................... 240

4.1.5

Unified Storage Training Path ................................................................................... 241

-6-

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

4.1.6

Massive Storage Training Path ................................................................................. 243

4.1.7

Server Products Training Path .................................................................................. 244

4.1.8

Cloud Computing Training Path ................................................................................ 245

4.1.9

IT Network Management Training ............................................................................. 246

4.1.10
4.2

Disaster Recovery and Backup Training Path ................................................... 247

Required Training Programs ............................................................................................ 248

Training Programs .............................................................................................................................. 248


4.3

Training Programs ............................................................................................................ 252

4.4

Storage Career Certification Training Programs .............................................................. 252


4.4.1

HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training ............. 252

4.4.2 HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training(Fast-Track ,


For channel ) .......................................................................................................................... 253
4.4.3

HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Network Training ................... 254

4.4.4

HCNP-Storage-CBDS Constructing Big Data Solution Training .............................. 255

4.4.5

HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System Training .................... 256

4.5

Cloud Computing Career Certification Training Programs............................................... 257


4.5.1

HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Training ........................... 257

4.5.2

HCNP-Cloud-FCDC FusionCloud DataCenter Solution Training ............................. 259

4.5.3

HCNP-Cloud-BDAP Building Big Data Analysis Platform Training ........................... 260

4.5.4

HCNP-Cloud-FCDS FusionCloud Desktop Solution Training................................... 261

4.6

Server Specialist Certification Training Programs............................................................ 262


4.6.1

4.7

HCS-Field-Server Training ........................................................................................ 262

Data Center Specialist Certification Training Programs ................................................... 264


4.7.1

4.8

HCS-Field-MicroDC Training..................................................................................... 264

IT Fundamental Training Programs .................................................................................. 265


4.8.1

4.9

Storage Fundamental Technology Training .............................................................. 265

IT Advanced Training Programs ....................................................................................... 266


4.9.1

OceanStor Unified Storage System Advanced Feature Training ............................. 266

4.9.2

OceanStor Unified Storage System Design Training ................................................ 267

4.9.3

Big Data Storage Advanced Technology Training..................................................... 268

4.9.4

Big Data Storage Design Training ............................................................................. 269

4.9.5

Disaster Recovery and Backup Advanced Technology Training .............................. 270

4.9.6

Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training ...................................................... 271

4.10

Unified Storage Training Programs ........................................................................... 272

4.10.1
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training ............................................................................................................ 272
4.10.2
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System Deployment and
Management Training (Fast-Track , For channel ) ................................................................ 274
4.10.3
T seriesV2 (S26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System Deployment and
Management Training ............................................................................................................ 275
4.10.4

OceanStor V3 Storage System Deployment and Management Training .......... 277

4.10.5

OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage System Deployment and

-7-

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

Management Training ............................................................................................................ 279


4.10.6
SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248) FC Switch Product Deployment and
Management Training ............................................................................................................ 281
4.10.7
Training

Dorado 2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment and Management


........................................................................................................................... 282

4.10.8
VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System Deployment and
Management Training ............................................................................................................ 283
4.10.9
4.11

Huawei Storage System Troubleshooting Training ........................................... 285


Massive Storage Training Programs ......................................................................... 286

4.11.1

OceanStor 9000 Storage System Deployment and Management Training ...... 286

4.11.2

N8500 V2 Cluster NAS System Deployment and Management Training ......... 288

4.12

Data Protection Training Programs ........................................................................... 289

4.12.1
4.13

VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and Management Training 289
Server Training Programs ......................................................................................... 290

4.13.1

RH V2 Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training ................ 290

4.13.2

RH V3 Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training ................ 291

4.13.3

X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management Training .......................... 292

4.13.4

E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training ................ 293

4.13.5
Training

E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server Deployment and Management


........................................................................................................................... 294

4.13.6

Huawei Server Troubleshooting Training........................................................... 295

4.14

Cloud Computing Training Programs ........................................................................ 296

4.14.1

Desktop Cloud Solution R5 Deployment and Management Training ................ 296

4.14.2

FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management Training .......................... 297

4.14.3

FusionSphere Solution R3 Deployment and Management Training ................. 298

4.14.4

FusionSphere Solution R5 Deployment and Management Training ................. 299

4.14.5

FusionInsight Solution Deployment and Management Training ........................ 300

4.14.6

Huawei Cloud Computing System Troubleshooting Training ............................ 301

4.15

IT Network Management Training Programs ............................................................ 302

4.15.1
4.16

Enterprise Network Management eSight-IT Operation and Maintenance Training


........................................................................................................................... 302
Disaster Recovery and Backup Solution Training Programs .................................... 303

4.16.1

OceanStor Backup Solution Deployment and Management Training ............... 303

4.16.2
Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Solution Deployment and
Management Training ............................................................................................................ 304
5

Enterprise Wireless Training Solution .............................................................................. 305


5.1

Training Path .................................................................................................................... 305


5.1.1

GSM-R BSS Training Path ........................................................................................ 305

5.1.2

GSM-R CS Training Path .......................................................................................... 306

5.1.3

GSM-R PS Training Path .......................................................................................... 307

5.1.4

GSM-R OSS Training Path ....................................................................................... 308

5.1.5

eLTE Broadband Trunking Solution Training Path .................................................... 309

-8-

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

5.1.6

eLTE Broadband Access Solution Training Path ...................................................... 310

5.2

Required Training Programs .............................................................................................311

5.3

Training Programs ............................................................................................................ 315

5.4

GSM-R BSS Training........................................................................................................ 315


5.4.1

GSM-R System Overview Training ........................................................................... 315

5.4.2

GSM-R Principle Training .......................................................................................... 316

5.4.3

GSM-R BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R013) .............. 317

5.4.4

GSM-R BTS Installation and Commissioning Training ............................................. 318

5.4.5

GSM-R BSC6000 Installation and Commissioning Training .................................... 319

5.4.6

GSM-R BSC6000 Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 320

5.4.7

GSM-R BSS Data Configuration Training ................................................................. 321

5.4.8

GSM-R BSS Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 322

5.5

GSM-R CS Training .......................................................................................................... 323


5.5.1

eCNS300 System Overview Training........................................................................ 323

5.5.2

GTSOFTX3000 Hardware Training ........................................................................... 324

5.5.3

GTSOFTX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................. 325

5.5.4

GTSOFTX3000 Data Configuration Training ............................................................ 326

5.5.5

UMG8900 Hardware Training ................................................................................... 327

5.5.6

UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................... 328

5.5.7

UMG8900 Data Configuration Training ..................................................................... 329

5.5.8

HSS9860 Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 330

5.5.9

GSM-R Feature Training ........................................................................................... 331

5.6

GSM-R PS Training .......................................................................................................... 332


5.6.1

UGW9811 Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................... 332

5.6.2

UGW9811 Data Configuration Training..................................................................... 333

5.6.3

USN9810 Operation and Maintenance Training(ATCA) ........................................... 334

5.6.4

USN9810 Data Configuration Training...................................................................... 335

5.6.5

PS Alarm Monitoring and Management Training ...................................................... 336

5.7

GSM-R OSS Training ....................................................................................................... 337


5.7.1

iManager M2000V200R013 Client Operation and Maintenance Training(BSS) ...... 337

5.7.2

iManager M2000V200R013 PS Operation and Maintenance Training .................... 339

5.7.3

iManager M2000V200R013 System Administrator Training (SUN) .......................... 340

5.7.4

iManager M2000V200R013 System Administrator Training (ATAE Cluster) ............ 342

5.8

GSM-R RNP&RNO........................................................................................................... 343


5.8.1

GSM-R Radio Network Design and Planning Training ............................................. 343

5.8.2

GSM-R Radio Network Optimization Training .......................................................... 344

5.8.3

GSM-R Radio Network Analysis Training ................................................................. 345

5.9

eLTE Principle Training..................................................................................................... 346


5.9.1

eLTE Basic Principle Training ................................................................................... 346

5.9.2

eLTE-EPC Network Basic Principle Training ............................................................ 347

5.10
5.10.1

eLTE Broadband Trunking Solution Training ............................................................ 348


eLTE Broadband Trunking System Overview Training ...................................... 348

-9-

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

5.10.2

eNodeB Operation and Maintenance Training(Trunking) .................................. 349

5.10.3

eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Trunking) ................................................ 350

5.10.4

eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Trunking) ..................................................... 351

5.10.5

eCNS210 System Overview Training ................................................................ 352

5.10.6

eCNS210 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................ 353

5.10.7

eCNS210 Data Configuration Training .............................................................. 354

5.10.8

eOMC910 Client Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 355

5.10.9

Dispatching System Operation and Maintenance Training ............................... 356

5.10.10

Terminal Operation Training(Trunking) .............................................................. 357

5.10.11

eSCN230 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................ 358

5.10.12

eSCN230 Data Configuration Training .............................................................. 359

5.10.13

eLTE Rapid Solution Training ............................................................................ 360

5.11

eLTE Broadband Access Solution Training ............................................................... 361

5.11.1

eLTE Broadband Access System Overview Training ........................................ 361

5.11.2

eNodeB Operation and Maintenance Training(Access) .................................... 362

5.11.3

eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Access) ................................................... 363

5.11.4

eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Access) ....................................................... 364

5.11.5

eCNS600 System Overview Training ................................................................ 365

5.11.6

eCNS600 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................ 366

5.11.7

eCNS600 Data Configuration Training .............................................................. 367

5.11.8

U2000 Client Operation and Maintenance Training .......................................... 368

5.11.9

Terminal Operation Training(Access) ................................................................ 369

5.11.10

eCNS610 Operation and Maintenance Training ................................................ 370

5.11.11

eCNS610 Data Configuration Training .............................................................. 371

5.12

eLTE RNP&RNO Training ......................................................................................... 372

5.12.1

eLTE Trunking Radio Network Planning and Optimizing Overview Training .... 372

5.12.2

eLTE Trunking Radio Network Design and Dimensioning Training................... 373

5.12.3

eLTE Trunking Radio RF Network Optimizing Training ..................................... 374

Network Energy Training Solution .................................................................................... 375


6.1

Training Path .................................................................................................................... 375


6.1.1

Telecom Energy Training Path .................................................................................. 375

6.1.2

Data Center Energy Training Path ............................................................................ 376

6.2

Required Training Programs ............................................................................................ 377

6.3

Training Programs ............................................................................................................ 378

6.4

UPS Specialist Certification Training Programs ............................................................... 378


6.4.1

6.5

6.6

HCS-Field-UPS Huawei UPS Specialist Certification Training ................................. 378

Telecom Energy Training Programs ................................................................................. 379


6.5.1

Minishelter(ITS1000M) System Operation and Maintenance Training ..................... 379

6.5.2

Power3000(DC Power) System Operation and Maintenance Training .................... 380

6.5.3

Power3000(DC Power) System Design Training ...................................................... 381

6.5.4

PowerCube1000 System Operation and Maintenance Training .............................. 382

Data Center Facility Training Programs ........................................................................... 383

- 10 -

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

6.6.1

IDS1000 Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ................... 383

6.6.2

IDS2000 Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training ...................... 384

6.6.3

UPS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................................... 385

Transmission Network Training Solution .......................................................................... 386


7.1

Training Path .................................................................................................................... 386


7.1.1

WDM Training Path ................................................................................................... 386

7.1.2

RTN Training Path ..................................................................................................... 389

7.1.3

MSTP Training Path .................................................................................................. 391

7.1.4

Transmission OSS Training Path .............................................................................. 393

7.2

Required Training Programs ............................................................................................ 394

7.3

Training Programs ............................................................................................................ 401

7.4

Transmission Network Evolution and Trends Training Programs .................................... 401

7.5

7.6

7.7

7.4.1

IP-oriented Transport Solution Training .................................................................... 401

7.4.2

40G/100G Coherent OTU Technology ...................................................................... 402

7.4.3

Transmission Based T-SDN Introduction .................................................................. 403

7.4.4

Introduction to 400G Technology .............................................................................. 404

7.4.5

OptiX OSN 1800 Based Metro Network Solution Training ....................................... 405

Mobile Backhaul Evolution and Trends Training Programs ............................................. 406


7.5.1

Microwave Backhaul Solution Evolution ................................................................... 406

7.5.2

Huawei Microwave Solution Overview ...................................................................... 407

7.5.3

Microwave Small Cell Backhaul Solution .................................................................. 408

Transmission Network Planning and Design Training Programs..................................... 409


7.6.1

OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training .............................................................. 409

7.6.2

OptiX MSTP Network Design Training ...................................................................... 410

7.6.3

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training ...........................................................411

7.6.4

OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design Training ................... 412

7.6.5

OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training ............................................ 413

7.6.6

OptiX WDM Network Design Training ....................................................................... 414

7.6.7

OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training ................................................................ 415

7.6.8

OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design Training ................. 416

7.6.9

OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training ............................................................ 417

7.6.10

OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training ....................................................... 418

7.6.11

OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training ...................................... 420

7.6.12

OptiX RTN 300 Network Planning Training ....................................................... 421

7.6.13

OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Planning and Design Training .................... 422

7.6.14

OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning and Design Training ...................... 423

7.6.16

OptiX OSN 1800 Network Design Training........................................................ 424

7.6.17

iManager MDS 6600 (WDM Designer) Operation Training ............................... 425

Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training Programs ...................... 426


7.7.1

OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training ................................................................ 426

7.7.2

OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training ............................................................... 427

7.7.3

OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training .................................. 428

- 11 -

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

7.7.4

OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training .............................................................. 429

7.7.5

OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training .............................................................. 430

7.7.6

OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training ................................................................. 431

7.7.7

OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training .......................................................... 432

7.8

Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training Programs ...................... 433


7.8.1

OptiX RTN Network Assessment Training ................................................................ 433

7.8.2

OptiX RTN Network Optimization Training................................................................ 434

7.9

Transmission Network Principle Training Programs ........................................................ 435


7.9.1

SDH Fundamental Training ....................................................................................... 435

7.9.2

WDM Fundamental Training ..................................................................................... 436

7.9.3

Ethernet Fundamental Training ................................................................................. 437

7.9.4

ASON Fundamental Training .................................................................................... 438

7.9.5

Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training ......................................................................... 439

7.10

WDM Products Training Programs ........................................................................... 440

7.10.1

OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 1st Line Maintenance Training .................................... 440

7.10.2

OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................... 441

7.10.3

OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 3rd Line Maintenance Training .................................... 443

7.10.4

OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training ....................... 445

7.10.5

OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and Maintenance Training .......................... 446

7.10.6

OptiX OSN 8800 100G O&M Training ............................................................... 448

7.10.7

OptiX NG WDM Equipment Installation Training ............................................... 449

7.10.8

OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training ..................................................... 450

7.10.9

OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training .............................. 451

7.10.10

OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 452

7.10.11

OptiX OSN 1800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training ....................... 453

7.10.12

OptiX OSN 1800V(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training .................... 455

7.10.13

OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN) Operation and Maintenance Training ........................ 457

7.10.14

OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training ....................... 458

7.10.15

OptiX OSN 9800 1st Line Maintenance Training............................................... 459

7.10.16

OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line Maintenance Training............................................... 460

7.10.17

OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta Training ............................................................... 462

7.10.18
Training

OptiX BWS 1600S (repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and Maintenance


........................................................................................................................... 463

7.10.19
OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and
Maintenance Training ............................................................................................................. 465
7.10.20

OptiX MDS 6630(Opical Power Commissioning) Training ................................ 467

7.10.21

OptiX OSN 9800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training ....................... 468

7.10.22

OptiX NG WDM T-SDN Operation and Maintenance Training .......................... 469

7.10.23

OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (EoO/EoW) Special Topic Training .......... 470

7.10.24

OptiX NG WDM Synchronization Special Topic Training .................................. 471

7.10.25

OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (Packet) Special Topic Training ............... 472

7.10.26

OptiX NG WDM DCN Special Topic Training .................................................... 473

- 12 -

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

7.10.27

OptiX NG WDM Optical Doctor System Special Topic ...................................... 474

7.10.28

OptiX NG WDM Master-Slave Subrack Management Special Topic ................ 475

7.11

RTN 900 Products Training Programs ...................................................................... 476

7.11.1

OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training ................................. 476

7.11.2

OptiX RTN 900 1st Line Maintenance Training ................................................. 478

7.11.3

OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................ 479

7.11.4

OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line Maintenance Training ................................................. 481

7.11.5

OptiX RTN 900V1R8 2nd Line Maintenance Training ....................................... 482

7.11.6

OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Features Training ........................................................ 484

7.11.7

OptiX RTN 980L IP Long Haul Microwave Features Training ........................... 485

7.11.8

OptiX RTN 980L Installation and Commissioning Training ............................... 486

7.12

RTN 900 Products Advanced Training ...................................................................... 488

7.12.1

OptiX RTN 900 ERPS Special Topic Training ................................................... 488

7.12.2

OptiX RTN 900 PLA/EPLA Special Topic Training ............................................ 489

7.12.3

OptiX RTN 900 PW APS Special Topic Training ............................................... 490

7.12.4

OptiX RTN 900 Tunnel APS Special Topic Training .......................................... 491

7.12.5

OptiX RTN 900 LAG Special Topic Training ...................................................... 492

7.12.6

OptiX RTN 900 AM Special Topic Training ........................................................ 493

7.12.7

OptiX RTN 900 Preconfiguration Tool and Operation Training ......................... 494

7.12.8

OptiX RTN 900 1588V2 Special Topic Training ................................................. 495

7.12.9

iManager U2000 RTN Network Monitoring Training.......................................... 496

7.12.10

KPI Analysis of Ethernet Service Training ......................................................... 497

7.13

RTN 300 Products Training Programs ...................................................................... 498

7.13.1

OptiX RTN 310360380 Installation and Commissioning Training ..................... 498

7.13.2

OptiX RTN 310360380 1st Line Maintenance Training ..................................... 499

7.13.3

OptiX RTN 310360380 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................................... 500

7.13.4

OptiX RTN 300 Preconfiguration Tool Operation............................................... 501

7.13.5

OptiX RTN 320 Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................... 502

7.13.6

OptiX RTN 310 Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................... 503

7.13.7

OptiX RTN 380 Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................... 504

7.13.8

OptiX RTN 360 Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................... 505

7.14

MSTP Products Training Programs .......................................................................... 506

7.14.1

OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Product Overview Training .................................. 506

7.14.2

OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Installation Training ............................................. 507

7.14.3

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning Training ................. 508

7.14.4

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training ....... 509

7.14.5

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training ................. 510

7.14.6

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ...... 512

7.14.7

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 3rd Line Maintenance Training ....... 514

7.14.8

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training .......................... 516

7.14.9

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 1st Line Maintenance Training ................ 517

7.14.10

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training .......................... 518

- 13 -

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

7.14.11

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............... 520

7.14.12

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning Training ................ 522

7.14.13

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training ...... 524

7.14.14

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation Training ................ 525

7.14.15

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ..... 527

7.14.16

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training ............. 529

7.14.17

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training ......... 530

7.14.18

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training 531

7.14.19

OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .............. 532

7.14.20

OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training ................................. 533

7.14.21

TP-Assist Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid MSTP) ....................... 534

7.15

Transmission Network OSS Training Programs ....................................................... 535

7.15.1

iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network only) ................. 535

7.15.2

iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training .......................................................... 536

7.15.3

iManager N2510 OLS Operation and Maintenance Training (Transmission) ... 537

7.15.4
iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance Training for NOC FO
(Transmission) ....................................................................................................................... 538
7.15.5
iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance Training for NOC BO
(Transmission) ....................................................................................................................... 539
7.15.6

iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 540

7.15.7
iManager uTraffic Network Performance Monitoring Training (Transmission
Network Only) ........................................................................................................................ 541
7.16

Transmission Engineer Certification Training Programs........................................... 542

7.16.1
Training

Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device


........................................................................................................................... 542

7.16.2
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission
Network Training .................................................................................................................... 543
7.16.3
Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission
Network Training .................................................................................................................... 544
8

Access Network Training Solution .................................................................................... 545


8.1

Training Path .................................................................................................................... 545


8.1.1

Principle ..................................................................................................................... 545

8.1.2

Evolution and Trends ................................................................................................ 545

8.1.3

Planning..................................................................................................................... 546

8.1.4

MA5600T Products.................................................................................................... 546

8.1.5

FTTx PON Products .................................................................................................. 547

8.1.6

DSLAM Products ....................................................................................................... 549

8.1.7

MSAN Products ......................................................................................................... 550

8.1.8

BITS ........................................................................................................................... 551

8.1.9

OSS ........................................................................................................................... 551

8.2

Required Training Programs ............................................................................................ 551

8.3

Training Programs ............................................................................................................ 556

- 14 -

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

8.4

8.5

8.6

8.7

8.8

Principle Training Programs ............................................................................................. 556


8.4.1

IP Basis Training ....................................................................................................... 556

8.4.2

Broadband(PPPoE/DHCP/Radius) Basis Training ................................................... 557

8.4.3

IPTV(IGMP Proxy/Snooping) Basis Training ............................................................ 558

8.4.4

VoIP(H.248/SIP) Basis Training ................................................................................ 559

8.4.5

PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product Interconnection Training .................................. 560

8.4.6

VDSL2 Fundamental Training ................................................................................... 561

8.4.7

GPON Fundamental Training .................................................................................... 562

Evolution and Trends Training Programs ......................................................................... 563


8.5.1

FTTx Network Overview Training .............................................................................. 563

8.5.2

FTTO Solution Overview Training ............................................................................. 564

8.5.3

FTTM Solution Overview Training ............................................................................. 565

8.5.4

xDSL Access Network Overview Training ................................................................. 566

8.5.5

ODN Overview Training ............................................................................................ 567

8.5.6

10G/40G PON Network Overview Training .............................................................. 568

8.5.7

Vectoring Overview Training ..................................................................................... 569

8.5.8

G.fast Overview Training ........................................................................................... 570

8.5.9

iODN Solution Overview Training ............................................................................. 571

8.5.10

FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training..................................................................... 572

8.5.11

MSO CMTS Solution Training............................................................................ 573

Planning Training Programs ............................................................................................. 574


8.6.1

FTTx Planning Training ............................................................................................. 574

8.6.2

ODN Planning Training ............................................................................................. 575

8.6.3

iODN Planning Training ............................................................................................. 576

8.6.4

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training ............................................. 577

8.6.5

MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Planning Training ..................................... 578

8.6.6

MSAN UA5000 Planning Training ............................................................................. 579

MA5600T Products Training Programs ............................................................................ 580


8.7.1

MA5600T Hardware Installation Training .................................................................. 580

8.7.2

MA5600T Commissioning Training ........................................................................... 581

FTTx PON Products Training Programs .......................................................................... 582


8.8.1

MA5800 System Overview ........................................................................................ 582

8.8.2

GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................. 583

8.8.3

GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd Line Maintenance Training......................................... 585

8.8.4

GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ..................................... 587

8.8.5

GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ........................................................ 589

8.8.6

GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training ........................................................ 590

8.8.7

FTTx P2P 2nd Line Maintenance Training................................................................ 591

8.8.8

FTTx PON+Vectoring Operation and Maintenance Training .................................... 592

8.8.9

GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Feature Implementation) Training ............................ 594

8.8.10

GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Advanced Troubleshooting) Training ................ 595

8.8.11

MA5600T Uplink Protection Solution and Configuration Training ..................... 596

- 15 -

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

8.8.12

Broadband Access Network Security Solution and Configuration Training ...... 597

8.8.13

U2000 FTTx Service Provision Training ............................................................ 598

8.8.14

U2000 FTTx Monitoring Training ....................................................................... 599

8.8.15

U2000 FTTx Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training ................................. 600

8.8.16

ODN Installation and Commissioning Training .................................................. 601

8.8.17

ODN Operation and Maintenance Training ....................................................... 602

8.8.18

iODN Operation and Maintenance Training ...................................................... 603

8.8.19

iODN NMS Administrator Training ..................................................................... 604

8.8.20

MSO CMTS Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 605

8.8.21

FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training ..................................... 606

8.9

DSLAM Products Training Programs ............................................................................... 608


8.9.1

DSLAM SmartAX MA5603T Vectoring

Maintenance Training ............................... 608

8.9.2

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training........................ 609

8.9.3

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 3rd Line Maintenance Training ........................ 610

8.9.4 DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU VDSL Vectoring Operation and Maintenance


Training ...................................................................................................................................611
8.9.5

DSLAM MA5616 Operation and Maintenance Training ............................................ 612

8.9.6

iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance Training .. 613

8.9.7

DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training ..................................... 614

8.9.8

DSLAM SmartAX MA5300 Series Commissioning Training ..................................... 615

8.9.9

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series Commissioning Training ..................................... 616

8.9.10

DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................. 617

8.9.11

DSLAM SmartAX MA5300 Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................. 618

8.9.12

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................. 619

8.9.13

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series 3nd Line Maintenance Training .................. 620

8.10

MSAN Products Training Programs .......................................................................... 621

8.10.1

MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training ........ 621

8.10.2

MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning Training ................... 622

8.10.3

iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and Maintenance Training ....


........................................................................................................................... 623

8.10.4

MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training ................................................. 624

8.10.5

MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training ........................................................... 625

8.10.6

MSAN UA5000 1st Line Maintenance Training ................................................. 626

8.10.7

MSAN UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training ................................................ 627

8.10.8

MSAN UA5000 3rd Line Maintenance Training ................................................. 629

8.10.9

HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................. 630

8.10.10

iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training ........... 631

8.11

BITS Training Programs ............................................................................................ 632

8.11.1

SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................................................. 632

8.11.2

SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line Maintenance Training .................................................. 633

8.11.3

SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line Maintenance Training ............................................ 634

8.12

OSS Training Programs ............................................................................................ 635

- 16 -

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

8.12.1

iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training .................................................. 635

8.12.2

iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training .......... 636

8.12.3

iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON) .......................................... 637

8.12.4

iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM)......................................... 638

8.12.5

iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN)........................................... 639

8.12.6

iManager N2510 Copper Software Test Operation Training ............................. 640

8.12.7

iManager N2510 Copper Hardware Test Operation Training ............................ 641

8.12.8

iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training ......................................................... 642

8.12.9

iManager N2510 Administration Training........................................................... 643

- 17 -

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

1 Huawei Training & Certification Service Overview


1.1 Introduce Huawei Training & Certification Service
1.1.1

ICT Convergence Training & Certification Solution

With the constant development of the information and communications technology (ICT) industry, IP, IT, and
CT applications gradually converge. New technologies such as Internet of Things (IoT) and mobile broadband
will bring an infinite number of opportunities to the ICT industry. The growing convergence of ICT
technologies will trigger tremendous industry transformations, challenging the knowledge system and skills
of those working in the industry, "Knowledge convergence, cross-field skills, and standards evolution" have
become new criteria for assessing qualified ICT talents.
Huawei launches its certification solution covering all ICT technical fields. Huawei developed this
certification solution by leveraging its years of experience in developing ICT talent and its deep insight into
industry trends. This solution fully encompasses Huawei's Cloud-Pipe-Device convergence technology and
covers IP, IT, CT, and ICT convergence technologies. It is the only training and certification program of its kind
in the industry that covers all ICT technical fields. Additionally, this certification solution is a sophisticated
certification program that covers new technologies, new ideas, and new industry trends, leading the way in
ICT technical certification to help enterprises and channel partners enhance the all-round development.

1.1.2

Huawei Training Service

Product technical training (Capability development based on customer positions and learning levels)
The product technical training targets product users and enables them to understand product positioning,
functions, features, and use methods (installation, deployment, configuration, and maintenance) and perform
maintenance when the equipment breaks down.
Career certification (Building Huawei's talent ecological chain)
The career certification targets a wide range of users, teaches common theories and skills, and equips trainees
with the theoretical foundations and skills required to enter specific career fields. It is the foundation of
product technical training and specialist certification.
Specialist certification (Improving the capabilities of partners)

18

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

The specialist certification targets channel partners, provides professional skills for specific positions, and
provides channel partners with the support and resources required. It verifies the capabilities of partners
required in specific fields through certification exams to help partners sharpen their competitive edge.

1.1.3

Help customer successfully deploy, operate and optimize Huawei products

and solutions
Training services as an important part of Huawei solutions, relying on the platform of Huawei overall, focus on
human capacity development needs, to help customer improve their employees' professional skills, team
capacity and organizational performance, to be the most reliable partner for customer.
Huawei relying on a deep understanding of the ICT industry, based on the service lifecycle PDIOI (Plan, Design,
Implement, Operate and Improve) model, through a series of modular product training, technical topics,
solution training to meet government, power, financial, energy, transportation, health care, education and
enterprise ICT employee cultivation requirement, and help customers successfully deploy, operation and
optimization of Huawei's products and solutions.
Huawei training services provide customers with professional, practical, effectiveness learning and
development solutions; learning brings capacity development, the capacity development bring enterprise
growth

Through a full range of product training to help customer quickly understand the product characteristics, become
competent in using;

Through the matching technical topic and product character, grasp the products and solutions deployment, and operation
and maintenance capability;

Through simulating real solutions scenarios training, fast, accurate, practical way to enhance customer.

The figure below shows that based on the service lifecycle PDIOI model, Huawei provide matching product
and knowledge training solution, including installation and commissioning, operation and maintenance,
advanced technical topic and planning and design training. Each stage in the full life cycle of PDIOI,Huawei has
different kinds of innovative patented tools and standard processes during each stage of full lifecycle, which
can ensure we deliver the service to you with high quality and efficiency and save your cost.

19

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

1.1.4

Learning Path

For beginners, it is recommended that you participate in technical fundamental training;


After you master general technology, you can select the corresponding product operation and maintenance
training base on specific product;
After you master the basic technical and familiar with the product characteristics, you can choose the
advanced technical training and planning & design training for further enhance.

Plan & Design

Implement & Operate

Improve

Planning and Design Training

Operation and Maintenance


Training

Advanced Technology
Training

XXX Design Training

XXX Product Installation and


Commissioning Training

XXX Advanced
Technology Training
Xd

Xd

XXX Product Essential Operation


and Maintenance Training
Xd

Xd

XXX Product Features Training


Xd

XXX Product Advanced Operation


and Maintenance Training
Xd

eSight Enterprise NM
Operation and Maintenance
Training
Xd
eSight- XXX Management

Training

Technology
Fundamentals Training

Xd

Technical Fundamental
Training

Xd

20

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

1.1.5

Huawei's Career Certification

Huawei Certified Network Associate (HCNA)


The HCNA certification validates knowledge and skills
required for the basic configuration and maintenance of
small and midsize networks. After passing the HCNA
certification, you demonstrate (1) a preliminary
understanding of small and midsize networks, including
common technologies for small and midsize networks, and
(2) the abilities to assist in designing small and midsize
networks and implementing design using Huawei's
equipment.

Archi-tect

Expert

Huawei Certified Network Professional (HCNP)


The HCNP certification validates knowledge and skills
required for the building and management of small and
midsize networks. After passing the HCNP certification,
you demonstrate (1) an all-round and in-depth
understanding of small and midsize networks, (2) mastery
of general technologies for small and midsize networks,
and (3) the abilities to independently design small and
midsize networks and implement this design using
Huawei's equipment.

Professional

Associate

Huawei Certified Internetwork Expert (HCIE)


The HCIE certification validates knowledge and skills required for the building, optimization, and management
of midsize and large complex networks. After passing the HCIE certification, you demonstrate (1) an all-round
and in-depth understanding of midsize and large complex networks, (2) mastery of technologies for midsize
and large complex networks, and (3) the abilities to independently design various complex networks and
implement this design using Huawei's equipment.
After passing Huawei's career certification, trainees will possess technical theories and related skills, and
master the following:
How technologies and protocols are incorporated into Huawei's products and solutions
The knowledge and skills required for deploying, operating, and maintaining networks using Huawei's
products and solutions

21

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

1.1.6

Training Instructors

Huawei instructor: More than 300 full time instructors, 70% of them are 10 years working experience on
developing, project management and excellent teaching skills.
Huawei Authorized Learning Partner (HALP) instructor: HALP refers to a professional training organization that
is authorized by Huawei to implement Huawei's product Training Courses under Huawei's supervision and
management after passing its assessment. The HCSI refers to an instructor who is certificated by Huawei and
employed by an HALP, Authorized Learning Partner information Query click
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi#navi%5Bid%5D=_trainingsearch&navi%5
Bt%5D=1349689093661&params%5Btab%5D=tab_org

1.1.7

Training Methods

For the convenience of customer, Huawei and HALP may offer on-site training, localize training, centralize
training and E-Learning;

Centralized training: Face-to-face training in authorized training partner or in Huawei training center can be more

22

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

comprehensive, in-depth grasp of Huawei's products and technical knowledge and skills.

Localize training: Localized face-to-face training in the partner lab, training courses should be partner demand design, has
a strong relevance and timeliness.

On-site training: on-site face-to-face training focused on hardware installation, routine maintenance, practical and
targeted content.

E-Learning Training: can get a quick, convenient learning service by the electronic platform

1.2 Huawei World Wide Learning Center

Huawei training service began in 1989, had training experience more than twenty years. Huawei training
service is all over the world, has 46 training centers on the global. Huawei Learning Service now has over
1500 instructors, and over 2,000,000 trainees form 160 countries have received our training.

1.2.1

China Global Training Center (CGTC)

Huawei China Training Center is one of the Global Training Center, setup in Southeast China, located at
Hangzhou, capital of Zhejiang province. China GTC now has 300+ professional instructors to support global
training demand. There are 122 classrooms and a centralized lab with 7,000+ sqM are available. Training
products supported as below:

Data Communication (Router, Switch, WLAN, Firewall, etc.)

Information Technology (Storage, Server, Cloud, Data Center, etc.)

UC&C (UC, CC, VC, IVS, etc.)

Wireless (GSM-R, eLTE, etc.)

Network Energy (Power, Data Center Facility, UPS, etc.)

Optical (MSTP, OTN, Microwave, etc)

Access (GPON, BITS, etc)

23

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

1.2.2

Malaysia Global Training Center (MGTC)

Huawei Malaysia Training Center is one of the Global Training Center setup in South Pacific region with 2508
sqM, located at Cyber Jaya, Malaysia with excellent environment. 50 professional instructors to support
global training demand. There are 14 classrooms and a centralized lab are available. Training products
supported as below:

Data Communication (Router, Switch, WLAN, Firewall, etc.)

Information Technology (Storage, Server, Cloud, Data Center, etc.)

Optical (SDH,WDM, Microwave, etc.)

24

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

1.3 General Terms and Conditions


1.3.1

Validity

Validity of Proposal and Pricing


The training programs and training price offered in this proposal will remain valid within 90 days from the
submission date. There might be changes to the course contents and training duration over this period
due to our continuous course development and optimization.
Validity of Training Delivery
The validity period of training is three (3) years from the effective date of the Contract signed. In case that
the Purchaser has not put forward the delivery request to Huawei and resulted in the invalidation on the
training program, the training contract will be deemed executed by Huawei.

1.3.2

Training Application

Training application and delivery are based on the contract between Purchaser and Huawei. Purchaser
need to issue training purchase order (PO) for the confirmation on the training program and training
delivery schedule proposed.
In order to ensure training resources availability, training application shall be received at least 45 working days
before commencement of the training.
For booking and more information, please contact your local Account Service Manager.

1.3.3

Training Cancellation Terms

Purchaser can cancel the training or alter the training date at least 1 week (7 Calendar days) before the start date.
Within this 7 Calendar days period, any cancellation or schedule changes will lead to penalties as follows:.
Cancellation Penalties Policy, the following cancellation charges will apply:
Working Days

Percentage of fees to be
invoiced

> 7 days

0%

0 7 days

100%

Once the course has commenced, if a trainee fails to attend or withdraw from the course, the full amount
of the course will be payable.
Huawei reserves the right to cancel the booking if we do not receive confirmation i.e. Training Purchase
Order (PO) at least 7 Calendar days before the scheduled training start date.

1.3.4

Training location

For the convenience of Purchaser, Huawei may offer different training locations for purchaser. The training
locations are selected, Huawei shall provide corresponding training supporting services.

25

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

Foreign Training: Huawei HQ centralized training. The training will delivery in Huawei Global Training
Center, Huawei shall responsible to provide a fully equipped training environment and all the necessary
training facilities and arrangement such as classroom and training lab, individual PC, meals and
refreshments during break time, training materials / manuals, stationery as well as souvenir for the
customer.

Local Training: Huawei region centralized training. The training will delivery in purchaser country, Huawei
shall provide instructor, classroom, training lab / e-lab, training materials / manuals and stationery.

On-site Training: Training will delivery in purchaser on-site, Huawei shall send instructor to purchaser
on-site, purchaser need prepare classroom and training lab and stationery by themselves.

1.3.5

Training Service Language

All training will be conducted in English. If there is local language required, it needs further negotiation
between Purchaser and Huawei Training Center and there might be extra charges applied on the request.

1.3.6

Training Quality Assurance

Course pre-requisite and Target Audience


To ensure training effectiveness and satisfaction, Purchaser shall send suitable trainees to attend the
training based on the course pre-requisite and target audience stated in the Section 3 Training Program
Descriptions in this proposal.
Class Size
The standard class size is 6 - 12 trainees. To ensure each trainee to have the chance to participate in the
equipment practice, recommended having maximum 12 trainees per class. The size of class shall be finally
agreed between Huawei and customer before start of the course.
On-site equipment availability and training environment
Purchaser has to provide the suitable classroom for on-site training and test bed/ equipment for hands-on
practice. However, if the purchaser is not able to provide the equipment for hands-on practice, Huawei
will provide the remote lab service and this service is chargeable. Purchaser should be responsible to
provide the internet connection to remote lab.

1.3.7

Other Services for Trainee

In order that trainee can enjoy a comfortable learning time in Huawei, Huawei shall provide following
services for trainee who participating in centralized training based on terms of the contract.

Laundry: Laundry fee is paid by Huawei , but it is limited.

Transportation: Provide transportation between hotel and airport, hotel and training center, and
transportation in spare time activity.

Post materials: After training, the materials will be dispatched to customers for free.

Insurance: Purchase the accidental injury insurance for customer.

SIM card: A SIM card which has 50 RMB in it will be provided for each customer.

Coffee break: Provide coffee and fruits for customer.

26

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

Allowance: Meal allowance will be provided from 1st day to the last day of training. (Except welcome
dinner, class end dinner as well as tour days lunch)

Stationery: Notebook, water glass & ball pen will be given as a training kit.

Souvenir: Class photo for each customer & a special gift from Huawei.

1.3.8

Intellectual Property Right

All intellectual property rights, including but not limited to copyrights, of soft copy or hard copy of
teaching materials, courseware, presentations, customized training proposals, plans, and other materials
for training (hereinafter the training materials) produced before or during training, belong to Huawei.
Without prior explicit written approval of Huawei, the training material shall not be reproduced,
transmitted, communicated or otherwise divulged by the customer or trainees to any third party and
persons who are not authorized and/or supposed to have access to or knowledge of such files and
information. Without prior explicit written approval of Huawei, training process shall not be recorded,
video taped or photographed by customer or customers. Customers should ensure that students fulfill
their obligations under these Terms.

27

1.4 Huawei online learning center (Learning Website)


Huawei online learning center (Learning Website), provides rich teaching resources, where enterprise
customers, partners and ICT practitioners can enjoy interactive and customized learning services anytime and
anywhere.

1.4.1

How to register for a website account?

First, visit to http://learning.huawei.com/en.


Second, click "log in", then click "Register Now" and fill in information: Account, which is recommended to
be the same with the registered e-mail; E-mail, which must be your own e-mail you use in your work.
Third, login your email and activate the account. Then a Huawei official website account is registered
successfully.

1.4.2

How to get online learning resource?

On learning website, users can download Huawei official training materials, learn e-learning courses, join in
Live Virtual Class, and download eNSP (Enterprise Network Simulation Platform) which can not only simulate
single router or switch device but also large network to do some.
On support website, users can get product support and cases, download software and tools, and interact and
communicate with experts.
1) Download Training Materials
Download E-course list which is updated monthly, and you can get the download address of training materials.
http://support.huawei.com/ecommunity/bbs/10150675.html
2Learn E-Learning course online
Log in website and find out the E-learning course needed, then click "play video" to start learning.
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi#navi[id]=_16
3Join in Live Virtual Class
Join in LVC on class time:
http://support.huawei.com/learning/NavigationAction!createNavi#navi[id]=_16
4Download eNSP
Download address
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/softdownload.action?lang=en&pid=9017384&idAbsPath=fixnode01|
7919710|9856717|21096933|9858914|9017384
5Download product documentation
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/#tabname=productsupport
6Browse Cases and Technical Notes
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/#tabname=servicescenter
7Download software
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/#tabname=softwaredownload
8Download Tools
http://support.huawei.com/enterprise/toolsinfo
9Get help on Support Community
http://support.huawei.com/ecommunity/

28

1.4.3

Frequently-Used Functions on Learning Website

FrequentlyUsed Function

Website

How to find
training

http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-01-01
Find Huawei training courses, know more about the course content,
training duration

How to find the


training plan

http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-01-02
Find the Training Plan provide by Huawei and Huawei Learning Partners

How to find
HALPs

http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-01-03
Find Huawei Authorized Learning Partners, know more about the contact
methods.

How to
participate in
certification
training

http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-03-02
Know more about Huawei Certification Training, such as how to participate.

How to
participate in
certification

http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-02-01
Know more about the process of certification such as how to schedule
exam

Description of
the access to
Learning
website

http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-03-03

For more functions, please visit Website Help:


http://support.huawei.com/learning/FAQ/en/help.jsp#nodeid=node-01-01

29

2 Enterprise Network Training Solution


2.1 Training Path
2.1.1

Routing and Switching Certification Training Path

HCIE-R&S

Expert

Professional

15d

HCNP-R&S-IERN
Implementing Enterprise
Routing Network
6d

Associate

HCNP-R&S-IESN
Implementing Enterprise
Switching Network
4d

HCNA-HNTD
Huawei Networking
Technology and Device
10d

Elective Guide

Follow the parts to learn.

30

HCNP-R&S-IENP
Improving Enterprise
Network Performance
5d

2.1.2

WLAN Certification Training Path

Expert

Professional

Associate

HCNA-WLAN-IEBW
Implementing Enterprise Basic
WLAN Training
5d

Elective Guide

HCNA or the similar knowledge is recommended for HCNA-WLAN.

31

2.1.3

Security Certification Training Path

HCIE-Security(to be)

Expert

1d
Professiona
l

15d

HCNP-Security-CISN
Constructing Infrastructure
of Security Network
5d

HCNP-Security-CTSS
Constructing Terminal
Security System
5d

HCNA-Security-CBSN
Constructing Basic
Security Network

Associate

Elective Guide:

Follow the paths to learn

32

5d

HCNP-Security-CSSN
Constructing Service
Security Network

5d

2.1.4

Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training Path

HCNA
Huawei Certified Network Associate
10d

HCNP-R&S

Huawei Certified Network Professional


- Routing and Switching

15d

HCS-Field-R&S

Huawei Certified Routing and


Switching Field Engineer

5d

Advanced Technology
Training

Routing and Switching Expert


25d

Elective Guide

HCNA is required and HCNP-R&S is recommended for attending Huawei Routing and Switching Field Engineer Training.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

33

2.1.5

IP Technology Fundamental Principle Training Path


IP Technology Fundamental Principles Training
IP Network Technology
Fundamental Training
1d

Huawei VRP System


Training
1d

Enterprise LAN
Technology Training

Enterprise WAN
Technology Training
2d

5d

Enterprise Network Engineer

Enterprise IP Routing
Technology Training

Training Path
Target Audience

5d
Advanced Technology Training

Enterprise IP Multicast
Technologies Training

Enterprise IP VPN
Technologies Training
5d

Enterprise IP Multicast
Technical Expert

Enterprise QoS
Technologies Training

Enterprise MPLS VPN


Technologies Training
5d

Enterprise IP VPN
Technical Expert

5d
Enterprise MPLS TE
Technologies Training

Enterprise HA
Technologies Training
1d

Enterprise QoS
Technical Expert

3d
1d

Enterprise HA
Technical Expert

Enterprise MPLS
Technical Expert

Enterprise IPv6
Technology Training
5d
Enterprise IPv6
Technical Expert

Elective Guide

HCNP-R&S or the similar knowledge is required for attending Advanced Technology Training programs.

34

2.1.6

NE Routers Training Path

Plan & Design

Implement & Operate

Improve

Planning and Design Training

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

Enterprise Network Design


Outlines Training

NE40E-X Router Installation


and Commissioning Training

Advanced Technology
Training

1d

1d

1d

NE40E-X Router Essential


Operation and Maintenance
Training
5d

Enterprise Campus Network


Design Training

Data Center Network Design


Training
2d
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training

NE40E-X Router Advanced


Operation and Maintenance
Training

5d

NE20E-S Router Installation and


Commissioning Training
1d

1d

NE20E-S Router Operation and


Maintenance Training
5d
NE05E&08E Router Installation
and Commissioning Training
1d
NE05E&08E Router Operation
and Maintenance Training
5d
Technology
Fundamentals
Training

IP Technology Fundamentals
14d

Elective Guide

The Essential Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

35

25d

2.1.7

AR G3 Routers Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training
Enterprise Network Design
Outlines Training

Implement & Operate

Improve

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

1d

AR G3 Router Installation and


Commissioning Training
1d

1d

AR G3 Router Essential
Operation and Maintenance
Training
5d

Enterprise Campus Network


Design Training

Data Center Network Design


Training
2d
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training
1d

AR G3 Router Advanced
Operation and Maintenance
Training

5d

AR SOHO Router Installation


and Commissioning Training
1d

AR SOHO Router Operation


and Maintenance Training
5d

Technology
Fundamentals
Training

IP Technology Fundamentals
14d

Elective Guide

The Essential Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

36

Advanced Technology
Training
25d

2.1.8

AR Industrial Router Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training
Enterprise Network Design
Outlines Training

Implement & Operate

Improve

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

1d

5d
AR Industrial Router Installation
and Commissioning Training
5d
1d

1d

5d
AR Industrial Routers Operation
and Maintenance Training5d
5d

Enterprise Campus Network


Design Training

Data Center Network Design


Training

AMI Solution Training

5d
5d
5d

2d
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training
1d

Technology
Fundamentals
Training

IP Technology Fundamentals
14d

Elective Guide

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

37

Advanced Technology
Training
25d

2.1.9

Campus Network Switch (S series) Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training

Improve

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

1d

Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27)


Installation and Commissioning
Training
1d

1d

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77)


Installation and Commissioning
Training
1d

2d

Campus network switch (S


series) Essential Operation and
Maintenance Training
5d

Enterprise Network Design


Outlines Training

Enterprise Campus Network


Design Training

Data Center Network Design


Training

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design


Training
1d

Technology
Fundamentals
Training

Implement & Operate

Campus network switches (S


series) Advanced Operation and
Maintenance Training
5d

IP Technology Fundamentals
14d

Elective Guide

The Essential Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

38

Advanced Technology
Training
25d

2.1.10 S12700 Agile Switch Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training

Implement & Operate

Improve

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

S12700 Agile Switch Installation


and Commissioning Training

Enterprise Network Design


Outlines Training
1d

1d

1d

S12700 Agile Switch Essential


Operation and Maintenance
Training
5d

2d

S12700 Agile Switch Advanced


Operation and Maintenance
Training
5d

Enterprise Campus Network


Design Training

Data Center Network Design


Training

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design


Training
1d

Technology
Fundamentals
Training

IP Technology Fundamentals
14d

Elective Guide

The Essential Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

39

Advanced Technology
Training
25d

2.1.11 Data Center Switches (CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training

Implement & Operate

Improve

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

1d

Data Center Switches


(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58)
Installation and Commissioning
Training
1d

1d

Data Center
Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE
58)Essential Operation and
5d
Maintenance Training

2d

Data Center
Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58)
Advanced Operation and
Maintenance
5d

Enterprise Network Design


Outlines Training

Enterprise Campus Network


Design Training

Data Center Network Design


Training

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design


Training
1d

Technology
Fundamentals
Training

IP Technology Fundamentals
14d

Elective Guide

The Essential Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

40

Advanced Technology
Training
25d

2.1.12 WLAN (AC/ACU/AP) Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training
WLAN Planning and Design
Training

Implement & Operate

Improve

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

WLAN Installation and


Commissioning Training
1d

5d

WLAN Essential Operation and


Maintenance Training
3d
WLAN Advanced Operation and
Maintenance Training
3d

Elective Guide

The Essential Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

The item in the dashed box is a combination of a number of training programs.

41

2.1.13 MSCG(ME60) Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training

Implement & Operate

Improve

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

ME60 Products 1st Line


Maintenance Training

Enterprise Network Design


Outlines Training

1d

1d
ME60 Products 2nd Line
Maintenance Training

Enterprise Campus Network


Design Training

ME60 Products IPTV Service


Features Training

Data Center Network Design


Training

4d

2d
Enterprise MPLS VPN Design
Training

iManager U2000 ME60 Product


Operation Training
2d

1d

IP Technology Fundamentals
14d

Elective Guide

ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

42

25d

ME60 Products
Troubleshooting Training
10d

1d

Technology
Fundamentals
Training

Advanced Technology
Training

5d

2.1.14 PTN Product Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training

PTN Network Planning and


Design Training
3d

Implement & Operate

Improve

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

PTN Products Installation and


Commissioning Training
2d

PTN Products 1st Line


Maintenance Training
2d

PTN Products 2nd Line


Maintenance Training
10d

Technology
Fundamentals
Training

IP Technology Fundamentals
14d

43

PTN Products 3rd Line


Maintenance Training
5d

2.1.15 Enterprise NMS eSight-IP Training Path


eSight Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path
Target Audience

eSight-IP Enterprise NM
Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d

eSight Operation and


Maintenance Engineer

eSight Advanced Feature Training


eSight-IP WLAN
Management Training
0.5d

WLAN Administrator
eSight-IP IPsec VPN
Management Training
0.5d

IPSec VPN Administrator

eSight-IP MPLS VPN


Management Training
0.5d

MPLS VPN Administrator


eSight-IP Smart Reporter
Management Training
0.5d

Report Administrator

eSight-IP MPLS Tunnel


Management Training
0.5d

eSight-IP Terminal Resource

MPLS Tunnel Administrator

Terminal Administrator

eSight-IP SecureCenter
Management Training

2d

SecureCenter Administrator

Management Training

0.5d

eSight-IP SLA
Management Training
0.5d

SLA Administrator
eSight-IP NTA Management
Training
0.5d

Network Monitor /
Traffic Analyzer
eSight Agile Features
TrainingSVF&iPCA
0.5d

Agile Administrator

eSight-IP LogCenter
Management Training
2d

LogCenter Administrator

eSight Product Expert

Elective Guide

eSight Basic Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operators.

eSight Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for eSight operation and maintenance engineer.

Choose eSight Advanced Feature Training programs according to the licenses purchased by the audience.

44

2.1.16 Agile Controller Training Path

Plan / Design

Implement / Operate

Improve

Planning and Design

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

Training

Agile Controller Operation &


Maintenance Training
3d
Elective Guide:

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

45

2.1.17 AnyOffice Training Path

Plan / Design

Implement / Operate

Improve

Planning and Design

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

Training

AnyOffice Operation &


Maintenance Training
3d
Elective Guide:

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

46

2.1.18 Enterprise Network Design Training Path

Enterprise Network
Design Outlines Training

Enterprise Network
Design Engineer

1d

Enterprise Campus
Network Design Training
1d

Enterprise Network
Design Expert

Enterprise MPLS VPN


Design Training

Data Center Network


Design Training
1d

WLAN Planning and


Design Training
2d

Enterprise MPLS
VPN Design Expert

Data Center Network


Design Expert

Training Path
Target Audience

Elective Guide

Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training is designed for general audience.

47

5d

Enterprise WLAN
Design Expert

2.1.19 Firewall Training Path

Plan / Design
Planning and Design Training
Firewall Planning and Design
1d

Implement / Operate

Improve

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

USG2000/5000 Installation and


Commissioning Training
1d
Firewall VPN Technology
Training

USG2000/5000 Operation and


Maintenance Training

3d
4d
Firewall UTM(Unified Threat
Management) Technology
Training
3d

USG6000 Installation and


Commissioning Training
1d

USG6000 Essential Operation and


Maintenance Training
4d

ASG Installation and


Commissioning Training

1d
ASG Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d

USG6000 Advanced Operation and


Maintenance Training
2d

USG9000 Installation and


Commissioning Training

SVN Installation and


Commissioning Training

1d
1d
USG9000 Essential Operation and
Maintenance Training

SVN Operation and


Maintenance Training

4d

2d
USG9000 Advanced Operation
and Maintenance Training

2d

Technology
Fundamentals
Training

Firewall Technology
Fundamental Training
1d

Elective Guide:

The Essential Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

48

Firewall Reliability&Attack
Defense Technology Training
3d

2.1.20 Security Management Software Training Path

Plan / Design

Implement / Operate

Improve

Planning and Design Training

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

Policy Center Operation and


Maintenance Training
3d

Technology
Fundamentals
Training

Firewall Technology
Fundamental Training
1d

Elective Guide:

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

TSM training need to be familiar with Firewall Technology Fundamentals

49

2.1.21 Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Path

Plan / Design
Planning and Design Training

Implement / Operate

Improve

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

NIP Installation and


Commissioning Training
1d
NIP Operation and Maintenance
Training
2d

Elective Guide:

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

50

2.1.22 Anti-DDoS Defense System Training Path

Plan / Design

Implement / Operate

Improve

Planning and Design

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

Training

Anti-DDoS Defense System


Operation and Maintenance
Training
3d

Technology
Fundamentals
Training

Firewall Technology
Fundamental Training
1d

Elective Guide:

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

51

2.1.23 UMA System Training Path

Plan / Design

Implement / Operate

Improve

Planning and Design

Operation and Maintenance Training

Advanced Technology Training

Training

UMA System Operation and


Maintenance Training
1d

Elective Guide:

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

52

2.2 Required Training Programs


Enterprise IP Training Programs are designed as follows:
Training Programs

Level

Duration
(working
days)

Training
Location

Class
Size

Routing and Switching Career Certification Training Programs


HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device
Training

10

6 ~ 12

HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device


Training (Fast-track)

6 ~ 12

HCNP-R&S Training

15

6 ~ 12

HCNP-R&S Training (Fast-Track)

6 ~ 12

HCIE-R&S training

15

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security


Network Training

6 ~ 12

HCNP-Security Training

15

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

IP Network Technology Fundamental Training

6 ~ 12

Huawei VRP System Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise LAN Technology Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise WAN Technology Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training

6 ~ 12

WLAN Career Certification Training Programs


HCNA-WLAN-IEBW Implementing Enterprise Basic
WLAN Training
Security Career Certification Training Programs

Routing and Switching Specialist Certification Training


HCS-Field-R&S Training
WLAN Specialist Certification Training Programs
HCS-Field-WLAN Training
IP Technology Fundamental Training Programs

IP Network Advanced Technology Training Programs

53

Enterprise IP Multicast Technologies Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise MPLS VPN Technologies Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise MPLS TE Technologies Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise QoS Technology Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise HA Technology Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training

6 ~ 12

NE40E-X Router Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

NE40E-X Router Essential Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

NE40E-X Router Advanced Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

NE20E-S Router Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

NE20E-S Router Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

NE05E&08E Router Installation and Commissioning


Training

6 ~ 12

NE05E&08E Router Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

AR G3 Router Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

AR G3 Router Essential Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

AR G3 Router Advanced Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

AR SOHO Router Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

AR SOHO Router Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

NE40E-X Router Training Programs

NE20E-S Router Training Programs

NE05E&08E Router Training Programs

AR G3 Router Training Programs

AR SOHO Router Training Programs

AR Industrial Router Training Programs

54

AR Industrial Router Installation and Commissioning


Training

6 ~ 12

AR Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

AMI Solution Training

6 ~ 12

Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and


Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Installation and


Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

Campus network switch (S series) Essential Operation


and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

Campus network switches (S series) Advanced Operation


and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

S12700 Agile Switch Installation and Commissioning


Training

6 ~ 12

S12700 Agile Switch Essential Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

S12700 Agile Switch Advanced Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

Data Center Switches (CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58)


Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58)Essential


Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

Data Center
Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58)Advanced Operation
and Maintenance

6 ~ 12

WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

WLAN Essential Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

WLAN Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

Campus Network Switch (S series) Training Programs

S12700 Agile Switch Training Programs

Data Center SwitchCE SeriesTraining Programs

WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs

55

6 ~ 12

ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training

10

6 ~ 12

ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training

6 ~ 12

ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training

6 ~ 12

iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training

6 ~ 12

PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training

10

6 ~ 12

PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

PTN Network Planning and Design Training

6 ~ 12

WLAN Planning&Optimization Training


MSCG(ME60) Training Programs

PTN Products Training Programs

Enterprise Network Management System eSight Training Programs


eSight-IP Enterprise NM Operation and Maintenance
Training

6 ~ 12

eSight-IP WLAN Management Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

eSight-IP MPLS VPN Management Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

eSight-IP MPLS Tunnel Management Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

eSight-IP SLA Management Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

eSight-IP IPsec VPN Management Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

eSight-IP Smart Reporter Management Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

eSight-IP NTA Management Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

eSight-IP Terminal Resource Management Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

eSight-IP SecureCenter Management Training

6 ~ 12

eSight-IP LogCenter Management Training

6 ~ 12

eSight Agile Features TrainingSVF&iPCA

0.5

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

Agile Controller Training Programs


Agile Controller Operation & Maintenance Training

56

AnyOffice Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise Campus Network Design Training

6 ~ 12

Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training

6 ~ 12

Data Center Network Design Training

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

Firewall VPN Technology Training

6 ~ 12

Firewall UTM(Unified Threat Management) Technology


Training

6 ~ 12

Firewall Reliability&Attack Defense Technology Training

6 ~ 12

USG2000/5000 Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

USG2000/5000 Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

USG6000 Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

USG6000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

USG6000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

USG9000 Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

USG9000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

USG9000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

SVN Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

SVN Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

AnyOffice Operation & Maintenance Training


Enterprise Network Design Training Programs

Security Technology Fundamental Training Programs


Firewall Technology Fundamental Training
Security Advance Technology Training Programs

USG2000/5000 Firewall Training Programs

USG6000 Next Generation Firewall Training Programs

USG9000 High-end Firewall Training Programs

SVN(Security Virtual Network) Training Programs

ASG( Application Security Gateway) Training Programs

57

ASG Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

ASG Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

NIP Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

NIP Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training Programs

Security Management Software Training Programs


Policy Center Operation and Maintenance Training
Anti-DDoS Defense System Training Programs
Anti-DDoS Defense System Operation and Maintenance
Training
UMA System Training Programs
UMA System Operation and Maintenance Training
Security Planning and Design Training Programs
Firewall Planning and Design Training

Level Description: : Basic Course : Intermediate Course : Advanced Course : Expert Course

58

2.3 Training Programs


2.4 Routing and Switching Career Certification Training Programs
2.4.1

HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device Training

Training Path

(RIP/OSPF) routing protocols for implementation


and support of effective enterprise network

HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and


Device Training
ORSA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

routing solutions.
Establish solutions for enterprise network

10d

administration and management through

Target Audience

application layer services including DHCP, FTP


and Telnet.

Those who wish to become a Huawei


Certified Network Associate

Establish a fundamental network capable of


supporting basic communications.

For those who possess a working knowledge


of routing and switching technologies.
Project Description

Enhance link layer performance the through


implementation of features and services
including link aggregation, VLAN technologies

With HCNA certification, you demonstrate a


basic understanding of small and mediumsized networks, including general network
technologies, and the ability to assist the
design of small and medium-sized networks,
and implement the designs using Huawei
routing and switching devices.
Prerequisites

and GVRP.
Manage and support Wide Area Network
communications over serial links for a range of
technologies including HDLC, PPP, PPPoE and
Frame Relay.
Apply Network Address Translation (NAT)
solutions for private networks.
Provide Wireless WAN network backup solutions

A working knowledge of IT technologies.

over 3G cellular networks.

Objectives

Provide effective IP security solutions using

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

various security architectures including Access

Explain the intricacies of data transmission over

support solutions.

Control Lists (ACL), AAA, and IPSec with GRE

IP networks, for competency in supporting,

Describe and implement solutions for unified

maintaining and troubleshooting IP networks.

enterprise network management, including

Perform IP address planning for establishing well

SNMP and Huawei eSight NMS technology

designed networks.

solutions.

Navigate and manage Huawei products through

Establish truly business capable enterprise

the virtual routing platform (VRP).

networks for real-world industries.

Duration

Build efficient data switching environments


through the management of switching products

10 working days
Class Size

and manipulation of related (STP/RSTP) link


layer protocols.

Min 6, Max 12

Explain the principles of routing and configure

59

2.4.2

HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and Device Training (Fast-track)

Training Path

Enhance link layer performance the through


implementation of features and services

HCNA-HNTD Huawei Network Technology and


Device Training (Fast-track)
ORSAA Lecture, Hands-on exercise

including link aggregation, VLAN technologies


and GVRP.

5d

Build efficient data switching environments

Target Audience

through the management of switching products


and manipulation of related (STP/RSTP) link

Those who wish to become a network


associate

layer protocols.
Explain the principles of routing and configure

Those who hope to obtain HCNA certification


Project Description

(OSPF) routing protocols for implementation and


support of effective enterprise network routing

With HCNA certification, you demonstrate a


basic understanding of small and mediumsized networks, including general network
technologies, and the ability to assist the
design of small and medium-sized networks,
and implement the designs using Huawei
routing and switching devices.
Prerequisites

solutions.
Manage and support Wide Area Network
communications over serial links for a range of
technologies including HDLC, PPP, PPPoE and
Frame Relay. Provide Wireless WAN network
backup solutions over 3G cellular networks.
Describe and implement solutions for unified
enterprise network management, including

Those who have obtained the same level

SNMP and Huawei eSight NMS technology

technical certificate in the industry, and hope to

solutions.

obtain Huawei certificate

Supporting IPv6 Networks.

Objectives

Duration

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

5 working days
Class Size

Navigate and manage Huawei products through

Min 6, Max 12

the virtual routing platform (VRP).

60

2.4.3

HCNP-R&S Training

Training Path

and medium-sized networks independently


and implement the designs using Huawei
routing and switching devices.
Prerequisites

HCNP-R&S-IERN
Implementing Enterprise Routing Network
ORSP1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

6d

HCNA certification or the similar knowledge

Objectives
HCNP-R&S-IESN
Implementing Enterprise Switching Network
ORSP2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

4d

Configure OSPF
Configure BGP

HCNP-R&S-IENP
Improving Enterprise Network
Performance
ORSP3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the principle of IGMP,PIM-SM/DM


Describe the principle of VLAN, QinQ, STP,
5d

RSTP and MSTP


Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN, Super VLAN and

Target Audience

QinQ
Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP

Those who hope to become a network


professional

Describe the basic principle of network security


List the features of USG

Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S


certificate
Project Description

Describe IP QoS end-to-end process


List High Availability technology

Duration

With HCNP-R&S certification, you


demonstrate a comprehensive and thorough
understanding of small and medium-sized
networks, including general network
technologies, and the ability to design small

15 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

61

2.4.4

HCNP-R&S Training (Fast-Track)

the industry

Objectives
Training Path
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

HCNP-R&S Training (Fast-Track)

Configure OSPF
ORSPA Lecture, Hands-on exercise

5d

Configure BGP

Target Audience

Configure Route Selection Tools

Those who hope to become a network


professional

Configure IGMP, PIM-SM/DM

Those who hope to obtain HCNP-R&S


certificate

Configure VLAN, Mux VLAN and GVRP

Describe the principle of VLAN


Configure STP, RSTP and MSTP

Those who have obtained the same level


technical certificate in the industry, and hope
to obtain Huawei certificate
Project Description

Describe the basic principle of network security

With HCNP-R&S certification, you


demonstrate a comprehensive and thorough
understanding of small and medium-sized
networks, including general network
technologies, and the ability to design small
and medium-sized networks independently
and implement the designs using Huawei
routing and switching devices.
Prerequisites

Configure end-to-end IP QoS

Configure the functions and features of USG


series firewall
Describe Huawei IP QoS end-to-end process
Build and configure simulation of enterprise
network

Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Obtained the same level technical certificate in

62

2.4.5

HCIE-R&S training

maintaining the large scope enterprise network

Objectives
Training Path
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

HCIE-R&S training
ORSE1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Understand the large and medium-sized


15d

complex networks
Design a variety of complex network

Target Audience

independently

Those who hope to become an internetwork


expert

Implement networks with Huawei routing and


switching devices

Those who hope to obtain HCIE-RS


certificate
Project Description

Maintain different networks with a variety of


routers and switches
Solve complex connectivity problems

With HCIE-R&S certification, you


demonstrate a comprehensive and thorough
understanding of large networks, including
technologies used in complex large and
medium-sized networks, and the ability to
design various enterprise networks
independently and implement those designs
using Huawei routing and switching devices.
Prerequisites

Use technical solutions to increase bandwidth,


shorten the corresponding time, maximize
performance, strengthen security and support
global applications
Troubleshoot complex networks
Analyze complex requirements of applications
on the network

Duration
15 working days
Class Size

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar


knowledge

Min 6, Max 12

Five years experiences on building and

63

2.5 WLAN Career Certification Training Programs


2.5.1

HCNA-WLAN-IEBW Implementing Enterprise Basic WLAN Training

Training Path

Outline the basic topology structure of WLAN


List Huawei WDS network mode

HCNA-WLAN-IEBW Implementing
Enterprise Basic WLAN Training
OWLA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe mesh network mode


Describe the basic knowledge of 802.11

5d

List the advantages of 802.11n

Target Audience

Describe the basic concepts of 802.11 physical

Those who hope to become a network


associate of WLAN

layer
Describe spread spectrum technology of 802.11

Those who hope to obtain HCNA-WLAN


certificate
Prerequisites

Describe DSSS technology


Describe OFDM technology
Differentiate Fat AP and Fit AP technology

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Describe CAPWAP tunnel protocol

A basic understanding of computer technology

Outline the general network mode of WLAN

HCNA certification or similar knowledge

Differentiate the forwarding modes of WLAN

Objectives

Differentiate different applications of VLAN in

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

WLAN service
Describe WLAN business configuration

Describe what WLAN is

processes of Huawei AC6605

Describe the development process of WLAN

Configure the basic attributes of AC

technology

Describe the basic features of Huawei product

List typical application scenarios of WLAN

List the key features of Huawei product

technology

Describe the basic concepts of roaming

Describe the functions and roles of WLAN

Outline the basic principles of roaming

standards organizations

List the application scenarios of roaming

Describe the related basic knowledge of RF

Describe security threat of WLAN

List working principle and specific property of RF

Describe the related concepts of WIDS and

Describe the working frequency band of WLAN

WIPS

and the basic concepts of channel

Describe the related concepts of AAA

Describe the rules of the working frequency

Outline the WLAN authenticated encryption

band and channel in each country

techniques

List other technologies related to WLAN

Configure Huawei WLAN security-profile

Describe the latest Huawei product information

Describe the frame format of 802.11

List the application scenarios of Huawei product

Differentiate three frame types and functions of

Describe the power supply mode of Huawei

802.11

product

Describe 802.11 media access control

Configure Huawei VRP basic command

mechanism

Configure AC basic attributes

Analyze media access process of WLAN

Upgrade the software of AC and AP

Describe the concepts of QoS

Describe the basic concepts of 802.11

Configure WMM-profile

64

Configure Traffic-profile

Configure the basic information of AC

Describe the definition and functions of antenna

Configure AP online

Describe the main performance indicates of

Configure AP-profile
Configure radio-profile

antenna
List some common passive device

Configure service-set

List the basic process of the WLAN network

Configure AP region

planning

Configure AP binding profile

List basic interference factors of WLAN

Perform daily maintenance operation tasks of

Describe the basic load-balancing ways of

WLAN service

WLAN

Describe WLAN commonly used fault

List the typical application scenarios of WLAN

troubleshooting

Describe the network planning processes of

Describe WLAN common diagnostic commands

WLAN

and tools

Point out some typical scenarios of WLAN

Describe the cause of some common failures of

network planning ways

WLAN

Describe the functional features of Huawei

Use troubleshooting tools and troubleshoot

WLAN planning tool

some common failures

Duration

Use Huawei WLAN tool to plan basic WLAN


network

5 working days
Class Size

List some functions of eSight


Configure WLAN service

Min 6, Max 12

65

2.6 Security Career Certification Training Programs


2.6.1

HCNA-Security-CBSN Constructing Basic Security Network Training

Training Path

Understand key VPN technologies.


Understand the classification and application of

HCNA-Security CBSN Constructing Basic


Security Network Training
OSCA1

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

VPN.
Understand the application scenarios of VPDN.

5d

Understand the principles of L2TP.

Target Audience

Understand the application scenarios of client-

Operators and Maintainers

initialized and NAS-initialized L2TP VPN.

Administrators
Prerequisites

Understand the configuration of L2TP.


Understand the principles and implementation of

Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary


knowledge

GRE VPN.
Understand the security mechanism of GRE

Be familiar with Router&Switch


elementary knowledge
Objectives

VPN.
Understand the typical application and
configuration of GRE VPN.

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Understand the principles of the IPSec

Understand OSI model

Understand the AH and ESP technologies.

Understand TCP/IP principles

Understand the service process of IKE.

Understand TCP/IP security issues

Understand the application scenarios and

technology.

configuration of IPSec VPN.

Understand Common attack means

Understand the principles of the SSL VPN

Understand the definition and classification of

technology.

firewalls.

Understand the Basic functions and features of

Understand firewall Main features and

the SVN product.

technologies.

Understand the configuration of SSL VPN.

Understand the Data forwarding process and

Understand firewall UTM basic technology

basic configuration of firewalls.

Understand what terminal security is.

Understand the functions and classification of

Understand the components and deployment of

ACLs.
Understand firewall Security Policy and

the Policy Center system.


Understand the organizational management and

configuration
Understand the principles of the NAT technology.

access control functions of the Policy Center

Understand the application of NAT.

system.

Understand the security policy


configuration of the Policy Center system.
Duration

Understand the NAT configuration of firewalls.


Understand firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
basic technology
Understand firewall User Management

5 working days
Class Size

Understand firewall
VLAN//SA/E1/ADSL/WLAN/3G technology

Min 6, Max 12

Understand the concept and functions of VPN.

66

2.6.2

HCNP-Security Training

Training Path

configuration of SLB
Understand Dual-system hot backup principle

HCNP-Security CISN Constructing


Infrastructure of Security Network
OSCP1

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

and configuration.
Understand the principle and configuration of

5d

BFD
Understand the implementation and
HCNP-Security CTSS Constructing Terminal
Security System

configuration of Link-group
Understand IP-link principle and configuration

OSCP2

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

5d

Understand Bypass principle and configuration


Understand Eth-Trunk principle and
configuration

HCNP-Security CSSN Constructing


Service Security Network
OSCP3

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Learn about the technology principles of virtual


firewall.

5d

Master virtual firewall configuration methods.


Know virtual firewall technology applications.

Target Audience

Understand advanced features and configuration

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

of IPSec VPN.
Understand advanced features and configuration

Be familiar with data communications


network elementary knowledge

of L2TP over IPSec VPN.


Understand Scenarios of comprehensive SSL

Be familiar with network security


elementary knowledge

VPN applications in HA.


Understand Basic network attack.

Be familiar with VPN elementary


knowledge

Understand Basic attack defense technologies

Be familiar with Firewall elementary


knowledge

Understand Application and configuration of

Be familiar with OS.

Understand the damages and mechanisms of

on firewalls.
basic attack defense technologies.

Be familiar with 802.1X access control


technology.

major DDoS attacks.


Understand the principle of the anti-DDoS

Has network security equipment operation


and maintenance experience

solution.
Learn about the networking of the anti-DDoS
solution.

Objectives

Learn about the installation and configuration of


the anti-DDoS solution.

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Master troubleshooting method.

Understand firewall device management

Master the troubleshooting of security policy.

Master firewall management by AAA

Master the troubleshooting of NAT technology.

Master password recovery

Master the troubleshooting of attack defence.

Understand the implementation and

Master the troubleshooting of traffic limiting


policies.

configuration of traffic limiting policies

Master the troubleshooting of HA technology.

Understand the implementation and

67

Master the troubleshooting of L2TP VPN.

products

Master the troubleshooting of IPsec VPN.

Understand the main technologies used for

Master the troubleshooting of SSL VPN.

content security
Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion

Understand the current situation of terminal

prevention technology

security.

Understand Intrusion detection and Intrusion

Understand the background of terminal security.

prevention application scenario

Understand the multidimensional defense

Understand the basic knowledge of viruses.

system as a terminal security solution.

Learn about virus signatures and the common

Understand the relationship among the five

tools for detecting viruses

elements.

Understand major antivirus technologies for

Understand the concepts and components of

gateways

identity authentication.

Understand the application of antivirus

Understand the implementation mechanism of

technologies for gateways

security policies during authentication

Describe the basic knowledge of Web filtering

Understand the implementation principles of

technology

multiple access control devices.

Describe common WEB risk

Know the terminal security solution design

Understand the key technology of Web filtering

roadmap.
Know how to complete the availability design of

Understand the Web filtering application

a solution.

scenario

Know the current situation of document security.

Understand the basic concept of spam

Understand the functions of DSM

Understand the generation and harm of spam

Master how to implement Policy Center system.

Understand the mechanism of spam filter

Master how to configurue Policy Center system.

Learn about the anti-spam solution of Huawei

Master the operation and maintenance of Policy

Describe background of deep packet inspect.


Understand the main DPI technology.

Center system.
Master the operation and maintenance of DSM.

Understand the DPI application scenario.

Describe the common fault in Policy Center

Master the troubleshooting of IPS

system.

Master the troubleshooting of AV

Master the troubleshooting method of Policy

Master the troubleshooting of URL filtering

Center system

Master the troubleshooting of RBL filtering

Master the troubleshooting method of DSM

Master the troubleshooting of deep packet

system

inspect

Master how to utilize diagnoses tools for

Master the troubleshooting of Database


updated.
Duration

troubleshooting security implementations.

Master the troubleshooting method of


Hardware SACG implementations.

15 working days
Class Size

Understand the basic knowledge of information


security

Min 6, Max 12

Understand the background of content security

68

2.7 Routing and Switching Specialist Certification Training Programs


2.7.1

HCS-Field-R&S Training

Training Path

Describe S12700 Agile Switches hardware


architecture

HCS-Field-R&S Training
ORSS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe S12700 Agile Switches boards and


modules

5d

Describe S12700 Agile Switches data forwarding

Target Audience

List S12700 Agile Switches characteristics

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

List S12700 Agile Switches software features


Describe S12700 Agile Switches application

A general familiarity with PC operation system

scenarios

A basic understanding of computer technology

Describe the Positioning of Huawei AR G3

HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge

Routers

Objectives

Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei


AR G3 Routers

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei AR G3


Routers

Describe the Positioning of Huawei Box

Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei

Switches

AR G3 Routers

Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei

Describe the Characteristics of Huawei AR G3

Box Switches

Routers

Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei Box

Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei

Switches

AR G3 Routers

Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei

Describe the Positioning of Huawei NE Routers

Box Switches

Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei

Describe the Characteristics of Huawei Box

NE Routers

Switches

Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei NE

Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei

Routers

Box Switches

Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei

Describe the Positioning of Huawei Chassis

NE Routers

Switches

Describe the Characteristics of Huawei NE

Describe the Hardware Architecture of Huawei

Routers

Chassis Switches

Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei

Describe Boards and Modules of Huawei

NE Routers

Chassis Switches

Describe the concepts of routine maintenance

Describe Data Forwarding Procedure of Huawei

List items of routine maintenance

Chassis Switches
Describe the Characteristics Huawei Chassis

Use the commands in routine maintenance

Switches

Distinguish routine maintenance and

Describe the Application Scenarios of Huawei

troubleshooting

Chassis Switches

List the steps of troubleshooting

Describe S12700 Agile Switches positioning

Mater the methods of information collection

69

Describe the technical support system of Huawei

Describe the iStack features on Huawei box

List the Mostly Used Methods of Software

switches
Configure the iStack features on Huawei box

Upgrade
Assess the Feasibility of Software Upgrade

switches
Describe the CSS principles

Work Out a Practical Scheme of Software

Describe the CSS features on Huawei chassis

Upgrade
Describe the General Steps of Device Software

switches
Configure the CSS features on Huawei chassis

Upgrade
Describe the General Steps of Installing Patch

switches
Describe the NTP principles

Describe the General Steps of Software

Describe the NTP features on Huawei chassis

Upgrade Using the BootRom


Describe the principles of ISSU

switches
Configure the NTP features on Huawei chassis

Describe the application scenarios of ISSU

switches

Configure ISSU on Huawei S Switches

Describe the advantages and functions of NQA

List the security features of Huawei Datacom

Describe basic principles and implementation

Products

methods of NQA

List the different security features between

Describe NQA features

Huawei Datacom Products

Describe typical applications of NQA

Describe the application scenarios of the

Describe the principles of LLDP

security features of Huawei devices


Understand firewall security features on the AR

Configure LLDP on Huawei Products


Describe the application of LLDP in enterprise

G3 router
Configure firewall features on the AR G3 router

network

Describe the implementation of RADIUS and

Describe the SNMP principles


Configure SNMP features on Huawei Products

HWTACACS

Duration

Describe domain-based user management


modes

5 working days
Class Size

Configure AAA on Huawei Datacom Product


Understand AAA application scenarios on the

Min 6, Max 12

enterprise network
Describe the iStack principles

70

2.8 WLAN Specialist Certification Training Programs


2.8.1

HCS-Field-WLAN Training

Training Path

Clarify customer's basic requirements in network


planning.

HCS-Field-WLAN Training
OWLS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Learn about customer's high-level requirements.


Describe main organizations and standards in

5d

the wireless field in industry and power

Target Audience

requirements of main countries.

Those who hope to become a network


associate of WLAN

Describe spectrum division of 2.4 GHz and 5


GHz, channel requirements of main countries,

Those who hope to become to a WLAN


Planning & Optimization expert

and HT40.
Calculate the EIRP.

Those who hope to obtain WLAN Planning &


Optimization certificate
Prerequisites

Know typical WLAN planning scenarios.


Have a good grasp of the WLAN planning
procedure and focuses.

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Use tools to carry out simple WLAN planning.

A basic understanding of computer technology

Perform brief WLAN planning to meet customer

HCNA certification or similar knowledge

requirements.
Describe the process of the site survey for

HCNA-WLAN certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

planning the WLAN.


Use WLAN planning tools for the site survey.

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe precautions for the site survey in


different scenarios.

List the differences between wired and wireless

Know how to design a hierarchical network.

networks.
Know commonly used Huawei WLAN devices.

Plan VLANs on a medium- to large-sized WLAN.

List usage scenarios and characteristics of

Plan IP addresses on the WLAN.


Plan routes on the WLAN.

WLAN on industry networks.

Describe basic WLAN architectures and

List usage scenarios of WLAN on carrier

components.

networks.

Differentiate application scenarios of different AC

Describe the lifecycle and processes of the

forwarding and deployment modes.

WLAN project.

Differentiate application scenarios of different AC

Describe necessities of WLAN planning and

networking modes and layers.

optimization.

Design WLAN architectures for different

Describe methods of WLAN planning and

scenarios.

optimization.

Describe other WLAN architectures.

Describe the necessity of pre-sales network

Learn about PoE components.

planning in the WLAN project.

Understand PoE power budget.

Describe usage of pre-sales network planning in

Configure PoE.

the WLAN project.


List the procedure of pre-sales network planning

Describe how the high availability (HA) of WLAN

in the WLAN project.

is implemented.

71

Distinguish different hot-standby (HSB) methods

Summarize basic principles of roaming.

and understand their components and

Plan roaming.

implementations.

Know how to clarify requirements.

Plan and configure an HSB WLAN network.

List site survey contents.

Design an indoor settled WLAN.

Know how to select APs and antennas.

Use the AP calculator.

Plan network bandwidth.

Select suitable devices for indoor network

Describe basic principles for deploying APs.

planning.

List typical WDS and Mesh network planning

Use product specification quick search and

scenarios.

comparison functions.

Learn about WLAN solution characteristics in

Operate the WLAN Planner.

typical scenarios.

Learn about common components of indoor

Perform WLAN network planning in typical

distributed WLAN.

scenarios.

Learn about the bandwidth, frequency band, and

Describe different stages of Huawei enterprise

signal calculation method of indoor distributed

service lifecycle model.

WLAN network planning.

Describe basic principles for WLAN network

Learn about three common WLAN scenarios.

planning.

Describe outdoor coverage requirements and

Describe advantages and disadvantages of each

site survey contents.

WLAN networking mode.

Know how to select APs and antennas.

Describe features of small- and medium-scale

Plan the bandwidth and capacity of outdoor

enterprise WLANs.

WLANs.

Describe common networking modes of small-

Describe the basic AP deployment principles.

and medium-scale enterprise WLANs.

List typical scenarios of outdoor coverage.

Describe planning methods of small- and

Select suitable devices for outdoor network

medium-scale enterprise WLANs.


Describe design methods of small- and medium-

planning.
Select suitable antennas for outdoor network

scale enterprise WLANs.


Understand basic BYOD concepts.

planning.
Master the basic outdoor network planning

Describe key WLAN technologies applicable in

process.

large-scale enterprises.

Select suitable devices for outdoor network

Describe WLAN optimization concept

planning.

Describe WLAN optimization process

Select suitable antennas for outdoor network

List WLAN data optimization methods

planning.

Describe basic WLAN parameter calibration

Master the basic outdoor network planning

methods

process.

List WLAN optimization benefits

Grasp basic knowledge about a WDS design.

Understand basic interference sources

Use the WLAN Planner to perform outdoor

Understand WLAN interference types

network planning.

Know basic WLAN interference optimization

Grasp basic knowledge about a WDS design.

methods

Use the WLAN Planner to perform outdoor

Know how to improve WLAN coverage

network planning.

Understand WLAN coverage methods in high

Describe basic concepts of roaming.

density scenarios

72

Describe functions of WLAN Tester

Optimize WLAN networks

Describe the usage procedure of WLAN Tester

Duration

Describe basic WLAN application scenarios

5 working days
Class Size

List WLAN optimization methods in different


scenarios

Min 6, Max 12

73

2.9 IP Technology Fundamental Training Programs


2.9.1

IP Network Technology Fundamental Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

IP Network Technology Fundamental


ORS11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Describe basic structure of IP network


Describe TCP/IP basis
Describe IP addressing and routing

Target Audience

Describe network layer protocols

Operators and Maintainers

Describe transit layer protocols

Administrators

Describe application layer protocols

Prerequisites

Duration

A general familiarity with PC operation


system

1 working day
Class Size

A basic understanding of computer


technology

Min 6, Max 12

74

2.9.2

Huawei VRP System Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Huawei VRP5 QuickStart


ORS21

Lecture, Hands-on exercise 0.5d

Describe the VRP architecture


Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center
Perform VRP operate files

Huawei VRP8 QuickStart

Operate VRP upgrade software


ORS22

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Describe history of Huawei VRP platform


Describe the features of VRP8

Target Audience

Know the basic operation of VRP8

Operators and Maintainers

Perform VRP operate files

Prerequisites

Duration

A general familiarity with PC operation


system

1 working day
Class Size

A basic understanding of computer


technology

Min 6, Max 12

75

2.9.3

Enterprise LAN Technology Training

Training Path
RRPP Feature and Configuration
Ethernet Basic Principle
ORS31

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

ORS39

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

0.5d

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
VLAN Basic Principle and Configuration
A general familiarity with PC operation system
ORS32

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

A basic understanding of computer technology


A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives
VCMP LNP Principle and Configuration
ORS33

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

0.5d

Describe the development of Ethernet


technology
List the standards of Ethernet

VLAN Advanced Features and Configuration


ORS34

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the working principle of HUB


0.5d

Describe the working principle of L2 switch


Describe the working principle of L3 switch
List the Ethernet port features

GVRP Principle and Configuration


ORS35

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Configure the Ethernet interface


Describe the background of VLAN technology

0.5d

Describe the principle of VLAN


Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication

Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle


and Configuration
ORS36

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

principle
0.5d

Configure the inter-VLAN communication


Understand the basic principle of VCNP
List all the VCMP roles support by switch
Configure VCMP on switch

STP Principle and Configuration


ORS37

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Understand the basic principle of LNP

1d

Configure LNP on switch


Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN
Configure the MUX-VLAN

SEP Features and Configuration


ORS38

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the principle of Super-VLAN


Configure the Super-VLAN

0.5d

Describe the GARP principle


Describe the GVRP principle
Configure GVRP

76

Describe the Ethernet link aggregation principle

Describe the MSTP advanced configuration

Describe the LACP basic principle

Configure the MSTP function

List the methods of link aggregation

Describe SEP Principle.

Configure the Ethernet link aggregation

Learn SEP features supported by the Huawei

Describe calculation process of spanning tree

switch

Describe the function of configuration BPDU

Master SEP configuration

Describe the flood process of topology change

Understand the SEP used in the enterprise


network scenarios

information
Configure the STP function

Describe the working principle of RRPP

Describe RSTP basic calculation process

Know about the RRPP feature

Describe RSTP port status transition

Configure the RRPP feature

Describe the function of RST BPDU

Understand the RRPP application scenarios for


enterprise networks

Describe the flooding process of topology

Duration

change notification
Configure the RSTP function

5 working days

Describe the basic concept of MSTP

Class Size

Describe the calculation process of inter-zone of


MST

Min 6, Max 12

77

2.9.4

Enterprise WAN Technology Training


List common WAN interfaces

Training Path

Describe PPP principles


WAN Interfaces Introduction and
PPP/MP Principle and Configuration
ORS41

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe LCP principles


1d

Describe NCP principles


Describe MP principles
Configure PPP and MP
Configure PPP authentication

FR/POS/HDLC Principles and


Configuration
ORS42

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe FR principles
1d

Target Audience

Configure FR
Describe POS principles
Describe SDH frame structure and multiplexing

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
List common WAN protocols

methods
Identify common optical interfaces
Configure POS interface
Describe HDLC principles
Configure HDLC

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.9.5

Enterprise IP Routing Technology Training


Describe the concepts of load balance and

Training Path

route backup
Configure static route

IP Routing Basis
ORS51

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Configure static default route


Describe the principles of distance-vector
routing protocols
Describe the routing loop issues and apply

RIP Protocol Feature and


Configuration
ORS52 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

loop avoidance solutions


0.5d

Describe the principles of RIP protocols


Identify the similarities and differences
between RIPv1 and RIPv2
Configure RIP in the network

OSPF Feature and Configuration


ORS53

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol


1d

Describe the route calculation process of link


state algorithm
Describe basic concepts of OSPF
Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types

IS-IS Feature and Configuration


ORS54

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor


relationship
Describe the route calculation process of
OSPF

BGP Feature and Configuration


ORS55

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Configure OSPF routing protocol


1d

Describe the origin of IS-IS protocol


Describe the principles of IS-IS protocol
Compare IS-IS and OSPF protocols

Route Selection and Control


Feature
ORS56 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Configure IS-IS protocol


1d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

Describe BGP basic concepts


Describe BGP working principles
Describe the route selection process of BGP
Configure BGP protocol
Describe route selection tools
Describe routing policy

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Describe policy-based route selection

A basic understanding of computer technology

Compare routing policy and policy-based route

A basic understanding of IP network

Configure routing policy

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Describe the IP routing process


Describe fields in the routing table

Min 6, Max 12

2.10

IP Network Advanced Technology Training

2.10.1 Enterprise IP Multicast Technology Training


Describe the join procedure of RPT and

Training Path

multicast source registration


Describe the procedure of switchover from RPT

IP Multicast Technologies Basis


ORSA1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

to SPT
1d

Configure PIM-SM
List the key technologies of PIM SSM
Describe the working principle of PIM SSM

IP Multicast Routing Technologies

ORSA2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Configure PIM SSM

2d

Describe the PIM-DM protocol basic principle


Configure PIM-DM
Describe the basic principles of MSDP.

Inter-domain Multicast Technologies


ORSA3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the RPF detection of MSDP.


2d

Target Audience

Describe the application of MSDP


Configure the MSDP
Describe the problems solved by the MBGP.

Operators and Maintainers

Describe the extensions of the MBGP.

Administrators

Describe the process that the MBGP transmit

Planners and Designers


Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the IP multicast concept
Describe the IP multicast address architecture
Describe the data forwarding procedure of IP
multicast
Describe the SPT and RPT concept
Describe the IGMP protocol principle
Differentiate the difference from IGMP versions
Configure the IGMP protocol
Differentiate the classification of multicast routing
protocol
List the features of common multicast routing
protocols
Describe the basic principle of PIM-SM

the IPv4 multicast routing table.


Configure the MBGP

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.10.2 Enterprise IP VPN Technology Training


Describe IPSec technical architecture

Training Path

Describe IKE principles


Describe IPSec principles

IP VPN Technology Fundamentals


ORSB1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1.5d

Describe IPSec application scenarios


Configure IPSec VPN
Describe SSL principles
Describe SSL application scenarios

IP VPN Applications
ORSB2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Configure SSL VPN


2d

Describe problems when deploy IPSec VPN


Describe Huawei Efficient VPN solution
Configure Efficient VPN on Huawei AR G3

Designing IP VPN
ORSB3

routers
Lecture

0.5d

List Problems When Deploy VPNs


Describe how NAT affects VPN deployment
and the solution
Describe how PMTU affects VPN deployment

Maintaining IP VPN
ORSB4 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

and the solution


1d

Target Audience

Describe how VPN affects QoS deployment


and the solution
Describe GRE over IPSec applications

Operators and Maintainers

Describe IPSec over GRE applications

Planners and Designers

Compare GRE over IPSec and IPSec over

Administrators
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

GRE
Configure GRE over IPSec on Huawei AR G3
routers
Configure IPSec over GRE on Huawei AR G3
routers
Describe security risks of VPDN
Describe common VPDN solutions

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Compare IPSec over L2TP and L2TP over

Describe concepts of IP VPN

Configure IPSec over L2TP on Huawei AR G3

List common VPN technologies


Describe GRE principles
Describe GRE application scenarios
Configure GRE VPN
Describe concepts of LAC and LNS

IPSec
routers
Configure L2TP over IPSec on Huawei AR G3
routers
Describe requirements when deploy VPN on
Hub-Spoke network

Describe L2TP principles

Describe Huawei DSVPN solution

Describe L2TP application scenarios

Describe DSVPN principles

Configure L2TP VPN

Configure DSVPN on Huawei AR G3 routers

List Huawei IP VPN products


Describe IP VPN features supported by
Huawei routers
Describe IP VPN features supported by
Huawei switches
Describe IP VPN features supported by
Huawei firewalls
Describe Huawei eSight VPN management
features
Describe Huawei VPN client features
Distinguish differences of IP VPN features of

Choose appropriate devices and technology


for enterprise VPN
Describe eSight VPN management features
Use eSight basic functions
Use eSight VPN management functions
Describe ideas when troubleshooting IP VPN
List common reasons of IP VPN failure
List common commands when troubleshooting
IP VPN
Analyze IP VPN Troubleshooting cases

Duration

different products
Describe applications of different products in IP
VPN
Describe methodology of network designing
Analyze enterprise VPN requirements
Describe typical VPN application

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.10.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Technology Training


Describe MPLS structure feature that contains

Training Path

two planes
Describe MPLS label structure

MPLS Technology and Configuration


ORSD1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding


Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism
Describe the process of LDP session
establishment

MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration


ORSD2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Describe LDP label space


Describe LDP label distribution mode
Describe LDP label control mode
Describe LDP label retention mode
Describe the PHP

MPLS L3VPN Extended Application


ORSD3 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

List the methods of MPLS loop detection


Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing
Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop
count

VPWS Technologies and Configuration


ORSD4 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Configure MPLS
1d

Configure LDP
Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP

VPLS Techniques and Configuration


ORSD5 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

MPLS VPN
1d

Describe the mechanisms of the route and


label distribution in BGP MPLS VPN

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Planners and Designers
Administrators
Prerequisites

Describe the process of data forwarding of


BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN
configuration
Describe the extended BGP attributes used by
MPLS BGP VPN

A general familiarity with PC operation system


A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Analyze the process of IP forwarding
Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
Describe the basic principle of MPLS
forwarding
List the applications of MPLS

Describe the troubleshooting on control plane


of MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of
MPLS BGP VPN
Describe how to access the Internet via the
ISP
Describe how to access the Internet via the
MPLS VPN backbone
Describe how to access the Internet via
different interfaces between CE and PE
Describe the three levels of hierarchy of OSPF
VPN

Analyze how MP-BGP advertises OSPF


routing information
Describe the basic configuration of OSPF VPN
Analyze the application and configuration of
Sham-link
Describe the background in MPLS BGP VPN
Inter-AS solutions
Compare the three solutions processing in
control plane and data plane

Describe Martini VLL Topology


Describe how public tunnel and VC connection
are established in Martini VLL
Describe how the data is forwarded in Martini
VLL
Describe the difference between Martini VLL
and SVC VLL
Configure Martini VLL and SVC VLL in a
simple networking topology

Describe VPN Characteristics

Describe the features of VPLS

Describe the difference between MPLS L2

Describe how does VPLS get Tunnel Label

VPN and L3 VPN


Describe MPLS L2 VPN architect and data
encapsulation
Describe VPWS and VPLS Features
List VPWS and VPLS solutions for specific
scenario
Describe CCC VLL Topology
Describe how to establish tunnel in CCC mode
Describe how the data is forwarded in CCC
mode
Configure CCC in a simple network topology

and VC Label
Describe how does VPLS forward data and
avoid loop
Configure VPLS in a simple networking
topology
Configure VPLS

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.10.4 Enterprise MPLS TE Technology Training


Describe the signaling protocol of MPLS TE

Training Path

Describe the basic and extension principle of


RSVP protocol

MPLS TE Technologies and Configuration


ORSE1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

3d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Planners and Designers
Administrators
Prerequisites

Analyze the path setup process of MPLS TE


Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE
using static routes
Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS TE
using automatic route
Describe the forwarding mode for MPLS using
policy routing
Describe the mode of traffic protection

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Describe the principle of path protection

A basic understanding of computer technology

Describe the principle of fast reroute

HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge

Describe DS-TE functions

A general familiarity with MPLS technology

Describe DS-TE applicable environment

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe detailed TE concepts and models
Describe MPLS TE background and functional
modules
Describe the content of MPLS TE information
distribution
Describe the way of MPLS TE information
flooding
Describe the process of MPLS TE information
distribution
Analyze the process of CSPF algorithm
Describe the other constrained conditions

Describe the rationale of Tunnel Preemption


Describe the rationale of Tunnel Reoptimization
Describe the rationale of Load Sharing
Describe the rationale of Automatic Bandwidth
Adjustment
Describe the combining of MPLS TE with
MPLS VPN
Configure MPLS TE in VRP system
List MPLS TE application
Design MPLS TE according to the requirement

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

which influence the process of path calculation

Min 6, Max 12

2.10.5 Enterprise QoS Technology Training


Training Path
IP QoS Technology
ORSF1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe basic concepts of IP QoS
Describe Diff-Serv model
Describe the principle of IP QoS
Describe the classed-based QoS
Configure QoS

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.10.6 Enterprise HA Technology Training


HCNA certification or similar knowledge

Training Path

Objectives
VRRP Principles and Configuration
ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe BFD basic concept and principles

BFD Principles and Configuration


ORSG2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Describe application scenarios of BFD


Configure BFD on VRP platform

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.10.7 Enterprise IPv6 Technology Training


Compare protocol packet and LSA changes of

Training Path

OSPFv3 with OSPFv2


Describe OSPFv3 protocol operation

IPv6 Training
ORSH1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

5d

Target Audience

Configure OSPFv3
Describe IS-IS extensions for IPv6
Describe IS-IS extensions for Multi-Topology

Operators and Maintainers

Configure IS-ISv6

Monitoring Staffs

Describe MP-BGP attributes

Administrators

Describe how the MP-BGP implements the IPv6

Prerequisites

inter-domain routing
Configure BGP+

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Describe the function and basic principle of MLD

A basic understanding of computer technology

Differentiate between MLDv1 and MLDv2

HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge

Describe the function of SSM Mapping

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the reason for upgrading IPv4 to IPv6
Describe the IPv6 address structure and IPv6
packet format

Configure MLD
Describe the basic principle of IPv6 PIM-SM
Describe the address structure and working
principle of Embedded-RP
Describe the working principle of PIM-SSM
Describe the typical application of IPv6 multicast

Describe the packet types of ICMPv6

Configure PIMv6

Describe the packet types of ICMPv6

List classification of the ACL6

Describe the IPv6 neighbor discovery process

Describe the application scenarios of ACL6

Describe the working principle of IPv6 address

Configure ACL6

auto configuration
Describe the working principle of IPv6 PMTU
Describe the working principle of IPv6 DNS
Configure IPv6 address
Configure IPv6 NDP
Configure IPv6 PMTU
Configure IPv6 application
Describe the forwarding mechanism of IPv6
unicast packets
Describe the principle of RIPng
Differentiate between RIPng and RIPv2
Describe the format and processing of RIPng
packets

List roles of the transitional technologies of IPv6


Describe application situations of the transitional
technologies of IPv6
Describe basic principles of the common
transitional technologies of IPv6
Configure common transitional technologies of
IPv6
Describe the concept of the 6PE over MPLS
Describe the principle of 6PE over MPLS
Configure 6PE over MPLS

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Configure RIPng
Differentiate between OSPFv3 and OSPFv2

Min 6, Max 12

2.11

NE40E-X Router Training Programs

2.11.1 NE40E-X Router Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

structure
Describe NE40E-X series routers board types
and functions

NE40E-X Series Routers Introduction


Lecture

ORT21

0.5d

Identify NE40E-X series routers board


Judge NE40E-X series routers board indicators
and functions
Describe NE40E-X series routers positioning

NE40E-X Series Routers Hardware Installation


ORT22

Lecture, Demonstration

0.5d

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

and application scenarios


Describe NE40E-X series routers features
Overview
Describe NE40E-X series routers installation
process
List precautions when install NE40E-X series
routers
Install NE40E-X series routers

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Duration

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

1 working day
Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe NE40E-X series routers hardware

Min 6, Max 12

2.11.2 NE40E-X Router Essential Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system

NE40E-X Series Routers Introduction


Lecture

ORT21

A basic understanding of computer technology


0.5d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Huawei VRP5 Quick Start
ORS21

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe NE40E-X series routers hardware


0.5d

structure
Describe NE40E-X series routers board types
and functions
Identify NE40E-X series routers board

IP Routing Basis

Judge NE40E-X series routers board indicators


ORS51

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

and functions
Describe NE40E-X series routers positioning
and application scenarios

OSPF Feature and Configuration


ORS53

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe NE40E-X series routers features


1d

Overview
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center

BGP Feature and Configuration


ORS55

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Perform VRP operate files


1d

Operate VRP upgrade software


Describe the IP routing process
Describe fields in the routing table
Describe the concepts of load balance and route

VRRP Feature and Configuration


ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

backup
0.5d

Configure static route


Configure static default route
Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol

BFD Technologies and Configuration


ORSG2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the route calculation process of link


0.5d

state algorithm
Describe basic concepts of OSPF
Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types

NE40E-X Series Routers Routine Maintenance


ORT23

Lecture

Target Audience

0.5d

Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor


relationship
Describe the route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF routing protocol
Describe BGP basic concepts

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Describe BGP working principles

Operators and Maintainers

Describe the route selection process of BGP

Configure BGP protocol


Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
List precautions for NE40E-X series routers

routine maintenance
Perform NE40E-X series routers routine
maintenance

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.11.3 NE40E-X Router Advanced Operation and Commissioning Training


Describe the basic principle of MPLS forwarding

Training Path

List the applications of MPLS


Route Selection and Control Feature
ORS56

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe MPLS structure feature that contains


1d

two planes
Describe MPLS label structure
Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding
Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism

MPLS Technology and Configuration


ORSD1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the process of LDP session


1d

establishment
Describe LDP label space
Describe LDP label distribution mode

MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration


ORSD2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Describe LDP label control mode


Describe LDP label retention mode
Describe the PHP
List the methods of MPLS loop detection
Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing

MPLS L3VPN Extended Application

Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop


ORSD2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

count
Configure MPLS
Configure LDP

IP QoS Technology
ORSF1

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN


1d

Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP


MPLS VPN

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe route selection tools
Describe routing policy
Describe policy-based route selection
Compare routing policy and policy-based route
Configure routing policy
Analyze the process of IP forwarding
Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding

Describe the mechanisms of the route and label


distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the process of data forwarding of BGP
MPLS VPN
Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN
configuration
Describe the extended BGP attributes used by
MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on control plane of
MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of
MPLS BGP VPN
Describe how to access the Internet via the
MPLS VPN backbone
Describe how to access the Internet via different
interfaces between CE and PE
Describe the three levels of hierarchy of OSPF
VPN

Analyze how MP-BGP advertises OSPF routing


information

Describe Diff-Serv model


Describe the principle of IP QoS

Describe the basic configuration of OSPF VPN

Describe the classed-based QoS

Analyze the application and configuration of

Configure QoS

Sham-link

Duration

Describe the background in MPLS BGP VPN


Inter-AS solutions
Compare the three solutions processing in
control plane and data plane
Describe basic concepts of IP QoS

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.12

NE20E-S Router Training Programs

2.12.1 NE20E-S Router Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

structure
Describe NE20E-S series routers board types
and functions

NE20E-S Series Routers Introduction


ORT24

Lecture

0.5d

Identify NE20E-S series routers board


Judge NE20E-S series routers board indicators
and functions
Describe NE20E-S series routers positioning

NE20E-S Series Routers Hardware Installation


ORT25

Lecture, Demonstration

0.5d

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

and application scenarios


Describe NE20E-S series routers features
Overview
Describe NE20E-S series routers installation
process
List precautions when install NE20E-S series
routers
Install NE20E-S series routers

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Duration

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

1 working day
Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe NE20E-S series routers hardware

Min 6, Max 12

2.12.2 NE20E-S Router Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system

NE20E-S Series Routers Introduction


Lecture

ORT24

A basic understanding of computer technology


0.5d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Huawei VRP8 Quick Start
ORS22

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe NE20E-S series routers hardware


0.5d

structure
Describe NE20E-S series routers board types
and functions
Identify NE20E-S series routers board

IP Routing Basis

Judge NE20E-S series routers board indicators


ORS51

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

and functions
Describe NE20E-S series routers positioning
and application scenarios

OSPF Feature and Configuration


ORS53

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe NE20E-S series routers features


1d

Overview
Describe the VRP development and history
Describe VRP platform features
Describe VRP8 platform new features

BGP Feature and Configuration


ORS55

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe VRP8 platform basic operation


1d

List the VRP8 platform basic commands


Describe the IP routing process
Describe fields in the routing table

VRRP Feature and Configuration


ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the concepts of load balance and route


0.5d

backup
Configure static route
Configure static default route
Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol

BFD Technologies and Configuration


ORSG2

Lecture

Describe the route calculation process of link


0.5d

state algorithm
Describe basic concepts of OSPF
Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types

NE20E-S Series Routers Routine Maintenance

Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor


relationship

ORT26

Lecture

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers

0.5d

Describe the route calculation process of OSPF


Configure OSPF routing protocol
Describe BGP basic concepts
Describe BGP working principles
Describe the route selection process of BGP

Configure BGP protocol


Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
List precautions for NE20E-S series routers

routine maintenance
Perform NE20E-S series routers routine
maintenance

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.13

NE05E&08E Router Training Programs

2.13.1 NE05E&08E Router Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

structure
Describe NE05E&08E series routers board types
and functions

NE05E&08E Series Routers Introduction


ORT27

Lecture

0.5d

Identify NE05E&08E series routers board


Judge NE05E&08E series routers board
indicators and functions
Describe NE05E&08E series routers positioning

NE05E&08E Series Routers Hardware


Installation
Lecture, Demonstration
ORT28

and application scenarios


0.5d

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

Describe NE05E&08E series routers features


Overview
Describe NE05E&08E series routers installation
process
List precautions when install NE05E&08E series
routers
Install NE05E&08E series routers

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Duration

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

1 working day
Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe NE05E&08E series routers hardware

Min 6, Max 12

2.13.2 NE05E&08E Router Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system

NE05E&08E Series Routers Introduction


Lecture

ORT27

A basic understanding of computer technology


0.5d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Huawei VRP5 Quick Start
ORS21

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe NE05E&08E series routers hardware


0.5d

structure
Describe NE05E&08E series routers board types
and functions
Identify NE05E&08E series routers board

IP Routing Basis

Judge NE05E&08E series routers board


ORS51

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

indicators and functions


Describe NE05E&08E series routers positioning
and application scenarios

OSPF Feature and Configuration


ORS53

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe NE05E&08E series routers features


1d

Overview
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center

BGP Feature and Configuration


ORS55

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Perform VRP operate files


1d

Operate VRP upgrade software


Describe the IP routing process
Describe fields in the routing table

VRRP Feature and Configuration


ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the concepts of load balance and route


1d

backup
Configure static route
Configure static default route
Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol

BFD Technologies and Configuration

Describe the route calculation process of link


ORSG2

Lecture

0.5d

state algorithm
Describe basic concepts of OSPF
Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor

NE05E&08E Series Routers Routine


Maintenance
ORT29

Lecture

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers

relationship
0.5d

Describe the route calculation process of OSPF


Configure OSPF routing protocol
Describe BGP basic concepts
Describe BGP working principles
Describe the route selection process of BGP

Configure BGP protocol


Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
List precautions for NE05E&08E series routers

routine maintenance
Perform NE05E&08E series routers routine
maintenance

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.14

AR G3 Router Training Programs

2.14.1 AR G3 Router Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

AR G3 Product Introduction
Lecture

ORT11

0.5d

Describe AR G3 product positioning


Describe AR G3 hardware architecture
Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows
List AR G3 cards and modules

AR G3 Routers Hardware Installation


ORT12

Lecture, Demonstration

0.5d

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

List AR G3 software features


Describe AR G3 router installation process
List precautions when install AR G3 routers
Install AR G3 routers

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.14.2 AR G3 Router Essential Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

AR G3 Product Introduction
Lecture

ORT11

A general familiarity with PC operation system


0.5d

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Huawei VRP5 Quick Start


ORS21

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Describe AR G3 product positioning


Describe AR G3 hardware architecture
Describe AR G3 data forwarding flows

WAN Interfaces Introduction and PPP/MP


Principle and Configuration
ORS41 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

List AR G3 cards and modules


1d

List AR G3 software features


Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands
Describe the function of VRP information center

IP Routing Basis

Perform VRP operate files


ORS51

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Operate VRP upgrade software


List common WAN protocols
List common WAN interfaces
Describe PPP principles

OSPF Feature and Configuration


ORS53

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Describe LCP principles


Describe NCP principles
Describe MP principles
Configure PPP and MP

VLAN Basic Principle and Configuration


ORS32

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Configure PPP authentication


0.5d

Describe the IP routing process


Describe fields in the routing table
Describe the concepts of load balance and route
backup

VRRP Feature and Configuration

Configure static route


ORSG1

Lecture

0.5d

Configure static default route


Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link

AR G3 Routers Routine Maintenance


ORT13

Lecture

state algorithm
0.5d

Describe basic concepts of OSPF


Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor


relationship
Describe the route calculation process of OSPF

Configure OSPF routing protocol


Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication
principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe the basic concept of HA
List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform

Describe the procedure and method for AR G3


router routine maintenance
List precautions for AR G3 router routine
maintenance
Perform AR G3 router routine maintenance

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.14.3 AR G3 Router Advanced Operation and Commissioning Training


Describe policy-based route selection

Training Path

Compare routing policy and policy-based route


Configure routing policy

BGP Feature and Configuration


Lecture

ORS55

1d

Analyze the process of IP forwarding


Analyze the disadvantage of IP forwarding
Describe the basic principle of MPLS forwarding
List the applications of MPLS

Route Selection and Control Feature


ORS56

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe MPLS structure feature that contains


1d

two planes
Describe MPLS label structure
Describe the process of MPLS data forwarding

MPLS Technology and Configuration


ORSD1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe LDP neighbor discovery mechanism


1d

Describe the process of LDP session


establishment
Describe LDP label space

MPLS L3VPN Technologies and Configuration

Describe LDP label distribution mode


Describe LDP label control mode

ORSD2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Describe LDP label retention mode


Describe the PHP
List the methods of MPLS loop detection

AR G3 Security Features
ORT14

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Analyze the method of MPLS TTL processing


1d

Describe LDP path vector and maximum hop


count

Target Audience

Configure MPLS
Configure LDP

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

Describe the model of BGP MPLS VPN


Describe the basic concepts referred to BGP
MPLS VPN
Describe the mechanisms of the route and label
distribution in BGP MPLS VPN
Describe the process of data forwarding of BGP
MPLS VPN

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe the basic MPLS BGP VPN

Describe BGP basic concepts

Describe the extended BGP attributes used by

Describe BGP working principles


Describe the route selection process of BGP
Configure BGP protocol
Describe route selection tools
Describe routing policy

configuration
MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on control plane of
MPLS BGP VPN
Describe the troubleshooting on data plane of
MPLS BGP VPN

Describe NAT principles


List NAT features on AR G3 routers
Configure NAT on AR G3 routers
Describe NAT applications
Describe concepts of firewall
List common firewalls
List firewall features on AR G3 routers

Configure firewall on AR G3 routers

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.15

AR SOHO Router Training Programs

2.15.1 AR SOHO Router Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

structure
Describe AR SOHO series routers board types
and functions

AR SOHO Series Routers Introduction


ORT15

Lecture

0.5d

Identify AR SOHO series routers board


Judge AR SOHO series routers board indicators
and functions

AR SOHO Series Routers Hardware Installation


ORT16

Lecture, Demonstration

0.5d

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

Describe AR SOHO series routers positioning


and application scenarios
Describe AR SOHO series routers features
Overview
Describe AR SOHO series routers installation
process
List precautions when install AR SOHO series
routers
Install AR SOHO series routers

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Duration

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

1 working day
Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe AR SOHO series routers hardware

Min 6, Max 12

2.15.2 AR SOHO Routers Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

structure
Describe AR SOHO E series routers board types
and functions

AR SOHO Series Routers Introduction


ORT15

Lecture

0.5d

Identify AR SOHO series routers board


Judge AR SOHO series routers board indicators
and functions
Describe AR SOHO series routers positioning

Huawei VRP5 Quick Start


ORS21

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

and application scenarios


0.5d

Describe AR SOHO series routers features


Overview
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands

VLAN Principle and Configuration

Describe the function of VRP information center


ORS32

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Perform VRP operate files


Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN

IP Routing Basis
ORS51

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Configure the basic functions of VLAN


Describe the inter-VLAN communication
principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication

AR DCC&DSL Features Introduction


ORT19

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the IP routing process


0.5d

Describe fields in the routing table


Describe the concepts of load balance and route
backup

AR SOHO Series Routers Routine Maintenance

Configure static route


Configure static default route

ORT18

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Describe DCC principles


Compare C-DCC and RS-DCC

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

Describe DCC features and applications


Configure DCC on AR routers
Describe the scennario of xDSL+3G solution
List the related technologies of xDSL+3G
solution

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Configure xDSL and 3G on AR routers

A basic understanding of computer technology

Compare the common management methods

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe AR SOHO series routers hardware

Perform web-based configurations on AR routers


List functions that can be configured through
web on AR routers
Use the web-based configuration to configure
AR routers

Maintain the related features on AR routers


List precautions for AR SOHO series routers
routine maintenance
Perform AR SOHO series routers routine
maintenance

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.16

AR Industrial Router Training Programs

2.16.1 AR Series Industrial Router Installation and Commissioning Training


Describe AR Series Industrial Routers

Training Path

Positioning
Describe AR Series Industrial Routers

AR Series Industrial Product Introduction


ORT31

Lecture

Product Models
0.5d

Describe AR Series Industrial Routers Cards and


Modules
Describe AR Series Industrial Routers Feature

AR Series Industrial Routers Hardware


Installation
Lecture, Demonstration
ORT32

Description
0.5d

Describe AR Series Industrial Routers


Application Scenarios

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe AR Series Industrial router installation


process
List precautions when install AR Series Industrial
routers
Install AR Series Industrial routers

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.16.2 AR Series Industrial Routers Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

AR Series Industrial Routers Routine


Maintenance

AR Series Industrial Product Introduction


Lecture

ORT31

ORT33

Lecture

0.5d

0.5d

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers

Huawei VRP5 Quick Start


ORS22

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Ethernet Basic Principle


ORS31

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Objectives
0.5d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe AR Series Industrial Routers
Positioning

VLAN Principle and Configuration

Describe AR Series Industrial Routers


ORS32

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Product Models
Describe AR Series Industrial Routers Cards and
Modules
Describe AR Series Industrial Routers Feature

SEP Feature and Configuration


ORS38

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Description
Describe AR Series Industrial Routers
Application Scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture

IP Routing Basis
ORS51

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Use basic operation commands


0.5d

Describe the function of VRP information center


Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the development of Ethernet

OSPF Feature and Configuration


ORS53

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

technology
1d

List the standards of Ethernet


Describe the working principle of HUB
Describe the working principle of L2 switch
Describe the working principle of L3 switch

BFD Technologies and Configuration


ORSG2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

List the Ethernet port features


Configure the Ethernet interface
Describe the background of VLAN technology
Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN

Describe the inter-VLAN communication


principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe SEP Principle.
Learn SEP features supported by the Huawei
Routers and Switches
Master SEP configuration of Huawei Routers
and Switches
Understand the SEP used in the enterprise
network scenarios.

Describe the IP routing process

Describe fields in the routing table


Describe the concepts of load balance and route
backup
Configure static route
Configure static default route

Describe basic concepts of OSPF


Describe OSPF routing protocol packet types
Describe OSPF routing protocol neighbor
relationship
Describe the route calculation process of OSPF
Configure OSPF routing protocol
Describe BFD basic concept and principles
Describe application scenarios of BFD
Configure BFD on VRP platform
Describe the procedure and method for AR
Series Industrial router routine maintenance
List precautions for AR Series Industrial router
routine maintenance
Perform AR Series Industrial router routine
maintenance

Duration

Describe the principles of distance-vector routing


protocols
Describe the feature of OSPF routing protocol
Describe the route calculation process of link
state algorithm

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.16.3 AMI Solution Training


Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

AMI Solution Introduction

Prerequisites
Lecture

ORT34

0.5d
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network

Internet Protocol Technology Analysis

Objectives
Lecture

ORT35

0.5d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe basic principle of Huawei AMI

AMI Solution project-based exploration


Lecture

ORT38

solution implementation
0.5d

Describe basic Internet protocol technology


Describe Huawei AMI solution engineering
survey basic method
Describe AR - UMS&AR - DCP deployment

AR-UMS&AR-DCP Setup and Deployment


ORT36

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

with high reliability


1d

Describe AR - DCP software installation


Describe AR - UMS software installation
Describe AR531 position in AMI solution
Describe AR531 configuration test

DCU(AR531) Setup and Deployment

Describe VRP architecture


Lecture

ORT37

0.5d

Use of VRP basic operation command


Describe VRP information center functions
Perform VRP file operations

Huawei VRP Quick Start


ORS22

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Operating VRP basic software upgrades


0.5d

Describe the OSPF protocol characteristics


Describe link-state routing calculation process
of the algorithm
Describe OSPF basic concepts

IP Routing Basis
ORS51

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the OSPF protocol message and the


0.5d

change of state
Configure OSPF protocol

Duration
OSPF Feature and Configuration
ORS53

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

5 working days
1d

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.17

Campus Network Switch (S series) Training

2.17.1 Box Switches(S67/S57/S37/S27) Installation and Commissioning Training


Describe Huawei box switch product

Training Path

positioning
Describe Huawei box switch hardware

S Series Switch Product Introduction


Lecture

OSW11

architecture
0.5d

Describe Huawei box switch cards and


modules
Describe Huawei box switch data forwarding

Box Switch (S67/S57/S37/S27) Hardware


Installation
OSW13

Lecture, Demonstration

flows
0.5d

List Huawei box switch characteristic function


List Huawei box switch software features

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe Huawei box switch installation


process
List precautions when install Huawei box
switch
Install Huawei box switch

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.17.2 Chassis Switches(S97/S93/S77) Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

positioning
Describe Huawei chassis switch product

S Series Switch Product Introduction


Lecture

OSW11

hardware architecture
0.5d

Describe Huawei chassis switch product cards


and modules
Describe Huawei chassis switch product data
forwarding flows

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) Hardware


Installation
OSW12

Lecture, Demonstration

Describe Huawei chassis switch product


0.5d

characteristic function
Describe Huawei chassis switch product

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

software features
Describe Huawei chassis switch product
application scenarios
Describe Huawei chassis switch installation
process
List precautions when install chassis switch

A general familiarity with PC operation system


A basic understanding of computer technology

Install Huawei chassis switch

Duration

Objectives

1 working day
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei chassis switch product

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.17.3 Campus Network Switch (S series) Essential Operation and Maintenance


Training
Training Path

S Series Switch Routine Maintenance

S Series Switch Product Introduction

Lecture

OSW11

OSW14

0.5d

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

Monitoring Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Huawei VRP5 Quickstart
ORS21

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Administrators
0.5d

Planners and Designers


Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system

Ethernet Basic Principle

A basic understanding of computer technology


ORS31 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

IP Routing Basis
ORS51 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Describe Huawei S Series Switch product


positioning
Describe Huawei S Series Switch product

VLAN Basic Principle and Configuration


ORS32

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

hardware architecture
0.5d

Describe Huawei S Series Switch product


cards and modules
Describe Huawei S Series Switch product data
forwarding flows

VCMP LNP Principle and Configuration

Describe Huawei S Series Switch product


ORS33

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

characteristic function
Describe Huawei S Series Switch product
software features

Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and


Configuration
ORS36

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe Huawei S Series Switch product


0.5d

application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture
Use basic operation commands

Spanning Tree Protocols Principle and


Configuration
ORS37

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the function of VRP information


center
1d

Perform VRP operate files


Operate VRP upgrade software
Describe the development of Ethernet
technology
List the standards of Ethernet

Describe the working principle of HUB

Describe the function of configuration BPDU

Describe the working principle of L2 switch

Describe the flood process of topology change

Describe the working principle of L3 switch

information

List the Ethernet port features

Configure the STP function

Configure the Ethernet interface

Describe the basic concepts of RSTP

Describe the IP routing process

Configure the RSTP function

Describe fields in the routing table

Describe the basic concepts of MSTP

Describe the concepts of load balance and

Configure the MSTP function

route backup

Describe the basic concepts of VBST

Configure static route

Configure the VBST function

Configure static default route

Describe the procedure and method for

Describe the background of VLAN technology


Describe the principle of VLAN
Configure the basic functions of VLAN
Describe the inter-VLAN communication
principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe LNP principles
Configure LNP
Describe VCMP principles
Configure VCMP
Describe the Ethernet link aggregation
principle
Describe the LACP basic principle
List the methods of link aggregation

Huawei S Series Switch routine maintenance


List precautions for Huawei S Series Switch
routine maintenance
Perform Huawei S Series Switch routine
maintenance
Describe the procedure and method for
Huawei S Series Switch parts replacement
List precautions for Huawei S Series Switch
component replacement
Perform Huawei S Series Switch component
replacement

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Configure the Ethernet link aggregation


Describe calculation process of spanning tree

Min 6, Max 12

2.17.4 Campus Network Switches(S series) Advanced Operation and Maintenance


Training
Training Path

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system

VLAN Advanced Features and Configuration

A basic understanding of computer technology

ORS34

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
VRRP Feature and Configuration

ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN


0.5d

Configure the MUX-VLAN


Describe the principle of Super-VLAN
Configure the Super-VLAN
Describe the basic concept of HA

OSPF Protocol Feature and Configuration


ORS53

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

List common HA technologies in network


Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform
Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

BGP Feature and Configuration


1d

ORS55 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the route calculation process of link


state algorithm
Describe the basic concept of OSPF

BFD Technologies

Describe OSPF protocol packets


Describe route calculation process of OSPF

ORSG2 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Configure OSPF protocol


Describe the principle of BGP protocol
Describe the common attributes of BGP

S Series Switches iStack and CSS Features


OSW1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

protocol
Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and
IGP protocol
Configure BGP protocol

S Series Switch Security Feature


OSW16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe BFD basic concept and principles


0.5d

Describe application scenarios of BFD


Configure BFD on VRP platform
Describe the iStack and CSS principles

Chassis Switch (S97/S93/S77) ISSU Features


OSW15 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers

0.5d

Describe the iStack and CSS features on


Huawei S Series Switches
Configure the iStack and CSS features on
Huawei S Series Switches
List the security risks of network access layer
List ACL types

List the application of ACL

Describe the principles of ISSU

Describe the principle of ARP attack and

Describe the application scenarios of ISSU

defense
Describe DHCP-Snooping principle

Configure ISSU on Huawei S Series Switches

Duration

Describe ARP security feature of Huawei


switches
List the defense of ARP attack
List the security features of Huawei switches
Configure the prevention of ARP attack

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.18

S12700 Agile Switch Training

2.18.1 S12700 Agile Switch Installation and Commissioning Training


Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product

Training Path

hardware architecture
Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product

S12700 Agile Switch Product Introduction


Lecture

OSW18

cards and modules


0.5d

Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product


data forwarding flows
Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product

S12700 Agile Switch Hardware Installation


OSW19

Lecture, Demonstration

characteristic function
0.5d

Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product


software features

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product


application scenarios
Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch
installation process
List precautions when install S12700 Agile
Switch

A general familiarity with PC operation system


A basic understanding of computer technology

Install Huawei S12700 Agile Switch

Duration

Objectives

1 working day
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product
positioning

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.18.2 S12700 Agile Switch Essential Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Target Audience

Monitoring Staffs

S12700 Agile Switch Product Introduction

Operators and Maintainers


Lecture

OSW18

0.5d

Administrators
Planners and Designers
Prerequisites

Huawei VRP5 Quickstart


A general familiarity with PC operation system
ORS21

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

A basic understanding of computer technology


A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

Ethernet Basic Principle


ORS31 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product
positioning

IP Routing Basis

Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product

ORS51 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

hardware architecture
Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product
cards and modules

VLAN Basic Principle and Configuration


ORS32

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product


0.5d

data forwarding flows


Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product
characteristic function
Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product

VCMP LNP Principle and Configuration

software features
ORS33

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Describe Huawei S12700 Agile Switch product


application scenarios
Describe the VRP architecture

Ethernet Link Aggregation Principle and


Configuration

ORS36 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Use basic operation commands

0.5d

Describe the function of VRP information


center
Perform VRP operate files
Operate VRP upgrade software

Spanning Tree Protocols Principle and


Configuration
ORS37

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the development of Ethernet


1d

technology
List the standards of Ethernet
Describe the working principle of HUB

S Series Switch Routine Maintenance


OSW14

Lecture

Describe the working principle of L2 switch


0.5d

Describe the working principle of L3 switch


List the Ethernet port features

Configure the Ethernet interface

Configure the STP function

Describe the IP routing process

Describe the basic concepts of RSTP

Describe fields in the routing table

Configure the RSTP function

Describe the concepts of load balance and

Describe the basic concepts of MSTP

route backup

Configure the MSTP function

Configure static route

Describe the basic concepts of VBST

Configure static default route

Configure the VBST function

Describe the background of VLAN technology

Describe the procedure and method for

Describe the principle of VLAN

Huawei S12700 Agile Switch routine

Configure the basic functions of VLAN

maintenance

Describe the inter-VLAN communication


principle
Configure the inter-VLAN communication
Describe LNP principles
Configure LNP

List precautions for Huawei S12700 Agile


Switch routine maintenance
Perform Huawei S12700 Agile Switch routine
maintenance
Describe the procedure and method for

Describe VCMP principles

Huawei S12700 Agile Switch parts

Configure VCMP

replacement

Describe the Ethernet link aggregation


principle
Describe the LACP basic principle
List the methods of link aggregation
Configure the Ethernet link aggregation
Describe calculation process of spanning tree
Describe the function of configuration BPDU

List precautions for Huawei S12700 Agile


Switch component replacement
Perform Huawei S12700 Agile Switch
component replacement

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Describe the flood process of topology change


information

Min 6, Max 12

2.18.3 S12700 Agile Switch Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

VLAN Advanced Features and Configuration


ORS34

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Describe the principle of MUX-VLAN


Configure the MUX-VLAN
Describe the principle of Super-VLAN
Configure the Super-VLAN

VRRP Feature and Configuration


ORSG1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Describe the basic concept of HA


List common HA technologies in network
Describe VRRP basic concept and principles
Configure VRRP on VRP platform

OSPF Protocol Feature and Configuration


ORS53

Describe the basic feature of OSPF protocol

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Describe the route calculation process of link


state algorithm
Describe the basic concept of OSPF

BGP Feature and Configuration

Describe OSPF protocol packets


1d

ORS55 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe route calculation process of OSPF


Configure OSPF protocol
Describe the principle of BGP protocol

S Series Switch Agile Features

Describe the common attributes of BGP


1d

OSW1A Lecture, Hands-on exercise

protocol
Describe BGP protocol route selection process
Distinguish the differentia of BGP protocol and

S Series Switches iStack and CSS Features

IGP protocol
Configure BGP protocol

OSW1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Describe Huawei S Series Switches


EasyDeploy principles
Configure EasyDeploy
Describe Huawei S Series Switches SVF

S Series Switch Security Feature

OSW16 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

principles
Configure SVF
Describe the iStack and CSS principles
Describe the iStack and CSS features on
Huawei S Series Switches
Configure the iStack and CSS features on
Huawei S Series Switches

A general familiarity with PC operation system

List the security risks of network access layer

A basic understanding of computer technology

List ACL types


List the application of ACL
Describe the principle of ARP attack and

defense
Describe DHCP-Snooping principle
Describe ARP security feature of Huawei
switches
List the defense of ARP attack
List the security features of Huawei switches

Configure the prevention of ARP attack

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.19

Data Center Switch(CE Series)Training Programs

2.19.1 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Installation and


Commissioning Training
Describe the installation procedure of CE

Training Path

series switch
Data Center Switches (CE128/CE68/CE58)
Hardware Installation

List the precaution of hardware installation of


CE series switch

OSW31

Lecture, Demonstration

0.5d

Install CE series switch


Describe the VRP development and history
Describe VRP platform features

VRP8 Platform Introduction


OSW32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe VRP8 platform new features


0.5d

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A genera familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe VRP8 platform basic operation


List the VRP8 platform basic commands
Configure the remote management function on
CE switch
Mange the configuration file on CE switch
Use the FTP function on CE switch

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.19.2 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Essential Operation and


Maintenance Training
Training Path

CE switch
Mange the configuration file on CE switch

CE Series Switches Hardware


Introduction
OSW33

Lecture

Use the FTP function on CE switch

0.5d

Know what VLAN is.


Know concepts about VLAN.
Know the mechanism and configuration of
communication between VLANs.

VRP8 Platform Introduction

OSW32 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Know the mechanism and configuration of

0.5d

VLAN aggregation.
Know the mechanism and configuration of
MUX VLAN
Know the mechanism and configuration of

CE Series Switches Campus Network

Features
OSW34

Management VLAN
Lecture

4d

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

Describe STP functions.


Describe STP implementation.
Describe RSTP improvement compared with
STP.
Describe MSTP calculation.
Configure MSTP on the CE5850.

A genera familiarity with PC operation system

Describe the IP routing process.

A basic understanding of computer technology

Describe fields in the routing table.

HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar

Configure a static route on an CE series

knowledge

Objectives

switch.
Configure OSPF on the network consisting of
CE series switch.

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Know the trend of data center development.

Troubleshooting on CE series switches.


Describe the meanings and functions of the
parameters relevant to the BGP configuration.

Know the basic concepts of data center.

Configure BGP on the CE switches.

Know CE series data center switches

Analyze and troubleshoot common faults in the

hardware.
Know CE series data center switches
advantages.
Know CE series data center switches features.
Describe the VRP development and history
Describe VRP platform features
Describe VRP8 platform new features
Describe VRP8 platform basic operation
List the VRP8 platform basic commands
Configure the remote management function on

BGP configuration on the CE switches


Understand trunk implementation.
Understand trunk forwarding.
Learn about LACP.
Configure link aggregation.
Describe the basic VRRP concepts.
Understand common VRRP features.
Configure VRRP on CE5850.
Describe the contents of maintenance of CE

series switch
Describe the precaution of maintenance of CE
series switch
Describe the parts replacement of TOR switch
Describe the parts replacement of CE12800
series switch

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.19.3 Data Center Switches(CE128/CE78/CE68/CE58) Advanced Operation and


Maintenance Training
Describe the principle of stack technology

Training Path

Describe the stack technology realization on


CE switch

Huawei Data Center Network Solution

OSW35

Lecture

0.5d

Differentiate the difference of stack on TOR


and CE12800 switch
List the procedure of configuration of stack on
TOR switch

Data Center Network New Technologies

OSW36 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

List the procedure of configuration of stack on


4.5d

Target Audience

CE12800 switch
Describe background of VS technology
Describe the realization of VS technology

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Describe the principle of VS technology

Operators and Maintainers

Describe the basic configuration of VS on CE

Prerequisites

switch
Know the background of SVF technology.

A genera familiarity with PC operation system


A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-RS(HCDP) certification or similar
knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Know the principle and operation of SVF


technology.
Know how to configure SVF feature on Huawei
CE series switches.
FCoE background
FCoE implementation
Relevant FCoE technologies

Describe the architecture of data center

Technologies used by lossless Ethernet

Describe the data center development

Huawei FCoE solution

Describe Huawei data center network solution

VXLAN principles

Know the trend of data center development.

VXLAN application scenarios

Know the basic concepts of data center.

VXLAN configuration methods

Know CE series data center switches

EVN technology background

hardware.
Know CE series data center switches
advantages.
Know CE series data center switches features
Describe the background of TRILL
Describe the basic concept of TRILL
Describe the protocol mechanism of TRILL
Describe the data forwarding of TRILL network
Describe the application of TRILL in modern
network
Configure TRILL protocol

EVN solution principles and highlights


EVN solution application and deployment
Describe the background of VM virtual
migration
Describe the technologies for VM virtual
migration
Describe the procedure of realization of VM
virtual migration
Describe the solution of Huawei nCenter
network implementation

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.20

WLAN(AC/ACU/AP) Training Programs

2.20.1 WLAN Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe Huawei WLAN solution
Describe Huawei AC basic performance

WLAN Product Introduction


OWL01

Lecture

0.5d

List Huawei wireless AP


Describe Huawei AC hardware features
Describe Huawei AC6605 Logical Architecture

WLAN Installation and Basic


Commissioning Training
OWL02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Install AC6605
Describe the models and usage scenarios of
0.5d

Target Audience

Huawei APs
Describe the basic installation of different types
APs

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

List the note during installation


Complete different types APs installation
Describe the WLAN basic component

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.20.2 WLAN Essential Operation and Maintenance Training


Describe the theory of CAPWAP tunnel

Training Path

Outline the typical Application of WLAN


Describe the theory of operations when AC as

WLAN Product Introduction


OWL01

Lecture

0.5d

a L2 switch or gateway
Describe the methods of AP management
Describe the AP boot sequence
Describe the CAPWAP tunnel forward mode

WLAN Basic Principle and Configuration

Use Huawei VRP basic command

OWL03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Configure Basic Attributes of AC

2.5d

Target Audience

Upgrade AC and AP
List the PoE components

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

Describe PoE budget


Configure the equipment interface of POE
Describe the WLAN Features Supported by
the AC
Outline the WLAN Configuration Roadmap of
Huawei WLAN network
Configure the basic attribute of AC

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

List the encryption suites of WLAN

Describe Huawei WLAN solution

Configure security-profile

Describe Huawei AC basic performance

List the authentication methods of WLAN

Duration

List Huawei wireless AP


Describe the WLAN basic component
Differentiate the different between Fat AP and
Fit AP

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.20.3 WLAN Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training


Configure Huawei WLAN load balance

Training Path

Describe the Huawei outdoor WLAN


WLAN Advanced Operation and
Maintenance Training
OWL04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

deployment scenarios
3d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

Describe the Fresnel Zone


Understand Radio Frequency Mathematics
Describe Huawei outdoor AP
List antennas characteristic
Describe how to select antennas
Describe WDS basic concept

A general familiarity with PC operation system

List WDS application scenarios

A basic understanding of computer technology

Describe WDS setup

HCNA certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

Configure WDS
Understand the basic principle of WMN

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Understanding of WMN application scenario

Describe the importance of WLAN reliability

List the common fault of WLAN

List the method of WLAN reliability

Describe common fault troubleshooting of

Configure WLAN dual-link backup


Describe the basic concept of WLAN roaming
Describe the basic principle of WLAN roaming
Configure WLAN roaming
Configure 802.11n basic
Describe the principle of WLAN user load
balance

Configure WMN

WLAN

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.20.4 WLAN Planning & Optimization Training


Describe spectrum division of 2.4 GHz and 5

Training Path

GHz, channel requirements of main countries,


and HT40.

WLAN Planning & Optimization


Training
OWL21 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Calculate the EIRP.


5d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNA certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
List the differences between wired and wireless
networks.
Know commonly used Huawei WLAN devices.
List usage scenarios and characteristics of
WLAN on industry networks.
List usage scenarios of WLAN on carrier
networks.
Describe the lifecycle and processes of the
WLAN project.
Describe necessities of WLAN planning and
optimization.
Describe methods of WLAN planning and
optimization.
Describe the necessity of pre-sales network
planning in the WLAN project.
Describe usage of pre-sales network planning in
the WLAN project.
List the procedure of pre-sales network planning
in the WLAN project.
Clarify customer's basic requirements in network
planning.
Learn about customer's high-level requirements.
Describe main organizations and standards in

Know typical WLAN planning scenarios.


Have a good grasp of the WLAN planning
procedure and focuses.
Use tools to carry out simple WLAN planning.
Perform brief WLAN planning to meet customer
requirements.
Describe the process of the site survey for
planning the WLAN.
Use WLAN planning tools for the site survey.
Describe precautions for the site survey in
different scenarios.
Know how to design a hierarchical network.
Plan VLANs on a medium- to large-sized WLAN.
Plan IP addresses on the WLAN.
Plan routes on the WLAN.
Describe basic WLAN architectures and
components.
Differentiate application scenarios of different AC
forwarding and deployment modes.
Differentiate application scenarios of different AC
networking modes and layers.
Design WLAN architectures for different
scenarios.
Describe other WLAN architectures.
Learn about PoE components.
Understand PoE power budget.
Configure PoE.
Describe how the high availability (HA) of WLAN
is implemented.
Distinguish different hot-standby (HSB) methods
and understand their components and
implementations.
Plan and configure an HSB WLAN network.
Design an indoor settled WLAN.

the wireless field in industry and power

Use the AP calculator.

requirements of main countries.

Select suitable devices for indoor network


planning.

Use product specification quick search and


comparison functions.
Operate the WLAN Planner.
Learn about common components of indoor
distributed WLAN.
Learn about the bandwidth, frequency band, and
signal calculation method of indoor distributed
WLAN network planning.
Learn about three common WLAN scenarios.
Describe outdoor coverage requirements and
site survey contents.
Know how to select APs and antennas.
Plan the bandwidth and capacity of outdoor
WLANs.
Describe the basic AP deployment principles.
List typical scenarios of outdoor coverage.
Select suitable devices for outdoor network
planning.
Select suitable antennas for outdoor network
planning.
Master the basic outdoor network planning
process.
Select suitable devices for outdoor network
planning.
Select suitable antennas for outdoor network
planning.
Master the basic outdoor network planning
process.

scenarios.
Learn about WLAN solution characteristics in
typical scenarios.
Perform WLAN network planning in typical
scenarios.
Describe different stages of Huawei enterprise
service lifecycle model.
Describe basic principles for WLAN network
planning.
Describe advantages and disadvantages of each
WLAN networking mode.
Describe features of small- and medium-scale
enterprise WLANs.
Describe common networking modes of smalland medium-scale enterprise WLANs.
Describe planning methods of small- and
medium-scale enterprise WLANs.
Describe design methods of small- and mediumscale enterprise WLANs.
Understand basic BYOD concepts.
Describe key WLAN technologies applicable in
large-scale enterprises.
Describe WLAN optimization concept
Describe WLAN optimization process
List WLAN data optimization methods
Describe basic WLAN parameter calibration
methods
List WLAN optimization benefits

Grasp basic knowledge about a WDS design.

Understand basic interference sources

Use the WLAN Planner to perform outdoor

Understand WLAN interference types

network planning.
Grasp basic knowledge about a WDS design.
Use the WLAN Planner to perform outdoor
network planning.
Describe basic concepts of roaming.

Know basic WLAN interference optimization


methods
Know how to improve WLAN coverage
Understand WLAN coverage methods in high
density scenarios

Summarize basic principles of roaming.

Describe functions of WLAN Tester

Plan roaming.

Describe the usage procedure of WLAN Tester

Know how to clarify requirements.

Describe basic WLAN application scenarios

List site survey contents.

List WLAN optimization methods in different

Know how to select APs and antennas.


Plan network bandwidth.
Describe basic principles for deploying APs.
List typical WDS and Mesh network planning

scenarios
Optimize WLAN networks

Duration

5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.21

MSCG(ME60) Training Programs

2.21.1 ME60 Products 1st Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

VRP System Operation


ODA02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Describe ME60 product hardware structure

Describe ME60-X series products hardware


structure

ME60 Product Introduction


ODB01

Lecture, LVC

0.5d

Describe ME60 product feature

Describe the VRP system structure

Describe the basic configuration and


commands

ME60 Product Routine Maintenance


ODB04 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Upgrade VRP system

Configure the VRP user logging authentication

Configure FTP service

Describe basic troubleshooting process of VRP


system

Target Audience
ME60 product 1st line maintenance engineer
Prerequisites

A basic understanding of data communication

A general understanding of telecom network

Describe basic BRAS technologies

Describe ME60 product routine maintenance

Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

2.21.2 ME60 Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

equipment

ME60 Product Introduction

A general understanding of TCP/IP

A general understanding of routing basics

Objectives
ODB01

Lecture, LVC

0.5d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
ME60 Routing Features Operation and
Troubleshooting
ODB05 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe ME60-X series products hardware


structure

Describe ME60 product feature

Describe BRAS OSPF routing protocol features

Describe BRAS ISIS routing protocol features

Configure BRAS OSPF routing protocol

4d

ME60 L2TP Features Operation and


Troubleshooting
ODB07 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe ME60 product hardware structure

1.5d

ME60 BRAS Features Operation and


Troubleshooting
ODB06 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

features

Configure BRAS ISIS routing protocol features

Describe RADIUS protocol principle

Describe DHCP protocol principle

Describe PPP and PPPoE protocol principle

Describe ME60 PPP service features and


realization

ME60 Multicast Features Operation and


Troubleshooting
ODB08 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 1d

Describe ME60 IP service features and


realization

Describe ME60 leased line service feature and


realization

Describe ME60 BRAS service features


troubleshooting

ME60 QoS Features Operation and


Troubleshooting
ODB09 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

ME60 Multi-Device Backup Features


Operation and Troubleshooting
ODB17 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Target Audience
ME60 product 2nd line maintenance
engineer
Prerequisites

At least one year of experience in the operation


or maintenance of data communication

Configure ME60 PPP service features

Configure ME60 IP service features

Configure ME60 leased line service feature

Describe ME60 L2TP features and realization

Configure ME60 L2TP feature

Describe ME60 QoS feature and realization

Configure ME60 QoS feature

Describe ME60 RUI feature and realization

Configure ME60 RUI feature

Duration
10 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

2.21.3 ME60 Products IPTV Service Features Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:

realization

ME60 IPTV Service Features

ODB18 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

4d

Target Audience
ME60 product IPTV service maintenance
engineer
Prerequisites

Describe ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature and

Attended ME60 Products 2nd Line

Describe ME60 multicast hot-backup feature


and realization

Describe ME60 MQE feature and realization

Describe ME60 IPTV solution features

Describe IPTV bear network multicast


deployment solutions

Configure ME60 BAS-Side multicast feature

Configure ME60 multicast hot-backup feature

Duration

Maintenance Training

A good understanding of datacom network


protocols

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

4 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

2.21.4 ME60 Products Troubleshooting Training


Training Path

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

ME60 Products Troubleshooting


ODB20 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

5d

Perform ME60 PPPoE features troubleshooting

Perform ME60 IPoE features troubleshooting

Perform ME60 leased line features

Target Audience
ME60 product 3rd line maintenance engineer
or expert from technical supporting team
Prerequisites

Attended ME60 Products 2nd Line


Maintenance Training

A good understanding of datacom network


protocols

troubleshooting

Perform ME60 multicast features


troubleshooting

Perform ME60 QoS troubleshooting

Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

2.21.5 iManager U2000 ME60 Product Operation Training


Training Path

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

iManager U2000 ME60 Configuration


ODM06 Lecture, Demonstration

1d

Describe the architecture and main features of


U2000

U2000 System Introduction


ONU01 Lecture, Demonstration

Describe the directory structure of U2000

List the main functions of U2000

Describe the basic concepts in alarm and


performance management of U2000

0.5d

Perform the browse and setting operation for


alarm

U2000 Alarm and Performance


Management
ONU02 Lecture, Hands-on Exercise 0.5d

Perform the basic response operation for


common alarm events

Perform the browse and setting operation for


performance events

Target Audience
U2000 operator and maintainer
IP network routine monitor and maintainer
Prerequisites

Having the basic knowledge of Huawei ME60


product

Manage ME60 by using U2000

Deploy services on ME60 by using U2000

Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

2.22

PTN Products Training Programs

2.22.1 PTN Products Installation and Commissioning Training


T
raining Path

Having an overview of telecommunications

Objectives
PTN Products Hardware Description
ODP03 Lecture, Demonstration

1d

PTN Products Installation and


Commissioning
ODP05 Lecture, Demonstration

1d

PTN series installation and commissioning


engineer
Prerequisites
Having an overview of PTN products
applications

Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure

Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure

Describe PTN 3900&1900 Installation and the


precautions

Target Audience

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe PTN 950&910 Installation and the


precautions

Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

2.22.2 PTN Products 1st Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

applications

Objectives

PTN Products Hardware Description


ODP03

Lecture, Demo

1d

PTN Products Field Maintenance


ODP06 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure

Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure

Describe PTN 3900&1900 On-Site


maintenance

0.5d

PTN Products Routine Maintenance in


NOC
ODP07Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Having an overview of telecommunications

0.5d

Describe PTN 950&910 On-Site maintenance

Describe 3900&1900 troubleshooting

Describe 950&910 troubleshooting

Describe PTN Products routine maintenance

Describe the tools and method of routine


maintenance in NOC

Duration
Target Audience
PTN series 1st line /field maintenance
engineer
Prerequisites

Having an overview of PTN products

2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

2.22.3 PTN Products 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

Target Audience
PTN series 2nd Line maintenance engineer
Prerequisites

PTN Products Hardware Description


ODP03

Lecture, Demo

1d

Having an overview of PTN products


applications

Having an overview of telecommunications

Objectives
PTN Products Features Description
ODP04

Lecture

1d

PTN Products Routine Maintenance in


NOC
ODP07 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

PTN Products Public Principle


ODP08

Lecture

2d

PTN Products Public Features


ODP09

Lecture, Demo

2d

PTN Products Basic Configuration


ODP10 Hands-on exercise, Demo

1d

PTN Products Service Configuration


ODP11 Hands-on exercise, Demo

2d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe TCP&IP basic concepts

Describe Ethernet basic principle

Describe basic IP routing protocol works

Describe MPLS basic concepts

Describe PTN 3900&1900 hardware structure

Describe PTN 950&910 hardware structure

Describe PTN 3900&1900 software feature

Describe PTN 950&910 software feature

Describe PTN products PWE3 technology

Describe PTN products control plane

Describe PTN products QoS technology

Describe PTN products protection technology

Describe PTN products packet clock


technology

Configure PTN products basic parameters

Configure PTN products interfaces

Configure PTN products control plane

Configure PTN products MPLS tunnel

Configure PTN products CES service

Configure PTN products ATM service

Configure PTN products E-Line service

Configure PTN products E-LAN service

Configure PTN products E-AGGR service

Describe PTN Products routine maintenance

Describe the tools and method of routine


maintenance in NOC

PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting


ODP13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting


process

0.5d

Duration
10 working days

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

2.22.4 PTN Products 3rd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

Training

Objectives
PTN Products Advanced Configuration
ODP12 Hands-on exercise, Demo

2d

PTN Products Basic Troubleshooting


ODP13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Configure PTN products QoS features

Configure PTN products protection

Deploy PTN products integrated services

Describe PTN products basic troubleshooting


process

0.5d

Describe PTN products alarm and performance


analysis

PTN Products Advanced Troubleshooting

ODP14

Lecture, Case-study

2.5d

Target Audience
PTN series 3rd Line maintenance engineer
Prerequisites

Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance

Describe PTN products common


troubleshooting sase

Locate and eliminate PTN products faults

Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

2.22.5 PTN Network Planning and Design Training


Training Path

Plan the PTN network management and DCN

Plan the equipment types according to the


network requirement

PTN Network Planning and Design


ODP15

Lecture, Case-study

3d

Target Audience
PTN series network planning and design
engineer
Prerequisites

Completion of PTN 2nd Line Maintenance


training

Objectives

Plan the PTN equipment boards

Plan the PTN network protections

Plan the PTN network synchronization

Plan the PTN network QoS

Design the PTN network layers

Design the PTN network slots allocation

Design the PTN equipment parameters

Design the MPLS tunnel parameters

Design CES /ATM /Ethernet services


parameters

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe the PTN network planning process

Collect the network requirements information

Plan the PTN network layers

Plan the PTN network services

Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

2.23

Enterprise NMS eSight-IP Training Programs

2.23.1 eSight-IP Enterprise NMS Operation and Maintenance Training


Describes the monitoring network alarm steps

Training Path

Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features


eSight Enterprise NMS Operation and
Maintenance
ONM11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describes the setting alarm mask steps


2d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

Describes the remote alarm notification


procedure
Describes the basic concepts of performance
management

Monitoring Staffs

Describes the performance monitoring process

Administrators

Describes the ways to browsing performance

Prerequisites

monitoring data
Describe the flow of backing up NE configuration

A general familiarity with PC operation system


A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

files
Describe common operations for managing NE
configuration files
Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration
files

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the basic concepts of network
management
Describe the network management functions
Describe the network management component
Describe the enterprise network overview
Describe the basic functions of eSight
Describe the networking mode of eSight system
Describe eSight related indicators

Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing


up parameters
Describe an overview of the functions provided
by the smart configuration tool
Describe operation steps of the Deployment by
template
Describe operation steps of the Deployment by
plan sheet
Describe the functions of Deployment record
management

Describe the installation profile

Describe Setting eSight Data Overflow Dump

Master the eSight installation and uninstall steps

Describe querying logs

Master eSight license function and application

Describe Lower-Layer NMS

Describe the user authority control and managed

Describe licenses management

domain management of eSight


Describe topology management
Describe the steps of accessing a resource

Describe backing up and restoring the database


Describe NE packages management

Duration

Describe about physical resource management


functions
Use link resource management functions
Use electronic label management features
Use about NE Explorer

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.23.2 eSight-IP WLAN Management Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

eSight WLAN Management


ONM1B Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

Describe the basic functions of eSight WLAN


Describe configuration task of eSight WLAN
management

Operators and Maintainers


Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network

Describe maintenance routine task of eSight


WLAN
Use eSight WLAN serve management to
manage WLAN equipment

Duration

0.5 working days


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.23.3 eSight-IP MPLS VPN Management Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

eSight MPLS VPN Management


ONM1C Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

Describe the basic concepts of BGP/MPLS VPN


Describe the process of BGP/MPLS VPN
Automatic Discovery of eSight

Operators and Maintainers


Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN Monitoring


Services of eSight
Use the functions of BGP/MPLS VPN

Duration

0.5 working days


Class Size

A basic understanding of IP network

Min 6, Max 12

2.23.4 eSight-IP MPLS Tunnel Management Training


A basic understanding of IP network

Training Path

Objectives
eSight MPLS Tunnel Management
ONM1I

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the basic concepts of MPLS tunnels
Configure automatic discovery of MPLS tunnels

Operators and Maintainers


Monitoring Staffs

Monitor functions of MPLS tunnels

Duration

Administrators
Prerequisites

0.5 working days


Class Size

A general familiarity with PC operation system


A basic understanding of computer technology

Min 6, Max 12

2.23.5 eSight-IP SLA Management Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

eSight SLA Management


ONM1D Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

Describe the functions and basic concepts of


SLA of eSight
Use the service management of SLA of eSight

Operators and Maintainers

Use the task management of SLA of eSight

Monitoring Staffs

Use the quick diagnosis of SLA of eSight

Administrators

Use the report of SLA of eSight

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Duration

0.5 working days


Class Size

A basic understanding of IP network

Min 6, Max 12

2.23.6 eSight-IP IPSec VPN Management Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

eSight IPSec VPN Management


ONM1E Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

Describe the application scenarios of IPSec VPN


Describe eSight IPSec VPN management
features

Operators and Maintainers


Monitoring Staffs

Use eSight IPSec VPN management features

Duration

Administrators
Prerequisites

0.5 working days


Class Size

A general familiarity with PC operation system


A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network

Min 6, Max 12

2.23.7 eSight-IP Smart Reporter Management Training


A basic understanding of IP network

Training Path

Objectives
eSight Smart Report Management
ONM1F Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the basic functions of eSight Report
Use eSight Report features

Operators and Maintainers

Duration

Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

0.5 working days


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.23.8 eSight-IP NTA(Network Traffic Analyzer) Management Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

eSight NTA (Network Traffic Analyzer)


Management
ONM1G Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

Describe the basic concepts of NTA


management
Use eSight NTA management features

Operators and Maintainers


Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system

Describe the application scenarios of eSight NTA


management

Duration

0.5 working days


Class Size

A basic understanding of computer technology


A basic understanding of IP network

Min 6, Max 12

2.23.9 eSight-IP Terminal Resources Management Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

eSight Terminal Resources Management


ONM1H Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

Describe the basic concepts involved in terminal


resource management
Describe the main functions of terminal resource

Operators and Maintainers

management

Monitoring Staffs

Use terminal resource management functions

Administrators

Describe the application scenarios of terminal

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of IP network

resource management

Duration

0.5 working days


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.23.10 eSight-IP SecureCenter Management Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe Secure Center positioning and
values

eSight SecureCenter Management


ONM1J Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Target Audience

Describe Secure Center basic


management
Describe Secure Center policy analysis

Operators and Maintainers

Describe Secure Center ACL


management

Installers and Commissioning Staff

Describe Secure Center firewall policy

Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary

management

Understand Secure Center AR policy


management
Be familiar with Secure Center switch
policy management
Duration

knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

1 working days,
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.23.11 eSight-IP LogCenter Management Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

eSight LogCenter Management


Training
ONM1K Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Installers and Commissioning Staff
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Describe the background of LogCenter


system
Describe LogCenter system function
Describe Typical Scenarios of LogCenter
System Application
Describe LogCenter System Performance
Be familiar with LogCenter system Basic
Operation

Understand Functional modules of


LogCenter
Duration

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.23.12 eSight Agile Features TrainingSVF&iPCA


Describe Basic concepts of iPCA

Training Path

Describe Basic functions of iPCA


Describe eSight iPCA components

eSight Agile Feature Management


ONM1L Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Installers and Commissioning Staff
Administrators
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Describe Typical application scenarios of


iPCA
Describe the basic concepts and
functions of eSight SVF
Describe the unified device management
function of eSight SVF
Describe the unified user management
function of eSight SVF
Describe the unified configuration
management function of eSight SVF
Duration

A basic understanding of IP network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

0.5 working days, including Hands-on


exercise 0.25 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.24

Agile Controller Training Programs

2.24.1

Agile Controller Operation & Maintenance Training


Understand application scenarios of admission

Training Path

control
Agile Controller Operation &
Maintenance Training
OACS1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Understand implementation of admission control


3d

Target Audience

Know how to deploy and configure admission


control
Know how to troubleshoot faults of admission
control

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system

Application scenarios of guest management


Process of creating, approving, distributing, and
deregistering guest accounts

A basic understanding of computer technology

Portal authentication process for guests

HCNA certification or similar knowledge

Guest behavior audit operations

Objectives

Understand application scenarios of Agile


Controller terminal security features

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Understand implementation of Agile Controller

Highlights of the Agile Controller

Know how to deploy and configure Agile

Software and hardware components of the Agile


Controller
Application scenarios of the Agile Controller
Get an overview of Agile Controller software

terminal security features


Controller terminal security features
Know how to troubleshoot faults of Agile
Controller terminal security features

Duration

Know how to install or uninstall the Agile


Controller
Master license functions of the Agile Controller
and the method to apply for a license

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.25

AnyOffice Training Programs

2.25.1 Anyoffice Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Understand the principles of the SSL VPN

AnyOffice Solution Introduction

OS31

Lecture

technology
0.5 d

Understand the configuration of SSL VPN


Understand the software architecture of
Anyoffice Device

AnyOffice Installation & Deployment


Lecture, Operation
demonstration

OS32

Understand the application environment of


Anyoffice Device

0.5 d

Understand the application scenario of Anyoffice


Device
Describe the basics configuration of Anyoffice

AnyOffice Features & Configurations

OS33

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Device
1.5 d

Understand the Solution deployment Anyoffice


Device
Describe Client customization method

AnyOffice Maintenance & Troubleshooting

OS34

Lecture

0.5 d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

Describe AnyOffice Basic Configuration


Describe AnyOffice Functions
Understand AnyOffice Case Analyze
Describe AnyOffice Software
Configurations

Describe AnyOffice User Authentication


Understand the Common faults and positioning

A basic understanding of computer technology


Be familiar with data communications network

method of Anyoffice Device


Understand the troubleshooting method of

elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary

Anyoffice Device
Duration

knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Objectives

On completion of this program, the

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.26

Enterprise Network Design Training Programs

2.26.1 Enterprise Network Design Outlines Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe enterprise network design principles
Describe enterprise network design basic

Enterprise Network Design Outlines


ORS91

Lecture, Case-study

1d

process
Analyze general enterprise requirements for
network design

Target Audience

Planners and Designers


Administrators
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

Describe best practices of enterprise network


design
Describe Huawei enterprise network products
Design general enterprise network

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.26.2 Enterprise Campus Network Design Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe concepts of campus network
Describe Huawei OneNet campus network

Designing Enterprise Campus Network


ORS92

Lecture, Case-study

1d

Target Audience

Planners and Designers


Administrators
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge
A general experience in network design

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

solution
List common technologies in campus network
Describe Huawei OneNet campus business
solution
Choose appropriate products for campus
network

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.26.3 Enterprise MPLS VPN Design Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Analyze of the general needs of enterprise
network construction

Designing MPLS VPN for Enterprise


ORS93

Lecture, Case-study

1d

Target Audience

Planners and Designers


Administrators
Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

Describe the architecture of the MPLS L3VPN


Analyze of the key technologies in the MPLS
L3VPN architecture
Select the appropriate technology and solutions
for enterprise networking
Choose the appropriate product for enterprise
networking

Duration
A basic understanding of computer technology
HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge
A general familiarity with MPLS VPN technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.26.4 Data Center Network Design Training


List Principles of Data Center Network Design

Training Path

Design Data Center Network Architecture


Design Data Center Network Areas

Designing Data Center Network


ORS94

Lecture

2d

Target Audience

Design Data Center Network Panels


Design Data Center Network Services
Design Data Center Network Interconnection

Planners and Designers

Describe Data Center Load-balancing Solution

Administrators

Describe Data Center WAN Optimization

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

Solution
Describe Data Center NetStream Solution
List Challenges of Cloud Computing Data Center

A basic understanding of computer technology


HCNP-R&S certification or similar knowledge
A general familiarity with MPLS/VPN

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Outline Data Center Network Overview

Network
Describe Huawei Cloud Fabric Data Center
Network Solution
List Huawei CloudEngine Products

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Outline Trend of Data Center Network


Outline Data Center Network Solution

Min 6, Max 12

2.27

Security Technology Fundamental Training

2.27.1 Firewall Technology Fundamental Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Understand the definition and classification of

Firewall Elementary Technology

OFW01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Target Audience
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Prerequisites
Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Router&Switch
elementary knowledge
Objectives
On completion of this program, the

firewalls.

1d

Understand firewall functions and technologies.

Understand the service process and


basic configuration of firewalls.
Understand the packet filtering scenario
and configuration
Understand the principles of the NAT
technology.
Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

2.28

Security Advance Technology Training

2.28.1 Firewall VPN Technology Training


Training Path

VPN.
Understand the principles of L2TP.

Basic VPN Technology


OFW02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Understand the principles of the IPSec


1d

technology.

Understand the principles of the SSL VPN


technology.
Understand the basic configuration of
VPN

Firewall VPN Technical Topic

Target Audience

Understand Advanced features and


configuration of IPSec VPN.

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

Understand Advanced features and


configuration of L2TP over IPSec VPN.

OFW11 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

2d

Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge


Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary
knowledge

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Understand Advanced applications and


configuration of SSL VPN.
Understand Scenarios of comprehensive
VPN applications.
Troubleshooting of VPN.
Duration
3 working days
Class Size

Understand the concept and functions of VPN.


Understand the classification and application of

Min 6, Max 12

2.28.2 Firewall UTM(Unified Threat Management) Technology Training


Describe the basic knowledge of UTM

Training Path

Understand Intrusion detection and


Intrusion prevention technology.

Firewall UTM Technical Topic


OFW12 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

3d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary

Understand major antivirus technologies


for gateways
Understand the key technology of Web
filtering.
Understand the mechanism of anti-spam
Understand the main DPI technology.
Troubleshooting of UTM
Duration

knowledge

Objectives

3 working days
Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Min 6, Max 12

2.28.3 Firewall Reliability &Attack Defense Technology Training


Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup

Training Path

principle
Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology
OFW03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup


Basic Networking and Configuration

0.5d

Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot


Backup Typical Networking.

Advanced Firewall Security Features


OFW13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise 2.5d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Troubleshooting of HA technology.

Describe Advanced Firewall Security


Features
Understand Firewall Reliability
Technology
Understand Virtual Firewall Technology
Understand Basic Attack Defense
Technologies on Firewall
Duration

Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary


knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.29

USG2000/5000 Firewall Training

2.29.1 USG2000/5000 Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path
USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product
Overview
OFW21 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Basic


Installation

OFW22 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the basic knowledge of
USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the function and features of
USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the application scenario of
USG2000/5000 firewall

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

Describe the hardware Installation and


maintenance of USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the basic CLI configuration of
USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the basic WEB management of

Be familiar with PC operation system


Be familiar with data communications network

USG2000/5000 firewall

Duration

elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.29.2 USG2000/5000 Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

USG2000/5000 firewall
Describe the function and features of
USG2000/5000 firewall

USG2000/5000 Series Firewall Product


Overview
OFW21 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

USG2000/5000 firewall

Describe the basic CLI configuration of


USG2000/5000 firewall

Firewall Elementary Technology


OFW01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the application scenario of

Describe the basic WEB management of


1d

USG2000/5000 firewall
Understand the definition and classification of
firewalls.

Basic VPN Technology


OFW02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Understand firewall functions and technologies.


1d

Firewall Dual-system hot backup Technology


OFW03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Understand the service process and


basic configuration of firewalls.
Understand the principles of the NAT
technology.
Understand the concept and functions of VPN.
Understand the classification and application of
VPN.
Understand the principles of L2TP.

USG2000/5000 UTM Technology


OFW23 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Understand the principles of GRE.


0.5d

Understand the principles of the IPSec


technology.

USG2000/5000 Routine Maintenance and


Troubleshooting

Understand the principles of the SSL VPN


technology.

OFW24Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

Understand the basic configuration of


VPN

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup


principle
Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup
Basic Networking and Configuration
Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot
Backup Typical Networking.
Troubleshooting of HA technology.
Understand USG2000/5000 UTM Typical
Networking and Configuration.
Understand the Method To Upgrade the
USG2000/5000

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Understand USG2000/5000 Routine

Describe the basic knowledge of

Understand the troubleshooting method of

Maintenance Steps.

USG2000/5000

Duration

4 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.30

USG6000 Next Generation Firewall Training

2.30.1 USG6000 Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

Objectives

USG6000 Series Product Overview

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OFW31 Lecture ,Operation demonstration 0.5d

Describe the basic knowledge of USG6000


firewall
Describe the application scenario of USG6000

USG6000 Series Product Basic Installation

OFW32 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

firewall
Describe the hardware Installation and
maintenance of USG6000 firewall

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Prerequisites

Describe the basic CLI configuration of


USG6000 firewall
Describe the basic WEB management of
USG6000 firewall

Duration
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.30.2 USG6000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

firewall
Describe the application scenario of USG6000
firewall

USG6000 Series Product Overview


OFW31 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

Describe the basic CLI configuration of


USG6000 firewall
Describe the basic WEB management of
USG6000 firewall

Firewall Elementary Technology


OFW01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Understand the definition and classification of


1d

firewalls.
Understand firewall functions and technologies.

Basic VPN Technology


OFW02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Understand the service process and


basic configuration of firewalls.
Understand the principles of the NAT
technology.
Understand the concept and functions of VPN.
Understand the classification and application of

Firewall Dual-system hot backup


Technology
OFW03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

VPN.
0.5d

Understand the principles of L2TP.


Understand the principles of GRE.
Understand the principles of the IPSec
technology.

USG6000 IPS & Anti-Virus Technology


OFW33 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

USG6000 Routine Maintenance and


Troubleshooting
OFW34 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

Understand the principles of the SSL VPN


technology.
Understand the basic configuration of
VPN
Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup
principle
Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup

Target Audience

Basic Networking and Configuration


Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the basic knowledge of USG6000

Backup Typical Networking.


Troubleshooting of HA technology.
Understand the technology principles of
USG6000 IPS & Anti-Virus
Understand the Configuration Method of
USG6000 IPS & Anti-Virus
Understand the Method To Upgrade the
USG6000
Understand USG6000 Routine Maintenance
Steps.
Understand the troubleshooting method of
USG6000

Duration

4 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.30.3 USG6000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Understand USG6000 Application Signature

USG6000 Advanced Features Overview

OFW35

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

technology
2d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

Understand USG6000 SA(Service Awareness)


Feature
Understand USG6000 Bandwidth Management
Feature
Understand USG6000 Intelligent Policy
Configuration
Understand USG6000 intelligent uplink selection
Feature
Understand USG6000 User Management
Feature

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.31

USG9000 High-end Firewall Training

2.31.1 USG9000 Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

knowledge

Objectives
USG9000 Series Product Overview
OFW41 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the hardware structure of
Huawei's high-end series firewall

USG9000 Series Product Basic Installation

OFW42 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

Describe the performance parameter of


Huawei's high-end series firewall system
Understand the distributed board of Huawei's

Target Audience

high-end series firewall

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Master USG9000 Hardware Installation

Operators and Maintainers

Master USG9000 Basic CLI Configuration

Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary

Master USG9000 Basic WEB Configuration

Duration

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.31.2 USG9000 Essential Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Huawei's high-end series firewall


Describe the performance parameter of

USG9000 Series Product Overview

Huawei's high-end series firewall system

OFW41Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

Understand the distributed board of Huawei's


high-end series firewall
Master USG9000 Basic CLI Configuration
Master USG9000 Basic WEB Configuration

Firewall Elementary Technology

Understand the definition and classification of

OFW01 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

firewalls.
Understand firewall functions and technologies.

Basic VPN Technology


OFW02 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Understand the service process and


basic configuration of firewalls.
Understand the principles of the NAT
technology.
Understand the concept and functions of VPN.
Understand the classification and application of

Firewall Dual-system hot backup


Technology
OFW03 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

VPN.
0.5d

Understand the principles of L2TP.


Understand the principles of GRE.
Understand the principles of the IPSec
technology.

USG9000 IPS & Anti-Virus Technology


OFW43 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

USG9000 Routine Maintenance and


Troubleshooting

OFW44Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

Understand the principles of the SSL VPN


technology.
Understand the basic configuration of
VPN
Describe Firewall Dual-system hot backup
principle
Understand Firewall Dual-System Hot Backup

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

Basic Networking and Configuration


Be familiar with Firewall Dual-System Hot
Backup Typical Networking.
Troubleshooting of HA technology.

Be familiar with PC operation system

Master USG9500 Hardware Installation

Be familiar with data communications network

Understand the technology principles of

elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the hardware structure of

USG9000 IPS & Anti-Virus


Understand the Configuration Method of
USG9000 IPS & Anti-Virus
Understand the Method To Upgrade the
USG9000
Understand USG9000 Routine Maintenance
Steps.
Understand the troubleshooting method of
USG9000

Duration

4 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.31.3 USG9000 Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

USG9000 High-end Firewall Advanced


Features Overview
OFW45 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

2d

Target Audience

Understand USG9000 Application Signature


technology
Understand USG9000 SA(Service Awareness)

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Feature

Administrators

Understand USG9000 IP-CAR Feature

Operators and Maintainers

Understand USG9000 intelligent uplink selection

Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Feature
Understand USG9000 virtual system Feature
Understand USG9000 IPv6 Feature

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.32

SVN(Security Virtual Network) Training

2.32.1 SVN Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Understand the hardware architecture
and Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000
Device

SVN Product Overview


Lecture

OSV11

0.5d

Understand the software architecture of


SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

SVN Product Basic Installation and


Configuration

OSV12

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Understand the main hardware


component of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

0.5d

Target Audience

Understand the application environment


of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the application scenario of

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Describe the hardware installation of


SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the physical environment
requirement of SVN2000/SVN5000
Device
Describe the basics configuration of
SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Duration

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.32.2 SVN Operation and Maintenance Training


Understand the main hardware
component of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Training Path

Understand the software architecture of


SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

SVN Product Overview


Lecture

OSV11

0.5d

Understand the application environment


of SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the application scenario of

SVN Functions and Features

SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
OSV13

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Understand the principles of the SSL


VPN technology
Understand the basics configuration of SSL VPN

SVN Routine Maintenance and


Troubleshooting
OSV14Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Understand the hardware architecture
and Specifications of SVN2000/SVN5000
Device

Understand the Solution deployment


SVN2000/SVN500 Device
Describe the high-level function
configuration of SVN2000/SVN5000
Device
Understand the System Status of
SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Describe the SVN2000/SVN5000 login
Manage page
Understand the Common faults and
positioning method of
SVN2000/SVN5000 Device
Understand the troubleshooting method of
SVN2000/SVN5000 Device

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.33

ASG( Application Security Gateway) Training

2.33.1 ASG Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe Network Orientation of ASG
Understand Hardware Structure of ASG

ASG Product Overview


Lecture,

OAS11

0.5d

Understand Function Feature of ASG


Know the Typical Application of ASG

Describe ASG login method


Describe ASG Initialization configuration

ASG Product Basic Installation and


Configuration

OAS12

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe ASG Installation Procedure


0.5d

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

Describe the Installation Procedure of


ASG Manager
Understand Overview of Updating the
signature database on ASG
Understand ASG Online Updating for the
signature database
Understand ASG Local Updating for the
signature database

Duration

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.33.2 ASG Operation and Maintenance Training


Understand Function Feature of ASG

Training Path

Know the Typical Application of ASG


ASG Product Overview
Lecture

OAS11

0.5d

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Understand ASG Manager Function


Configuration
Describe the Alarm Management function
of ASG Manager

ASG Functions and Features Overview


OAS13

Describe the management module


function of ASG

1d

ASG Routine Maintenance and


Troubleshooting
OAS14Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe Network Orientation of ASG
Understand Hardware Structure of ASG

Describe the configuration of Alarm


Management function in ASG Manager
Describe ASG Maintenance tool
Describe ASG Hardware Maintenance
Describe ASG Software Maintenance
Describe ASG Software Upgrade
Understand ASG Manager Routine
Maintenance and Main method
Understand ASG Manager Software
Upgrade
Understand ASG Manager fault
finding in routine maintenance
Understand the basic troubleshooting
knowledge
Describe ASG Manager Troubleshooting
method
Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.34

Intrusion Detection and Prevention Training

2.34.1 NIP Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

Device
Understand the software Function of
IPS/IDS Device

NIP Product Overview


Lecture,

ONI11

0.5d

Understand the hardware specifications


of NIP Device

NIP Product Basic Installation and


Configuration

ONI12

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Understand the hardware architecture of


NIP Device

0.5d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Installers and Commissioning Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device
Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS

Understand the hardware main


component of NIP Device
Understand the software architecture of
NIP
Understand the software application scenario of
NIP Device

Understand the hardware installation of


NIP Device
Understand the physical environment of
NIP Device
Understand the basic configuration of NIP
Device

Duration

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.34.2 NIP Operation and Maintenance Training


Understand the hardware specifications
of NIP Device

Training Path

Understand the hardware main


component of NIP Device

NIP Product Overview


ONI11

Lecture

NIP Product Functions and Features


Overview
ONI13 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5d

Understand the software architecture of


NIP
Understand the software application scenario of
NIP Device

1d

Understand the concept of Intrusion detection


and Intrusion prevention

NIP Product Routine Maintenance and


Troubleshooting
ONI14 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

Understand Intrusion detection technology


Understand Intrusion prevention technology
Understand the application of Intrusion detection
technology

Target Audience

Understand the application of Intrusion


prevention technology

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

Understand Application control of IPS Device


Understand Application control of IDS Device

Be familiar with PC operation system

Understand Threat Prevention of IPS Device

Be familiar with network security elementary

Understand Threat Prevention of IDS Device

knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

Understand Typical Application scene of IPS


Device
Understand Typical Application scene of IDS
Device

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Understand the maintenance operations of NIP

Understand the NIP IPS/IDS Device

Understand the software patches of NIP Device

Understand the hardware of NIP IPS/IDS


Device

Understand the Troubleshooting of NIP Device

Understand the software Function of


IPS/IDS Device
Understand the hardware architecture of
NIP Device

Device

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.35

Security Management Software Training

2.35.1 Policy Center Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Policy Center Product Overview


OPC11

Lecture,

0.5d

Describe Terminal Security Management system


Background.

Policy Center Product Basic Installation and


Configuration
Lecture, Operation demonstration
OPC12
Hands-on exercise

Describe Terminal Security Management system


component

1d

Understand Policy Center System Background


Understand Policy Center System Architecture
Understand Policy Center System Functions

Policy Center Functions and Features


Configuration
Lecture, Operation demonstration
OPC13
Hands-on exercise

Describe Policy Center System Typical


1d

Scenarios and Performance index


Understand Policy Center Installation Planning
and Preparations

Policy Center Routine Maintenance and


Troubleshooting
OPC14 Lecture, Operation demonstration 0.5d

Be familiar with Policy Center Installation


Process
Be familiar with Policy Center system Basic
Operation

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary

Understand Functional modules Definition of


Policy Center
Understand the technology and application of
Policy Center System each Component
Understand the Policy Center Routine
Maintenance Methods

Duration

knowledge
Be familiar with OS.

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.36

Anti-DDoS Defense System Training

2.36.1 Anti-DDoS Defense System Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path
Anti-DDoS Solution Operation and
Maintenance Training
OAD11

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

3d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe Huawei Anti-DDos Product
Component
Describe Anti-DDos Network Orientation
and Typical Application

Describe Principle of Anti-DDoS attack


and Anti-DDoS defense technology
Understand network Design of
management Center
Understand network Design of Detecting
Center
Understand network Design of Cleaning
Center
Understand mirroring traffic, monitor
network traffic and redirection traffic in
Anti-DDoS Solution
Master basic configuration and system
management
Master Anti-DDoS Product Management
and Customer Management
Master Anti-DDoS Solution Report management
and System maintenance

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.37

UMA System Training

2.37.1 UMA System Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:

UMA Solution Operation and Maintenance


Training
OUM11 Lecture, Operation demonstration

1d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites
Be familiar with PC operation system
Be familiar with data communications network
elementary knowledge
Be familiar with network security elementary
knowledge
Be familiar with Firewall elementary knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

Describe UMA orientation and product


value
Master UMA system architecture and
system component
Master UMA main function feature
Know the UMA application network
Master UMA initial configuration
Master UMA basic function configuration
Know Common fault finding in UMA

Duration

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2.38

Security Planning and Design Training

2.38.1 Firewall Planning and Design Training


Training Path
Firewall Planning and Design
OSCD1

Lecture,

1d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with TCP/IP elementary knowledge
Be familiar with Router&Switch elementary
knowledge

Be familiar with Firewall elementary


knowledge
Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Understand Huawei Security Concept
Understand Huawei Security
Competence Center
Be familiar with Huawei Security Products
Describe Scenarios of Huawei Security
Products Application and Solution
Duration

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

3 Enterprise UC&C Training Solution


3.1 Training Path
3.1.1

UC Career Certification Training Path

Expert

Professional

HCNP-UC (Fast-Track)
Implementing Huawei Unified
Communication Solutions

5d

Associate

HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing
Huawei Unified Communication

Administration
5d
Elective Guide:

Projects in Associate/ Professional corresponding to HCNA/HCNP courses

Customers without related voice technology background are recommended to elect HCNA-UC at first

3.1.2

CC Career Certification Training Path

Expert

Professional

Associate

HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei


Contact Center Administration Training

5d
Elective Guide:

Projects in Associate corresponding to HCNA courses

3.1.3

VC Career Certification Training Path

Expert

Professional

HCNP-VC-IHVCP
Huawei Video
Conference
Protocol

HCNP-VC-IHVP
Implementing Huawei
Advanced ViewPoint
System
5d

3d

Associate

HCNA-VC-IHVCA
Introducing Huawei
Video Conference
Administration

5d

Elective Guide:

Follow the paths to learn.

Customers without related voice technology background are recommended to elect HCNA-UC at first

3.1.4

Huawei eSpace IPT System Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training

Implement & Operate

Improve

Operation and Maintenance


Training

Advanced Technology
Training

Huawei eSpace IPT System

Huawei eSpace IPT System

Configuration and Operation Training


5d

Troubleshooting Training

Elective Guide:

Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U1900 voice system.

Electing by customer: System Designer/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to System


Design/Configuration and Operation/Installation and Commissioning.

3d

3.1.5

Huawei eSpace UC System Training Path

Plan & Design

Implement & Operate

Planning and Design


Training

Operation and Maintenance


Training

Improve
Advanced Technology Training

Huawei eSpace UC System


Configuration and Operation Training
8d

Elective Guide:

Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using UC system.

Electing by customer: System Designer/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to System


Design/Configuration and Operation/Installation and Commissioning.

3.1.6

CC Operation and Maintenance Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design
Training

Implement & Operate

Improve

Operation and Maintenance


Training

Advanced Technology
Training

Voice Contact Center Service


Introduction, Configuration and
Operation Training
8d

Multimedia Contact Center


Service Introduction, Configuration
and Operation (Including Voice
Contact Center Service
Introduction, Configuration and
Operation) Training
10d

Elective-Guide:

Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using U2900 access gateway.

Electing by Scenario: The main scenarios are Voice Contact Center/ Multimedia Contact Center.

Electing by customer: Manager/System Maintainer/Installation engineer are corresponding to Management and


Monitoring/Service introduction, configuration and operation/Installation and Commissioning.

3.1.7

Video Conference Product Training Path

Plan & Design

Implement & Operate

Improve

Planning and Design


Training

Operation and Maintenance


Training

Advanced Technology
Training

Video Conference
System( Terminal/MCU/
SMC/RSE) Operation and
Maintenance

H.323 and SIP Protocol


2d

5d

Video Conference
System( Terminal/MCU/SMC)
Advanced Features Operation
and Maintenance
5d
TP/RP Series Product Operation
and Maintenance

2d

Technology
Fundament
als Training

Video Conference
System( Terminal/MCU/SMC)
Technology Fundamental

2d

TelePresence(TP) and
RoomPrecense(RP) Series
Technology Fundamental

Elective Guide

Programs in this path are prepared for training projects using VC system.

The Operation and Maintenance Training is designed for general audiences.

1d

3.2 Required Training Programs


Enterprise UC&C Training Programs are designed as follows:
Training Programs

Level

Duration
(working
days)

Training
Location

Class
Size

UC Career Certification Training Programs


HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified
Communication Administration Training

6 ~ 12

HCNP-UC (Fast Track) Implementing Huawei Unified


Communication Solutions Training

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

HCNA-VC Training

6 ~ 12

HCNP-VC Training

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

Huawei eSpace IPT System Configuration and


Operation Training

6 ~ 12

Huawei eSpace IPT System Troubleshooting Training

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

Voice Contact Center Service Introduction,


Configuration and Operation Training

6 ~ 12

Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction,


Configuration and Operation Training(Including Voice
Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration
and Operation Training)

10

6 ~ 12

CC Career Certification Training Programs


HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact
Center Administration Training
VC Career Certification Training Programs

IVS Specialist Certification Training


HCS-Field-IVS Training
Huawei eSpace IPT system Training

Huawei eSpace UC System Training


Huawei eSpace UC System Configuration and
Operation Training
CC general Training Programs
Contact Center Management and Monitoring Training
CC Contact Center Operation and Maintenance Training

CC eSpace VTM Training


eSpace VTM Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

VC Operation and Maintenance Training


Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC/RSE)
Operation and Maintenance Training

Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced


Features Operation and Maintenance Training

TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

Huawei IVS System Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

VCM Intelligent Analysis System Deployment and


Management Training

6 ~ 12

eSight-UCC Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

eSight-UCC UC Business Management Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

eSight-UCC TP&VC Business Management Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

eSight-UCC IVS Business Management Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

Huawei eSpace IVS System Traning

Enterprise Network Management System eSight-UCC Traning

Description: : Basic Course : Intermediate Course

: Advanced Course

: Expert Course

3.3 Training Programs


3.4 UC Career Certification Training Programs
3.4.1

HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified Communication Administration


Understand the call flow of U1900 intra-office

Training Path

Perform the data configuration on 1900, IAD


HCNA-UC-IHUCA Introducing Huawei Unified
Communication Administration
OUCX1

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

5 d

Target Audience

Those who hope to become a UC engineer


Those who hope to obtain HCNA-UC
Prerequisites

and IP Phone
Describe the inter-office call flow of U1900
Complete the data configuration in related
devices to realize the inter-office call
Describe the number conversion application
scenario
Understand the number conversion types and
their priority

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Configure the number conversion

A general familiarity with network knowledge

Describe the intelligent routing application

A general familiarity with communication theory

Objectives

scenario
Configure intelligent routing
Understand the voice service of Huawei

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Understand the traditional voice network
Understand the components, interfaces and
signaling in the traditional voice network
Know the architecture in the VoIP Network
Master the basic knowledge in the VoIP
Network
Understand the signaling and media protocols
in the VoIP network
Know basic concepts of the Huawei eSpace
IPT solution
Describe system architecture and products at
each layer of the Huawei eSpace IPT solution
Understand the operation interfaces of every
element of eSpace IPT solution
Understand the functions of administrator
operation interfaces

eSpace IPT solution


Understand the various voice service
configuration of Huawei eSpace IPT solution
Describe the advanced features of eSpace IPT
Solution
Understand the application scenarios of
eSpace IPT advanced features
Perform the configuration of eSpace IPT
advanced features
Know U1900 users default call right
Describe the right control application scenario
Configure common call restriction policies
Perform the maintenance of devices of eSpace
IPT system
Describe the routine maintenance and
troubleshooting methods of U1900
Describe the routine maintenance and
troubleshooting methods of IAD

Get some basic concepts about calls

Configure and upgrade IP Phones in batches

Understand the interrelationship between

Understand the troubleshooting process

these concepts
Describe the registration flow of the users
under U1900

Collect and analyze various types of fault


reference information

Diagnose common system faults


Rectify common faults

Duration

5 working days, including hands-on

exercise 2 working days


Class Size

Min 6, max 12

3.4.2

HCNP-UC (Fast-Track) Implementing Huawei Unified Communication

Solutions
Master Active&standby network configuring

Training Path

Understand the mechanism of remote disaster


HCNP-UC (Fast-Track) Implementing Huawei
Unified Communication Solutions
OUCX2

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

5 d

Target Audience

recovery network
Know the registration process and call process
of multi-node centralized network
Master fundamental and configuring of local
regeneration

Those who hope to become an advanced


Unified Communication engineer
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-UC
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A general familiarity with network knowledge
A general familiarity with communication theory
HCNA-UC Certification or similar knowledge

Objectives

Master configuring of multi-node centralized


network
Understand the registration process and call
process of peer to peer mode network
Understand the registration process and call
process of convergent mode network
Understand the ECS application deployment
types
Know the installation of ECS application
Know the principle of terminal account

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Master how to configure the terminal account

Know the development tendency of

Know the registration process and call process

communication

in BMU
of terminal

Know the architecture of eSpace UC solution

Know the presence and IM service

Know the component element of eSpace UC

Know UC self-service operation

solution
Know various services provided in eSpace UC
solution
Understand the Typical networking of eSpace
UC solution
Know components and their functions of
eSpace UC solution
Know calling processes of eSpace UC solution
Know required licenses of eSpace UC solution
Understand eSpace UC service management
system
Understand gateway and terminal login
interfaces
Understand self-service portal
Understand terminal portal
Understand the reliable IPT network

Master how to make multimedia conference


service
Master how to commission the corporate
directory service
Understand console service
Understand the toll fraud prevention measure
Know the basic service configuration of
eSpace UMS
Understand eSpace Audio Recorder solution
features
Get familiar with the CDR service scenarios
Configure the CDR service in Single node
Learn about precautions for eSpace UC
routine maintenance
Get familiar with typical tools and methods for
routine maintenance

Understand the troubleshooting process


Understand how to collect and analyze various
types of fault reference information
Understand how to diagnose common system

Duration

5 working days, including hands-on


exercise 2 working days
Class Size

faults
Understand how to rectify common faults

Min 6, max 12

3.5 CC Career Certification Training Programs


3.5.1

HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact Center Administration Training

Training Path

system of the eSpace U2980 series gateway.


Understand the cable connections and

HCNA-CC-IHCCA Introducing Huawei Contact

Center Administration Training


OCCX1 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

5d

Target Audience

Those who hope to become a Contact


Center engineer
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-CC
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system

Objectives

applications of the U2980.


Master the basic concepts of the U2980.
Master the basic connection configuration of
the U2980.
Understand basic principles of the agent
service.
Get familiar with interworking configuration.
Be skilled in agent service configuration.
Get familiar with basic concepts and scenarios
about routing in a contact center.
Understand the call allocation policies.
Be skilled in contact center policy

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Learn about the contact center's development
history.
Get familiar with eSpace CC solution.
Know typical networks of eSpace CC.
Understand interfaces and protocols of eSpace
CC.
Master functions of components in eSpace
CC.
Get familiar with U2980 LMT management
page.
Get familiar with WAS platform management
and operation page.
Get familiar with Agent management and
operation page.
Get familiar with CMS platform management
and operation page.
Get familiar with BIR platform management
and operation page.
Understand the planning and design principles
of the eSpace CC system.
Know how to install the software for the
eSpace CC system.
Understand the networking and hardware

configuration.
Learn about basic principles of the IVR
service.
Be skilled at IVR service configuration.
Understand basic concepts about eSpace BIR.
Get familiar with the networking scheme,
component relationships, and service process
for the eSpace BIR voice report service.
Be skilled in commissioning the eSpace BIR
voice report service.
Understand the basic concepts and functions
of eSpace CMS.
Know the component relationships and service
processes of eSpace CMS.
Get skilled in commissioning the eSpace CMS
monitoring and inspection services.
Configuration administrator routine operations.
Operation administrator routine operations.
Service manager routine operations.
Inspector routine operations.
Agent routine operations.
Routine maintenance of the eSpace CC
system.
Methods for collecting logs for the eSpace CC
system.

Sequence for powering on the eSpace CC


components upon power outage and methods
for restarting the eSpace CC services.
eSpace CC backup scenarios and policies.
Methods for changing passwords for users in
the eSpace CC system.

Duration

5 working day, including hands-on exercise


2 working day
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

3.6 VC Career Certification Training Programs


3.6.1

HCNA-VC Training

Training Path

Master MCU Functions and Features


Master SMC Roles and Product Lines

HCNA-VC-IHVCA Introducing Huawei Video


Conference Administration

OVCX1

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Master SMC Architecture


5d

Target Audience

Those who hope to become a video


conference associate
Those who hope to obtain HCNA-VC
certificate
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

Master SMC Features and Benefits


Know Huawei MCU Interoperability with MS-UC
Know Huawei VC Interoperability with IBM
SameTime
Know Huawei MCU Interoperability With Skype
Know Huawei MCU Interoperability With Other
Vendors
Know Huawei Video Conference system Design
Master HD terminal Installation and
Configuration
Master MCU Installation and Configuration
Master SMC Installation and Configuration
Know TP Room Recommendations

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Master HD terminal Software Upgrade

Know Video Conference Concept

Master SMC Software Upgrade

Know Video Conference Development History

Mater Terminal Optimization & Tuning

and Trend

Master MCU Software Upgrade

Master Basic Diagnostic Method

Know Video Conference Product Portfolio

Master Log Collection

Know Video Conference Technological

Know Troubleshooting strategies and

Innovation

Methodologies

Know Videoconferencing Application Modes

Master Event monitoring

Know Huawei Videoconferencing Solutions

Master HD terminal troubleshooting method

Know H.323 and SIP framework Protocol

Master MCU troubleshooting method

Concept
Know H.323 Conference Scheduling Flow
Master HD terminal Roles and Product Lines
Master HD terminal Basic Work Principle
Master HD terminal Functions and Features
Master HD terminal Hardware Interfaces
Master MCU Roles and Product Lines
Master MCU Basic Work Principle

Master SMC troubleshooting method

Duration

5 working days, including Hands-on exercise


2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

3.6.2

HCNP-VC Training

Training Path

Technology

HCNP-VC-IHVCP Huawei Video Conference


Protocol

OVCX2

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

3d

Know Basic Concepts of Video Codec and their


Differences.
Know Common Video Codec Streams, RTP
Packetization Formats, and SDP Descriptions
Understand the Concept and Structure of the
Integrated Videoconferencing System

HCNP-VC IHVP Implementing Huawei


Advanced Video Conference System

OVCC3

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Know Components of Videoconferencing Room

5d

Target Audience

Understand Installation Skills of Different


Videoconferencing Rooms
Know Advanced Features 9000 and TE Series
Master Maintenance and Fault Diagnosis

Those who hope to become a video


conference professional
Those who hope to obtain HCNP-VC
Prerequisites

Understand Basic Concept and Work Principle of


MCU
Know Application Scenarios and Use Methods of
Advanced Features of MCU

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Know Basic troubleshooting Methods of MCU

A basic understanding of computer technology

Understand Basic Concepts and Work Principle

A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

of SMC Platform
Know Application Scenarios and Use Methods of
Advanced Features of SMC Platform

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Be Familiar with Basic Fault Location Methods

Understand Wireshark interface

Master Diagnostic Functions Provided by the

Know about Wireshark basic operations

on SMC Platform
Network Diagnostician

Know basics of the H.323 protocol

Master Network Statistics Query Using NLog

Know Signaling Process of Conference

Master Basic Approaches to Troubleshooting

Scheduling

Videoconferencing System

Know How to Troubleshoot Common Faults

Master How to Troubleshoot Terminals

Understand the Usage SIP

Master How to Troubleshoot Service

Know Signaling Process of SIP Messages


Understand Common SIP Call Process and SDP
Negotiation Process
Learn the Basic Principles of RTP and RTCP
Master the Application of RTP and RTCP
Know common audio encoding algorithms and
their differences
Learn audio-related technologies
Understand the Video Image Processing

Management Center (SMC)


Master How to Troubleshoot Multipoint Control
Units (MCUs)
Understand Basic Concepts and Functions of
Firewall
Master Problems and Solutions of Video
Services under Firewall
Master Typical Problems and Positioning Method
of Video Services under Firewall

Duration

8 working days, including Hands-on exercise


3 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

3.7 IVS Specialist Certification Training


3.7.1

HCS-Field-IVS Training

Training Path

Know how to add a camera to the IVS platform


Have basic understanding on the rights system

Basic knowledge of video surveillance system

Lecture

VS01

0.5d

Configure roles and users


Configure the recording system
Use the recording function
Know the structure of the alarm system

Huawei eSpace IVS system configuration and

Know the operation process of the alarm system

advanced maintenance training

Deploy the eSpace IVS alarm system

VS03

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

2.5d

Target Audience

Know eSpace IVS's central devices


Know how to log in to and operate the decoder
Know the common troubleshooting methods
Be familiar with typical troubleshooting cases

Administrators

Know Huawei IPC Series Products

Operators and Maintainers

Describe hardware features of Huawei video

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

surveillance IP cameras (IPCs)


Know IPC Fittings Familarize with Huawei IPC
web management pages
Know how to perform basic operations on IPC
web pages

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Know the basic troubleshooting procedures

Know video surveillance systems at different

Know FAQs

development stages
Know typical video surveillance solutions
Describe video surveillance development
Know Huawei's VCN3000
Know the architecture of Huaweis IVS Platform
Know typical networking modes
Know how to use the basic functions of eSpace
IVS

Be familiar with typical troubleshooting cases

Duration

3 working daysincluding hands-on exercise


1working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

3.8 Huawei eSpace IPT System Training


3.8.1

Huawei eSpace IPT System Configuration and Operation Training


Describe the U1900 system function and feature

Training Path

Describe the U1900 system maintenance


U1900 System Introduction

OUC11

Lecture

method
0.5 d

Describe the U1900 system technical


specifications
Describe the concepts of prefix, office route,

U1900 System Configuration

OUC12

office route selection code

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

3d

Perform U1900 system operation


Describe the configuration ways to U1900
system

IAD Introduction and Installation

OUC52

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Perform U1900 system user configuration


0.5d

Perform U1900 system service configuration


Describe IAD function and feature

IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and


Configuration

OUC53

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Perform U1900 system trunk configuration

Describe the classification of IAD


0.5d

Describe the module of IAD


Describe IAD technical specification

U1900 System Maintenance and


Troubleshooting

Describe IAD Power-Off/Network Interruption


survival

OUC14 Lecture, Demonstration

0.5d

Target Audience

Perform the IAD installation


Describe the difference between IP phone and
traditional phone

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

A general familiarity with PC operation


system
A general familiarity with network
knowledge
A general familiarity with communication
theory
A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge
Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe U1900 system positioning
Describe the U1900 system composition
Describe the hardware structure of U1900
system

Describe the IP phone function and feature


Perform the IP phone installation
Perform the IP phone upgrade
Perform the IP phone operation
Perform the IP phone configuration
Describe the contents of the routine
maintenance
Perform the system maintenance of eSpace
U1900
Upgrade U1900
Diagnose the common faulty cases
Perform troubleshooting of U1900

Duration

5 working days, including hands-on exercise


2.5 working days

Class Size

Min 6, max 12

3.8.2

Huawei eSpace IPT System Troubleshooting Training


A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge
A general familiarity with U1900 system

Training Path
UC Signaling and Protocols

OUC03

Lecture

Objectives
0.5 d

Know analog voice fundaments

U1900 System Architecture

Lecture

OUC15

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

0.5 d

Know digital voice fundamentals


Know signaling and protocols in VoIP network
Describe U1900 Hardware Structure and

U1900 Terminal Registration Faults

OUC16

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Components
0.5 d

Modules
Analyze U1900 Call Process and Faults

U1900 Call Faults

OUC17

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Describe U1900 Software Architecture and

Identify IP phone registration faults

0.5 d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Prerequisites

A general familiarity with PC operation


system
A general familiarity with network
knowledge
A general familiarity with communication
theory

Describe IP phone registration process


Explain registration information
Handle registration faults
Describe U1900 call troubleshooting process
Handle routine call faults

Duration

2 working days, including hands-on exercise


0.5 working day
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

3.9 Huawei eSpace UC System Training


3.9.1

Huawei eSpace UC System Configuration and Operation Training

Training Path

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


UC System Introduction

OUC71

Lecture

Prerequisites
0.5 d

A general familiarity with PC operation system


A general familiarity with network knowledge
A general familiarity with communication theory

U1900 System Introduction

OUC11

Lecture

0.5 d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

U1900 System Configuration

OUC1
2

A general familiarity with VoIP knowledge

3d

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the UC system solution


Describe the UC system function
Describe the classification of UC system

UC System Configuration

OUC7
2

Describe the UC system capacity

Lecture, Hands-on exercise

1d

Describe the UC system network architecture


Describe U1900 system positioning
Describe the U1900 system composition

AR Voice System Configuration

Describe the hardware structure of U1900

OUC42 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

system

1d

Describe the U1900 system function and feature


Describe the U1900 system maintenance

IAD Configuration and Maintenance

method

OUC52 Lecture, Hands-on exercise

0.5 d

Describe the U1900 system technical


specifications
Describe the concepts of prefix, office route,

IP Phone Installation, Upgrade and


Configuration

OUC5
3

Lecture, Hands-on exercise0.5 d

office route selection code


Perform U1900 system operation
Describe the configuration ways to U1900
system

eSpace Desktop Routine Operation

OUC5
5

Lecture, Hands-on exercise0.5 d

UC System Maintenance and


Troubleshooting

OUC73 Lecture, Hands-on exercise0.5d

Perform U1900 system user configuration


Perform U1900 system trunk configuration
Perform U1900 system service configuration

Describe the UC system solution


Describe the UC system function
Describe the classification of UC system
Describe the UC system capacity
Describe the UC system network

architecture

Perform eSpace Desktop routine operation

Describe the concepts on voice-featured AR

Perform eSpace Desktop common setting

Perform basic configuration on voice-featured

List UC system maintenance methods

AR
Describe the configuration methods of IAD
Perform the IAD configuration

Perform UC system maintenance


Perform UC system troubleshooting
Duration

Perform the IAD maintenance


Perform the IAD security maintenance
Describe the difference between IP phone and
traditional phone
Describe the IP phone function and feature
Perform the IP phone installation
Perform the IP phone upgrade
Perform the IP phone operation
Perform the IP phone configuration

8 working days, including hands-on exercise


3.5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

3.10

CC General Training Programs

3.10.1 Contact Center Management and Monitoring Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe eSpace CC concepts
Describe eSpace CC system architecture

eSpace CC Solution Introduction

OCC01

Lecture

0.5d

Describe eSpace CC AEP function


Describe eSpace CC multimedia features
Describe eSpace CC report function
Describe eSpace CC monitoring function

eSpace CC Agent Service Commissioning

Describe eSpace CC agent function

OCC22

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

1d

Get familiar with U2980


LMT/WAS/Agent/CMS/BIR management page.
Understand basic principles of the agent service.

eSpace CC Report Service Commissioning

OCC31

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

0.5d

Get familiar with interworking configuration.


Be skilled in agent service configuration.
Learn about basic principles of the IVR service.
Be skilled at IVR service configuration.

eSpace CC Monitoring and Inspection

Describe report typical configuration

Service Commissioning

OCC41

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

0.5d

Implement Datastation installation configuration


Implement BIR installation configuration
Describe report secondary development principle
Understand the basic concepts and functions of

eSpace CC Routine Operations

OCC51

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

eSpace CMS.
0.5d

Target Audience

Know the component relationships and service


processes of eSpace CMS.
Get skilled in commissioning the eSpace CMS
monitoring and inspection services.

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Configuration administrator routine operations.

Operators and Maintainers

Operation administrator routine operations.

Service Managers

Service manager routine operations.

Managers

Inspector routine operations.

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
Computer basics

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

Duration

3 working days, including hands-on exercise


1.25 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

3.11

CC Contact Center Operation and Maintenance Training

3.11.1 Voice Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and Operation


Training
Training Path

eSpace CC System Maintenance

eSpace CC Solution
Introduction
Lecture
OCC01

OCC24

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

1d

0.5d

Target Audience

eSpace CC Gateway Service


Commissioning
OCC11 Lecture+, Hands-on
exercise

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


Operators and Maintainers
1.5d

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system

eSpace CC Agent Service


Commissioning
Lecture, Hands-on
OCC22
exercise

Computer basics

Objectives
1d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe eSpace CC concepts

eSpace CC Voice IVR Commissioning


OCC23

Lecture+, Hands-on
exercise

Describe eSpace CC system architecture


1d

Describe eSpace CC AEP function


Describe eSpace CC multimedia features
Describe eSpace CC report function

eSpace CC Report Service Commissioning

OCC31

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Describe eSpace CC monitoring function


1d

Describe eSpace CC agent function


Get familiar with U2980 LMT management page.
Get familiar with WAS platform management and

eSpace CC Monitoring and Inspection


Service Commissioning
Lecture, Hands-on
1d
OCC41
exercise

operation page.
Get familiar with Agent management and
operation page.
Get familiar with CMS platform management and
operation page.

eSpace CC Routine Operations


OCC51

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Get familiar with BIR platform management and


1d

operation page.
Describe U2900 series gateway system
structure and function
Describe U2900 series gateway hardware
structure

Describe U2900 series gateway software


structure
Describe U2900 series gateway interfaces and
protocols
Describe U2900 series gateway function and
specification

Understand the basic concepts and functions of


eSpace CMS.
Know the component relationships and service
processes of eSpace CMS.
Get skilled in commissioning the eSpace CMS
monitoring and inspection services.

Analyze U2900 series gateway networking

Configuration administrator routine operations.

Describe prefix, office direction, signaling link,

Operation administrator routine operations.

trunk circuit
Implement U2900 series gateway basic
operation
Implement U2900 series gateway device data
configuration
Implement U2900 series gateway office data
configuration
Implement U2900 series gateway service data
configuration

Service manager routine operations.


Inspector routine operations.
Agent routine operations.
Routine maintenance of the eSpace CC system.
Methods for collecting logs for the eSpace CC
system.
Sequence for powering on the eSpace CC
components upon power outage and methods for
restarting the eSpace CC services.

Understand basic principles of the agent service.

eSpace CC backup scenarios and policies

Get familiar with interworking configuration.

Methods for changing passwords for users in the

Be skilled in agent service configuration.


Learn about basic principles of the IVR service.

eSpace CC system.

Duration

Be skilled at IVR service configuration.


Describe report typical configuration
Implement Datastation installation configuration
Implement BIR installation configuration
Describe report secondary development principle

8 working day, including hands-on exercise 4


working day
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

3.11.2 Multimedia Contact Center Service Introduction, Configuration and


Operation Training (Including Voice Contact Center Service Introduction,
Configuration and Operation) Training
Training Path

eSpace CC System Maintenance

eSpace CC Solution
Introduction
Lecture
OCC01

OCC24
0.5d

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

1d

Target Audience

Installers and Commissioning Staffs


eSpace CC Gateway Service
Commissioning
OCC11 Lecture+, Hands-on
exercise

Operators and Maintainers


1.5d

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
Computer basics

eSpace CC Agent Service


Commissioning
Lecture, Hands-on
OCC22
exercise

Objectives
1d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe enterprise communication concepts
Describe eSpace CC concepts

eSpace CC Voice IVR Commissioning


OCC23

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

1d

Describe eSpace CC system architecture


Describe eSpace CC AEP function
Describe eSpace CC multimedia features

eSpace CC Report Service


Commissioning
Lecture, Hands-on
OCC31
exercise

Describe eSpace CC report function


1d

Describe eSpace CC monitoring function


Describe eSpace CC agent function
Get familiar with U2980 LMT management page.

eSpace CC Monitoring and Inspection


Service Commissioning
Lecture, Hands-on
1d
OCC41
exercise

Get familiar with WAS platform management and


operation page.
Get familiar with Agent management and
operation page.
Get familiar with CMS platform management and

eSpace CC Routine Operations


OCC51

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

operation page.
1d

Get familiar with BIR platform management and


operation page.
Describe U2900 series gateway system structure

eSpace CC Multimedia Technology


Service Commissioning
Lecture, Hands-on
OCC61
exercise

and function
Describe U2900 series gateway hardware
2d

structure
Describe U2900 series gateway software
structure
Describe U2900 series gateway interfaces and

protocols
Describe U2900 series gateway function and
specification

Operation administrator routine operations.


Service manager routine operations.
Inspector routine operations.

Analyze U2900 series gateway networking

Agent routine operations.

Describe prefix, office direction, signaling link,

Describe Huawei WECC application scenario

trunk circuit

Describe Huawei Email call scenario

Implement U2900 series gateway basic operation

Describe Huawei Fax call scenario

Implement U2900 series gateway device data

Describe Huawei SMS call scenario

configuration
Implement U2900 series gateway office data
configuration
Implement U2900 series gateway service data
configuration
Understand basic principles of the agent service.
Get familiar with interworking configuration.
Be skilled in agent service configuration.
Learn about basic principles of the IVR service.

Implement text chat service configuration


Implement click to dial service configuration
Implement call back request service configuration
Implement escorted browsing service
configuration
Routine maintenance of the eSpace CC system.
Methods for collecting logs for the eSpace CC
system.
Sequence for powering on the eSpace CC

Be skilled at IVR service configuration.

components upon power outage and methods for

Describe report typical configuration

restarting the eSpace CC services.

Implement Datastation installation configuration

eSpace CC backup scenarios and policies.

Implement BIR installation configuration

Methods for changing passwords for users in the

Describe report secondary development principle


Understand the basic concepts and functions of

eSpace CC system.

Duration

eSpace CMS.
Know the component relationships and service
processes of eSpace CMS.
Get skilled in commissioning the eSpace CMS
monitoring and inspection services.
Configuration administrator routine operations.

10 working day, including hands-on exercise


5 working day
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

3.12

eSpace VTM System Training

3.12.1 eSpace VTM Basic Operation and Maintenance Training


Describe eSpace CC system architecture

Training Path

Describe eSpace CC AEP function


Describe eSpace CC multimedia features

eSpace CC Solution Introduction

Lecture

OCC01

Describe eSpace CC outbound function


0.5d

Describe eSpace CC report function


Describe eSpace CC QC function
Describe eSpace CC monitoring function

eSpace CC Gateway Service Commissioning

OCC11Lecture+, Hands-on exercise 1.5d

Describe eSpace CC agent function


Describe U2900 series gateway system
structure and function
Describe U2900 series gateway hardware
structure

eSpace VTM Solution and Composing

Describe U2900 series gateway software

Principle

Lecture

OCCB1

1d

structure
Describe U2900 series gateway interfaces and
protocols
Describe U2900 series gateway function and

eSpace VTM system Installation and


Commissioning

OCCB2

specification

Lecture, hands-on
exercise

2d

Analyze U2900 series gateway networking


Describe prefix, office direction, signaling link,
trunk circuit
Master eSapce VTM Solution and product

eSpace VTM system operation

orientation

OCCB3

Lecture, hands-on
exercise

1d

Know eSpace VTM functions and features


Know eSpace VTM functional unit
Master eSpace VTM assemblies function and

eSpace VTM system maintenance

OCCB4

Lecture, hands-on
exercise

principle
1d

Master eSpace VTM assemblies network


connection
Know the message handing flow of eSpace VTM

Target Audience

signal, data and files.

Operators and maintainers

Master eSpace VTM system installation logic

Service managers

Master eSpace VTM system assemblies

Prerequisites

installation and configuration


Master eSpace VTM system assemblies

Communication basic knowledge


Contact Center Fundamental knowledge

Objectives
Describe enterprise communication concepts
Describe eSpace CC concepts

connection and configuration


Know eSpace VTM system service
commissioning
Master the main work content and operation for
system administrator in different scenario

Master the main work content and operation for


quality inspector in different scenario

recovery principle and strategy

Duration

Master the main work content and operation for


counter in different scenario
Master eSpace VTM system daily maintenance
Master eSpace VTM reboot flow when power off
Master eSpace VTM system and user password
setttings
Master eSpace VTM system back-up and

7 working days, including hands-on exercise


2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

3.13

VC Operation and Maintenance Training

3.13.1 Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC/RSE) Operation and


Maintenance Training
Describe Huawei Video Conference System

Training Path

Overview
Video Conference System Overview

Lecture

OVC01

Describe Huawei video conference technology


innovation
0.5d

Describe Huawei video conference solution


Describe H.323 protocol structure
Describe H.323 protocol registration flow
Master video conference schedule signaling

H.323 Protocol
Lecture

OVC03

0.5d

flow
Learn HD Terminal product positioning, product
specifications
Master HD Terminal product features

HD Terminal Operation and Maintenance

OVC11/12/13 Lecture, Hands-on

Know the Hardware Structure of HD Terminal


1.d

Know the installation and initial configuration of


HD Terminal
Know the operation of remote controller of HD
Terminal

MCU Operation and Maintenance

Know the maintenance and diagnostics of HD

OVC21/22 Lecture, Hands-on

1d

Terminal
Know how to upgrade the software of HD
Terminal
Know MCU structure composing

SMC Operation and Maintenance

OVC31/32 Lecture, Hands-on

1d

Know MCU basic feature


Know MCU boards and daughter boards
Master MCU Web basic configuration
Master MCU outside GK scenario conference

RSE Operation and Maintenance

OVC51

Lecture, Hands-on

configuration
1d

Master MCU built-in GK scenario conference


configuration
Know MCU Web advanced settings

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Administrators
Prerequisites
Know video conference communication basic
knowledge
Know video conference development process
and trend

Master MCU software upgrade


Master MCU fault disposal flow
Master MCU fault disposal routine methods
Master MCU routine fault disposal methods
Know SMC2.0definition
Describe SMC2.0 functions of Huawei video
conference
Master SMC2.0 system structure
Master SMC2.0 system main function
Master SMC2.0 routine operation

Master SMC2.0 routine Maintenance

Master Basic Operation of Recording System

Master SMC2.0 routine fault and exclude

Know Typical Network of Recording System

methods

Duration

Master SMC2.0 conference schedule


Master SMC2.0 conference control
Master SMC2.0 routine Maintenance
Master SMC2.0 routine fault disposal
Know Product Forms, Performance
Specifications of Recording Server

5 working days, including Hands-on


exercise 2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

3.13.2 Video Conference System(Terminal/MCU/SMC) Advanced Features Operation


and Maintenance Training
Training Path

Know the Advanced Features of the VP 9000


and TE series

SIP Protocol

OVC04

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Master the Maintenance and Fault Diagnosis

1d

Understand Basic Concept and Working


Principle of MCU
Know Application Scenarios and Use Methods of
Advanced Features of MCU

Video Conference System-Advanced

Know Basic Troubleshooting Methods for MCU

OVC0A

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

4d

Target Audience

Understand Basic Concepts and Working


Principle of SMC Platform
Know Application Scenarios and Usage Methods
of Advanced Features of SMC Platform

Monitoring Staffs
Operators and Maintainers
Administrators
Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

Be Familiar with Basic Fault Location Methods


on SMC Platform
Master Diagnostic Functions Provided by the
Network Diagnostician
Master Network Statistics Query Using NLog
Master Basic Approaches to Troubleshooting
Videoconferencing System
Master How to Troubleshoot Terminals
Master How to Troubleshoot Service
Management Center (SMC)

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Master How to Troubleshoot Multipoint Control

Understand the Usage of SIP

Understand Basic Concepts and Functions of

Understand SIP Commands


Know the Signaling Process of SIP Messages
Know Session Description Protocol (SDP)
Understand Common SIP Call Process and SDP
Negotiation Process
Understand the Concept and Structure of the
Integrated Videoconferencing System
Know Components of a Videoconferencing
Room

Units (MCUs)
Firewall
Master Problems and Solutions of Video
Services under Firewall
Master Typical Problems and Positioning Method
of Video Services under Firewall

Duration

5 working days, including Hands-on exercise


1.25 working days
Class Size

Understand Installation Skills of Different


Videoconferencing Rooms

Min 6, Max 12

3.13.3 TP/RP Series Product Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path
TP/RP Product Introduction

Lecture

OVC41

0.25d

TP/RP Routine Operation and


Maintenance

OVC42

Lecture, Hands-on

1.75d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Administrators
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Know Huawei telepresence basic feature
Know Huawei telepresence development and tend
Know Huawei telepresence series product
Know Huawei telepresence product principle
Know Huawei telepresence product structure
Describe Huawei telepresence application scenarios
Master Huawei telepresence conference operation
Master Huawei telepresence conference control operation
Master Huawei telepresence conference troubleshooting
Know Huawei telepresence series product software upgrade
Know telepresence product fault classification
Master telepresence product troubleshooting methods
Describe telepresence product troubleshooting cases

Duration

2 working days, including Hands-on exercise 0.25 working days


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

3.14

Huawei eSpace IVS System Training

3.14.1 Huawei IVS System Operation and Maintenance Training


know how to configure and operate IVS system

Training Path

via OMU Portal


Basic knowledge of video surveillance system

Lecture

OVS01

Know how to use the basic functions of eSpace


IVS

0.5d

Know how to add a camera to the IVS platform


Have basic understanding on the rights system

Huawei IVS System Operation and

Configure roles and users

Maintenance Training

Configure the recording system

OVS03

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

4.5d

Target Audience

Use the recording function


Know the structure of the alarm system
Know the operation process of the alarm system
Deploy the eSpace IVS alarm system

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Know eSpace IVS's central devices

Operators and Maintainers

Know how to log in to and operate the decoder

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology
A basic understanding of Huawei eSpace IVS
system primary daily operation and maintenance

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Know video surveillance systems at different
development stages
Know typical video surveillance solutions
Describe video surveillance development

Know the common troubleshooting methods


Be familiar with typical troubleshooting cases
Know the classification, structure, and fittings of
cameras
Know common image processing technologies
employed by cameras
Know how to select appropriate cameras
Know Huawei IPC Series Products
Describe hardware features of Huawei video
surveillance IP cameras (IPCs)
Know IPC Fittings
Describe hardware features of Huawei video
surveillance IP cameras (IPCs).

Know Huawei's VCN3000

Know how to install various types of IPCs

Know the architecture of Huaweis IVS Platform

Familarize with Huawei IPC web management

Know typical networking modes


Master typical service processes.
Know the relationship between VCN3000
internal interfaces.
Know the relationship between VCN3000
external interfaces.
Know how to install VCN3000 hardware.
Know the process of installing the VMU twonode cluster
Know the OMU Web management system

pages
Know how to perform basic operations on IPC
web pages
Know the basic troubleshooting procedures
Be familiar with typical troubleshooting cases
Know FAQs

Duration

5working daysincluding hands-on exercise


2 working days

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

3.14.2 VCM Intelligent Analysis System Deployment and Management Training


Know VCM network system

Training Path

Know VCM basic functions and application

Basic knowledge of VCM Intelligent


Analysis System
Lecture
0.5d
OVS04

scenarios
Know network planning of VCM system
Master VCM system installation steps
Know VCM system

VCM Intelligent Analysis System


Deployment and Management
Lecture, Hands-on
OVS05
exercise

Know VCM login note


Describe the configuration process of VCM
2.5d

Target Audience

system
Know VCM system configuration
Master VCM system handling operation
Know the VCM management system operation

Installers and Commissioning Staffs

Master VCM system inspection function

Operators and Maintainers

Master VCM system troubleshooting

Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Know basic knowledge of VCM products

Know each module in VCM log system

Duration

3 working daysincluding hands-on exercise


1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

3.15

Enterprise Network Management System eSight-UCC Training

3.15.1 eSight-UCC Operation and Maintenance Training


Describe about physical resource

Training Path

management functions
Use link resource management functions

eSight Enterprise NMS Operation and


Maintenance

ONM11

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Use electronic label management features


Use about NE Explorer

2d

Describes the monitoring network alarm steps


Use Monitoring Alarms/Alarm Analysis features

Target Audience

Describes the setting alarm mask steps

Operators and Maintainers

Describes the remote alarm notification

Monitoring Staffs

procedure

Administrators

Describes the basic concepts of performance

Prerequisites

management
Describes the performance monitoring process

A general familiarity with PC operation system

Describes the ways to browsing performance

A basic understanding of computer technology

monitoring data

A basic understanding of IP network

Describe the flow of backing up NE

Objectives

configuration files
Describe common operations for managing NE

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

configuration files
Describe the flow of restoring NE configuration

Describe the basic concepts of network

files

management

Describe the steps of setting FTP and backing

Describe the network management functions

up parameters

Describe the network management component

Describe an overview of the functions provided

Describe the enterprise network overview

by the smart configuration tool

Describe the basic functions of eSight

Describe operation steps of the Deployment by

Describe the networking mode of eSight

template

system

Describe operation steps of the Deployment by

Describe eSight related indicators

plan sheet

Describe the installation profile

Describe the functions of Deployment record

Master the eSight installation and uninstall

management

steps

Describe Setting eSight Data Overflow Dump

Master eSight license function and application

Describe querying logs

Describe the user authority control and

Describe Lower-Layer NMS

managed domain management of eSight

Describe licenses management

Describe topology management

Describe backing up and restoring the

Describe the steps of accessing a resource

231

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

exercise 1 working day

database
Describe NE packages management

Class Size

Duration

Min 6, Max 12

2 working daysincluding hands-on

232

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

3.15.2 eSight-UCC UC Business Management Training


Training Path

eSight-UCC UC Business
Management
Lecture, Hands-on
OUC81
exercise

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Understand basic UC device management

0.5d

functions supported by the eSight


Understand simple processes of managing UC

Target Audience

devices on the eSight

Operators and Maintainers


Duration

Monitoring Staffs
Administrators

0.5 working daysincluding hands-on


exercise 0.25 working day

Prerequisites

Class Size

A general familiarity with PC operation system


A basic understanding of computer technology

Min 6, Max 12

233

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

3.15.3 eSight-UCC TP&VC Business Management Training


participants will be able to:

Training Path

Understand the telepresence configuration


query and conference diagnosis features
eSight-UCC TP&VC Business Management

OUC81

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Master the procedure for telepresence


configuration query

0.5d

Master the procedures for SMC configuration


and diagnosis before and during a conference

Target Audience

Understand that eSight, routers, telepresence

Operators and Maintainers

devices, and telepresence SMC must work

Monitoring Staffs

together to enable telepresence conference

Administrators

diagnosis

Prerequisites

Duration

A general familiarity with PC operation system

0.5 working daysincluding hands-on

A basic understanding of computer technology

exercise 0.25 working day

Objectives

Class Size

On completion of this program, the

Min 6, Max 12

234

2015 Huawei Product and Knowledge Enterprise Customer Training Manual

3.15.4 eSight-UCC IVS Business Management Training


Training Path

eSight-UCC IVS Business Management

OVS11

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

0.5d

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers


Monitoring Staffs
Administrators
Prerequisites
A general familiarity with PC operation system
A basic understanding of computer technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Have a basic knowledge of configuration
management, service tracing, and data
analysis in video surveillance
Know how to perform video surveillance
operation and maintenance (O&M)
management operations
Know how to use the configuration
management, service tracing, and data
analysis functions in video surveillance

Duration

0.5 working daysincluding hands-on


exercise 0.25 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

235

Training Programs

236

Training Programs

4 Enterprise IT Training Courses


4.1 Training Path
4.1.1

Storage Career Certification Training Path

Expert

Professional

HCNP-Storage-CUSN
Constructing Unified
Storage Network
5d

HCNP-Storage-CBDS
Constructing Big Data
Solution
5d

HCNA-Storage-BSSN
Building the Structure of
Storage Network
5d

Associate

Elective Guide

Follow the path to learn.

237

HCNP-Storage-CDPS
Constructing Data
Protection System
5d

Training Programs

4.1.2

Cloud Computing Certification Training Path

Expert

Professional

HCNP-Cloud-FCDC

HCNP-Cloud-FCDS

FusionCloud DataCenter

FusionCloud Desktop

Solution

Solution

3d

HCNP-Cloud-BDAP
Building Big Data

3d

HCNA-Cloud-BCCP
Building Cloud Computing
Platform
5d

Associate

Elective Guide
Follow the path to learn

238

Analysis Platform

3d

Training Programs

4.1.3

Server Specialist Certification Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design
Training

Implement & Operate


Operation and Maintenance
Training
Server Specialist Certification
Training Programs

Improve
Advanced Technology
Training

3d

Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include RH V2/V3 series, X6000, E6000 and E9000 products trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: the infrastructure of the data center, the cloud computing
infrastructure and IT infrastructure.

Operators and Maintainers, Managers, Designers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and
maintenance, planning and design training programs respectively.

239

Training Programs

4.1.4

Data Center Specialist Certification Training Path

Plan & Design

Implement & Operate

Planning and Design Training


Enterprise Data Center Network
Design Training

Improve

Operation and Maintenance


Training

Advanced Technology
Training

HCS-Field-MicroDC Training

1d

2d
Enterprise Data Center Security
Design Training

1d
Enterprise Data Center Disaster
Recovery and Backup Design
Training
2d

Technology IP Technology Foundation


Foundation Training (Fast-Track)
Training (In 13 IP Programs)

3d

Firewall Technology Foundation


Training (In13 Security
Programs)
2d

Storage Technology
Foundation Training

1d

Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include Data Center Solution products trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: Micro DC solution and large-scale data center solutions.

Operators and Maintainers, Managers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and maintenance
training programs respectively.

240

Training Programs

4.1.5

Unified Storage Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training
OceanStor Unified Storage

System Design Training


1d

Implement & Operate


Operation and Maintenance
Training

T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/
68T)Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training

4d
T SeriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/
68T)Storage Array Deployment and
Management Training (Fast-Track)

2d
T SeriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T)
Storage System Deployment and
Management Training

4d

OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end


Storage System Deployment and
4d
Management Training
SNS Series (SNS2124/SNS2224/
SNS2248) FC Switch Product
Deployment and Management Training

1d
Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage
System Deployment and
2d
Management Training

VIS6000T Series Virtual


Storage Gateway System
Deployment and Management
3d
Training
V3 series(53/55/56/58/68/69)Storage
System Deployment and Management
Training
5d
Huawei Storage System
Troubleshooting Training

2d
Storage Technology
Foundation Training

Storage Fundamental
Technology Training
1d

Elective Guide

241

Improve
Advanced Technology
Training

OceanStor Unified Storage


System Advanced Feature

1d

Training Programs

The training programs in the path include T series storage array OceanStor 18500/18800, SNS, Dorado, VIS6000T
products and technologies trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: centralized storage, backup, storage virtualization, disaster
recovery, cloud computing storage infrastructure and data center storage infrastructure.

Operators and Maintainers, Managers, Designers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and
maintenance, planning and design training programs respectively.

The Fast-Track Training is designed for the audiences of relevant technical background.

242

Training Programs

4.1.6

Massive Storage Training Path

Plan & Design

Implement & Operate

Planning and Design Training


Enterprise Big Data Storage
Design Training

1d

Operation and Maintenance


Training

OceanStor 9000 Storage System


Deployment and Management
Training
3d
N8500V2 Clustered NAS
System Deployment and
Management Training

Technology Foundation
Training

Improve
Advanced Technology
Training

Big Data Storage Advanced


Technology Training

1d

3d

Storage Fundamental
Technology Training
1d

Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include OceanStor 9000, N8500, VTL6900 and HDP3500E products and
technologies trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: file sharing, file-level data centralized storage and
management, unstructured data backup and management, file-level DST, file system backup and disaster recovery.

Operators and Maintainers, Managers, Designers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and
maintenance, planning and design training programs respectively.

243

Training Programs

4.1.7

Server Products Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design
Training

Implement & Operate


Operation and Maintenance
Training
RH V2 Series Rack Server
Deployment and Management
Training
1d

Improve
Advanced Technology
Training

RH V3 Series Rack Server


Deployment and Management
Training
1d
X6000 Series Server
Deployment and Management
Training
1d

E6000 Series Blade Server


Deployment and Management
Training
1d
E9000 Series Blade Server
Deployment and Management
Training
1d

Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include RH V2/V3 series, X6000, E6000 and E9000 products trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: the infrastructure of the data center, the cloud computing
infrastructure and IT infrastructure.

Operators and Maintainers, Managers, Designers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and
maintenance, planning and design training programs respectively.

244

Training Programs

4.1.8

Cloud Computing Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training

Implement & Operate


Operation and Maintenance
Training

Improve
Advanced Technology
Training

Desktop Cloud Solution(R5)


Deployment and Management

3d

FusionCube Solution Deployment


and Management Training

2d
FusionInsight Solution
Deployment and Management

1d

Training

FusionShpere[R3 or R5]
Solution Deployment and
Management Training
2d/3d

Technology Foundation
Training
Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include, FusionSphere Solution, Desktop Cloud Solution, FusionCube and
FusionInsight trainings.

FusionCube and Desktop Cloud solution need FusionSphere knowledge. Its suggested to sale these two training
solution together. If customers are familiar with FusionSphere already, they can buy the need courses only.

Operators and Maintainers, Managers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and maintenance
training programs respectively.

245

Training Programs

4.1.9

IT Network Management Training

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training

Implement & Operate


Operation and Maintenance
Training

Enterprise Network Management

Improve
Advanced Technology
Training

eSight-IT O&M Training

1 day

Technology
Foundation Training
Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include eSight V3R2 product technologies trainings.

The training programs cover the following scenarios: data center IT equipments management.

Operators and Maintainers are proposed to learn the operation and maintenance training programs.

246

Training Programs

4.1.10 Disaster Recovery and Backup Training Path

Plan & Design

Implement & Operate

Planning and Design


Training

Operation and Maintenance


Training
OceanStor Backup
Solution

Disaster Recovery and Backup


Design Training

Deployment and Management

1d

4d

Training

Improve
Advanced Technology
Training

Disaster Recovery and Backup


Advanced Technology Training

1d

Business Continuity and Disaster

Recovery Solution Deployment


and Management Training

3d

VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library


System Introduction

3d

Storage Technology
Foundation Training

Storage Technology Foundation


Training

1d

Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include VTL6900/OceanStor Backup Solution/ Business Continuity and Disaster
Recovery Solution

OceanStor Backup Solution Deployment and Management Training2 type of scenes

Disk-DiskFilesystem Backup/Oracle RAC Backup/VMware Backup

Disk-VTLOracle Database Backup

Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Solution Deployment and Management TrainingActivePassive/Active-Active/3DC

Disaster Recovery and Backup Advanced Technology TrainingDisaster Recovery and Backup Key
technology/Feature and network

Disaster Recovery and Backup Design TrainingDisaster Recovery and Backup Plan/Design/method

VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System IntroductionVTL6900 is required in Disk-VTL backup scenethis course
introduces knowledge of VTL product

Operators and Maintainers, Managers, Designers are proposed to learn the technology foundation,
operation and maintenance, planning and design training programs respectively

247

Training Programs

4.2 Required Training Programs

Training Programs

Level

Duration
(working
days)

Training
Location
(Proposed)

Class
Size

Storage Career Certification Training


HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage
Network Training

6~12

HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage


Network Training(Fast-Track , For channel )

6~12

HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage


Network Training

6~12

HCNP-Storage-CBDS Constructing Big Data Solution


Training

6~12

HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection


System Training

6~12

HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing


Platform Training

6~12

HCNP-Cloud-FCDC FusionCloud DataCenter Solution


Training

6~12

HCNP-Cloud-BDAP Building Big Data Analysis


Platform Training

6~12

HCNP-Cloud-FCDS FusionCloud Desktop Solution


Training

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

Cloud Computing Career Certification Training

Server Specialist Certification Training


HCS-Field-Server Training
Data Center Specialist Certification Training
HCS-Field-MicroDC Training
IT Fundamental Training
Storage Fundamental Technology Training
IT Advanced Training
OceanStor Unified Storage System Advanced Feature
Training

248

6~12

Training Programs

OceanStor Unified Storage System Design Training

6~12

Big Data Storage Advanced Technology Training

6~12

Big Data Storage Design Training

6~12

Disaster Recovery and Backup Advanced Technology


Training

Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training

6~12

6~12

Unified Storage Training


T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage
System and Management Training
T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage
System Deployment and Management Training (FastTrack , For channel )

T seriesV2 (55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System


Deployment and Management Training

OceanStor V3 Storage System Deployment and


Management Training

OceanStor18500/18800 High-end Storage System


Deployment and Management Training

SNS Series(SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248) FC Switch


Deployment and Management Training

Dorado2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System


Deployment and Management Training

VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System


Deployment and Management Training

Huawei Storage System Troubleshooting Training

OceanStor 9000 Storage System Deployment and


Management Training

N8500 V2 Cluster NAS System Deployment and


Management Training

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

Massive Storage Training


6~12

6~12

Data Protection Training


VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and
Management Training

249

6~12

Training Programs

Server Training
RH V2 Series Rack Server Deployment and
Management Training

RH V3 Series Rack Server Deployment and


Management Training

X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management


Training

E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and


Management Training

E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server


Deployment and Management Training

Huawei Server Troubleshooting Training

Desktop Cloud Solution R5 Deployment and


Management Training

FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management


Training

FusionSphere Solution R3 Deployment and


Management Training

FusionSphere Solution R5 Deployment and


Management Training

FusionInsight Solution Deployment and Management


Training

Huawei Cloud Computing System Troubleshooting


Training

OceanStor Backup Solution Deployment and


Management Training

Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Solution


Deployment and Management Training

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

Cloud Computing Training


6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

IT Network Management Training


Enterprise Network Management eSight-IT Operation
and Maintenance Training

6~12

Disaster Recovery and Backup Solution Training

Level Description: : Basic Course : Intermediate Course : Advanced Course

250

6~12

6~12
: Expert

Training Programs

Course
Proposed Training Location: If the training delivery will be In China and only contain IT trainings, its
highly recommended to be held in Chengdu city as IT instructor team and the best IT lab locate
there.

251

Training Programs

4.3 Training Programs


4.4 Storage Career Certification Training Programs
4.4.1

HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network Training

Training Path

key technologies
Understand the basic concepts and structures

HCNA-BSSN Huawei Certified Network Associate-

of a NAS system

Building the Structure of Storage Network)


OHC11

Master multipath technology and host

Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Demo 5d

connection basics for both the technology and

Target Audience

application
Understand Huawei all series storage product

Those who want to be storage engineer

feature and main application

Those who want to achieve HCNA-Storage

Master SAN storage array product function,

certification

hardware, interface, network and typical

Operators

application
Master storage array and mapping configuration

IT Managers

on ISM

Planners and Designers

Master SAN storage product routine

Prerequisites

maintenance and troubleshooting


Understand the application scenarios and key

Have basic network knowledge


Have basic computer knowledge

technologies of Backup and Disaster Recovery.


Understand the background and

Have basic knowledge of Windows/Linux

application scenarios of Big Data.


Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Understand the status quo and key

technologies of Cloud Computing.


Duration

Know the basics of storage systems and

5 working days, including 1.5 days of


hands-on practice

networks, structures and components


Understand the basics of RAID concepts,
common RAID principles, features and different

Class Size

RAID application scenarios

Min 6, Max 12

Identify the basics of the FC-SAN and IP-SAN

252

Training Programs

4.4.2

HCNA-Storage-BSSN Building the Structure of Storage Network

Training(Fast-Track , For channel )


Training Path
HCNA-BSSN Huawei Certified Network Associate- Building the
Structure of Storage Network Fast-Track , For channel
OHC11092
Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Demo
3d

Target Audience

Those who want to be storage engineer


Those who have storage background , but dont know Huaweis storage array, and they want to
achieve HCNA-Storage certification
Operators
IT Managers
Planners and Designers
Prerequisites
Have basic network knowledge
Have basic computer knowledge
Have basic knowledge of Windows/Linux
Have storage background, understand storage basic knowledge,such as RAID,LUN,SAN,NAS, Backup,
Disaster Recovery.

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Master multipath technology and host connection basics for both the technology and application
Understand Huawei all series storage product feature and main application
Master SAN storage array product function, hardware, interface, network and typical application
Master storage array and mapping configuration on ISM
Master SAN storage product routine maintenance and troubleshooting

Duration

working days ,including 1.5 days for lab


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

253

Training Programs

4.4.3

HCNP-Storage-CUSN Constructing Unified Storage Network Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Master unified storage structure,

HCNP- CUSN Huawei Certified Network Associate-

component

Constructing Unified Storage Network

Know storage data process and

OHC12091

Lecture, Hands-on exercise, 5d


Demo
Target Audience

communication protocol, principle and


application
Know storage system advanced

Enterprise ICT technology


management personal and IT
technology personal

technology and application


Know connection and application between
storage and mainstream OS platforms

Those who hope to systemically learn


and master storage technology and
application, build information storage
and data protection solution ability
Maintainers

Master storage system fault diagnosis


and disposal method
Understand storage performance factor
and optimization
Master storage system and network

Managers

(SAN) common technology and

Planners and Designers

application; master information storage

Prerequisites

system and SAN storage solution plan,


deployment, management and

Know server basal knowledge and

maintenance ability

application

Duration

Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and


technology

5 working days

Understand storage system basal

Class Size

operation and technology

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

254

Training Programs

4.4.4

HCNP-Storage-CBDS Constructing Big Data Solution Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

HCNP-CBDS Huawei Certified Network ProfessionalConstructing Big Data Solution


OHC12092 Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Demo

Be familiar with Big Data concept,

5d

development and key technology

Target Audience

Be familiar with Big Data Storage solution

Enterprise ICT technology management


personal and IT technology personal

architecture and technology: distributed


Storage, clustered NAS,DST, load

Those who hope to systemically learn and


master storage technology and
application, build information storage and
data protection solution ability Maintainers

balancing , quota, connection, file system


snapshot, mirror and replication technology
Command Big Data Storage OceanStor9000
architecture, network planning, deployment,

Managers

operation and management


Command Big Data Storage troubleshooting

Planners and Designers

Command Big Data Storage solution

Prerequisites

planning programming
Know server basal knowledge and

Duration

application
Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology
Understand main OS and DB operation and

5 working days
Class Size

technology

Min 6, Max 12

255

Training Programs

4.4.5

HCNP-Storage-CDPS Constructing Data Protection System Training

Training Path

Objectives

HCNP-CDPS Huawei Certified Network


Professional- Constructing Data Protection System

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OHC12093Lecture, Hands-on exercise, Demo

Be familiar with backup and recovery system

5d

architecture, backup component, backup media,

Target Audience

Backup mode and strategy

Enterprise ICT technology management


personal and IT technology personal

Be familiar with backup network, backup and

Those who hope to systemically learn and


master storage technology and application,
build information storage and data protection
solution ability Maintainers

Know DR solution, especially the cloud disaster

recovery technology and application


technology and application scenario
Command backup system troubleshooting
Command backup DR technology and

Managers

application, master backup and recovery system

Planners and Designers

and data protection solution plan, deployment


and management

Prerequisites
Know server basal knowledge and application

Duration

5 working days

Know SAN,NAS concept and technology


Understand mainstream database system basal

Class Size

operation and technology

Min 6, Max 12

256

Training Programs

4.5 Cloud Computing Career Certification Training Programs


4.5.1

HCNA-Cloud-BCCP Building Cloud Computing Platform Training


Be familiar with basic knowledge of

Training Path

FusionStorage solution

HCNA-BCCP Huawei Certified Network


Associate-Building Cloud Computing Platform

OHC11

Lecture, hands-on exercise

Describe the hardware structure of Huawei Cloud


Computing solution

5d

Be familiar with basic knowledge of Huawei

Target Audience

server
Be familiar with basic knowledge of Huawei

Those who hope to become Cloud


Computing engineers

storage
Be familiar with basic knowledge of Huawei

Those who hope to obtain HCNA-Cloud


certificate

switch
Be familiar with basic knowledge of Huawei TC

Operators and Maintainers

devices

Administrators

Master the typical hardware deployment mode of

Planners and designers

Huawei Cloud Computing solution

Prerequisites

Describe the function of FusionCompute

Be familiar with basic knowledge of network

Be familiar with the structure of FusionCompute

Be familiar with basic knowledge of server

Master the features of FusionCompute

Be familiar with basic knowledge of storage

Describe the function of FusionManager


Be familiar with the structure of FusionManager

Objectives

Master the features of FusionManager

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Be familiar with the structure and function of


FusionAccess

Describe the basic concept of Cloud Computing

Master the service process of FusionAccess

Describe the deployment and business mode of

Describe the features of FusionAccess

Cloud Computing

Be familiar with the structure of FusionInsight

Describe the values and applications of Cloud

Master the function of FusionInsight

Computing

Describe the deployment of Huawei Cloud

Describe the strategy of Huawei Cloud

Computing solution

Computing

Describe the design of Huawei Cloud Computing

Be familiar with computing virtualization

solution

technology

Master the configuration of Huawei Cloud

Be familiar with storage virtualization technology

Computing hardware

Be familiar with network virtualization technology

Master the configuration of Huawei Cloud

Be familiar with basic knowledge of

Computing software

FusionSphere solution

Master the configuration of Huawei Cloud

Be familiar with basic knowledge of FusionCube


solution
Be familiar with basic knowledge of

Computing service

Duration

5 working days

FusionAccess solution

257

Training Programs

Class Size

Min 6, max 12

258

Training Programs

4.5.2

HCNP-Cloud-FCDC FusionCloud DataCenter Solution Training

Training Path
HCNP-Cloud- FCDC Huawei Certified
Network Professional- FusionCloud
DataCenter Solution
Lecture, hands-on exercise
OHC12

participants will be able to:


Familiar with Cloud OS Concept and Main
components
Familiar with Huawei FusionSphere Datacenter

3d

Virtualization Solution

Target Audience

Describe the features and theories of


Computing virtualization

Those who hope to become Cloud


Computing engineers

Describe the features and theories of Storage


virtualization

Those who hope to obtain HCNP-Cloud


certificate

Describe the features and theories of


Networking virtualization

Operators and Maintainers

Know typical devices passthrough thechnology

Administrators

and theory

Planners and designers

Master Huawei Private and Hybrid Cloud

Prerequisites

Solution
Master Huawei cloud computing troubshooting

Be familiar with operation system basic

processes and methods

knowledge and applications

Know the processes and methods of cloud

Be familiar with server basic knowledge and

project design

applications

Design Private Cloud solution based on Huawei

Be familiar with network security basic

FusionSphere

knowledge and applications


Be familiar with storage basic knowledge and

Duration

applications
Be familiar with virtualization basic knowledge

Objectives

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

On completion of this program, the

259

Training Programs

4.5.3

HCNP-Cloud-BDAP Building Big Data Analysis Platform Training

Training Path
HCNP-Cloud-BDAP Huawei Certified
Network Professional-Building Big Data
Analysis Platform
Lecture, hands-on exercise
OHC12

participants will be able to:


Describe FusionInsight solution
Describe FusionInsight HD architecture
Describe HDFS component features

3d

Describe MapReduce component features

Target Audience

Describe YARN component features

Those who hope to become Cloud


Computing engineers

Describe Spark component features

Those who hope to obtain HCNP-Cloud


certificate

Describe HBase component features

Operators and Maintainers

Describe Loader component features

Administrators

Describe Flume component features

Planners and designers

Describe FusionInsight Manager features

Describe Kerberos component features


Describe Hive component features

Master the integrated design of FusionInsight

Prerequisites

Master the installation and deployment of

Be familiar with datacom basic knowledge and

FusionInsight

applications

Master the routine maintenance of

Be familiar with server basic knowledge and


applications
Be familiar with network security basic

FusionInsight

Duration

3 working days

knowledge and applications


Be familiar with storage basic knowledge and

Class Size

applications

Min 6, max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

260

Training Programs

4.5.4

HCNP-Cloud-FCDS FusionCloud Desktop Solution Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe FusionCloud Desktop solution

HCNP-Cloud-FCDS Huawei Certified


Network Professional-FusionCloud Desktop
Solution
Lecture, hands-on exercise 3d
OHC12

Describe the advantage of FusionCloud Desktop


solution
Describe the architecture of FusionAccess

Target Audience

Master the features and theories of


FusionAccess

Those who hope to become Cloud


Computing engineers

Master the components and the principle


Master AD(Active Directory) features

Those who hope to obtain HCNP-Cloud


certificate

Master DNS feature

Operators and Maintainers

Master DHCP feature

Administrators

Familiar with FusionAccess redirection

Planners and designers

Master FusionAccess key service process


Familiar with high security of FusionAccess

Prerequisites

Master FusionAccess Deploy process


Be familiar with operation system basic

Master the routine maintenance of FusionAccess

knowledge and applications

Master FusionAccess troubshooting processes

Be familiar with server basic knowledge and


applications
Be familiar with network security basic

and methods

Duration

3 working days

knowledge and applications


Be familiar with storage basic knowledge and

Class Size

applications

Min 6, max 12

Be familiar with virtualization basic knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

261

Training Programs

4.6 Server Specialist Certification Training Programs


4.6.1

HCS-Field-Server Training

Training Path

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows and Linux

Basic Knowledge on Huawei Servers

OSV71

Lecture

Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP


Know basic knowledge of server

0.3 d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Product Knowledge on Huawei Server

OSV72

Lecture

0.7 d

Master server basic knowledge


Describe the models, position, main functions
and application scenarios of RH series rack

Huawei Server Site Survey

OSV73

Lecture

servers, X series high density server, E6000


blade server and E9000 Converged

0.2d

Infrastructure Blade Server


Master the hardware structure, views and

Hardware Installation and Cable


Connection of Huawei Servers
Lecture
OSV74

interface of RH series rack servers, X series high


density server, E6000 blade server and E9000
Converged Infrastructure Blade Server.

0.2 d

Master Huawei server site survey process and


key points

Huawei Server Configuration and


Operation
Lecture
OSV75

Master the hardware installation and cabling of


RH series rack servers, X series high density
0.4 d

server, E6000 blade server and E9000


Converged Infrastructure Blade Server

Routine Maintenance and


Troubleshooting for Servers
Lecture
OSV76

Master BMC function, management and


maintenance of RH series rack servers, X series
high density server, E6000 blade server and

0.2 d

E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server.


Master RAID plan and configuration of RH series

E9000 Blade Server Product


Technology
Lecture
OSV77

rack servers, X series high density server, E6000


blade server and E9000 Converged
Infrastructure Blade Server.

1d

Master OS installation method of RH series rack


servers, X series high density server, E6000

Target Audience

blade server and E9000 Converged


Infrastructure Blade Server.

Operators and Maintainers

Master management and operation of MM

Administrators

module of E6000 and E9000 server.


Master management and operation of switch
module of E6000 and E9000 server.
262

Training Programs
Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts

of RH series rack servers, X series high density

replacement of RH series rack servers, X series

server, E6000 blade server and E9000

high density server, E6000 blade server and

Converged Infrastructure Blade Server.

E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server.

Duration

Master the methods of log collection of RH

3 working days

series rack servers, X series high density server,


E6000 blade server and E9000 Converged

Class Size

Infrastructure Blade Server.

Min 6, max 12

Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods

263

Training Programs

4.7 Data Center Specialist Certification Training Programs


4.7.1

HCS-Field-MicroDC Training

Training Path

hardware architecture
Know MicroDC solution typical application
scenarios

HCS-Field-MicroDC
ODC01

Lecture

Familiar with MicroDC solution planning and

1d

design

Target Audience

Familiar with MicroDC solution hardware


installation

Operators and Maintainers

Familiar with MicroDC solution software

Administrators

deployment

Planners and Designers

Know the HUAWEI devices commissioning

Prerequisites

methods

Know basic computer knowledge

Know MicroDC daily maintenance

Know basic IP technology and knowledge

Master MicroDC troubleshooting methods

Know server knowledge

Duration

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

1 working dayincluding 0.25 day hands-on


practice
Class Size

Know requirements and position of MicroDC

Min 6, Max 12

solution
Know MicroDC solution software structure and

264

Training Programs

4.8 IT Fundamental Training Programs


4.8.1

Storage Fundamental Technology Training

Training Path

Understand the basics of RAID concepts,


common RAID principles, features and different

Storage Technology Foundation

RAID application scenarios

OST01

Lecture

Identify the basics of the FC-SAN and IP-SAN

1d

key technologies

Target Audience

Understand the basic concepts and structures of


a NAS system

Operators and Maintainers

Master multipath technology and host

Prerequisites

connection basics for both the technology and


Know computer basal knowledge
Know OS basal knowledge

application
Duration

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Know the basics of storage systems and


networks, structures and components

265

Training Programs

4.9 IT Advanced Training Programs


4.9.1

OceanStor Unified Storage System Advanced Feature Training

Training Path

Objectives

OceanStor Unified Storage System Advanced


Feature

OST0A

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Master unified storage structure, component

1d

Know storage data process and communication

Target Audience

protocol, principle and application

Operators and Maintainers

Know storage system advanced technology and

Managers
Planners and Designers

application

Duration

Prerequisites

1 working day
Know server basal knowledge and application

Class Size

Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology

Min 6, Max 12

Understand main OS and DB operation and


technology

266

Training Programs

4.9.2

OceanStor Unified Storage System Design Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OceanStor Unified Storage System Design

OST0B

Lecture

Be familiar with SAN system

1d

Be familiar with SAN system plan process

Target Audience

Planners and Designers


Manager

Be familiar with SAN system plan methods

Duration

1 working day

Prerequisites
Know PC OS

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Know basal computer knowledge


Know basal storage technology

267

Training Programs

4.9.3

Big Data Storage Advanced Technology Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Be familiar with Big Data background

Big Data Storage Advanced Technology

Be familiar with Huaweis Big data basic

Training

OST0C

Lecture

technology, like Erasure Code, Wushan File

1d

system.

Target Audience

Be familiar with hardware and network of


OceanStor 9000.

Operators and Maintainers

Be familiar with Advanced feature of OceanStor

Managers

9000, like InfoAllocator, InfoTier,InfoEqualizer

Planners and Designers

etc.

Prerequisites

Duration
Know server basal knowledge and application

1 working day

Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology


Understand main OS and DB operation and

Class Size

technology

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

268

Training Programs

4.9.4

Big Data Storage Design Training


Know big data storage advanced technology

Training Path

Objectives
Enterprise Big Data Storage Design Training

OST0D

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

1d

Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 networking

Target Audience

Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 performance

Operators and Maintainers

monitoring and improvement

Managers
Planners and Designers
Prerequisites

Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 best practice.

Duration

1 working day

Know server basal knowledge and application


Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology

Class Size

Understand main OS and DB operation and

Min 6, Max 12

technology

269

Training Programs

4.9.5

Disaster Recovery and Backup Advanced Technology Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Be familiar with backup and recovery system

Disaster Recovery and Backup


Advanced Technology
Lecture
OST0E

architecture, backup component, backup media,


Backup mode and strategy

1d

Be familiar with backup network, backup and

Target Audience

recovery technology
Be familiar with Data deduplication, CDP

Operators and Maintainers

technology principle

Managers

Know DR solution, technology and application

Planners and Designers


Prerequisites

scenario

Duration

Know server basal knowledge and application


Know SAN,NAS,DR concept and technology
Understand main OS and DB operation and

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

270

Training Programs

4.9.6

Disaster Recovery and Backup Design Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Description the basic concepts of disaster

Disaster Recovery and Backup Design


Training

OST0F

Lecture

recovery and backup


Description the requirement analysis of disaster

1d

recovery and backup

Target Audience

Description the design principles, processes and


methods of disaster recovery and backup

Planners and Designers

solution

Manager

Master the key technology of disaster recovery

Prerequisites

disaster and backup solution

Familiar with the IT system architecture and the

Master of the plan and design methods of

basic knowledge
Familiar with storage and SAN system

disaster recovery and backup solution

Duration

technology

1 working day

Familiar with backup and disaster recovery basic


knowledge and experience

Class Size

Objectives

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

271

Training Programs

4.10

Unified Storage Training Programs

4.10.1 T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage Array Deployment and


Management Training
Training Path

Objectives

S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Product Introduction

Lecture

OST11

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe T series product position

0.25d

Describe T series product structure


Describe T series product hardware

S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Plan and Design

Lecture

OST12

configuration and component


Describe T series product software structure and

0.25d

component
Describe T series product main features and
S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Installation and Configuration

OST13

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

typical application scenario


Understand T series storage plan and design
target

1d

Understand T series storage plan rule


Understand T series storage plan method

S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Routine Maintenance

Master storage system hardware installation


Master storage system device cabling

OST14

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

0.25d

Master storage system power on sequence


Master device configuration
Master basal operation configuration

S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Troubleshooting

OST15

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248 structure


Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248

0.25d

configuration
Master T series product management

S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Advanced Function

Master T series product license using


Master T series product basal application

OST16
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

2d

configuration
Master T series product performance stat.
function using

Operators and Maintainers

Master T series product upgrade

Managers

Know T series product common fault disposal

Planners and Designers

Master T series product fault disposal process

Prerequisites

Describe UltraPath product request and product


position

Know PC OS
Know basal computer knowledge

Know UltraPath product main function feature

Know basal storage technology

Know UltraPath product application scenario and


deployment scheme
272

Training Programs
Know Snapshot definition, principle and

Know Thin Provisioning configuration feature

configuration process

and using

Know LUN Copy definition, principle,

Know Thin Provisioning configuration feature

configuration process

application scenario

Know Remote replication definition, principle,

Describe Dynamic RAID Group Expansion

configuration process
Know Smart Cache definition, principle,

principle, configuration

Duration

configuration process

4 working days

Describe Split Mirror definition, principle,


configuration process

Class Size

Describe Thin Provisioning configuration feature

Min 6, Max 12

request

273

Training Programs

4.10.2 T seriesV1 (22T/26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System Deployment and


Management Training (Fast-Track , For channel )
Know basal storage technology

Training Path

Objectives

S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Product Introduction

Lecture

OST11

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

0.25d

Describe T series product position


Describe T series product structure

S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Plan and Design

Lecture

OST12

Describe T series product hardware


configuration and component

0.25d

Describe T series product software structure and


component

S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Installation and Configuration

OST13

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Describe T series product main features and


typical application scenario
Master storage system hardware installation

1d

Master storage system device cabling


Master storage system power on sequence

S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Routine Maintenance

Master device configuration


Master basal operation configuration

OST14

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

0.25d

Master T series product management


Master T series product license using
Master T series product basal application

S22T/S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68T Storage
Array Troubleshooting

OST15
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

configuration
Master T series product performance stat.

0.25d

function using
Master T series product upgrade
Know T series product common fault disposal

Operators and Maintainers


Managers

Duration

Prerequisites
Know PC OS

2 working days
Class Size

Know basal computer knowledge

Min 6, Max 12

274

Training Programs

4.10.3 T seriesV2 (S26T/55T/56T/58T/68T) Storage System Deployment and


Management Training
Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe T series V2 product position

S26T /S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array


Product Introduction

Lecture

OST17

Describe T series V2 product structure


Describe T series V2 product hardware

0.25 d

configuration and component


Describe T series V2 product software structure

S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array


Plan and Design

Lecture

OST18

and component
Know T series V2 product hardware installation
plan

0.25 d

Know T series V2 product deployment and


configuration plan

S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array


Installation and Configuration

Master T series V2 product hardware installation


Master T series V2 product basal operation

OST19

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

1d

configuration
Describe storage pool basal principle
Describe Disk reconstruction, Partial

S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array


Routine Maintenance

OST1A

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

reconstruction, Recovery reconstruction


Describe Pre-copy and Equalization

0.25d

Reconstruction performance analysis


Storage pool configuration

S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array


Troubleshooting

Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248 structure


Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248

OST1B

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

0.25d

configuration
Know T series V2 product maintenance tool
using

S26T/S55T/S56T/S58T/S68TV2 Storage Array


Advanced Function

OST1C
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Master T series V2 product routine maintenance


method

2d

Know T series V2 product upgrade process and


precaution
Know T series V2 product common fault disposal

Operators and Maintainers

Master T series V2 product fault disposal

Managers

process

Planners and Designers

Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,

Prerequisites

deployment and configuration


Describe SmartThin principle, key technology,

Know PC OS

plan, deployment and configuration

Know basal computer knowledge

Describe SmartQoS principle, key technology,

Know basal storage technology

plan, deployment and configuration

Objectives

Know Virtual snapshot definition, principle and

On completion of this program, the

configuration process
275

Training Programs
Know LUN Copy definition, principle and
configuration process

configuration process

Duration

Know Remote replication definition, principle and

4 working days

configuration process
Describe Split Mirror definition, principle and

Class Size

configuration process

Min 6, Max 12

Describe clone principle, technology and

276

Training Programs

4.10.4 OceanStor V3 Storage System Deployment and Management Training


Describe OceanStor V3 product software

Training Path

structure and component


5300/5500/5600/5800/6800/6900 V3 Storage
Array Product Introduction

Know OceanStor V3 product hardware


installation plan

Lecture

OST1U

0.5 d

Know OceanStor V3 product deployment and


configuration plan
Master OceanStor V3 product hardware

5300/5500/5600/5800/6800/6900 V3 Storage
Array Plan and Design

Lecture

OST1V

installation
Master OceanStor V3 product basal operation

0.5 d

configuration
Storage pool configuration
5300/5500/5600/5800/6800/6900 V3 Storage
Array Installation and Configuration

Know OceanStor V3 product maintenance tool


using

OST1W

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

0.5 d

Master OceanStor V3 product routine


maintenance method
Know OceanStor V3 product upgrade process

5300/5500/5600/5800/6800/6900 V3 Storage
Array Troubleshooting and Routine
Maintenance

OST1X

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

and precaution
Know OceanStor V3 product common fault

0.5 d

disposal
Master OceanStor V3 product fault disposal
process

5300/5500/5600/5800/6800/6900 V3 Storage
Array Advanced Function

OST1Y

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,


deployment and configuration

3 d

Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,


deployment and configuration

Target Audience

Describe IP-ScaleOut principle, key technology,

Operators and Maintainers

deployment and configuration

Managers

Describe StoragePool principle, key technology,

Planners and Designers

deployment and configuration


Describe CIFS principle, key technology,

Prerequisites

deployment and configuration

Know PC OS

Describe NFS principle, key technology,

Know basal computer knowledge

deployment and configuration

Know basal storage technology

Describe SmartQuota principle, key technology,

Objectives

deployment and configuration


Describe SmartDedupe and SmartCompression

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

principle, key technology, deployment and


configuration

Describe OceanStor V3 product position

Describe Snapshot principle, key technology,

Describe OceanStor V3 product structure

deployment and configuration

Describe OceanStor V3 product hardware

Describe File System Snapshot principle, key

configuration and component

technology, deployment and configuration


277

Training Programs
Describe Remote Replication principle, key

Class Size

technology, deployment and configuration

Min 6, Max 12

Duration

5 working days

278

Training Programs

4.10.5 OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage System Deployment and


Management Training
Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe OceanStor 18500/18800 product

OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage


Product Introduction

Lecture

OST1D

position
Describe OceanStor 18500/18800 product

0.25 d

structure
Describe OceanStor 18500/18800 product

OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage


Plan and Design

Lecture

OST1E

hardware configuration and component


Describe OceanStor 18500/18800 product
software structure and component

0.25 d

Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product


hardware installation plan
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage
Installation and Configuration

Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product


deployment and configuration plan

OST1F

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

1 d

Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product


hardware installation
Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product basal

OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage


Routine Maintenance

OST1G

Lecture

operation configuration
Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248 structure

0.25 d

Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248
configuration
Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product

OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage


Troubleshooting

OST1H

Lecture

maintenance tool using


Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product routine

0.25 d

maintenance method
Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product upgrade
OceanStor 18500/18800 High-end Storage
Advanced Function

process and precaution


Know OceanStor 18500/18800 product common

OST1I

Lecture

2 d

fault disposal
Master OceanStor 18500/18800 product fault

Target Audience

disposal process

Operators and Maintainers

Describe storage pool basal principle

Managers

Describe Disk reconstruction, Partial

Planners and Designers

reconstruction, Recovery reconstruction

Prerequisites

Describe Pre-copy and Equalization


Reconstruction performance analysis

Know PC OS

Storage pool configuration

Know basal computer knowledge

Describe SmartTier principle, key technology,

Know basal storage technology

deployment and configuration

Objectives

Describe SmartThin principle, key technology,

On completion of this program, the

plan, deployment and configuration


279

Training Programs
Describe SmartQoS principle, key technology,

configuration process
Describe clone principle, technology and

plan, deployment and configuration


Know Virtual snapshot definition, principle and
configuration process

configuration process

Duration

Know LUN Copy definition, principle and

4 working days

configuration process
Know Remote replication definition, principle and

Class Size

configuration process

Min 6, Max 12

Describe Split Mirror definition, principle and

280

Training Programs

4.10.6 SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248) FC Switch Product Deployment


and Management Training
Know basal computer knowledge

Training Path
SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248)
FC Switch Product Introduction

Lecture

OST1J

Know basal storage technology

Objectives

0.5d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248 structure

SNS series (SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248)


FC Switch Configuration

OST1K

Lecture, demo

Master SNS2124/SNS2224/SNS2248
configuration

0.5d

Duration

Target Audience

1 working day
Operators and Maintainers

Class Size

Prerequisites

Min 6, Max 12
Know PC OS

281

Training Programs

4.10.7 Dorado 2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage System Deployment and Management
Training
Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe Dorado2100 G2/5000 product position

Dorado 2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage Product


Introduction

Lecture

OST1L

Know Dorado2100 G2/5000 product


hardware/software structure component

0.25d

Know Dorado2100 G2/5000 product main


function feature

Dorado 2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage


Installation and Configuration

Understand Dorado2100 G2/5000 product


typical application case

OST1M

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Know Dorado2100 G2/5100 product

1.5d

hardware/software installation process


Know Dorado2100 G2/5100 product basal

Dorado 2100 G2/5100 SSD Storage


Maintenance and Troubleshooting

configuration method
Know Dorado2100 G2 product routine

OST1N

Lecture, Demo

0.25d

maintenance operation process


Know Dorado2100 G2 product upgrade process

Target Audience

Know Dorado2100 G2 product fault disposal

Operators and Maintainers


Managers
Prerequisites
Know PC OS
Know basal computer knowledge

operation

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Know basal storage technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

282

Training Programs

4.10.8 VIS6000T Series Virtual Storage Gateway System Deployment and


Management Training
Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe VIS6000T product position

VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Product


Introduction

Lecture

OST1O

Know VIS6000T product software/hardware


structure component

0.25d

Know VIS6000Tproduct main function feature


Understand VIS6000Tproduct typical application

VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Plan and


Design

Lecture

OST1P

case
Know VIS6000T product hardware
installation/network plan

0.5d

Master VIS6000T product hardware/software


installation and deployment

VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Installation


and Configuration

Master VIS6000T product basal function


configuration

OST1Q

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

0.75d

Know VIS6000Tproduct maintenance tool


Know VIS6000Tproduct routine maintenance
method

VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Routine


Maintenance

Lecture

OST1R

Master VIS6000T product common fault disposal


process

0.25d

Know VIS6000T product fault disposal basal


principle and method

VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway


Troubleshooting

Lecture

OST1S

Know VIS6000T product replication function


principle, key technology, application plan,
network and connection

0.25d

Master VIS6000T product replication function


application deployment and configuration,
VIS6000T Virtual Storage Gateway Advanced
Function

troubleshooting
Know VIS6000T product mirror function

OST1T
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

1d

principle , key technology, application plan,


network and connection
Master VIS6000T product mirror function

Operators and Maintainers

application deployment and configuration,

Managers

troubleshooting

Planners and Designers

Know VIS6000T product snapshot function

Prerequisites

principle, key technology, application plan,


network and connection

Know PC OS

Master VIS6000T product snapshot function

Know basal computer knowledge

application deployment and configuration,

Know basal storage technology

Objectives

troubleshooting

Duration

On completion of this program, the

3 working days
283

Training Programs

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

284

Training Programs

4.10.9 Huawei Storage System Troubleshooting Training


Training Path

Target Audience

Huawei Storage System


Troubleshooting Introduction

Operators and Maintainers


Managers

OST1Z01

Lecture

Planners and Designers


Prerequisites

Huawei Storage System


Troubleshooting Tools

OSTZ02

Know PC OS
Know basal computer knowledge

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Know HUAWEI HCNP storage technology or


more

Huawei Storage System


Troubleshooting Commands

OSTZ03

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Describe storage issues definiation and position


Master HUAWEI storage troubleshooting tools

Huawei Storage System Fault


Environmental Information Collection
Method introduction

and commands
Master HUAWEI storage fault environmental

OST1Z04 Lecture, Hands-on


exercise

information collection methods


Master HUAWEI storage troubleshooting

Huawei Storage System


Troubleshooting for Hardware Issues

OST1Z05

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

methods for hardware issues


Master HUAWEI storage troubleshooting
methods for configuration issues

Duration

Huawei Storage System


Troubleshooting for Configuration Issues

2 working days
Class Size

OST1Z06 Lecture, Hands-on


exercise

Min 6, max 12

285

Training Programs

4.11

Massive Storage Training Programs

4.11.1 OceanStor 9000 Storage System Deployment and Management Training


Know Windows, Linux OS operation

Training Path

Know NAS system knowledge

OceanStor 9000 product Introduction

OST25

Lecture

Know cluster system foundation


0.25d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OceanStor 9000 Storage System Technology

OST26

Lecture

Describe OceanStor 9000 product, position,


main function, application scenario

0.5d

Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 product


hardware installation Planning
Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 product

OceanStor 9000 Storage System Installation


and Configuration Planning

OST27

Lecture

deployment and configuration Planning process

0.25d

and tools
Command OceanStor 9000 product hardware
installation

OceanStor 9000 Storage System Installation


and Configuration

OST28

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Command OceanStor 9000 typical networking


Command OceanStor 9000 product file sharing

0.5d

configuration
Command OceanStor 9000 InfoAllocator
configuration and application

OceanStor 9000 Storage System Advanced


Function Principle and Deployment

OST29

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Command OceanStor 9000 InfoEqualizer


1d

configuration and application


Command OceanStor 9000 InfoStamper
configuration and application(optional)

OceanStor 9000 Storage System Routine


Maintenance

OST2A

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Command OceanStor 9000 InfoTier


configuration and application(optional)

0.25d

Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 maintenance


tool
Command OceanStor 9000 routine maintenance

OceanStor 9000 Storage System


Troubleshooting

OST2B

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

method
Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 upgrade

0.25d

process and notice

Target Audience

Be familiar with OceanStor 9000 troubleshooting


method

Operators and Maintainers

Command OceanStor 9000 troubleshooting case

Managers
Planners and Designers

Duration

Prerequisites

3 working days

Know storage foundation


286

Training Programs

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

287

Training Programs

4.11.2 N8500 V2 Cluster NAS System Deployment and Management Training


Know NAS system knowledge

Training Path

Know cluster system foundation

N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System


Introduction

OST2C

Lecture

Objectives
0.25d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
DescribeN8500V2R1 Clustered NAS product

N8500 V2 Clustered NAS Technology

OST2D

Lecture

type, position, main function, application


scenario

0.25d

Describe N8500V2R1 clustered NAS NFS,CIFS,


DST, replication technology principle
Be familiar with N8500 product hardware

N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Installation


and Configuration Planning

OST2E

Lecture

installation planning
Be familiar with N8500 product deployment and

0.25d

configuration planning
Be familiar with network and bond mode

N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Installation


and Configuration

OST2F

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Command N8500V2R1 product hardware


installation

0.5d

Command N8500V2R1 typical networking


Command N8500V2R1 deployment tool

N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Advanced


Function Principle and Deployment

OST2G

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Command N8500V2R1 product file sharing basic


operation configuration

1d

Command N8500V2R1 Backup, DST


configuration and application
Command N8500V2R1 file system snapshot ,

N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System Routine


Maintenance

OST2H

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

mirror image, replication principle, configuration


and application

0.25d

Be familiar with N8500V2R1 maintenance tool


method
Command N8500V2R1 routine maintenance

N8500 V2 Clustered NAS System


Troubleshooting

OST2I

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

method
Be familiar with N8500V2R1 upgrade method

0.5d

Be familiar with N8500V2R1 product

Target Audience

troubleshooting method
Command N8500V2R1 typical fault case

Operators and Maintainers


Managers

Duration

Planners and Designers


Prerequisites

3 working days
Class Size

Know storage foundation

Min 6, Max 12

Know Windows, Linux OS operation

288

Training Programs

4.12

Data Protection Training Programs

4.12.1 VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System Deployment and Management Training
Know Windows, Linux OS operation

Training Path

Know virtual tape library knowledge

VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System


Introduction

OST35

Know cluster knowledge

Objectives

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System


Installation and Configuration Planning

OST36

Lecture

Describe VTL6900 positioning , architecture ,


features, application scenarios

0.25d

Be familiar with VTL6900 Approaches to


deploying and to planning VTL6900 deployment

VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System


Installation and Configuration

OST37

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

and using configuration tools


Be familiar approaches and procedure for

1d

installing the VTL6900 hardware


Be familiar with Approaches to installing and
deploying the VTL6900

VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System


Routine Maintenance

OST38

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Be familiar with Approaches to using ISM


ServiceTool to finish Daily maintenance tasks

0.25d

Be familiar with Approaches to upgrading the


VTL6900

VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System


Troubleshooting

OST39

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Be familiar with Approaches to locating and


handling the VTL6900 faults
Command VTL6900 clustered mechanism

0.25d

Command VTL6900 data deduplication principle


and application

VTL6900 Virtual Tape Library System


Advance Function Principle and Application

OST3A

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Command VTL6900 Tape Out principle and


application

1d

Command VTL6900 replication principle and

Target Audience

Operators and Maintainers

application

Duration

Managers
Planners and Designers

3 working days
Class Size

Prerequisites

Min 6, Max 12
Know storage foundation

289

Training Programs

4.13

Server Training Programs

4.13.1 RH V2 Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training


Describe the models, position, main
functions and application scenarios of RH
V2series servers

Training Path
RH V2 Series Rack Server
Introduction

Lecture

OSV11

Master the hardware structure, views,


interfaces and hardware installation of RH
V2 series servers

0.4 d

Master BMC configuration of RH V2


series servers

RH V2 Series Server Configuration and


Deployment

OSV12

Lecture, demo

Master RAID plan and configuration of


RH V2 series servers

0.3 d

Master OS installation method of RH


series servers

RH V2 Series Rack Server Routine


Maintenance and Troubleshooting

OSV13
Target Audience

Lecture, hands-on
exercise

Master the steps, methods and cautions


of parts replacement of RH V2 series
servers

0.3 d

Master the methods of log collection of


RH V2 series servers

Operators and Maintainers


Administrators

Be familiar with basic troubleshooting


methods of RH V2series servers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows and Linux

Duration

Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP


Know basic knowledge of server

1 working days
Class Size

Objectives

Min 6, max 12

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

290

Training Programs

4.13.2 RH V3 Series Rack Server Deployment and Management Training


Describe the models, position, main
functions and application scenarios of RH
V3 series servers

Training Path
RH V3 Series Rack Server
Introduction

Lecture

OSV81

Master the hardware structure, views,


interfaces and hardware installation of RH
V3 series servers

0.4 d

Master BMC configuration of RH V3


series servers

RH V3 Series Server Configuration and


Deployment

OSV82

Lecture, demo

Master RAID plan and configuration of


RH V3 series servers

0.3 d

Master OS installation method of RH V3


series servers

RH V3 Series Rack Server Routine


Maintenance and Troubleshooting

OSV83
Target Audience

Lecture, hands-on
exercise

Master the steps, methods and cautions


of parts replacement of RH V3 series
servers

0.3 d

Master the methods of log collection of


RH V3 series servers

Operators and Maintainers


Administrators

Be familiar with basic troubleshooting


methods of RH V3 series servers

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows and Linux

Duration

Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP


Know basic knowledge of server

1 working days
Class Size

Objectives

Min 6, max 12
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

291

Training Programs

4.13.3 X6000 Series Server Deployment and Management Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the models, position, main functions

X6000 Server Introduction

Lecture

OSV21

and application scenarios of X6000 series


servers

0.4 d

Master the hardware structure, components,


views, modules, blade types and hardware
installation of X6000 series servers

X6000 Server OS Installation

Master BMC configuration of X6000 series

OSV22

Lecture, demo

servers

0.3 d

Master RAID plan and configuration of X6000


series servers
X6000 Server Routine Maintenance and
Troubleshooting

OSV23
Target Audience

Lecture, hands-on
exercise

Master OS installation method of X6000 series


servers
0.3 d

Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts


replacement of X6000 series servers
Master the methods of log collection of X6000

Operators and Maintainers

series servers

Administrators

Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows and Linux

of X6000 series servers

Duration

Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP


Know basic knowledge of server

Objectives

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

On completion of this program, the

292

Training Programs

4.13.4 E6000 Series Blade Server Deployment and Management Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the models, position, main functions

E6000 Blade Server Introduction

Lecture

OSV31

and application scenarios of E6000 series


servers
0.4 d

Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces


and hardware installation of E6000 series
servers

E6000 Blade Server OS Installation

OSV32

Lecture, demo

Master iMana function, management and


maintenance of E6000 blade server

0.3 d

Master RAID plan and configuration of E6000


series servers
E6000 Blade Server Routine Maintenance and
Troubleshooting

OSV33
Target Audience

Lecture, hands-on
exercise

Master OS installation method of E6000 series


servers

0.3 d

Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts


replacement of E6000 series servers
Master the methods of log collection of E6000

Operators and Maintainers

series servers

Administrators

Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows and Linux

of E6000 series servers

Duration

Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP


Know basic knowledge of server

Objectives

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

On completion of this program, the

293

Training Programs

4.13.5 E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server Deployment and Management


Training
Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server


Introduction

Lecture

OSV51

Describe the models, position, main functions

0.2 d

and application scenarios of E9000 Converged


Infrastructure Blade Server
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade
Server Hardware Installation

OSV52

Lecture, demo

Master the hardware structure, views, interfaces


and hardware installation of E9000 Converged

0.2 d

Infrastructure Blade Server


Master BMC function, management and
maintenance of E9000 Converged Infrastructure

E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade


Server Management and Configuration

OSV53

Lecture, demo

Blade Server
Master RAID plan and configuration of E9000

0.4 d

Converged Infrastructure Blade Server


Master OS installation method of E9000
E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server
Routine Maintenance and Troubleshooting

OSV54
Target Audience

Lecture, hands-on
exercise

Converged Infrastructure Blade Server


Master the steps, methods and cautions of parts

0.2 d

replacement of E9000 Converged Infrastructure


Blade Server
Master the methods of log collection of E9000

Operators and Maintainers

Converged Infrastructure Blade Server

Administrators

Be familiar with basic troubleshooting methods

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows and Linux

of E9000 Converged Infrastructure Blade Server

Duration

Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP


Know basic knowledge of server

1 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

294

Training Programs

4.13.6 Huawei Server Troubleshooting Training


Training Path

methods
Master server routine troubleshooting methods

Huawei Server Troubleshooting

OSV91
Target Audience

Familiar server component replacement process


and notes

Lecture, hands-on
exercise

Master server routine problems help channel


Understand Huawei server tools system

Operators and Maintainers

Master Huawei server tools operation

Administrators

Understand Huawei server hardware fault


phenomenon

Prerequisites

Master Huawei server hardware troubleshooting


Be familiar with basic knowledge of Windows

methods

and Linux operating system

Master Huawei server management software

Know basic knowledge of TCP/IP

troubleshooting methods

Know basic knowledge of server

Master Huawei server operating system

Be familiar with Huawei server products and

installation method

operations

Master routine troubleshooting methods of

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Master server routine inspection and

Huawei server operating system installation

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

maintenance operations

Min 6, max 12

Master server troubleshooting ideas


Familiar server log information collection

295

Training Programs

4.14

Cloud Computing Training Programs

4.14.1 Desktop Cloud Solution R5 Deployment and Management Training


Training Path

FusionCloud Desktop
Master the protocol of FusionCloud Desktop

Desktop Cloud Solution R5 Deployment and


Management
OCL16

Lecture, hands-on exercise

Master the service commissioning process of


FusionCloud Desktop

3d

Master the access process of FusionCloud

Target Audience

Desktop

Operators and maintainers

Master the installation of FusionAccess

Administrators

Master the image tool of FusionCloud Desktop

Planners and designers

Master the Management and Maintenance of


FusionCloud Desktop

Prerequisites

Describe the peripherals of FusionCloud

Be familiar with PC and Server operating system

Desktop

Know basic knowledge of network

Describe the peripherals redirection principle

Know basic knowledge of server

Master the method of troubleshooting

Know basic knowledge of storage

Master the solution of different faults


Master AD(Active Directory) features

Objectives

Master DNS feature

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Master DHCP feature


Master the upgrade process of FusionCloud

Describe the location of FusionCloud Desktop

Desktop

Describe the features and advantages of

Master the compatibility of FusionCloud Desktop

FusionCloud Desktop
Describe the basic concept of FusionCloud

Duration

Desktop
Describe the Cases of FusionCloud Desktop

3 working days
Class Size

Master the structure and configuration of

Min 6, max 12

FusionCloud Desktop
Master the components and functions of

296

Training Programs

4.14.2 FusionCube Solution Deployment and Management Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe FusionCube solution

FusionCube Solution Deployment and


Management
OCL13

Lecture, hands-on exercise

Describe the structure and functions of


FusionCube

2d

Describe the hardware structure of FusionCube

Target Audience

Describe FusionCompute structure and functions


Describe FusionCompute routine operations and

Operators and maintainers

maintenance

Administrators

Describe FusionManager structure and functions

Planners and designers

Describe FusionManager routine operations and

Prerequisites

maintenance
Be familiar with PC operating system

Duration

Know basic knowledge of datacom

2 working days

Know basic knowledge of server


Know basic knowledge of storage

Class Size

Objectives

Min 6, max 12

On completion of this program, the

297

Training Programs

4.14.3 FusionSphere Solution R3 Deployment and Management Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

FusionSphere Solution R3 Deployment and


Management
OCL14

Lecture, hands-on exercise

Describe FusionSphere solution

2d

Describe FusionSphere installation procedure

Target Audience

Describe FusionCompute structure and functions

Operators and maintainers

Describe FusionCompute routine operations and

Administrators

maintenance

Planners and designers

Describe FusionManager structure and functions

Prerequisites

Describe FusionManager routine operations and


maintenance

Be familiar with PC operating system


Know basic knowledge of datacom

Duration

Know basic knowledge of server


Know basic knowledge of storage

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

298

Training Programs

4.14.4 FusionSphere Solution R5 Deployment and Management Training


Master FusionSphere Concept, Components

Training Path

and Deployment Model


FusionSphere Solution R5 Deployment and
Management
OCL15

Lecture, hands-on exercise

Describe FusionSphere Critical Functions


Master FusionSphere Typical Features and Its

3d

Configuration

Target Audience

Trough Typical Lab Experiments, Upgrade Skills


Understand FusionSphere Advanced Fuctions

Operators and maintainers

Related Concepts

Administrators

Master FusionSphere VPC features and

Planners and designers

Experiment

Prerequisites

Master FusionSphere Routine Operations,

Be familiar with PC and Server operating system


Know basic knowledge of network

Maintenance and Troubleshooting Methods

Duration

Know basic knowledge of server

3 working days, 1.5 days for Lab


Experiments.

Know basic knowledge of storage

Objectives

Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Min 6, max 12

299

Training Programs

4.14.5 FusionInsight Solution Deployment and Management Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

FusionInsight Solution Deployment and


Management
OCL17

Lecture, hands-on exercise

Describe FusionInsight Solution

1d

Describe the architecture and components of

Target Audience

FusionInsight

Operators and maintainers

Master the networking and plan of FusionInsight

Administrators

Master the installation and maintenance of

Planners and designers

FusionInsight

Prerequisites

Master the operation and maintenance of


FusionInsight

Be familiar with PC operating system


Know basic knowledge of datacom

Duration

Know basic knowledge of server


Know basic knowledge of storage

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, max 12

300

4.14.6 Huawei Cloud Computing System Troubleshooting Training


Training Path
Huawei Cloud Computing Troubleshooting
OCL15

Lecture, hands-on exercise

2d

Target Audience

Huawei Cloud Computing Solution Operators and maintainers


Huawei Cloud Computing Solution Administrators
Huawei Cloud Computing Solution Planners and designers
Prerequisites
Basic knowledge of Huawei FusionCompute
Basic knowledge of Huawei FusionManager
Basic knowledge of Huawei FusionAccess

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe Huawei Cloud Computing Troubleshooting Basic Knowledge
Describe FusionCompute Fault Category
Master FusionCompute Host Faults
Master FusionCompute VRM Nodes Faults
Master FusionCompute Operation and Maintenance Faults
Master FusionCompute Users VM Faults
Describe FusionManager Fault Category
Master FusionManager Management Node Faults
Master FusionManager Operation and Maintenance Faults
Describe FusionAccess Fault Category
Master FusionAccess Management Node Faults
Master FusionAccess Operation and Maintenance Faults
Master FusionAccess End Users Desktop Faults

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, max 16

301

4.15

IT Network Management Training Programs

4.15.1 Enterprise Network Management eSight-IT Operation and Maintenance


Training
Training Path

features
Be familiar with eSight product architecture

Enterprise Network Management eSight-IT

Be familiar with eSight product deployment

Operation and Maintenance Training


ONM11

Lecture

Master eSight server spec requirement

1d

Master eSight installation planning and

Target Audience

preparation
Master eSight installation

Operators and Maintainers

Master eSight basic configuration

Prerequisites

Master eSight server product management


Know PC OS

software operation

Know server technology

Master eSight storage product management

Know Huawei Server Product Management

software operation

Know Huawei Server Product Management

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Master the maintenance of eSight product

Duration

1 working days
Class Size

Describe eSight product position

Min 6, Max 12

Be familiar with eSight product functions and

302

4.16

Disaster Recovery and Backup Solution Training Programs

4.16.1 OceanStor Backup Solution Deployment and Management Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OceanStor Backup Solution Deployment and


Management
OST81

Lecture, hands-on exercise

Be familiar with backup network and system

4d

Be familiar with backup solution plan process

Target Audience

Be familiar with backup solution plan methods

Planners and Designers

Be familiar with backup solution plan and

Manager/Administrator

implement in Filesystem, Oracle, and VMware

Prerequisites

scenes
Be familiar with routine maintenance and

Know PC OS

troubleshooting

Know basal computer knowledge


Know basal storage technology

Duration

Know Huawei Storage or VTL


Know basal Simpana

4 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

303

4.16.2 Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery Solution Deployment and


Management Training
Training Path
Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery
Solution Deployment and Management
OST82

Lecture, hands-on exercise

3d

Target Audience

Planners and Designers


Manager/Administrator
Prerequisites
Know PC OS
Know basal computer knowledge
Know basal storage technology
Know Huawei Storage and VIS

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Be familiar with Disaster Recovery network and
system
Be familiar with Disaster Recovery solution plan
process
Be familiar with Disaster Recovery solution plan
methods
Be familiar with plan and implement ActivePassive and Active-Active Disaster Recovery
solutions

Duration

3 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5 Enterprise Wireless Training Solution


5.1 Training Path
5.1.1

GSM-R BSS Training Path

Plan &Design

Operation and Maintenance


GSM-R BTS Operation and

GSM-R Radio Network

Design and Planning Training

2d

GSM-R Radio Network

Maintenance Training(BSC6000
V901R013)

Advanced course

Optimization Training

5d

3d

GSM-R BTS Installation and

GSM-R Radio Network

Commissioning

2d
GSM-R BSC6000 Installation and
Commissioning

2d

GSM-R BSC6000 Operation and


Maintenance Training

3d
GSM-R BSS Data Configuration
4d

GSM-R BSS Troubleshooting

3d

GSM-R System Overview

1d

Technology Basic
Training
GSM-R Basic Principle Training

1d

Analysis Training

2d

Training Programs

5.1.2

GSM-R CS Training Path

Plan & Design

Operation and Maintenance

Improve

eCNS300 System Overview

GSM-R Feature Training

1d

GTSOFTX3000 Hardware
Training

1d

GTSOFTX3000 Operation
and Maintenance Training

3d

GTSOFTX3000 Data

Configuration Training

6d

UMG8900 Hardware Training


1d

UMG8900 Operation and


Maintenance Training

2d

UMG8900 Data
Configuration Training

2d

HSS9860 Operation and


Maintenance Training

2d

5d

Training Programs

5.1.3

GSM-R PS Training Path

Plan &Design

Operation and Maintenance

UGW9811 Operation and


Maintenance Training

2d
UGW9811 Data Configuration
Training

2d

USN9810 Operation and


Maintenance Training

3d

USN9810 Data Configuration


Training

9d

PS Alarm Monitoring and


Management Training

1d

Improve

Training Programs

5.1.4

GSM-R OSS Training Path

Maintenance personnel

System Administrator

iManager M2000V200R013 Client

iManager M2000V200R013 System

Operation and Maintenance(BSS)

Administrator Training (SUN)

2d

5d

iManager M2000V200R013 PS

iManager M2000V200R013 System

Operation and Maintenance

Administrator Training (ATAE Cluster)


2d

3d

Training Programs

5.1.5

eLTE Broadband Trunking Solution Training Path

Plan&Design

eLTE Trunking Radio


Network Planning and
Optimization Overview
eLTE Trunking Radio
Network Design and
Dimensioning

Implement & Operate

eNodeB Product Training


(eLTE Broadband Trunking)

1d

5d
eCN210 Training

5d

1d
eSCN230 Training

2d
eOMC910 Operation and
Maintenance Training
2d

Dispatching System Product


Training
1d
Terminal Product Training
(Trunking)

1d

Improve
eLTE Trunking Radio RF
Network Optimizing

1d

Training Programs

5.1.6

eLTE Broadband Access Solution Training Path

Plan&Design

Implement & Operate

Improve

eNodeB Training (eLTE


Broadband Access)

5d
eCN600 Training

5d
eCNS610 Training

2d
U2000 Operation and
Maintenance

2d
Terminal Operation Training
(Access)

1d

Basic Principle

eLTE-EPC Network Basic


Principle

eLTE Basic Principle

Technology

1d

1d

Training Programs

5.2 Required Training Programs


Enterprise Wireless Training Programs are designed as follows:

Training Programs

Level

Duration
(working
days)

Training
Location

Class
Size

GSM-R BSS Training


GSM-R System Overview Training

6~12

GSM-R Principle Training

6-12

GSM-R BSC6000 Installation and


Commissioning Training

GSM-R BSC6000 Operation and Maintenance


Training

GSM-R BSS Data Configuration Training

6~12

GSM-R BSS Troubleshooting Training

6~12

eCNS300 System Overview Training

6~12

GTSOFTX3000 Hardware Training

6~12

GTSOFTX3000 Operation and Maintenance


Training

GTSOFTX3000 Data Configuration Training

6~12

UMG8900 Hardware Training

6~12

UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training

6~12

GSM-R BTS Operation and Maintenance


Training(BSC6000 V901R013)
GSM-R BTS Installation and Commissioning
Training

6~12

6~12

6~12

6~12

GSM-R CS Training

6~12

Training Programs

UMG8900 Data Configuration Training

6~12

HSS9860 Operation and Maintenance Training

6~12

GSM-R Feature Training

6~12

UGW9811 Operation and Maintenance Training

6~12

UGW9811 Data Configuration Training

6~12

USN9810 Data Configuration Training

6~12

PS Alarm Monitoring and Management Training

6~12

GSM-R PS Training

USN9810 Operation and Maintenance Training


ATCA

6~12

GSM-R OSS Training


6~12

iManager M2000V200R013 Client Operation and


Maintenance Training(BSS)

iManager M2000V200R013 PS Operation and


Maintenance Training

iManager M2000V200R013 System


Administrator Training (SUN)

iManager M2000V200R013 System


Administrator Training (ATAE Cluster)

6~12

6~12

6~12

GSM-R RNP&RNO Training


GSM-R Radio Network Design and Planning
Training

6~12

GSM-R Radio Network Optimization Training

6~12

GSM-R Radio Network Analysis Training

6~12

6~12

eLTE Principle Training


eLTE Basic Principle Training

Training Programs

6~12

6~12

eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Trunking)

6~12

eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Trunking)

6~12

eCNS210 System Overview Training

6~12

eCNS210 Operation and Maintenance Training

6~12

eCNS210 Data Configuration Training

6~12

eOMC910 Client Operation and Maintenance


Training

Dispatching System Operation and Maintenance


Training

Terminal Operation Training(Trunking)

6~12

eSCN230 Operation and Maintenance Training

6~12

eSCN230 Data Configuration Training

6~12

eLTE Rapid Solution Training

6~12

eLTE Broadband Access System Overview


Training

eNodeB Operation and Maintenance


Training(Access)

eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Access)

6~12

eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Access)

6~12

eCNS600 System Overview Training

6~12

eCNS600 Operation and Maintenance Training

6~12

eCNS600 Data Configuration Training

6~12

eLTE-EPC Network Basic Principle Training


eLTE Broadband Trunking Solution Training
eLTE Broadband Trunking System Overview
Training
eNodeB Operation and Maintenance
Training(Trunking)

6~12

6~12

6~12

eLTE Broadband Access Solution Training


6~12

6~12

Training Programs

U2000 Client Operation and Maintenance


Training

6~12

Terminal Operation Training(Access)

6~12

eCNS610 Operation and Maintenance Training

6~12

eCNS610 Data Configuration Training

6~12

eLTE RNP&RNO Training


eLTE Trunking Radio Network Planning and
Optimizing Overview Training
eLTE Trunking Radio Network Design and
Dimensioning Training
eLTE Trunking Radio RF Network Optimizing
Training

6~12

6~12

6~12

Training Programs

5.3 Training Programs


5.4 GSM-R BSS Training
5.4.1

GSM-R System Overview Training


participants will be able to:

Training Path

Understand GSM - R system


structure, interface, and business

GSM-R System Overview


Lecture

1d

Understand the feature

business of GSM-R

Understand the requirements

of railway business on GSM-R


Target Audience

GSM-R solution technology


characteristic

Field Engineer, Manager


Prerequisites

Duration
A general mobile communication and
data communication.

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.4.2

GSM-R Principle Training


communication technology of
multiple access, Cellular technology

Training Path

Understand GSM - R system


structure, interface, and business

GSM-R Basic Principle Training


Lecture

Understand the physical


channel structure, logical channel
function and combination of Um

1d

interface

Target Audience

Field Engineer

area division and numbering plan

Prerequisites

Understand GSM-R mobile


Understand GSM-R major

technology
A general mobile communication and
data communication.
Duration

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Understand the mobile

1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.4.3

GSM-R BTS Operation and Maintenance Training(BSC6000 V901R013)


Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers

Training Path

Prerequisites
GSM-R BTS3012 Product Description
Lecture

A general mobile communication and


data communication.

0.5d

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

GSM-R DBS3900 Product Description


Lecture

0.5d

GSM-R BTS3900 Product Description


Lecture

0.5d

Describe site maintenance objects.

Describe the concepts of BTS


management status.

Describe the concepts of BTS operation


status.

Describe BTS routine operation and


maintenance procedure.

GSM-R BTS Operation and Maintenance


Training (BSC6000V901R013)
LectureHand-on
Exercise

Explain how to use BTS remote


maintenance console.

1.5d

Duration
3working days

Target Audience
Class Size
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.4.4

GSM-R BTS Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path
GSM-R BTS Installation and
Commissioning
Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:
2d

Target Audience

Describe the hardware system structure

Master the hardware installation process

Understand the hardware commissioning

process
BSS Field Technicians, BSS Operation and
Maintenance
Prerequisites

Understand the BTS Product Description

Understand the BTS Operation and

Maintenance

Duration
2working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.4.5

GSM-R BSC6000 Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path
GSM-R BSC Installation and
Commissioning
Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:
2d

Target Audience

Describe the hardware system structure

Master the hardware installation process

Understand the hardware commissioning

process
BSS Field Technicians, BSS Operation and
Maintenance
Prerequisites

Understand the BSC6000 Product

Description

Understand the BSC6000 Operation and

Maintenance

Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.4.6

GSM-R BSC6000 Operation and Maintenance Training


GSM wireless network operation and

Training Path

maintenance

GSM-R BSC6000 Product Description


WB30

Lecture

1d

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

GSM-R BSC6000 Operation and


Maintenance Training
Lecture, Hands-on
WB32
Exercise

Describe the work flow of BSC6000


maintenance.

2d

BSC6000 maintenance.

Target Audience
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation
and Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
Prerequisites
Basic knowledge of mobile
communications

At least 1 year working experience in

Describe important parameters in


Operate on the BSC6000 maintenance

console.

Perform the routine maintenance for

BSC6000.
Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.4.7

GSM-R BSS Data Configuration Training

Training Path

Objectives

GSM-R DBS3900 Data Configuration


Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise

1d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Master BSC6000 GSM-R data


configuration process

GSM-R BTS3900 Data Configuration


Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise

To complete the global data


configuration

To complete the equipment data


configuration

1d

To complete the data interface


configuration

GSM-R BSC6000 Data Configuration


Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise

Understand the CME main interface

Understand the data configuration


process based on CME

Complete BSC6000 GSM-R data

2d

configuration

Target Audience
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation
and Maintenance Technicians and Engineers
Prerequisites

Basic knowledge of mobile

Duration
4 working days
Class Size

communications
At least 1 year working experience in
GSM wireless network operation and
maintenance

Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.4.8

GSM-R BSS Troubleshooting


participants will be able to:

Training Path

GSM-R BSS Signaling Flow and analysis


Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise

1d

Understand the knowledge, skills and


operations that the maintenance
personnel need to grasp.

Understand the analysis thinking and


process of BSC trouble commissioning.

Master the common method and


processing method of BSC fault
location..

Master the BSC system failure

GSM-R BTS Troubleshooting


Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise

1d

prevention measures.

alarming.

GSM-R BSC6000 Troubleshooting


Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise

Understand the relative conception of

methods of preserving the alarm log

1d

Target Audience
BSS Field Technicians, First Line Operation
and Maintenance Technicians and Engineers

Query alarms through M2000, LMT, and


List the TOP alarm type and find
common cause

Draw the alarm processing flow chart,


and can according to the picture to
locate the alarm and analysis the cause

Prerequisites
Duration

Basic knowledge of mobile

communications
At least 1 year working experience in
GSM wireless network operation and
maintenance
Objectives
On completion of this program, the

3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.5 GSM-R CS Training


5.5.1

eCNS300 System Overview Training


participants will be able to:

Training Path

Describe system structure and hardware


structure of eCNS300.

Perform software related installation and

eCNS300 System Overview


Lecture

upgrade procedure.

1d

Perform hardware operation and


maintenance.

Perform the routine operation and

Target Audience
Field Maintenance Engineers, First line
Maintenance Engineers,

maintenance.

eCNS300.

Prerequisites

A general understanding of mobile


communication and data
communication.

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

Perform the basic data configuration of

Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.5.2

GTSOFTX3000 Hardware Training


participants will be able to:

Training Path

structures

GTSOFTX3000 Hardware System


Lectures,

Describe the GTSOFTX3000 hardware

structures

1d

Target Audience

Describe the function, indicators, ports


and working mode of each board

Explain the types and applications of


different fibers and cables

GSM-R core network Installation engineers


GSM-R core network Commissioning

Describe the GTSOFTX3000 cascade

Duration

engineers
GSM-R core network Operation and
maintenance engineers
Prerequisites

A basic knowledge of telecommunication

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

1working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.5.3

GTSOFTX3000 Operation and Maintenance Training


M3UA based)

Training Path

GTSOFTX3000 Operation and


Maintenance

Lectures, Hands-on
Exercise

Perform the data configuration from


GTSOFTX3000 to RNC based on IP and
ATM

3d

Perform data configuration between


GTSOFTX3000 and PSTN/MSC in
different mode

Target Audience
GSM-R core network Installation engineers
GSM-R core network Operation and
maintenance engineers

Manage equipments, for example:


checking board status and version

Manage data, for example: backup


system data, executing MML commands

Prerequisites

A basic knowledge of telecommunication

logs, saving logs

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

Manage logs, for example: querying


Manage tracing tasks, for example:
creating a tracing task, checking tracing
result, saving result

Perform the routine operation and


maintenance

participants will be able to:


Describe the GTSOFTX3000 hardware

Operation of replace the hardware board

structures

Operation of change the cable

Describe the GTSOFTX3000 cascade

Operation of system backup

structures

Operation of system recovery

Describe the function, indicators, ports


and working mode of each board

Explain the types and applications of

Manage alarms (browsing alarms,


querying alarms, printing alarms, dump
alarm logs)

different fibers and cables

Create performance tasks

Describe the concept of Hardware


Configuration

Checking status of performance tasks

Customized performance tasks

Perform hardware configuration

Dump the measurement result

Know how to verify hardware

Start and stop the process of BAM

configuration

Point out key information and its


directory of BAM

Perform the connection between


GTSOFTX3000 and MGW

Perform GTSOFTX3000 Office


information configuration

Perform data configuration between


GTSOFTX3000 to HLR

Perform data configuration between


GTSOFTX3000 and BSC (M2UA based,

Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.5.4

GTSOFTX3000 Data Configuration Training

Training Path

Perform hardware configuration

Know how to verify hardware


configuration

GTSOFTX3000 Data Configuration


Lectures, Hands-on
Exercise

GTSOFTX3000 and MGW


6d

Perform GTSOFTX3000 Office


information configuration

Perform data configuration between

Target Audience
GSM-R core network Installation engineers

GTSOFTX3000 to HLR

GSM-R core network Commissioning


engineers
GSM-R core network Operation and
maintenance engineers
Prerequisites

Perform the connection between

Perform data configuration between


GTSOFTX3000 and BSC (M2UA based,
M3UA based)

Perform the data configuration from


GTSOFTX3000 to RNC based on IP and
ATM

A basic knowledge of telecommunication

Perform data configuration between


GTSOFTX3000 and PSTN/MSC in
different mode

Objectives
Duration
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Describe the concept of Hardware

6 working days
Class Size

Configuration
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.5.5

UMG8900 Hardware Training


participants will be able to:

Training Path

GSM-R UMG8900 Hardware System

Lectures

Describe UMG8900 hardware structure

Describe UMG8900 logical architecture

Describe UMG8900 software


architecture

Describe UMG8900 Cascading System

Describe main boards' functions of


UMG8900

Describe Internal message flow of

1d

Target Audience
GSM-R core network monitor engineers
GSM-R core network Installation engineers
GSM-R core network commissioning
engineers
GSM-R core network Operation and
maintenance engineers
Prerequisites

A basic knowledge of telecommunication

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

UMG8900

Describe function of SIWF

Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.5.6

UMG8900 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

GSM-R UMG8900 Operation and


Maintenance

Lectures, Hands-on
Exercise

Perform interworking with MGW based


on different networking

2d

Perform interworking with BSC based on


different scenarios

Perform interworking with MSC/PSTN

Target Audience
GSM-R core network monitor engineers

based on different networking

GSM-R core network Installation engineers


GSM-R core network Operation and
maintenance engineers
Prerequisites

A basic knowledge of telecommunication

Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.5.7

UMG8900 Data Configuration Training

Training Path

Perform backup and recovery of


UMG8900

Query the service status

Browse alarm information

Browse the performance task

Configuring System Parameters

Configuring System Time

Configuring Frames and Boards

GSM-R core network monitor engineers

Configuring the Clock

GSM-R core network Installation engineers

Configuring the NMS Interface

GSM-R core network commissioning

Configuring the MGW Control Interface

GSM-R UMG8900 Data Configuration

Lectures, Hands-on
Exercise

2d

Target Audience

and SIGTRAN Interface

engineers

Prerequisites

A basic knowledge of telecommunication

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Configure SIWF

Perform operation and maintenance of


SIWF

Query equipment status

Query resource information

Configure ATM bearer, IP bearer, TDM


bearer

Configure signaling transfer

Configure MGW data

Configure the link

Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.5.8

HSS9860 Operation and Maintenance Training


application

Training Path

Describe HSS9860 interface protocol


function

HSS9860 System and Networking


Overview

Lectures

Lectures

0.5d

HSS9860 Data ConfigurationGU

Lectures
Hands-on Exercise

structure

0.5d

HSS9860 Subscriber Data Management


GU

Describe HSS9860 board function

Describe HSS9860 signaling flow

Describe HSS9860 software structure

Describe HSS9860 IP planning

Perform installation of operation PGW


client with GU network

Perform the method of adding or


deleting subscriber

Modify subscription according to


customer requirement

Perform configuration of subscription


data

Describe the steps of HSS9860 data


configuration

Perform hardware and system data

1d

Target Audience
Operation and Maintenance Engineer
Technical Support Engineer

Describe HSS9860 physical and logical

configuration
Prerequisites

At least half a year experience of


operation and maintenance of
telecommunication equipments

Being familiar with Windows operation


and basic UNIX operation

A basic knowledge of mobile


communication

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Describe HSS9860 product function and

Perform interface data configuration

Check the data configuration


correctness and validity

Perform basic debugging of HSS9820


(GU)

Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.5.9

GSM-R Feature Training

Training Path

Configure and verify Multiple-Engine


service

GSM-R Feature Training

Lectures, Hands-on
Exercise

Configure and verify functional


addressing

5d

Configure and verify call area restriction


Configure and verify location dependent
addressing service

Configure and verify SMC integration


service

GSM-R core network telecommunication


engineers

Configure and verify access matrix

GSM-R core network commissioning

Target Audience

engineers
Operation and maintenance engineers

service
release service

A basic knowledge of railway


telecommunication system

Configure and verify priority cell service

Perform AC (Acknowledgement Center)


server software installation and
uninstallation

Configure AC in BAM

Operate GMS(Group Management

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Describe the fundamental of GSM-R

Describe the architecture of GSM-R


system

Describe the service and function of


GSM-R system

Configure and verify eMLPP service

Configure and verify USS1 service

Configure and verify VBS service

Configure and verify VGCS service

Configure and verify missed call SMS


prompt service

Prerequisites

Configure and verify break-in and force

Server) installation
Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.6 GSM-R PS Training


5.6.1

UGW9811 Operation and Maintenance Training


participants will be able to:

Training Path

UGW9811 Routine Operation and


Maintenance
Lecture, Lab, Demo

Describe system structure and hardware


structure of UGW9811.

Perform software related installation and


upgrade procedure.

2d

Target Audience

Perform hardware operation and


maintenance.

Perform the Routine Operation and


Maintenance including authorization
management, system information
management, alarm management, trace
management ,log management, license
management ,patch management ,data

Field Maintenance Engineer, First line


Maintenance Engineer, Routine Maintenance
Engineer
Prerequisites

backup and restore.


A general understanding of mobile
communication and data
communication.

Duration
2 working days

Successful completion of the program


EPC Principle Training.

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.6.2

UGW9811 Data Configuration Training


UGW9811 Routine Operation and

Training Path

Maintenance Training.

UGW9811 (GGSN) Data Configuration


(2G/3G)

Lecture, Lab, Demo

5d

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Perform configuration of Gn/Gp, Ga and


Gi interfaces and route.

Perform data Describe basic concept of

Target Audience
Field Maintenance Engineer, Routine
Maintenance Engineer, Second line
Maintenance Engineer, Senior Maintenance

VPN, APN and charging.

charging.

Engineer
Prerequisites

A general understanding of mobile


communication and data
communication.

Successful completion of the program of

Perform configuration of VPN, APN and

Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.6.3

USN9810 Operation and Maintenance Training(ATCA)


participants will be able to:

Training Path

structure of USN9810.

USN ATCA platform Operation and


Maintenance Training(2G/3G/4G)
Lecture, Lab, Demo

3d

Target Audience

Perform hardware operation and


maintenance.

Perform the Routine Operation and


Maintenance including security
management, system information
management, alarm management, trace
management, data management, license
management, performance
management.

Engineer
Prerequisites
A general understanding of mobile
communication and data

Perform software related installation and


upgrade procedure.

Field Maintenance Engineer, First line


Maintenance Engineer, Routine Maintenance

Describe system structure and hardware

Duration

communication.

Successful completion of the program


EPC Principle Fundamental Training.

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.6.4

USN9810 Data Configuration Training


USN ATCA platform Operation and

Training Path

Maintenance Training
Objectives

USN9810 (SGSN) Data Configuration


Training (2G/3G)

Lecture, Lab, Demo

9d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Target Audience

Perform configuration of USN hardware.

Perform configuration of USN Gb, Iu-PS,


Gn, Ga and Gr interfaces.

Field Maintenance Engineer, Second line


Maintenance Engineer, Routine Maintenance

service.

Engineer
Prerequisites

A general understanding of mobile


communication and data
communication.

Successful completion of the program

Perform configuration of USN basic

Duration
9 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.6.5

PS Alarm Monitoring and Management Training

Training Path

equipment maintenance.

PS Alarm Monitoring and Management

Lecture, Lab, Demo

1d

Target Audience
Field Maintenance Engineer, First line
Maintenance Engineer, Routine Maintenance

Prerequisites
A general understanding of mobile
communication and data
communication.

Get familiar with TCP/IP.

Successful completion of the program of


GPRS/UMTS PS Fundamental Training.

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Understand basic alarm.

Understand basic method of alarm


monitoring and management.

Engineer

1 years related experience in PS

Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.7 GSM-R OSS Training


5.7.1

iManager M2000V200R013 Client Operation and Maintenance Training(BSS)


security.

Training Path
iManager M2000 System Overview
Lecture

0.5d

Describe the performance specifications


of the M2000 system, including system
capacity, bandwidth, storage capacity,
processing capability, and client number.

iManager M2000 Client Monitor and

Maintenance
Lecture, Hands-on Exercise

in M2000 system.
1d

Describe the alarm processing ability

supported by the M2000 server.

iManager M2000 Client Performance and


Maintenance
Lecture, Hands-on exercise

Describe the alarm categories and levels

Browse and query the current alarms in

M2000 clients.
0.5d

Target Audience

All wireless engineer

M2000 Alarm Operation and


Maintenance Technician and Engineer

M20000 Performance Operation and


Maintenance Technician and Engineer

Manage the alarm level and name in


M2000 and NE.

Describe the performance counter and

object categories in M2000system.


Query the performance result by the
setting conditions.

Export the performance result files.

Check the performance task status.

Query the NE configuration data from

M2000 client.
Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge in
telecommunication and mobile
communication
Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:
Describe the overall architecture,
hardware architecture, software architecture,
typical configuration and interfaces of the

Configure data to NE from M2000 client.

Describe the performance counter


categories and the difference between them.
Describe the performance object
categories.

Query the performance result by the

setting conditions.

Export the performance result file.

Define the performance query template.

Check the performance task status.

M2000
Describe the software structure of the
M2000 equipment, the functions of different
parts.
Describe the system reliability of the
M2000 system from the aspects of system

Duration
2 working days

Training Programs

Class Size
Min 6Max12

Training Programs

5.7.2

iManager M2000V200R013 PS Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

M2000 Routine Operation and


Maintenance Training

Lecture, Lab

2d

Describe the overall architecture,


hardware architecture, software
architecture, typical configuration and
interfaces of the M2000.

Describe the software structure of the


M2000 equipment, the functions of
different parts.

Target Audience
Field Maintenance Engineer, First line
Maintenance Engineer, Routine Maintenance

system security.

Engineer
Prerequisites

A general mobile communication and


data communication.

Describe the system reliability of the


M2000 system from the aspects of
Perform the Routine Operation and
Maintenance of M2000 client.

Duration
2 working days
Class Size

Objectives
Min 6, Max 12
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Training Programs

5.7.3

iManager M2000V200R013 System Administrator Training (SUN)


management commands

Training Path

iManager M2000 System Solution and


Networking

Lecture

0.5d

Describe files system structure

Perform system management operation

Describe Sybase15 database modules

Describe Sybase15 database operation


commands

iManager M2000 Operation System and


Database Management (SUN)
Lecture, Lab

1d

iManager M2000 Server Operation and


Maintenance (SUN HA)
Lecture, Lab

1d

Implement start and stop data process

Master how to import and export


database

Describe M2000 SUN Single Server


network system structure, logical,
hardware, software structure

List M2000 server file system composing

List M2000 system user type

Perform powering on/powering off the


M2000, monitoring system status,
M2000 database management, system
backup and restore

Perform M2000 routine maintenance

iManager M2000 Administrator Operation


Lecture, Lab, Demo,
Discussion

2.5d

tasks

Target Audience
M2000 Server maintenance engineer
Prerequisites

Master Solaris basic operations

Master Sybase database basic

software structure

List M2000 server file system composing

List M2000 system user type

Perform powering on/powering off the


M2000, managing cluster resources,
monitoring system status, M2000
database management, system backup
and restore

Perform M2000 routine maintenance


tasks

Describe user type in M2000 system

operations
Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Describe M2000 SUN HA network


system structure, logical, hardware,

Know M2000 hardware and software


structure

Master how to create, modify, delete


user information

Describe M2000 software modules


structure and modules functions

Manage user group in M2000 system

List M2000 server typical configuration

Manage user network right and


operation right

Describe M2000 server networking

Complete monitor user state

Describe Solaris 10 system

Complete M2000 system log

Training Programs

management

Master the methods and steps of M2000


system emergency maintenance

Master NEs status checking methods

Describe M2000 system software

Know M2000 dangerous operations

structure

Master normal Trouble Shooting

Describe system software updating


procedure and methods

Perform NEs mediation software


installation and updating

methods

Describe M2000 system Backup and


Restore base knowledge
Master how to backup and restore
M2000 data

Know the base knowledge of M2000


system emergency maintenance

List M2000 system emergency scene

Describe Northbound interface functions


in M2000 system

Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.7.4

iManager M2000V200R013 System Administrator Training (ATAE Cluster)


function of OSMU

Training Path

Master the system management of


OSMU

iManager M2000System Overview - ATAE


Cluster
WP31

Lecture

0.5d

Master the equipment management,


service management, software
management, general maintenance
OSMU

iManager M2000 Operation System and


Database Management (ATAE Cluster)
WP32

Lecture, Lab

Master the method to backup and


restore the different data types of ATAE
Cluster

Describe Northbound Interface Definition

1d

and Function

iManager M2000 ATAE Cluster Server


Operation and Maintenance
WP33

Lecture, Lab

Perform Northbound Interface


Interconnection Commissioning

1.5d

Handle Northbound Interface Common


Troubleshooting

Target Audience
Network management operator
Prerequisites

Having basic knowledge in


telecommunication and mobile
communication

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Describe the basic concepts and


principles of ATAE cluster

Describe the ATAE hardware structure


and its function

Map between principles and the


corresponds hardware module

Master the networking and typical


application scenario of ATAE Cluster
scheme

Describe the system structure and basic

Explain the meaning of OM user, NE


user, mode 1, mode 2 NE

Manage OM user and NE user

Set security policy parameters

Monitor the user status

Describe Oracle storage and SQL


language

Describe M2000 database

Perform the M2000 database Usage


viewing

Describe the concept and features of


SUSE Linux system

Perform common operating system


commands

Duration
3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.8 GSM-R RNP&RNO


5.8.1

GSM-R Radio Network Design and Planning Training

Training Path

Interpret the structure of the antenna


equipments

Interpret the features of the antenna

GSM-R RNP System Overview


Lecture

equipments
0.25d

Implement selecting the suitable


antenna type

GSM-R Antenna Basics


Lecture

Outline the key specifications of antenna

Implement GSM-R radio network


coverage planning

0.75d

Explain the link budget model and its


application

improving coverage

GSM-R Radio Network Planning


Lecture

Explain the advance technology for

2d

Implement GSM-R radio network traffic


capacity planning on
TCHF/TCHH/SDCCH

Explain the capacity enhancement


technology

Describe the paging ability of radio


network

Explain GSM-R frequency resource, C/I


conception, frequency reuse definition,
and frequency tighten reuse technology

Target Audience
GSM-R Radio Network Planning Engineers
Prerequisites

Basic knowledge of mobile


communications

and its application


Objectives
Duration
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Describe the theory of radio signal


propagation

Describe the radio signal propagation


model

3 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.8.2

GSM-R Radio Network Optimization Training


GSM wireless network optimization

Training Path

Objectives
GSM-R Radio Interface

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


1d

participants will be able to:

Describe the function of each kind of


logical channel

Describe the general radio signal

GSM-R BSS Signaling Flow


Lecture

process on Um interface
1d

State the techniques used on Um


interface

GSM-R BSC600 Cell Parameters


Lecture, Lab

Describe typical GSM-R communication


flow

Perform the operation for interface


message trace

Identify the messages on A interface and

1d

Abis interface
GSM-R BSS Handover Algorithm
Lecture

1d

Analysis the messages on A interface


and Abis interface

Explain the important message


parameters

Identify the fault by the method of


analyzing the signaling flow

List the MS behaviors in idle mode

Describe the parameters associated with

GSM-R Traffic Statistics Analysis


Lecture, Lab

0.5d

MS behaviors in idle mode

Describe the operations about


performance management based on
M2000

Interpret the general analysis procedure

GSM-R Radio Network Performance


Management
Lecture

0.5d

of traffic analysis
Target Audience
GSM-R Radio Network Optimization
Engineers
Prerequisites

Basic knowledge of mobile


communications
At least 1 year working experience in

Interpret the functions of some typical


counters

Duration
5 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.8.3

GSM-R Radio Network Analysis Training


participants will be able to:

Training Path

GSM-R Radio Network Optimization

Lecture, Case

Describe the key KPIs of TCH/SDCCH


call drop

Summarize the typical problems of call


drop in realistic network

Analyze the main reasons of call drop

Describe the key KPIs of handover

Summarize the typical problems of

2d

Target Audience
GSM-R Radio Network Optimization
Engineers

handover failure in realistic network

Analyze the main reasons of handover


failure

Prerequisites

Completion of the following program(s):

GSM-R BSC6000 Radio Network


Optimization Training,

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

Study the cases

Duration
2 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.9 eLTE Principle Training


5.9.1

eLTE Basic Principle Training


releases

Training Path

eLTE Basic Principle

Describe the radio interface techniques

Explain the difference between the FDD


and TDD mode

Lecture

1d

Target Audience

Describe the flexible spectrum usage

Outline the concepts of channel coding

Describe the principle for OFDM

Have a good understanding of the


OFDMA/SC-FDMA principle, signal
generation and processing

Explain the pros and cons with OFDMA


and SC-FDMA

Outline the radio interface protocols

Detail the time-domain and frequencydomain structure in the radio interface in


UL and DL for both FDD and TDD mode

Service Engineer
Service Design Engineer
Network Design Engineer
Prerequisites

Attendees should have a general


knowledge in cellular systems and radio
technology.

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

1 working days
Class Size

Describe the evolution of cellular


networks

Duration

Summarize the evolution of 3GPP

Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.9.2

eLTE-EPC Network Basic Principle Training

Training Path

Have basic knowledge of mobile


network.

eLTE-EPC Network Basic Principle


Training

Lecture

Objectives
1d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Target Audience

Outline the EPC network structure.

Describe the EPC network interface and


protocol.

All Technical and non-Technical Personnel

procedures.

Prerequisites

Describe the EPC network working

A general understanding of mobile


communication and data
communication.

Duration

Be familiar with Windows operation

Class Size

system.

1 working days

Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.10

eLTE Broadband Trunking Solution Training

5.10.1 eLTE Broadband Trunking System Overview Training


participants will be able to:

Training Path

Describe mobile network evolution.


eLTE Broadband Trunking System Overview
Training

Describe the network structure of EUTRAN/EPC

Lecture

Target Audience
System Engineer
General Manager

1d

Describe the interface and protocol of EUTRAN


Describe wireless interface technology
principle such as OFDM,MIMO and so on
Describe LTE channel structure , wireless
frame structure

Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge in
telecommunication and mobile
communication
Objectives
On completion of this program, the

Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.2 eNodeB Operation and Maintenance Training(Trunking)


Know about eNodeB application

Training Path

scenarios and typical configuration


eNodeB Product Description(Trunking)

Powering up/down the eNodeB and


connect up LMT to the node

Lecture

0.5d

Finding the alarm list of eNodeB


Perform corrective and preventive
maintenance on eNodeB
Finding Faulty Hardware units and

eNodeB Operation and Maintenance


(Trunking)
Lecture,hand-on exercise

replace them
1.5d

Understand the operation and


maintenance system structure

Target Audience

Complete login eNodeB O&M system


Know eNodeB equipment management

System Engineer

Know eNodeB transmission management

Service Engineer

Master eNodeB wireless management

Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge in
telecommunication and mobile
communication
Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:
Master eNodeB product description
Understand eNodeB product structure

Backup eNodeB configuration file


Duration
2 working days0.75d for hand-on exercise
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.3 eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Trunking)


participants will be able to:

Training Path

Master eNodeB data configuration


operation
eNodeB Data Configuration (Trunking)

Master eNodeB data modification


operations

Lecture, hand-on exercise

2d

Install LMT software


Install eOMC910 client software

Target Audience

Use LMT login eNodeB

System Engineer

Use eOMC 910 client and eNodeB

Service Engineer

Execute MML in single mode

Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge in
telecommunication and mobile
communication
Objectives
On completion of this program, the

Execute MML in batch mode


Duration
2 working days1d for hand-on exercise
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.4 eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Trunking)


troubleshooting flow

Training Path

Perform the alarm management and


analysis

eNodeB Troubleshooting(Trunking)

Lecture

1d

Perform the log collection

Draw hardware fault handling procedure

Handle with the main faults of device


level

Target Audience
System Engineer
Service Engineer

Draw transport fault handling procedure

Handle with the main faults of transport


level

Draw radio fault diagnosis process

Check the eNodeB radio configuration

Successful completion of the following

Check quality on the air interface

courses:

Check the EPC configuration

Handle with the main faults of radio level

Prerequisites

eLTE System Overview

eNodeB Product Description

eNodeB Data Configuration

Duration
1 working day

Objectives
Class Size
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Outline the procedure of eNodeB

Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.5 eCNS210 System Overview Training


Training Path

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

eCNS210 System Overview


Lecture

participants will be able to:


1d

Target Audience
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers

Understand eCNS210 system and


hardware structure

Understand eCNS210 logical structure

Understand eCNS210 internal data flow

Duration
1 working days

Prerequisites

Having EPC basic principle technology


knowledge, and having basic knowledge
in telecommunication and mobile
communication.

Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.6 eCNS210 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Understand eCNS210 system and


hardware structure

eCNS210 Routine Operation and


Maintenance
Lecture, Hand-on Exercise

Understand software installation and


upgrading process

2d

Complete eCNS210 hardware operation


and data configuration

Target Audience
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers

Complete eCNS210 equipment routine


maintenance

Complete eCNS210 basic equipment


management

Prerequisites

Having EPC basic principle technology


knowledge, and having basic knowledge
in telecommunication and mobile

Duration

communication.

Class Size

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

2 working days,0.5 day for exercise

Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.7 eCNS210 Data Configuration Training

Training Path

Understand eCNS210 system and


hardware structure

eCNS210 Data Configuration

Understand software installation and


upgrading process

Lecture, Hand-on Exercise

2d

Complete eCNS210 hardware operation


and data configuration

Target Audience
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers

Complete eCNS210 equipment routine


maintenance

Complete eCNS210 basic equipment


management

Prerequisites

Having EPC basic principle technology


knowledge, and having basic knowledge
in telecommunication and mobile

Duration

communication.

Class Size

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

2 working days,1day for hand-on exercise

Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.8 eOMC910 Client Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path
eOMC910 Operation and Maintenance
Training

Lecture

2d

Familiar the routine operation

Familiar the concrete application

Familiar operation maintenance client


related installation and uninstallation

Grasp the elementary operation of


operation maintenance client

Target Audience

operation maintenance client

Field Engineer, First line Maintenance


Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers
Prerequisites

Grasp the operation of control panel

Grasp the maintenance routine

Familiar operation terminal related

Be familiar with communication network


management technology.

installation and uninstallation

Grasp the elementary operation of


operation client

Familiar the Concrete application of

Objectives
Objectives
On completion of this program, the

operation client

Grasp the Network element of eOMC910

Familiar physical structure and software


structure of eOMC910.

Familiar service and skill of eOMC910.

Understand technical specifications of


eOMC910

Familiar Client terminal related


installation and uninstallation

Familiar eOMC910 product complete


flow

control.

Familiar prepare works for eOMC910


product complete

participants will be able to:

Familiar the functional modules of

Duration
2 working days,1day for hand-on exercise
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.9 Dispatching System Operation and Maintenance Training


participants will be able to:

Training Path

of eAPP.

Dispatching System Product Training


Lecture, Hand-on Exercise, Demo

Describe system structure and structure

1d

Perform hardware installation procedure.

Perform Commissioning of eAPP.

Perform the routine operation and


maintenance.

Target Audience
Duration
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers
Prerequisites

Basic understanding of trunking


knowledge.

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.10 Terminal Operation Training(Trunking)


participants will be able to:

Training Path
Terminal Operation Training(Trunking)
Lecture, Demo

Master the terminal product structure

Understand EG860 hardware installation

Complete EG860 business


commissioning

Complete terminal business

1d

Target Audience
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers
Prerequisites

Basic understanding of trunking


knowledge.

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

demonstration
Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.11 eSCN230 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

UnderstandeSCN230 system and


hardware structure

eSCN230 Operation and Maintenance


Training
Lecture

1d

Understand software installation and


upgrading process

Complete eSCN230 hardware operation


and data configuration

Target Audience
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers

Complete eSCN230 equipment routine


maintenance

Complete eSCN230 basic equipment


management

Prerequisites

Having EPC basic principle technology


knowledge, and having basic knowledge
in telecommunication and mobile
communication.

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Duration
1working days
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.12 eSCN230 Data Configuration Training

Training Path

UnderstandeSCN230 system and


hardware structure

eSCN230 Data Configuration

Understand software installation and


upgrading process

Lecture

1d

Complete eSCN230 hardware operation


and data configuration

Target Audience
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers

Complete eSCN230 equipment routine


maintenance

Complete eSCN230 basic equipment


management

Prerequisites

Having EPC basic principle technology


knowledge, and having basic knowledge
in telecommunication and mobile
communication.

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Duration
1working days
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.10.13 eLTE Rapid Solution Training


Training Path

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

eLTE Rapid System Overview


Lecture

participants will be able to:


0.25d

eLTE Rapid System Installation and


Commissioning
Lecture

Know about Huawei eLTE Rapid


System overview.
Know about Huawei eLTE Rapid

System Logical structure.


1.25d

Know about Huawei eLTE Rapid

System Products components

eSCN231 Operation and Maintenance


Lecture

1d

Know about Huawei eLTE Rapid

System Typical Application Scenarios

Know about Huawei eLTE Rapid


System Hardware Composition

Know about Huawei eLTE Rapid


System Installation Procedure.

Know about Huawei eLTE Rapid


System Commissioning and Maintenance

eOMC910 Client Operation and


Maintenance
Lecture,Hand-on Exercise

1d

Grasp the elementary operation of

operation client of eOMC

Familiar the Concrete application of


operation client of eOMC

Dispatching System Operation and


Maintenance Training
Lecture,Hand-on Exercise

1d

Perform the eMDC routine operation

and maintenance.

0.5d

Target Audience
Duration
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers
Prerequisites
Be familiar with communication network
management technology.

terminal

product

Complete EP680/EG860 business


commissioning

Complete
demonstration

the

structure

Terminal Operation
Leture,Hand-on Exercise

Master

5 working day
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

terminal

business

Training Programs

5.11

eLTE Broadband Access Solution Training

5.11.1 eLTE Broadband Access System Overview Training


Describe mobile network evolution.

Training Path
eLTE Broadband Trunking System Overview

Describe the network structure of EUTRAN/EPC

Training

Describe the interface and protocol of ELecture

1d

UTRAN
Describe wireless interface technology
principle such as OFDM,MIMO and so on

Target Audience
System Engineer

Describe LTE channel structure , wireless


frame structure

General Manager
Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge in
telecommunication and mobile
communication
Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.11.2 eNodeB Operation and Maintenance Training(Access)


Know about eNodeB application

Training Path

scenarios and typical configuration


Powering up/down the eNodeB and

eNodeB Product Description(Access)

connect up LMT to the node


Lecture

0.5d

Finding the alarm list of eNodeB


Perform corrective and preventive
maintenance on eNodeB

eNodeB Operation and Maintenance(Access)

Finding Faulty Hardware units and


replace them

Lecture,hand-on exercise

1.5d

Understand the operation and


maintenance system structure

Target Audience

Complete login eNodeB O&M system


Know eNodeB equipment management

System Engineer

Know eNodeB transmission management

Service Engineer

Master eNodeB wireless management

Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge in
telecommunication and mobile
communication
Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:
Master eNodeB product description
Understand eNodeB product structure

Backup eNodeB configuration file

Duration
2 working days0.75d for hand-on exercise
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.11.3 eNodeB Data Configuration Training(Access)


participants will be able to:

Training Path

Master eNodeB data configuration


operation
Master eNodeB data modification

eNodeB Data Configuration (Access)

operations
Lecture, hand-on exercise

2d

Install LMT software


Install eOMC910 client software

Target Audience

Use LMT login eNodeB


Use NMS client to manage eNodeB

System Engineer

Execute MML in single mode

Service Engineer

Execute MML in batch mode

Prerequisites
Having basic knowledge in
telecommunication and mobile
communication
Objectives
On completion of this program, the

Duration
2 working days1d for hand-on exercise
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.11.4 eNodeB Troubleshooting Training(Access)


troubleshooting flow

Training Path

Perform the alarm management and


analysis

eNodeB Troubleshooting(Access)

Lecture

1d

Perform the log collection

Draw hardware fault handling procedure

Handle with the main faults of device


level

Target Audience
System Engineer
Service Engineer

Draw transport fault handling procedure

Handle with the main faults of transport


level

Draw radio fault diagnosis process

Check the eNodeB radio configuration

Successful completion of the following

Check quality on the air interface

courses:

Check the EPC configuration

Handle with the main faults of radio level

Prerequisites

eLTE System Overview

eNodeB Product Description

eNodeB Data Configuration

Duration
1 working day

Objectives
Class Size
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Outline the procedure of eNodeB

Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.11.5 eCNS600 System Overview Training


Training Path

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

eCNS210 System Overview


Lecture

participants will be able to:


1d

Target Audience
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers

Understand eCNS600 system and


hardware structure

Understand eCNS600 logical structure

Understand eCNS600 internal data flow

Duration
1 working days

Prerequisites

Having EPC basic principle technology


knowledge, and having basic knowledge
in telecommunication and mobile
communication.

Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.11.6 eCNS600 Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

eCN600 Routine Operation and


Maintenance
Lecture, Hand-on Exercise

participants will be able to:


2d

Target Audience
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers
Prerequisites

Having EPC basic principle technology


knowledge, and having basic knowledge
in telecommunication and mobile
communication.

Complete eCNS600 equipment routine


maintenance

Complete eCNS600 basic equipment


management

Duration
2 working days,1 day for exercise
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.11.7 eCNS600 Data Configuration Training


participants will be able to:

Training Path

hardware structure

eCNS600 Data Configuration

Lecture, Hand-on Exercise

2d

Field Engineer, First line Maintenance


Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers
Prerequisites
Having EPC basic principle technology
knowledge, and having basic knowledge
in telecommunication and mobile
communication.
Objectives
On completion of this program, the

Understand software installation and


upgrading process

Complete eCNS600 hardware operation


and data configuration

Complete eCNS600 service data

Target Audience

Understand eCNS600 system and

configuration
Duration
2 working days,1day for hand-on exercise
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.11.8 U2000 Client Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path
U2000 Operation and Maintenance
Training

Lecture, Hand-on Exercise

Wireless Engineer

U2000 operation and maintenance


technicians, engineers

Prerequisites
Be familiar with communication network
management technology.
Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Create NE and subnet in U2000 systems

Manage the NE state in U2000 system

Know user type in U2000

Create, modify and delete user


information

Manage the user group in U2000

Manage user NE authority and U2000


authority

Monitor user state

Query system log

Check NE healthy state

2d

Target Audience

Duration
2 working day,1day for hand-on exercise
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.11.9 Terminal Operation Training(Access)


Training Path

Objectives
On completion of this program, the

Terminal Operation Training(Access)


Lecture, Hand-on Exercise

participants will be able to:


1d

Target Audience
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers
Prerequisites

Be familiar with communication access


communication technology.

Master teminal product system structure

Complete terminal hardware installation

Complete terminal commissioning

Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.11.10 eCNS610 Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Objectives

eCNS610 Operation and Maintenace

Lecture,Hand-on Exercise

1d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Understand eCNS610 system and


hardware structure

Understand software installation and


upgrading process

Target Audience
Field Engineer, First line Maintenance
Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers

Complete eCNS610 equipment routine


maintenance

Complete eCNS610 basic equipment


management

Prerequisites

Having EPC basic principle technology


knowledge, and having basic knowledge
in telecommunication and mobile
communication.

Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.11.11 eCNS610 Data Configuration Training


Training Path

Objectives

eCNS610 Data Configuration Training

Lecture,Hand-on Exercise

1d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Understand eCNS610 system and


hardware structure

Understand software installation and


upgrading process

Target Audience

and data configuration

Field Engineer, First line Maintenance


Engineers, Routine Maintenance Engineers
Prerequisites

Having EPC basic principle technology


knowledge, and having basic knowledge
in telecommunication and mobile
communication.

Complete eCNS610 hardware operation

Duration
1 working day
Class Size
Min 6Max 12

Training Programs

5.12

eLTE RNP&RNO Training

5.12.1 eLTE Trunking Radio Network Planning and Optimizing Overview Training
principle

Training Path

Know about LTE Protocols and


Procedures

eLTE Radio RNO&RNP Overview

Objectives
Lecture

0.5d
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Antenna Introduction
Lecture

0.5d

the physical layer and their relations

Target Audience
Service Planning Engineer
Service Design Engineer

Brief the main functions of Non Access


Stratum(NAS), Radio Resource Control
(RRC), Packet Data Convergence
Protocol (PDCP) Radio Link Control
(RLC), Medium Access Control (MAC),

Duration
1 working days

Network Design Engineer


Class Size
Prerequisites

Know about LTE Basic communication

Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.12.2 eLTE Trunking Radio Network Design and Dimensioning Training

Training Path

Perform eLTE radio network coverage


dimensioning

eLTE Radio Network Design

Lecture

1d

Target Audience
Service Planning Engineer
Service Design Engineer
Network Design Engineer

Perform eLTE link budget

Describe propagation model

Perform site number dimensioning

Outline capacity dimensioning procedure

Describe traffic model and parameters

Perform radio network throughput


calculation

Analysis DL Throughput

Analysis UL Throughput

Perform throughput per cell(IP)

Prerequisites

dimensioning

Successful completion of the following

Perform capacity dimensioning

courses:

Outline frequency planning

LTE Air Interface

Outline TA planning

LTE Protocols and Procedures

Outline PCI planning

Outline PRACH planning

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Outline eLTE radio network planning

Describe eLTE radio network planning


Process

Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

Training Programs

5.12.3 eLTE Trunking Radio RF Network Optimizing Training


Training Path

eLTE trunking Radio RF Network Optimize

Lecture

1d

Describe fault diagnosis process

Perform operations of fault diagnosis

Perform checking hardware connections

Perform checking version mapping

Perform checking the eNodeB


configuration

Perform checking quality on the air


interface

Describe time and frequency resources

Target Audience
Service Planning Engineer
Service Design Engineer
Network Design Engineer
Network Optimize Engineer

and throughput calculation

Describe throughput fault diagnosis


procedures and methods

Describe processes of data transmission


fault diagnosis

Prerequisites

Successful completion of the following


courses:

LTE Air Interface

LTE Protocols and Procedures

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Perform handover fault analysis

Describe typical case of handover fault

Describe basic principle of access

Describe basic requirements for fault


diagnosis

Perform diagnosis for locating downlink


data transmission faults

Perform diagnosis for uplink problems

Duration
1 working days
Class Size
Min 6, Max 12

6 Network Energy Training Solution


6.1 Training Path
6.1.1

Telecom Energy Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training
Power3000 System Design
Training
2d

Implement & Operate


Operation and Maintenance
Training
Minishelter(ITS1000M)
System Operation and
Maintenance Training 2d

Improve
Advanced Technology
Training

Power3000 System
Operation and Maintenance
Training
4d

PowerCube1000 System
Operation and
Maintenance Training 4d

Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include Minishelter, Power3000, PowerCube1000 products trainings.

Operators and Maintainers, Managers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and maintenance
training programs respectively.

6.1.2

Data Center Energy Training Path

Plan & Design


Planning and Design Training

Implement & Operate


Operation and Maintenance
Training
IDS1000 Container Data
Center Operation and
Maintenance Training 2d

Improve
Advanced Technology
Training
HCS-Field-UPS Huawei
UPS Specialist Certification
Training
5d

IDS2000 Modular Data


Center Operation and
Maintenance Training
5d

UPS Operation and


Maintenance Training
2d

Elective Guide

The training programs in the path include IDS1000, IDS2000 and UPS products trainings.

Operators and Maintainers, Managers are proposed to learn the technology foundation, operation and maintenance
training programs respectively.

6.2 Required Training Programs


Enterprise Network Energy Training Programs are designed as follows:
Training Programs

Level

Duration
(working
days)

Training
Location

Class
Size

UPS Specialist Certification Training Programs


HCS-Field-UPS Huawei UPS Specialist
Certification Training

Minishelter(ITS1000M) System Operation and


Maintenance Training

Power3000(DC Power) System Operation and


Maintenance Training

Power3000(DC Power) System Design Training

PowerCube1000 System Operation and


Maintenance Training

6~12

Power Supply Product Training Programs


6~12

6~12

6~12
6~12

Data Center Facility Product Training Programs


IDS1000 Container Data Center Operation and
Maintenance Training

6~12

IDS2000 Modular Data Center Operation and


Maintenance Training

6~12

6~12

UPS Operation and Maintenance Training

Level Description: : Basic Course : Intermediate Course : Advanced Course


Course

: Expert

6.3 Training Programs


6.4 UPS Specialist Certification Training Programs
6.4.1

HCS-Field-UPS Huawei UPS Specialist Certification Training

Training Path

Master the installation and debugging points, site


work content, attention matters of UPS product

HCS-Field-UPS Huawei UPS Field Specialist


Certification

OUPS13
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

and Storage battery


Master the basic Fault determination method

5d

and thought of UPS product and Storage battery


Master the trouble diagnosis and treatment

Operators and maintainers

methods of UPS product


Master the log analysis capabilities of UPS

Prerequisites

Master the commonly testing tools usage of UPS

Have a basic knowledge of electrician

Master the commonly faulty judgment and

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

processing of storage battery


Duration

5 working days

Master the application scenarios and basic


working principle of UPS product

Class Size

Master the Structure and components function of

Min 6, Max 12

UPS product and Storage battery

378

6.5 Telecom Energy Training Programs


6.5.1

Minishelter(ITS1000M) System Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Outline the typical configurations of


Minishelter(ITS1000M)

Minishelter Operation and Maintenance

Interpret the functions and specifications of

OPS11
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
Exercise

different parts.

2d

Perform hardware configuration and cables


connection.

Operators and maintainers

Perform the installation of

Prerequisites

Minishelter(ITS1000M) system.
Perform the operation of Minishelter(ITS1000M)

The program is intended for field


maintenance engineers, second line or
technical support engineers of Minishelter
(ITS1000M) System Operation and
Maintenance

system.
Perform the maintenance of
Minishelter(ITS1000M) system.
Explain the common fault types.
Apply fault disposal method

Objectives

Explain how to prevent the fault

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Outline green site solution of

Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from


troubleshooting practice
Duration

Minishelter(ITS1000M) system.

2 working days

Interpret the working principle of


Minishelter(ITS1000M) system.

Class Size

Interpret the basic structure of

Min 6, Max 12

Minishelter(ITS1000M) system.

379

6.5.2

Power3000(DC Power) System Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Outline composing of power system


Interpret the functions and specifications of

Power3000(DC Power) System Operation and


Maintenance

OPS12
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

different composing.
Outline the load capacity and ability of power

4d

system.
Perform DC power system operation and

Operators and maintainers

maintenance, etc.
Perform the on-site operation, such as AC

Prerequisites

detective-Board replacement, etc.

Have a basic knowledge of power supply

Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

troubleshooting practice
Duration

4 working days

Describe the working principle of power system


Describe structure, functions of power system

Class Size

Outline the features of power system.

Min 6, Max 12

380

6.5.3

Power3000(DC Power) System Design Training

Training Path

Explain the design principle of Power 3000 (DC


Power) solution.

Power3000(DC Power) System Design

Outline the design step of Power 3000 (DC

OPS21
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Power) solution.

2d

Perform power consumption calculation


Perform battery configuration design of Power

Operators and maintainers

3000 (DC Power) solution.

Planners and Designers

Perform the design process, design methods of


Power 3000 (DC Power) solution

Prerequisites

Have a basic knowledge of power supply

Duration

2 working days

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

381

6.5.4

PowerCube1000 System Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

different parts.
Perform hardware configuration and cables

PowerCube1000 System Operation and


Maintenance

OPS14
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

connection.
Perform the installation of PowerCube 1000

4d

Solution.
Perform the operation of PowerCube 1000

Operators and maintainers

Solution.
Perform the maintenance of PowerCube 1000

Prerequisites

Solution.

Have a basic knowledge of power supply

Explain the common fault types.

Objectives

Apply fault disposal method

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Explain how to prevent the fault


Perform the Field operation, such as Battery

Outline the load capacity and ability of

replacement.

PowerCube 1000 Solution.

Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from

Interpret the working principle of PowerCube


1000 Solution.

troubleshooting practice
Duration

Interpret the basic structure of PowerCube 1000

4 working days

Solution.
Outline the typical configurations of PowerCube

Class Size

1000 Solution.

Min 6, Max 12

Interpret the functions and specifications of

382

6.6 Data Center Facility Training Programs


6.6.1

IDS1000 Container Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Describe the installation tools of the container


DC

IDS1000 Container Data Center


Operation and Maintenance

OIDS11
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Describe the installation precautions of the


container DC

2d

Describe fastness and combination


Describe the interconnect pipes of the container

Operators and maintainers

DC
Describe the interconnect cables of the container

Prerequisites

DC

None

Describe the System commission with power

Objectives

supply

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe the Inspections and checks of the

Describe the basic structure of the container DC

Describe the cooling system troubleshooting

container DC

Describe the basic concepts and features of the

methods
Describe the power supply system

container DC
Describe the typical configurations of the

troubleshooting methods
Describe the fire protection system

container DC
Describe the values for consumer of the

troubleshooting methods
Describe the room management system alarm

container DC
Describe the technical advantages of the
container DC

processing methods
Duration

Describe the application scenarios of the

2 working days

container DC
Perform the engineering surveys of the container

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

DC

383

6.6.2

IDS2000 Modular Data Center Operation and Maintenance Training

Training path

Describe modular DC installation tool


Describe modular DC installation notes

IDS2000 Modular Data Center


Operation and Maintenance

OIDS12
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Describe modular DC combined cabinet


Describe modular DC fan installation

5d

Describe modular DC UPS and UPS battery


installation

Operators and maintainers

Describe modular DC cable connection


Describe modular DC system power on

Prerequisites

debugging

None

Describe modular DC inspection

Objectives

On completion of this course, the participants


will be able to:

Describe modular DC UPS fault handle method


Describe modular DC fan fault handle method
Describe management system alarm handle

Describe modular DC basic components

methodDuration

Describe modular DC basic concept

5 working days

Describe modular DC technical features


Describe modular DC typical configuration

Class size

Describe modular DC value for consumer

Min 6, Max 12

Describe modular DC application scene

384

6.6.3

UPS Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Master the operation and routine maintenance


Master the Structure and components function of

UPS Operation and Maintenance

UPS product and Storage battery

OUPS12
Target Audience

Lecture, Hands-on
exercise

Master the installation and debugging points, site

2d

work content, attention matters of UPS product


and Storage battery
Master the basic Fault determination method

Operators and maintainers

and thought of UPS product and Storage battery

Prerequisites

Master the model selection for UPS and Storage

Have a basic knowledge of electrician


Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Master the application scenarios and basic

battery
Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

working principle of UPS product

385

7 Transmission Network Training Solution


7.1 Training Path
WDM Training Path

Prerequisites

WDM Principle Introduction


WBT (Pre-Learning)

1H

WDM Fundamental Training


ILT/LVC

1D

OTN Introduction
WBT (Pre-Learning)

Installation & Commissioning


Engineer

7.1.1

ILT/LVC

2D

ASON Fundamental Training


3H

ILT//LVC

1D

OptiX MDS 6630(Opical Power


Commissioning) Training

OptiX WDM Equipment


Installation Training
ILT

Ethernet Fundamental Training

ILT

2D

386

2D

OptiX NG WDM Equipment


Installation Training

Tannsmission Based T-SDN


Introduction

ILT

ILT

1D

OptiX NG WDM Network


Protection (EoO/EoW) Special
Topic Training
ILT

OptiX NG WDM DCN Special


Topic Training

O&M Engineer

3D

OptiX NG WDM Optical Doctor


System Special Topic

1D

ILT

1D

OptiX NG WDM ASON


Operation & Maintenance
Training

OptiX NG WDM DCN Special


Topic Training
ILT

OptiX NG WDM Synchronization


Special Topic Training
ILT

3D

ILT

0.5D

1D

ILT

Introduction to 400G Technology


ILT

0.5D

OptiX NG WDM Network


Protection (Packet) Special
Topic Training
ILT

2D

OptiX NG WDM Master-Slave


Subrack Management Special
Topic
ILT

1D

OptiX NG WDM T-SDN


Operation and Maintenance
Training

3D

ILT

3D

OptiX OSN 8800 Hardware


Description
WBT (Pre-Learning)

1.5H

OptiX BWS 1600S (repeatered)


Sub-marine System Operation
and Maintenance Training
ILT

OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) 2nd


Line Maintenance Training
ILT

OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) 2nd


Line Maintenance Training

7D

ILT

5D

OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 1st Line


Maintenance Training
ILT

2D

OptiX OSN 9800 1st Line


Maintenance Training
ILT

ILT

7D

OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 2nd Line


Maintenance Training
ILT

13D

2D

ILT

10D

OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and


Maintenance Training

0.5H

ILT

4D

OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN)


Operation and Maintenance
Training

ILT

ILT

5D

OptiX OSN 1800V(Packet)


Operation and Maintenance
Training
ILT

5D

iManager MDS 6600 (WDM


Designer) Operation Training
ILT

4D

387

ILT

12D

ILT

3D

OptiX OSN 1800(Packet)


Operation and Maintenance
Training
ILT

OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM)


Operation and Maintenance
Training
5D

OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 3rd Line


Maintenance Training

OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta


Training

OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line


Maintenance Training

OptiX OSN 1800 Hardware


Description
WBT (Pre-Learning)

OptiX BWS 1600S


(unrepeatered) Sub-marine
System Operation and
Maintenance Training
ILT
5D

OptiX OSN 9800(Packet)


Operation and Maintenance
Training

OptiX OSN 8800 100G O&M


Training
ILT

7D

5D

5D

OptiX OSN 1800 Network


Design Training
ILT

5D

Network Optimization
Engineer
Network Planning & Design Engineer

OptiX WDM Network


Optimization Training

OptiX WDM Network


Assessment Training
ILT

2D

ILT

OptiX WDM Network Expansion


Training
ILT

2D

1D

OptiX WDM Network


Reconstruction Training
ILT

3D

OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(WDM)


Network Planning and Design
Training

OptiX WDM Network Design


Training
OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network
Design Basic Training
ILT

2D

ILT

ILT

3D

OptiX NG WDM Packet Network


Planning and Design Training

OptiX NG WDM Network Design


Training
ILT

ILT

3D

3D

OptiX BWS 1600S


(unrepeatered) Planning and
Design Training
ILT

Technical Manager

4D

Mobile Backhaul
Synchronization Solution
Introduction Training

OptiX NG WDM Product


Overview Training
ILT/LVC

0.5D

0.5D

OptiX WDM 40G100G Coherent


OTU Technology

40G/100G Coherent OTU


Technology
WBT (Pre-Learning)

ILT /LVC

1H

ILT /LVC

0.5D

3D

IP-oriented Transport Solution


Training
ILT/LVC

2D

OSN 1800 Based Metro Network


Solution Training
ILT/LVC

2D

The WBT indicates optional module

388

Prerequisites

RTN Training Path

Digital Microwave Principle


Introduction
WBT(Pre-Learning 2H

OptiX RTN 900 Hardware


Description
WBT(Pre-Learning 1H

OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN


Features Introduction

WBT(Pre-Learning

2H

OptiX RTN 900 Packet Service


Introduction

WBT(Pre-Learning

Network Planning & Design

7.1.2

2H

OptiX RTN Network


Planning Basic Training
ILT/LVC
2D

OptiX RTN 900 Network


Planning Training
ILT/LVC

OptiX RTN 300 Network


Planning Training
ILT/LVC
2D

389

4D

OptiX RTN 900 Network


Planning Advanced
Training
ILT/LVC
2D

Installation
and
Commissioning
Operation and Maintenance

OptiX RTN 900 Installation


and Commissioning
Training
ILT
7D

OptiX RTN 900 1st Line


Maintenance Training
ILT
2D

OptiX RTN 980L IP Long


Haul Microwave Features
Training

ILT

3D

OptiX RTN 980L


Installation and
Commissioning Training
ILT
7D

OptiX RTN 310360380


Installation and
Commissioning Training
ILT
4D

OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line


Maintenance Training

OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line


Maintenance Training
ILT
7D

ILT

7D

OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN


Features Training
ILT

5D

OptiX RTN 310360380 1st


Line Maintenance Training
ILT
2D

OptiX RTN 310360380 2nd


Line Maintenance Training
ILT
5D

OptiX RTN 310 Operation


and Maintenance Training
ILT
4D

OptiX RTN 360 Operation


and Maintenance Training
ILT
4D

Assessment
and
Optimization

OptiX RTN Network


Optimization Training
ILT
1D

Technical
manager

IP-oriented Transport
Solution Training
ILT/LVC
2D

OptiX RTN 300


Preconfiguration Tool and
Operation
ILT
0.5D

Microwave Backhaul
Solution Evolution
ILT/LVC
0.5D

RTN 900 Products Advanced Training

OptiX RTN Network


Assessment Training
ILT
2D

Transmission
Network Evolution
and Trends
Training

OptiX RTN 320 Operation


and Maintenance Training
ILT
4D

OptiX RTN 900 ERPS


Special Topic Training
ILT/LVC
0.5D

OptiX RTN 900 PLA/EPLA


Special Topic Training
ILT/LVC
0.5D

OptiX RTN 900 Tunnel


APS Special Topic Training
ILT/LVC
0.5D

OptiX RTN 900 LAG


Special Topic Training
ILT/LVC
0.5D

OptiX RTN 900


Preconfiguration Tool and
OperationTraining
ILT/LVC
0.5D

OptiX RTN 380 Operation


and Maintenance Training
ILT
4D

Huawei Microwave
Solution Overview
ILT /LVC
0.5D

OptiX RTN 900 1588V2


Special Topic Training
ILT/LVC
0.5D

Microwave Small Cell


Backhaul Solution
ILT/LVC
0.5D
OptiX RTN 900 PW APS
Special Topic Training
ILT/LVC
0.5D
OptiX RTN 900 AM Special
Topic Training
ILT/LVC
0.5D
iManager U2000 RTN
Network Monitoring
Training
ILT/LVC
0.5D

KPI Analysis of Ethernet


service
ILT/LVC
0.5D
The WBT indicates optional module

390

7.1.3

MSTP Training Path

391

Hybrid MSTP Fundamental


Training

SDH Principle Introduction


WBT (Pre-Learning)

Ethernet Basis
Prerequisites

ILT/LVC

2.5H

SDH Fundamental Training

WBT (Pre-Learning)

1H

ILT/LVC

2D

2D

Ethernet Fundamental Training


ILT/LVC

2D

ASON Fundamental Training

IP Basis
WBT (Pre-Learning)

ILT//LVC

1H

1D

OptiX OSN 1500250035007500


Hardware Description

Installation & Commissioning Engineer

WBT (Pre-Learning)

1H

OptiX NG SDH & OCS


Equipment (TDM)
Commissioning Training

OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS


Installation Training
ILT

2D

ILT

5D

OptiX NG SDH Equipment


(Packet) Commissioning
Training
ILT

5D

OptiX NG SDH Equipment


(Packet+TDM) Commissioning
Training
ILT

8D

OptiX NG SDH & OCS


Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line
Maintenance Training
ILT

OptiX NG SDH & OCS


Equipment (TDM) 1st Line
Maintenance Training
ILT

15D
OptiX NG SDH & OCS
Equipment (TDM) NMC
Operation Training

2D
ILT

OptiX NG SDH Equipment


(Packet) 1st Line Maintenance
Training
ILT

2D

ILT

ILT

ILT

4D

12D

OptiX NG SDH Equipment


(Packet) NMC Operation
Training
10D

ILT
3D

13D

OptiX NG SDH Equipment


(Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance
Training

OptiX NG SDH Equipment


(Packet+TDM) NMC Operation
Training
OptiX NG SDH Equipment
(Packet+TDM) 1st Line
Maintenance Training

ILT

OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced


Operation and Maintenance
Training
12D

ILT

O&M Engineer

OptiX NG SDH & OCS


Equipment (TDM) 3rd Line
Maintenance Training

OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation


and Maintenance Training
ILT

3D

15D

OptiX NG SDH Equipment


(Packet+TDM) 2nd Line
Maintenance Training
ILT

18D

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)


Operation and Maintenance
Training
ILT

4D
OptiX OSN 500/550/580
(Packet) Operation and
Maintenance Training

ILT

OptiX OSN 500/550/580


(Packet+TDM) Operation and
Maintenance Training
ILT

8D

5D

392

TP-Assist Operation and


Maintenance Training (Hybrid
MSTP)
ILT

1D

Network
Optimization
Engineer

OptiX SDH Network Assessment


Training
ILT

3D

OptiX SDH Network


Optimization Training
ILT

OptiX SDH Network Expansion


and Reconstruction Training
3D

ILT

3D

OptiX SDH Network Design


Basic Training

Network Planning &


Design Engineer

ILT

2D

OptiX MSTP Network Design


Training
ILT

3D

OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH)


Network Planning and Design
Training
ILT

4D

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network


Design Training

Technical
Manager

ILT
Mobile Backhaul
Synchronization Solution
Introduction Training

OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS


Product Overview Training
ILT/LVC

3D

0.5D

ILT/LVC

Hybrid MSTP-Based Mobile


Backhaul Evolution Solution
Training

0.5D

ILT/LVC

0.5D

The WBT indicates optional module

Transmission OSS Training Path

iManager N2510 OLS


Operation and
Maintenance Training
(Transmission)
ILT
1D

Operation and Maintenance

7.1.4

iManager U2000 LCT


Operation Training
ILT

1D

iManager U2000 Operation


and Maintenance Training
for NOC FO (Transmission)
ILT

2D

iManager U2000 Monitoring


Training (Transmission
Network only)
ILT
1D

iManager uTraffic Network


Performance Monitoring
Training(Transmission
Network Only)
ILT

2D

393

iManager U2000 Operation


and Maintenance Training
for NOC BO
(Transmission)
ILT
3D

iManager U2100 Operation


and Maintenance Training
ILT

5D

7.2 Required Training Programs


Transmission Network Training Programs are designed as follows:
Training Programs

Level

Duration
(working
days)

Training
Location

Class
Size

Transmission Network Evolution and Trends Training


IP-oriented Transport Solution Training

6 ~ 12

40G/100G Coherent OTU Technology

0.5

6 ~ 12

Transmission Based T-SDN Introduction

0.5

6 ~ 12

Introduction to 400G Technology

0.5

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 1800 Based Metro Network Solution


Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

Microwave Backhaul Solution Evolution

0.5

6 ~ 12

Huawei Microwave Solution Overview

0.5

6 ~ 12

Microwave Small Cell Backhaul Solution

0.5

6 ~ 12

Mobile Backhaul Evolution and Trends Training

Transmission Network Planning and Design Training


OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX MSTP Network Design Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning


and Design Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX WDM Network Design Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning


and Design Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced

6 ~ 12

394

Training
OptiX RTN 300 Network Planning Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Planning and


Design Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning and


Design Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 1800 Network Design Training

6 ~ 12

iManager MDS 6600 (WDM Designer) Operation


Training

6 ~ 12

Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training


OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training

6 ~ 12

Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training


OptiX RTN Network Assessment Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN Network Optimization Training

6 ~ 12

SDH Fundamental Training

6 ~ 12

WDM Fundamental Training

6 ~ 12

Ethernet Fundamental Training

6 ~ 12

ASON Fundamental Training

6 ~ 12

Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

Transmission Network Principle Training

WDM Products Training


OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 1st Line Maintenance
Training

395

OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance


Training

13

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 3rd Line Maintenance


Training

12

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 8800 100G O&M Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG WDM Equipment Installation Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 1800(Packet) Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 1800V(Packet) Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN) Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM) Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 9800 1st Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line Maintenance Training

10

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX BWS 1600S (repeatered) Sub-marine


System Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine


System Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX MDS 6630(Opical Power Commissioning)


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 9800(Packet) Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

396

OptiX NG WDM T-SDN Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (EoO/EoW)


Special Topic Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG WDM Synchronization Special Topic


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (Packet)


Special Topic Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG WDM DCN Special Topic Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG WDM Optical Doctor System Special


Topic

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG WDM Master-Slave Subrack


Management Special Topic

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 1st Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900V1R8 2nd Line Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Features Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 980L IP Long Haul Microwave Features


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 980L Installation and Commissioning


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 ERPS Special Topic Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 PLA/EPLA Special Topic Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 PW APS Special Topic Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 Tunnel APS Special Topic Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 LAG Special Topic Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

RTN 900 Products Training

RTN 900 Products Advanced Training

397

OptiX RTN 900 AM Special Topic Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 Preconfiguration Tool and


Operation Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 ERPS Special Topic Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 900 1588V2 Special Topic Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

iManager U2000 RTN Network Monitoring Training

6 ~ 12

KPI Analysis of Ethernet service

0.5

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 310360380 Installation and


Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 310360380 1st Line Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 310360380 2nd Line Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 300 Preconfiguration Tool and


Operation

0.5

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 320 Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 310 Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 380 Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX RTN 360 Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Product Overview


Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Installation Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM)


Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 1st Line


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC

12

6 ~ 12

RTN 300 Products Training

MSTP Products Training

398

Operation Training
OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line
Maintenance Training

15

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 3rd Line


Maintenance Training

13

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet)


Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 1st Line


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC


Operation Training

10

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 2nd Line


Maintenance Training

12

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM)


Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 1st Line


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC


Operation Training

15

6 ~ 12

OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 2nd Line


Maintenance Training

18

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet+TDM) Operation


and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

TP-Assist Operation and Maintenance Training


(Hybrid MSTP)

6 ~ 12

Transmission Network OSS Training

399

iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission


Network only)

6 ~ 12

iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training

6 ~ 12

iManager N2510 OLS Operation and Maintenance


Training (Transmission)

6 ~ 12

iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance


Training for NOC FO (Transmission)

6 ~ 12

iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance


Training for NOC BO (Transmission)

6 ~ 12

iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

iManager uTraffic Network Performance Monitoring


Training (Transmission Network Only)

6 ~ 12

Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission


Technologies and Device Training

15

6 ~ 12

Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building


Carrier MSTP Transmission Network Training

10

6 ~ 12

Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building


Carrier OTN Transmission Network Training

10

6 ~ 12

Transmission Engineer Certification

400

7.3 Training Programs


7.4 Transmission Network Evolution and Trends Training Programs
7.4.1

IP-oriented Transport Solution Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Hybrid MSTP Network Overview

OTA08

Lecture

0.5d

Describe the background of OptiX Hybrid


MSTP
Explain the service characters of OptiX Hybrid

All IP Transport Network Solution

OTA19

Lecture

MSTP
Describe the networking characters of OptiX

0.5d

Hybrid MSTP
Outline the difference of OptiX Hybrid MSTP
network from other network technology

Metro OTN Solution

OTC09

Lecture

List the trend of Metro transmission network

0.5d

Illustrate the features of OTN


Describe the application of Huawei OTN
products

OptiX RTN Microwave Network Overview

List the equipment types of OptiX RTN

OTF48

Lecture

0.5d

Outline main functions of OptiX RTN


equipment
Describe typical networking and protection of

Target Audience

OptiX RTN equipment

Technical manager

Know the typical solutions of OpiX RTN


equipment

Personnel who requires a general understanding

Outline the technologies of the transmission

of Huawei OptiX RTN equipment and solution

network for All-IP service


Describe the solutions for All-IP network

Prerequisites

Compare the All-IP transport solutions and

Having the basic knowledge about


telecommunications network, especially

figure out the difference

Duration

transmission network.

2 working days

Having the experience for telecommunications


equipment

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

401

7.4.2

40G/100G Coherent OTU Technology

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the key technologies for 40G/100G

OptiX WDM 40G100G Coherent OTU


Technology

OTC81

Lecture

transmission
Describe the PDM-BPSK and PDM-QPSK

0.5d

modulation method
Describe the basic principle of coherent

Target Audience

detection

Technical manager

List the main functions and features of the

Prerequisites

Having the basic knowledge for


communication network
Objectives

40G/100G coherent OTU board

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

On completion of this program, the

Min 6, Max 12

402

7.4.3

Transmission Based T-SDN Introduction

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Transmission Based T-SDN Introduction


OTC156

Lecture

0.5d

Understand the development and origin of TSDN

Target Audience

Describe the T-SDN structure


Understand the application scenarios of T-SDN

Technical manager
Prerequisites

Duration

0.5 working day

Having knowledge of OTN, WDM and IP


technology

Class Size

Having experience of IP, WDM network

Min 6, Max 12

operation and maintenance

403

7.4.4

Introduction to 400G Technology

Training Path

operation and maintenance

Objectives
Introduction to 400G Technology

OTC157

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

0.5d

Understand the key technologies of 400G

Target Audience

Duration

Technical manager
0.5 working day

Prerequisites

Class Size
Having knowledge of OTN, WDM and IP

Min 6, Max 12

technology
Having experience of IP, WDM network

404

7.4.5

OptiX OSN 1800 Based Metro Network Solution Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OptiX OSN 1800 Based Metro Network


Solution

OTC181

Lecture

0.5d

List the future direction of Transmission


network.

Target Audience

List the value of OptiX OSN 1800 product.

Technical manager

Describe the application solutions of OptiX

Prerequisites
Having working experience in WDM

OSN1800 product.

Duration

transmission network
Upon completion of OptiX OSN 1800 2nd Line

0.5 working day


Class Size

Maintenance Training or having equivalent

Min 6, Max 12

knowledge
Be familiar with Windows operating system

405

7.5 Mobile Backhaul Evolution and Trends Training Programs


7.5.1

Microwave Backhaul Solution Evolution

Training Path
Microwave Backhaul Solution Evolution
OTF87

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

Technical manager
Prerequisites

Having the basic knowledge for communication


network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe mobile backhaul trends

Describe the mobile backhaul evolution


strategy based on the current network

Describe the microwave backhaul solution

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

406

7.5.2

Huawei Microwave Solution Overview

Training Path
Huawei Microwave Solution Overview
OTF88

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

Technical manager
Prerequisites

Having the basic knowledge for communication


network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe microwave evolution trend

Describe huawei microwave solution

Outline the features of huawei microwave


products

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

407

7.5.3

Microwave Small Cell Backhaul Solution

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Microwave Small Cell Backhaul Solution


OTF89

Lecture

0.5d

Describe the small cell features

Outline huawei microwave small cell backhaul


solution

Target Audience
Duration

Technical manager
0.5 working day

Prerequisites

Class Size
Having the basic knowledge for communication

Min 6, Max 12

network

408

7.6 Transmission Network Planning and Design Training Programs


7.6.1

OptiX SDH Network Design Basic Training

Training Path

Describe the structure of SDH network


Outline the service types of SDH network

OptiX SDH Network Design Basics

OTA13

Lecture, Lab

Illustrate the common protection mechanism of


SDH network

1d

List the procedures of SDH network design


Describe the basic factors that should be
involved in the SDH network design

OptiX NG SDH OCS System


Description

OTA28

Lecture

Accomplish the SDH/PDH service design

1d

Illustrate the networking applications of the


OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Target Audience

Describe the system structure and features of


the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

SDH network junior planning design


engineer

Outline the system protection schemes of the


OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Prerequisites

Duration
Having the basic knowledge of

2 working days

telecommunications and SDH network

Objectives

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

409

7.6.2

OptiX MSTP Network Design Training

Training Path

service demand
List the procedures of SDH network design

OptiX MSTP Network Design

OTA44

Lecture, Case

Outline network protection types


Describe the key point of complicated network

3d

design

Target Audience

Figure out the details of network reliability


design

SDH network planning design engineer

Perform SDH network design including the

Prerequisites

network reliabilty and clock trace design


List the factors of data service design

Having the basic knowledge of


telecommunications and MSTP network

Describe the key point of the data service

Having working experience in the planning


and design of MSTP networks

planning according to the bandwidth


requirement
Perform data service design in the SDH

Objectives

network

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Duration

Describe the application of OptiX NG SDH


OCS system

3 working days
Class Size

Outline the equipment capacity of OptiX NG

Min 6, Max 12

SDH OCS system


Choose the right equipment according to the

410

7.6.3

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design Training

Training Path

Describe the application of OptiX NG SDH


system

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Network Design

OTA47

Lecture, Case

Outline the equipment capacity for packet


service access of OptiX NG SDH system

3d

Outline the common boards for packet service

Target Audience

of OptiX NG SDH equipment


Choose the right equipment according to the

Hybrid MSTP network planning design


engineer

service demand
Consider all the required main points for

Prerequisites

planning a Hybrid MSTP network


List the procedure for designing the Hybrid

Having the basic knowledge of


telecommunications and Hybrid MSTP
network
Having working experience in the planning
and design of Hybrid MSTP networks

MSTP network
Perform the Hybrid MSTP network design

Duration

3 working days

Objectives

Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Min 6, Max 12

411

7.6.4

OptiX MDS 6600 ASON(SDH) Network Planning and Design Training

Training Path
List the configuration of iManager MDS 6600

iManager MDS 6600 ASON (SDH)


Network Design

OTA33

Lecture, Case

Describe the characters of iManager MDS


4d

6600
Perform SDH ASON network design through

Target Audience

iManager MDS 6600


Describe the considerations of ASON planning

OptiX SDH ASON senior network planning


design engineer

List the steps of ASON planning


Describe the function of ASON planning tool

Prerequisites

Accomplish SDH ASON network design

Having the basic knowledge of


telecommunications and SDH network

according to the service demand


Perform data import/export operation between

Having a general knowledge of ASON


Having working experience in the planning
and design of SDH networks

iManager MDS 6600 and NMS


Verify the import/export operation

Duration

Objectives

4 working days
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Class Size

Describe the structure of iManager MDS 6600

Min 6, Max 12

412

7.6.5

OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training

Training Path

various optical components


Explain the key technologies of WDM system,

OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design


Basics

OTC47

Lecture

for example optical source, optical amplifiers,


etc

2d

Describe the characteristics of optical interface

Target Audience

in WDM system
Outline the functions and features of the

WDM network junior planning

different units in OptiX WDM/NG WDM

design engineer

products

Prerequisites

Illustrate the main factors involved in WDM


network planning, such as power budget,

Having a general understanding of


telecommunications

dispersion compensation, OSNR calculation


and nonlinearity

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Outline the design process of WDM network

Duration

2 working days

Describe the function module and network


structure of WDM system

Class Size

Outline the characteristics of various fibers

Min 6, Max 12

Explain the functions and characteristics of

413

7.6.6

OptiX WDM Network Design Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Outline the functions and features of the

OptiX WDM Network Design

OTC03

Lecture, Case

different units in OptiX WDM products


Evaluate the WDM networks including the

3d

network architecture, protection mechanism,

Target Audience

signal flow and network capacity


Analyze typical configuration of OptiX WDM

WDM network planning

series products

design engineer

Analyze the design process of WDM network


Design a complete OptiX WDM network

Prerequisites

Having basic knowledge of


telecommunications
Objectives

according to requirements

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

On completion of this program, the

Min 6, Max 12

414

7.6.7

OptiX NG WDM Network Design Training

Training Path

Describe OSN 8800/6800/3800 product


capacity and features

OptiX NG WDM Network Design

OTC31

Lecture, Case

Describe WDM network topologies and system


applications

3
d

Outline the designing procedure of WDM

Target Audience

network
Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX NG

OptiX NG WDM network planning


design engineer

WDM
Memorize the OptiX OSN 6800/8800 system

Prerequisites

capacity with different traffics


Apply the OptiX OSN 6800/8800 system

Having working experience in the planning


and design of WDM products

functions and configuration principles in


network planning

Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM


Network Design Basic Training or having
equivalent knowledge

Describe the designing procedure of NG WDM


FOADM network
Fulfill the hardware configuration of NG WDM

Objectives

FOADM network

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Duration

3 working days

Describe OSN 8800/6800/3800 product


networking

Class Size

Outline OSN 8800/6800/3800 product

Min 6, Max 12

functions

415

7.6.8

OptiX MDS 6600 ASON (WDM) Network Planning and Design Training

Training Path

Describe NG WDM ASON network features


Outline NG WDM ASON network planning

OptiX NG WDM ASON Network Planning


Design
2d
OTC36
Lecture, Case

steps
Complete the NG WDM ASON network node
design
Understand the special topics of NG WDM
ASON network planning and design

iManager MDS 6600 WDM Planner


Operation

OTC74

Lecture, Lab

Understand NG WDM ASON network features

1d

Outline NG WDM ASON network planning


steps
Complete the NG WDM ASON network node

iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer


Operation

OTC75

Lecture, Lab

design
1d

Describe features and functions of the


iManager MDS 6600 WDM Planner

Target Audience

Plan WDM network


Fulfill the MDS 6600 WDM Planner operation

OptiX NG WDM ASON senior network


planning design engineer

Implement the WDM network plan by the MDS


6600 WDM Planner

Prerequisites

Outline system architecture of iManager MDS

Having working experience in the planning


and design of WDM products

6600
Describe features and functions of the

Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM


Network Design Basic Training or having
equivalent knowledge

iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer


Complete WDM network design
Fulfill the MDS 6600 WDM Designer operation

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Implement the WDM network design by the


MDS 6600 WDM Designer

Duration

Outline the standards of ASON


Illustrate the structure of ASON
Describe the networking characters of ASON

4 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Explain the service characters of ASON

416

7.6.9

OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic Training

Training Path

Objectives

Digital Microwave Communication Basics

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OTF01

Describe the concept and characters of digital

Lecture

0.5d

microwave communication
Describe the theory and function of every part

OptiX RTN Network Planning Basic

OTF40

Lecture

in the digital microwave system


List the networking application for digital

1.5d

microwave system

Target Audience

List the fadings in microwave propagation


List the common technologies of antifading

Microwave network junior planning


engineer

Familiar with the microwave network design


contents

Prerequisites

Know the basic information about microwave

Having a general knowledge of Digital


Microwave Communication

planning

Duration

Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS


and QinQ
Having the general knowledge of Ethernet
and QoS

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

417

7.6.10 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Training


Training Path

part in the digital microwave system for


details

OptiX RTN Network Planning

OTF49

Lecture

1.5d

OptiX RTN Network Service Planning


(Hybrid)

OTF59

Lecture

0.5d

Lecture

Know the microwave planning principles

Familiar the interference analysis


methods

Familiar with the principles for Ethernet


service and TDM service planning

Know how to select the proper


equipment type and functions for
different scenarios

OptiX RTN Network Service Planning


(Packet)

OTF60

efficient hybrid service delivery

0.5d

Lecture

1d

OptiX RTN Network Planning Case


Analysis

OTF61

Lecture

Implement network design according to


the guideline to ensure the high and
efficient packet service delivery

Familiar with the working mechanism of


clock & DCN

0.5d

Know how to select the proper clock &


DCN mode for different scenarios

Target Audience

Familiar with the clock & DCN planning


guidelines

Microwave network planning engineer

Implement clock & DCN design


according to the guideline to ensure the
high and efficient planning delivery

Understand basic principle of frequency


planning and operation procedure.

MPLS and QinQ

Having the general knowledge of


Ethernet and QoS

Master planning to reduce the skills and


methods of relay station.

Master planning method, which design


appropriate SD spacing to improve the
reliability of the link by planning software
antenna.

Prerequisites

Having a general knowledge of Digital


Microwave Communication

Having the general knowledge of IP,

Familiar with the principles for Ethernet


service, CES service, ATM/IMA service
and MPLS tunnel planning

OptiX RTN Clock & DCN Planning

OTF51

Implement network design according to


the guideline to ensure the high and

Objectives
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Familiar with the microwave network


design contents

Describe the theory and function of every

Duration

4 working days

418

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

419

7.6.11 OptiX RTN 900 Network Planning Advanced Training


Training Path

clock DCN

OptiX RTN Clock & DCN Planning


OTF51

DCN mode for different scenarios

Lecture

1d

Lecture

0.5d

OptiX RTN Network QoS Planning


Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

Understand basic principle of frequency


planning and operation procedure.

Master planning to reduce the skills and


methods of relay station.

Master planning method, which design


appropriate SD spacing to improve the
reliability of the link by planning

Familiar with the principles for Ethernet


service, CES service, ATM/IMA service
and MPLS tunnel planning

Know how to select the proper


equipment type and functions for
different scenarios

Implement network design according to


the guideline to ensure the high and
efficient packet service delivery

Microwave senior network planning engineer


Prerequisites

Implement clock DCN design


according to the guideline to ensure the
high and efficient planning delivery

OptiX RTN Network Planning Case


Analysis

OTF62

Familiar with the clock DCN planning


guidelines

OTF61

Know how to select the proper clock

Having a general knowledge of Digital


Microwave Communication

Having the general knowledge of IP,


MPLS and QinQ

Having the general knowledge of


Ethernet and QoS

Be familiar with RTN product

Duration

2 working days

Objectives

Class Size
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Min 6, Max 12

Familiar with the working mechanism of

420

7.6.12 OptiX RTN 300 Network Planning Training


Training Path

product

Objectives
OptiX RTN 300 Network Planning
OTF101

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

1d

Familiar with the RTN 300 network design


contents

OptiX RTN 300 Network Service Planning


OTF102

Lecture

0.5d

Know the microwave planning principles

Familiar the interference analysis methods

Familiar with the principles for protection and


AM planning

OptiX RTN 300 Network Planning Case


Study
OTF103

Lecture

Familiar with the principles for Ethernet


service planning

0.5d

Understand basic principle of frequency


planning and operation procedure.

Target Audience

analysis to ensure the high and efficient

RTN 300 Network planning engineer


Prerequisites

service delivery

Duration

Having a general knowledge of Digital

2 working days

Microwave Communication

Having a good foundation of Ethernet

Class Size

knowledge

Implement network design after the case

Min 6, Max 12

Having the general knowledge of RTN 300

421

7.6.13 OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Planning and Design Training


Training Path

Describe OptiX BWS 1600S system access


capacity

OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered)


Planning and Design

OTC71

Lecture, Case

Identify wavelength distribution and service


process ability for OptiX BWS 1600S products

3d

Evaluate the network resilience, which include

Target Audience

network architecture, protection mechanisms,


signal flow and network capacity

OptiX BWS 1600S senior network planning


design engineer

Outline the designing procedure of OptiX BWS


1600S network

Prerequisites

Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX


BWS 1600S products

Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM


Network Design Basic Training or having
equivalent knowledge
Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Complete the exercises of OptiX BWS 1600S


network design

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Describe the functions and features of OptiX

Min 6, Max 12

BWS 1600S products

422

7.6.14 OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning and Design Training


Training Path

Outline the equipment capacity for packet


service access of OptiX NG WDM system

OptiX NG WDM Packet Network Planning


and Design
3d
OTC110
Lecture, Case

Outline the common boards for packet service


of OptiX NG WDM equipment
Choose the right equipment according to the

Target Audience

service demand
Consider all the required main points for

OptiX NG WDM packet network planning


design engineer

planning a OptiX NG WDM packet network


List the procedure for designing the OptiX NG

Prerequisites

WDM packet network


Perform the OptiX NG WDM packet network

Having working experience in the planning


and design of NG WDM Packet Network
Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

design

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Describe the application of OptiX NG WDM

Min 6, Max 12

packet system

423

7.6.16 OptiX OSN 1800 Network Design Training


Training Path

Outline OptiX OSN 1800 product functions

Describe OptiX OSN 1800 product capacity

OptiX OSN 1800 Network Design


OTC145

Lecture, Lab

and features

3d

Describe OptiX OSN 1800 network topologies


and system applications

Target Audience

Outline the designing procedure of OptiX


OSN 1800 network

OptiX OSN 1800 network planning design


engineer

Fulfill the hardware configuration of OptiX


OSN 1800

Prerequisites

Memorize the OptiX OSN 1800 system


capacity with different traffics

Having working experience in the planning


and design of WDM/MS-OTN products

and configuration principles in network

Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM


Network Design Basic Training or having
equivalent knowledge
Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Apply the OptiX OSN 1800 system functions


planning

Describe the designing procedure of OptiX


OSN 1800 FOADM network

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Describe OptiX OSN 1800 product

Min 6, Max 12

networking

424

7.6.17 iManager MDS 6600 (WDM Designer) Operation Training


Training Path

Network Design Basic Training or having


equivalent knowledge

OptiX NG WDM Network Design


OTC31

Lecture, Case

Objectives
2d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

iManager MDS 6600 (WDM Designer)


Operation
OTC149

Lecture, Lab

Outline system architecture of iManager MDS


6600.

2d

Describe features and functions of the


iManager MDS 6600 WDM Designer.

Target Audience

OptiX WDM network planning design


engineer

Complete WDM network design.

Simulate the fault and analyze the


survivability for ASON network

Duration

Prerequisites

4 working days
Having working experience in the planning
and design of WDM products

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM

425

7.7 Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training


Programs
7.7.1

OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training

Training Path
SDH Network Assessment

OTA93

Lecture, Case

3d

Target Audience

OptiX SDH network optimization engineer or senior maintenance engineer


Prerequisites
Be familiar with OptiX SDH equipment
Having working experience with at least 2 years in the maintenance of optical transport network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


List the main items of SDH network resource
List the main items of SDH network assessment
Describe the requirement of SDH network resource assessment
Describe the main contents about SDH service capacity and efficiency assessment
Describe the items and contents about SDH network security assessment
Describe the measures about SDH survivable network assessment
List the methods about trail usability assessment
Describe the items and contents about SDH network OM assessment
Describe the methods about ECC subnetwork assessment
Describe the methods about clock subnetwork assessment
Describe the methods about spare part assessment

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

426

7.7.2

OptiX SDH Network Optimization Training

Training Path
SDH Network Optimization

OTA94

Lecture, Case

3d

Target Audience

OptiX SDH network optimization engineer or senior maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Be familiar with OptiX SDH equipment


Having working experience with at least 2 years in the maintenance of optical transport network
Upon completion of OptiX SDH Network Assessment Training
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the causes and effects of discrete services
Recognize the discrete services of the network
Eliminate discrete services
Optimize the lower level cross-connection of SDH equipment
Optimize the trails to improve the network usage efficiency
Describe the items and contents about SDH network security optimization
Describe the measures about SDH survivable network optimization
List the methods about trail usability optimization
Describe the items and contents about SDH network OM optimization
Describe the methods about ECC subnetwork optimization
Describe the methods about clock subnetwork optimization
Describe the methods about spare part optimization

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

427

7.7.3

OptiX SDH Network Expansion and Reconstruction Training

Training Path
SDH Network Expansion
Reconstruction

OTA43

Lecture, Lab

3d

Target Audience

OptiX SDH network optimization engineer or senior maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Having working experience in the maintenance of SDH products


Having been attend SDH series 2nd Line maintenance training
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Outline the scenario of SDH network expansion
List the key point of network expansion
Interpret the operation of SDH network expansion
Perform SDH network expansion and verify the service interconnection
Outline the scenario of SDH network reconstruction
List the key point of network reconstruction
Interpret the operation of SDH network reconstruction
Perform SDH network reconstruction and verify the service interconnection

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

428

7.7.4

OptiX WDM Network Assessment Training

Training Path
OptiX WDM Network Assessment

OTC72

Lecture, Case

2d

Target Audience

OptiX WDM network optimization engineer or senior maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX OSN 6800/8800(OTN) Second Line Maintenance Training program or OptiX
BWS 1600G Second Line Maintenance Training program
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe methods of assessing WDM network design performance
Analyze and assess WDM network design performance
Provide suggestions on optimizing WDM network design performance
Describe methods of assessing running performance of a WDM network
Analyze and assess running performance of a WDM network
Provide suggestions for optimizing running performance of a WDM network

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

429

7.7.5

OptiX WDM Network Optimization Training

Training Path
OptiX WDM Network Optimization

OTC73

Lecture, Lab

1d

Target Audience

OptiX WDM network optimization engineer or senior maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX OSN 6800/8800(OTN) Second Line Maintenance Training program or OptiX
BWS 1600G Second Line Maintenance Training program
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the method for optimizing design performance of a WDM network
Describe the procedure for designing a solution to design performance optimization of a WDM network
Complete the solution to the design performance optimization of a WDM network
Describe how to optimize operating performance of a WDM network
Describe the process of optimizing operating performance of a WDM network
Design solutions to optimizing operating performance of a WDM network

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

430

7.7.6

OptiX WDM Network Expansion Training

Training Path
OptiX WDM Network Expansion

OTC51

Lecture, Lab

2d

Target Audience

OptiX WDM network optimization engineer or senior maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX OSN 6800/8800(OTN) Second Line Maintenance Training program or OptiX
BWS 1600G Second Line Maintenance Training program or OptiX Metro 6100 Second Line
Maintenance Training program
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Illustrate OptiX WDM system optical power calculation
Outline the process of OptiX WDM network expansion
Implement the indices testing during network expansion
Complete the OptiX WDM network service expansion of OTM/OADM stations

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

431

7.7.7

OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction Training

Training Path
OptiX WDM Network Reconstruction

OTC52

Lecture, Lab

3d

Target Audience

OptiX WDM network optimization engineer or senior maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX OSN 6800/8800(OTN) Second Line Maintenance Training program or OptiX
BWS 1600G Second Line Maintenance Training program
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe OptiX WDM system upgrade reconstruction methods, which include 2 5G upgrading to 10G, 10G
upgrading to 40G and 400G upgrading to 800G
Describe OptiX WDM equipment software upgrade methods
Describe OptiX WDM network reconstruction methods, which include the site type reconstruction, the protection
type reconstruction and wavelength reconstruction
Complete the OptiX WDM network reconstruction

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

432

7.8 Transmission Network Assessment and Optimization Training


Programs
7.8.1

OptiX RTN Network Assessment Training

Training Path

network performance
Analyze and access microwave network

Microwave Network Performance


Assessment

OTF63

Lecture

performance
Complete microwave network performance

0.5d

assessment
Describe the methods about capacity
assessment

Microwave Network General Assessment

OTF64

Lecture

Describe the methods about frequency

0.5d

assessment
Describe the methods about reliability
assessment

Microwave Network Assessment Case


Analysis

OTF65

Case Study

Describe the methods about NMS DCN


1d

assessment
Complete microwave network performance
assessment

Target Audience

Complete microwave network capacity

OptiX RTN network optimization engineer


or senior maintenance engineer

assessment
Complete microwave network frequency

Prerequisites

assessment
Complete microwave network reliability

Be familiar with OptiX RTN series equipment

assessment

Having working experience with at least 1

Complete microwave network NMS DCN

years in the maintenance of microwave

assessment

transport network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Describe methods of assessing microwave

Min 6, Max 12

433

7.8.2

OptiX RTN Network Optimization Training

Training Path
Microwave Network Optimization

OTF66

Lecture

0.5d

Microwave Network Optimization Case


Analysis

OTF67

Case Study

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN network optimization engineer or senior maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Be familiar with OptiX RTN equipment


Having working experience with at least 2 years in the maintenance of microwave transport network
Upon completion of OptiX RTN Network Assessment Training
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the microwave network optimization procedure
Complete the solution to the design performance optimization of a RTN network
Describe how to optimize the capacity of a RTN network
Describe the methods about frequency optimization
Describe the methods about topology optimization
Describe the methods about NMS DCN optimization
Complete microwave network performance optimization
Complete microwave network capacity optimization
Complete microwave network frequency optimization
Complete microwave network reliability optimization
Complete microwave network NMS DCN optimization

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

434

7.9 Transmission Network Principle Training Programs


7.9.1

SDH Fundamental Training

Training Path
SDH Principle

OTA01

Lecture

1d

SDH Networking and Protection

OTA02

Lecture

1d

Target Audience

SDH series equipment operation and maintenance engineer


SDH series equipment operation and maintenance engineer
Prerequisites
NA

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the structure of the SDH frame
Illustrate the multiplexing procedure of PDH signal to SDH signal
Outline the function of section and path overhead
Explain the working mechanism of the pointer
Describe the common SDH network topologies and their features
Explain the protection mechanism of linear MSP
Explain the protection mechanism of MS shared protection ring
Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in ring/mesh topology
Analyze the service signal flow before/after the protection switch takes place

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

435

7.9.2

WDM Fundamental Training

Training Path
WDM Basics

OTC01

Lecture

1d

Target Audience

WDM network operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Having working experience in the planning and design of WDM networks


Upon completion of OptiX WDM/NG WDM Network Design Basic Training and OptiX NG WDM
Network Design Training or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the function module and network structure of WDM system
Outline the characteristics of various fibers
Explain the functions and characteristics of various optical components
Explain the key technologies of WDM system, for example optical source, optical amplifiers, etc
Describe the characteristics of optical interface in WDM system

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

436

7.9.3

Ethernet Fundamental Training

Training Path
Ethernet Basics

OTA03

Lecture

2d

Target Audience

Personnel who requires a general knowledge of Ethernet over SDH technology


Prerequisites

Having a general knowledge of data telecommunications


Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Outline the types and applications of Ethernet
Explain the technical background of the Ethernet and its basic concepts
Illustrate the Ethernet frame structure
Describe the function of VLAN and L2 switching
Outline the classification of Ethernet service
Explain the function and applications of different types Ethernet service
Outline the basic concepts of data traffic
List basic concepts of network and internet
Describe the applications of familiar protocol and standard
Illustrate basic structure of IP network
Tell the basic knowledge of IP address

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

437

7.9.4

ASON Fundamental Training

Training Path
ASON Basics

OTA07

Lecture

1d

Target Audience

Technical manager, ASON operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Having a general knowledge of SDH and data telecommunications basics


Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Outline the standards of ASON
Illustrate the structure of ASON
Describe the networking characters of ASON
Explain the service characters of ASON

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

438

7.9.5

Hybrid MSTP Fundamental Training

Training Path
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction

OTA45

Lecture

1d

Hybrid MSTP Network Application

OTA46

Lecture

1d

Target Audience

Hybrid MSTP operation and maintenance engineer


Hybrid MSTP novice
Prerequisites

Having a general knowledge of SDH and Ethernet communications basics


Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the classification of IP addresses
Describe the basic concepts of MPLS
Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
Outline the QinQ application scenarios of OptiX Hybrid MSTP
Describe the basic concepts of PWE3
Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format for Ethernet
Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format for TDM E1
Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product networking
Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid MSTP product
Classify the service types of Ethernet
Outline the types and applications of Ethernet

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

439

7.10

WDM Products Training Programs

7.10.1 OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 1st Line Maintenance Training


Training Path
OptiX NG WDM System Description
OTC24

Lecture

0.5d

OptiX NG WDM (OTN) Field Maintenance

OTC29

Lecture, Lab

1.5d

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM equipment field maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows operating system


Having a general knowledge of WDM basics
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the position of OptiX OSN 6800/8800(OTN) systems in an optical transport network

Describe the functions and features of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) systems

Illustrate the functions of different units in OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) systems, which include OTU, MUX/DEMUX,
OA, OSC/ESC, XCS etc

Describe the protection and features of OptiX OSN i8800(OTN) systems

Describe the status of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products alarm indicators

Describe the running environment of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products

List the routine maintenance items of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products

Perform the basic maintenance operations of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products, such as board replacement,
fiber connection, optical power adjusting, etc

Complete the maintenance records of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products

Outline the common menus of OptiX iManager U2000/Web LCT

Perform the NE configuration, board configuration, and protection configuration of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN)
products via iManager U2000/Web LCT

Perform the routine maintenance of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products via iManager U2000/Web LCT

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
440

7.10.2 OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows operating system

WDM Basics
OTC01

Lecture

Having a general knowledge of WDM


basics

1d

Objectives
OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) Hardware
Description and Application
OTC25

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

2d

Describe the function module and network


structure of WDM system

U2000 System Introduction


ONU01

Lecture

Outline the characteristics of various fibers

Explain the functions and characteristics of

0.5d

various optical components

Explain the key technologies of WDM system,


for example optical source, optical amplifiers,

OTN Basics
OTC05

etc
Lecture

1d

Describe the characteristics of optical


interface in WDM system

OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) systems

OptiX NG WDM Optical Layer Grooming


OTC153

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the system structure and features of

1.5d

Describe the main functions of the boards

Outline the system protection modes of OptiX


OSN 8800(OTN) systems

OptiX NG WDM Electrical Layer Grooming

OTC154

network elements of OptiX OSN 8800(OTN)

2d

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

List the common network topologies and


systems

Describe the network applications of OptiX


OSN 8800(OTN) systems

OptiX NG WDM Commissioning


OTC28

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

of U2000

2.5d

NG WDM (OTN) System Troubleshooting


OTC30

Lecture, Lab

Describe the architecture and main features

Describe the directory structure of U2000

Describe the main functions of U2000

Describe OTN frame structure, maintenance


signals and function for different layers

2.5d

Outline alarm and performance events


generation mechanism

Target Audience

Analyze the alarm and performance events


and locate the failures in OTN

OptiX NG WDM equipment field


maintenance engineer

Describe the advantages of OTN

Describe the OTN frame structure and list the


different components function

441

Describe the main features of the optical

OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) equipment

layer grooming and electrical layer grooming

Describe OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) system

channel

signal flow and fiber connection, which


include OTM, OLA, OADM, etc

Outline the supervisory channel signal flow in

Describe the functions, architecture and the

Configure OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products


through iManager U2000

Describe the fault handling flow

Configure the typical protection for the

Analyze and eliminate the common faults of


OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products

Check the data configuration correctness and

validity

Illustrate basic operation for OptiX OSN


8800(OTN) troubleshooting

equipment

Explain the troubleshooting ideas and


methods for OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) products

and system management

Eliminate the fault occurring during the


commissioning process

Implement iManager U2000 basic operations,


OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) data configuration

Perform indices testing during the


commissioning process

menus of iManager U2000

Perform the main path commissioning of


OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) equipment

different network elements

Perform the commissioning of supervisory

Check the equipment running condition such

Improve the ability of eliminating faults


through case analysis and practice

Duration

as power connections, fiber connections,

13 working days

mounted boards, etc

Outline and perform the commissioning

Class Size

procedure for OptiX OSN /8800(OTN)

Min 6, Max 12

equipment

Perform the single station commissioning of

442

7.10.3 OptiX OSN 8800(OTN) 3rd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

List the main functions and features of OptiX


OSN 8800

OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800 Hardware


Description and Signal Flow Revie
OTC122

Lecture

0.5d

Generalize the categories of boards

List the main functions and features of the


boards

8800

OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation and


Maintenance
OTC65

3d

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the characteristics of various


protection types and their application

OptiX OSN 8800 (OTN) Advanced


Troubleshooting
Lecture, Lab

Perform the commissioning for OptiX NG


WDM systems

OTC64

Outline typical node signal flow of OptiX OSN

scenarios

3d

Understand the operations related to the


OSN 8800 product protection

OptiX NG WDM Ethernet Operation and


Maintenance
2.5d
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
OTC32

the characteristics of various protection types

Lecture

Illustrate troubleshooting common operation

List the troubleshooting methods

Briefly introduce the general workflow in

1d

OptiX OSN 8800 equipment troubleshooting

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

practice

2d

Explain the IP over WDM principle

Describe the Ethernet service and protection


of NG WDM equipment

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM senior operation and


maintenance engineer

Configure the Ethernet service and protection


through iManager U2000

Prerequisites

Implement the routine maintenance and


troubleshooting of NG WDM Ethernet service

Completion of OptiX OSN 6800/8800


(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance or NMC
Operation Training

Describe the OSN 8800 hardware

List the OSN 8800 packet boards

Describe the networking application of OSN


8800 (Packet)

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Enhance the troubleshooting analyze and


reaction ability through case discussion and

OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Service


Configuration

OTC87

Locate and eliminate the trouble based on


maintenance rules

OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Hardware,


Networking and Application Introduction
OTC86

Fulfilled the service configuration and verify

Illustrate the service and protection type of


OSN 8800 (Packet)

Implement the data configuration through

Describe the position and networking ability

iManager U2000 for OSN 8800 packet

of OptiX OSN 8800

service and protection


443

Duration

Class Size

12 working days

Min 6, Max 12

444

7.10.4 OptiX OSN 8800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the basic concepts of Ethernet, VLAN

OptiX NG WDM Packet Technology


Introduction

OTC85

Lecture

and QinQ
Describe the classification of IP addresses

0.5d

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS


Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
Describe the basic concepts of PWE3

OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Hardware,


Networking & Application Introduction

OTC86

Lecture

Describe the OSN 8800 hardware

1d

List the OSN 8800 packet boards


Describe the networking application of OSN
8800 (Packet)

OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Service


Configuration

OTC87 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

Illustrate the service and protection type of


2d

OSN 8800 (Packet)


Implement the data configuration through
iManager U2000 for OSN 8800 packet service

OptiX OSN 8800 Packet Features

OTC88 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

and protection
Describe the function and features of QoS in

1.5d

OSN 8800 (Packet)


Implement the QoS configuration through
iManager U2000

OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) Routine


Maintenance

OTC89 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

Describe the function and features of OAM in


1d

OSN 8800 (Packet)


Implement the OAM configuration through
iManager U2000

OptiX OSN 8800 (Packet) System


Troubleshooting

OTC90

Lecture, Lab

Implement the NMS side routine maintenance

1d

for OSN 8800 (Packet)


List the common analysis methods of packet

Target Audience

network fault locating


Outline the fault handling flow

OptiX OSN 8800 packet network operation


and maintenance engineer

Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,


APS switching failed, OAM errors,etc

Prerequisites

Illustrate the application of common

Having working experience in WDM


transmission network
Upon completion of OptiX OSN
6800/8800(OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance
Training or having equivalent knowledge

troubleshooting methods for packet network


Analyze common faulty of the OSN 8800
(Packet) network

Duration

7 working days

Be familiar with Windows operating system


Objectives

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the


445

7.10.5 OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Describe the common SDH network topologies


and their features

OptiX SDH System Troubleshooting

OTA14

Lecture, Lab

Explain the protection mechanism of linear


MSP

2d

Explain the protection mechanism of MS


shared protection ring
Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in

OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Hardware


Description & Application

OTC48

Lecture

ring/mesh topology

1d

Analyze the service signal flow before/after the


protection switch takes place
Configure OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) product

OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Product


Configuration

OTC49 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

Configure the required


2.5d

SDH/Synchronization/Overhead units
Configure the typical protection for the network
and equipment
Configure the common services for the typical

U2000 System Introduction

SDH networks
ONU01

Lecture

0.5d

Analyze and maintain the configured


equipment/units/services
Describe the status of OptiX OSN 8800(OCS)

OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) Field Maintenance

OTC50 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

product indicators
Describe the operation environment of OptiX

1d

OSN 8800(OCS) equipment

Target Audience

Perform the NE configuration, board


configuration, service provisioning and

OptiX OSN 8800 (OCS) operation and


maintenance engineer

protection configuration for equipment via NMS


Perform the routine maintenance via NMS

Prerequisites

Perform the basic maintenance operations of

Be familiar with Windows operating system

OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) equipment such as

Objectives

board replacement, resetting etc


Complete the routine maintenance records of

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) equipment


Describe the architecture and main features of

Describe the system structure and features of

U2000

OptiX OSN 8800(OCS) system

Describe the directory structure of U2000

Describe the main functions of the boards

Describe the main functions of U2000

Outline the system protection modes of OptiX

List the common analysis methods of fault

OSN 8800(OCS) system

locating

Describe the network applications of OptiX

Outline the fault handling flow

OSN 8800(OCS) system


446

Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption,

Locate and eliminate faults, get experience

error bit, etc


Illustrate the application of common

from troubleshooting practice

Duration

troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,

7 working days

testing, alarm and performance events


analysis, replacement, etc

Class Size

Analyze common faulty of the network consist

Min 6, Max 12

of OptiX NG SDH OCS series

447

7.10.6 OptiX OSN 8800 100G O&M Training


Training Path
OptiX OSN 8800 100G Operations and
Maintenance

OTC128 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

5d

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX NG WDM relative technical training


Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the position and networking ability of OptiX OSN 8800
Outline the layout of OptiX OSN 8800 subrack
Generalize the categories of boards
List different usage of the common NG WDM network node types
Describe NG WDM network application modes and main features
Describe the key technologies for 40G/100G transmission
Describe the PDM-BPSK and PDM-QPSK modulation method
Describe the basic principle of coherent detection
List the main functions and features of the 40G/100G coherent OTU board
Configure the common data configuration by U2000
Configure the OCh trail by U2000
Configure 100G board electrical layer services by iManager U2000
List the Items of Routine Maintenance;
Grasp the basic operation of maintenance on U2000
Implement routine operation and maintenance on NMS side
Describe the optical power commissioning requirements
List the optical power commissioning procedures
Perform the optical power commissioning for 100Gbit/s and mixed transmission system
List the items of testing the network
Master the common methods for trouble shooting
Analyze common faults
Handle typical faults

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
448

7.10.7 OptiX NG WDM Equipment Installation Training


Training Path
OptiX NG WDM Installation
OTC133

Lecture

1d

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM network installation engineer


Prerequisites

Having basic knowledge of telecommunications


Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Outline the functions and features of the different units in OptiX NG WDM products

Describe the hardware installation procedure

Describe cable routing and related installation specifications for the equipment

Outline the safety precautions to be taken during the installation

Perform the hardware installation inspection according to the checklist

Duration

1 day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

449

7.10.8 OptiX WDM Equipment Installation Training


Training Path
OptiX WDM Installation

OTC04

Lecture, WBT

2d

Target Audience

WDM network installation engineer


Prerequisites

Having basic knowledge of telecommunications


Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Outline the functions and features of the different units in OptiX WDM products
Describe the hardware installation procedure
Describe cable routing and related installation specifications for the equipment
Outline the safety precautions to be taken during the installation
Perform the hardware installation inspection according to the checklist

Duration

2 days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

450

7.10.9 OptiX NG WDM ASON Operation & Maintenance Training


Training Path
OptiX NG WDM ASON
Operation#Maintenance

OTC65

Lecture, Lab

3d

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM ASON operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX OSN 6800/8800 (OTN) 2nd Line Maintenance or NMC Operation Training.
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Outline the standards of ASON
Illustrate the structure of ASON
Describe the networking characters of ASON
Explain the service characters of ASON
Fulfill the WDM ASON trail configuration
Complete the ASON routine maintenance items
Describe The Basic Thoughts and Methods of NG WDN ASON Fault Locating
Quickly restore interrupted ASON services under emergency conditions.

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

451

7.10.10 OptiX OSN 1800 Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path
OptiX OSN 1800 Operation &
Maintenance

OTC46 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

4d

Target Audience

OptiX OSN 1800 operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Having working experience in the maintenance of WDM products


Be familiar with Windows operating system
Upon completion of OTC01 WDM Basics course or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the system structure and features of OptiX OSN 1800
Describe the main functions of the boards
Outline the system protection modes of OptiX OSN 1800
List the common network topologies and network elements of OptiX OSN 1800
Describe the network applications of OptiX OSN 1800
Check the equipment running condition such as power connections, fiber connections, mounted boards, etc
Describe OptiX OSN 1800 system signal flow and fiber connection
Implement NMS basic operations, OptiX OSN 1800 data configuration and system management
Configure OptiX OSN 1800 through NMS
Configure the typical protection for the equipment
Check the data configuration correctness and validity
Perform the single station commissioning of OptiX OSN 1800
Perform the main path commissioning of OptiX OSN 1800
Eliminate the fault occurring during the commissioning process
Apply different troubleshooting methods according to actual faults
Perform the common troubleshooting operations of WDM network
Explain the possible reasons of all kinds of OptiX WDM network faults
Describe the fault handling flow
Analyze and locate the complex fault of OptiX WDM network
Improve the ability of eliminating faults through case analysis and practice

Duration

4 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
452

7.10.11 OptiX OSN 1800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS


Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP

OptiX NG WDM Packet Technology


Introduction

OTC85

Lecture

Describe the basic concepts of PWE3


Describe the network applications of OptiX

0.5d

OSN 1800 equipment.


Explain the system structure and features of
OptiX OSN 1800 equipment.

OptiX OSN 1800 System Introduction

OTC111

Lecture

State the main functions of the cards in the

1d

OptiX OSN 1800 equipment.


System signal flow of OSN 1800
The protection and design principle of OSN

OptiX OSN 1800 Packet Service


Configuration

OTC112 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

1800
1.5d

Metro access backhaul application acenes of


OSN 1800
Key factors in networking of OSN 1800

OptiX OSN 1800 Packet Features

OTC113 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

Describe OSN 1800 product feature (packet)


Master packet services configuration

1d

Outline the configuration of protection for OSN


1800 (packet)
Describe the function and features of QoS in

OptiX OSN 1800 (Packet) Routine


Maintenance

OTC114 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

OSN 1800 (Packet)

0.5d

Implement the QoS configuration through


iManager U2000
Describe the function and features of OAM in

OptiX OSN 1800 (Packet) System


Troubleshooting

OTC115

Lecture, Lab

OSN 1800 (Packet)

0.5d

Implement the OAM configuration through


iManager U2000

Target Audience

List the items of routine maintenance


Grasp the basic operation of maintenance on

OptiX OSN 1800 operation and


maintenance engineer

U2000
Implement routine operation and maintenance

Prerequisites

List the common analysis methods of packet

Having working experience in the


maintenance of WDM products

network fault locating


Outline the fault handling flow

Be familiar with Windows operating system

Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,

Objectives

APS switching failed, OAM errors,etc

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Illustrate the application of common

Describe the basic concepts of Ethernet, VLAN

Analyze common faulty of the OSN 1800

troubleshooting methods for packet network


(Packet) network

and QinQ
Describe the classification of IP addresses
453

Duration

Class Size

5 working days

Min 6, Max 12

454

7.10.12 OptiX OSN 1800V(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path
OptiX NG WDM Packet Technology
Introduction
Lecture

OTC85

0.5d

Describe the classification of IP addresses

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP

Describe the basic concepts of PWE3

Describe the network applications of OptiX


OSN 1800V (Packet) equipment.

OptiX OSN 1800V (Packet) System


Introduction
Lecture

OTC144

Explain the system structure and features of


OptiX OSN 1800V (Packet) equipment.

1d

State the main functions of the cards in the


OptiX OSN 1800V (Packet) equipment.

OptiX OSN 1800 Packet Service


Configuration
OTC112

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Metro access backhaul application scenes


of OSN 1800V (Packet)

1.5d

Describe OSN 1800V (Packet) product


feature

OptiX OSN 1800 Packet Features


OTC113

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Master packet services configuration

Outline the configuration of protection for


OSN 1800V(Packet)

1d

Describe the function and features of QoS in


OSN 1800V(Packet)

OptiX OSN 1800 (Packet) Routine


Maintenance
OTC114

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Implement the QoS configuration through


iManager U2000

0.5d

Describe the function and features of OAM in


OSN 1800V(Packet)

OptiX OSN 1800 (Packet) System


Troubleshooting

OTC115

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Implement the OAM configuration through


iManager U2000

0.5d

List the items of routine maintenance

Grasp the basic operation of maintenance on


U2000

Target Audience

OptiX OSN 1800V (Packet) operation and


maintenance engineer

Implement routine operation and


maintenance

Prerequisites

List the common analysis methods of packet


network fault locating

Having working experience in the


maintenance of WDM products

Outline the fault handling flow

Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,


APS switching failed, OAM errors, etc

Be familiar with Windows operating system

Objectives

Illustrate the application of common


troubleshooting methods for packet network

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe the basic concepts of Ethernet,

Analyze common faulty of the OSN 1800V


(Packet) network

Duration

VLAN and QinQ

5 working days
455

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

456

7.10.13 OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Check the equipment running condition such


as power connections, fiber connections,

OptiX OSN 1800V (OTN) Operation and


Maintenance
OTC147

Lecture, Lab

mounted boards, etc

5d

signal flow and fiber connection

Target Audience

management

Having working experience in the


maintenance of WDM products

Explain the key technologies of WDM system,

interface in WDM system


Describe the system structure and features of

Outline the system protection modes of OptiX


OSN 1800V(OTN)

Describe the fault handling flow

Analyze and locate the complex fault of OptiX

Improve the ability of eliminating faults


through case analysis and practice

Duration

List the common network topologies and


network elements of OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN)

WDM network

OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN)

Explain the possible reasons of all kinds of


OptiX WDM network faults

Describe the characteristics of optical

Describe the main functions of the boards

Perform the common troubleshooting


operations of WDM network

etc

Apply different troubleshooting methods


according to actual faults

for example optical source, optical amplifiers,

Eliminate the fault occurring during the


commissioning process

various optical components

Perform the main path commissioning of


OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN)

Describe the function module and network


structure of WDM system

Perform the single station commissioning of


OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN)

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Explain the functions and characteristics of

Check the data configuration correctness and


validity

Objectives

Configure the typical protection for the


equipment

Be familiar with Windows operating system

Outline the characteristics of various fibers

Configure OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN) through


NMS

Prerequisites

Implement NMS basic operations, OptiX OSN


1800V(OTN) data configuration and system

OptiX OSN 1800V (OTN) operation and


maintenance engineer

Describe OptiX OSN 1800V(OTN) system

5 working days
Class Size

Describe the network applications of OptiX

Min 6, Max 12

OSN 1800V(OTN)

457

7.10.14 OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:

OptiX OSN 1800V (TDM) Hardware and


Networking
OTC140

Lecture

Appreciate the networking applications of the


OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM)

1d

Describe the system structure and features of


the OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM)

used on the OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM)

OptiX OSN 1800V (TDM) Service and


Configuration
OTC141

Lecture, Lab

2d

Outline the operation environment of OptiX


OSN 1800V(TDM) series equipment

OptiX OSN 1800V (TDM) Routine and


Maintenance
Lecture

Outline the system protection schemes of the


OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM)

OTC143

Describe the main functions of the boards

List the status description of OptiX OSN


1800V(TDM) equipment indicators

1d

List the maintenance items of OptiX OSN


1800V(TDM) equipment

OptiX OSN 1800V (TDM) Troubleshooting


OTC142

Lecture

Perform the basic maintenance operations of


OptiX OSN 1800V(TDM) equipment

1d

Complete the maintenance records of OptiX


OSN 1800V(TDM) equipment

Target Audience

Configure protection attributes in OptiX OSN


1800V(TDM) network, such as SNCP, LMP,

OptiX OSN 1800V (TDM) operation and


maintenance engineer

RMP etc

Prerequisites

Configure services of OSN 1800V(TDM)

Duration

Having working experience in the


maintenance of WDM products
Be familiar with Windows operating system

5 working days
Class Size

Objectives

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

458

7.10.15 OptiX OSN 9800 1st Line Maintenance Training


Training Path
OptiX OSN 9800 Hardware Description &
Application
OTC116

Lecture

1d

OptiX OSN 9800 Field Maintenance


OTC151

Lecture

1d

Target Audience

OptiX OSN 9800 equipment field maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Having working experience in the maintenance of WDM products


Be familiar with Windows operating system
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the position and networking ability of OptiX OSN 9800

List the main functions and features of OptiX OSN 9800

Outline the layout of OptiX OSN 9800 subrack

Generalize the categories of boards

List the main functions and features of the boards

Outline the equipment operation precautions

Perform the basic maintenance operations

Replace the boards

List the items of routine maintenance

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

459

7.10.16 OptiX OSN 9800 2nd line Maintenance Training


Training Path

maintenance of WDM products


Be familiar with Windows operating system

WDM Basics

OTC01

Objectives

Lecture

1d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the function module and network

OTN Basics

OTC05

structure of WDM system

Lecture

Outline the characteristics of various fibers

1d

Explain the functions and characteristics of


various optical components
OptiX WDM 40G100G Coherent OTU
Technology

OTC81

Lecture

Explain the key technologies of WDM system,


for example optical source, optical amplifiers,

0.5d

etc
Describe the characteristics of optical interface
in WDM system

OptiX OSN 9800 Hardware Description &


Application
2d
OTC116
Lecture

Describe the architecture and main features of


U2000
Describe the directory structure of U2000
Describe the main functions of U2000

U2000 System Introduction


ONU01

Lecture

Describe OTN frame structure, maintenance


signals and function for different layers

0.5d

Outline alarm and performance events


generation mechanism
Analyze the alarm and performance events

OptiX OSN 9800 Products Configuration

and locate the failures in OTN

OTC117 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

2.5d

Describe the advantages of OTN


Describe the OTN frame structure and list the
different components function

OptiX OSN 9800 Commissioning

OTC118 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

Describe the key technologies for 40G/100G


1.5d

transmission
Describe the PDM-BPSK and PDM-QPSK
modulation method

OptiX OSN 9800 System Troubleshooting

OTC119

Lecture, Lab

Describe the basic principle of coherent


detection

1d

List the main functions and features of the


40G/100G coherent OTU board

Target Audience

List the main functions and features of OptiX

OptiX OSN 9800 operation and


maintenance engineer

OSN 9800
Outline the layout of OptiX OSN 9800 subrack

Prerequisites

Generalize the categories of boards


List the main functions and features of the

Having working experience in the


460

Outline the equipment operation precautions

boards
List different usage of the common OptiX OSN

Perform the basic maintenance operations


Replace the boards

9800 network node Types.


Describe OptiX OSN 9800 network application

List the items of routine maintenance.

modes and main features.

Grasp the basic operation of maintenance on

List key factors in OptiX OSN 9800 networking

U2000

Explain the principles of various protection

Implement routine operation and maintenance

types applied in the OSN 9800 products

on NMS side

Describe the characteristics of various

Review NG WDM network node signal flow

protection types and their application scenarios

List the common indices on optical power

Perform the operations related to the OSN

calculation

9800 product protection

Calculate the optical power

Configure client 1+1 protection and ODUk

Perform the Optical Power Commissioning

subnet connection protection (SNCP)

List the Optical Power Commissioning

Able to create an OptiX OSN 9800 network by

Procedures

iManager U2000

Perform the Optical Power Commissioning for

Backup database by iManager U2000

100Gbit/s, 40Gbit/s and Hybrid Transmission

Describe the FOADM and ROADM features

System

Describe the FOADM and ROADM application

Understand the Operations Related to Tests

scope

Performing

Understand the FOADM and ROADM

Describe the basic thoughts and methods of

functional units and the matching relations of

fault

these functional units

Locating Comprehend the methods of

Configure optical layer services by U2000

rectifying different types of faults

Diagram the electrical layer service grooming

List the common methods for trouble shooting

model of OptiX OSN 9800

Analyze common faults independently.

List the boards which have electrical layer


cross-connect function

Handle typical faults

Duration

Configure electrical layer services

10 working days

independently by station
Configure end-to-end electrical layer services

Class Size

independently by trail

Min 6, Max 12

461

7.10.17 OptiX OSN 9800 O&M Delta Training


Training Path

Perform the operations related to the OSN


9800 product protection

OptiX OSN 9800 Hardware Description #


Application Overview
1d
OTC120
Lecture

Configure client 1+1 protection and ODUk


subnet connection protection (SNCP)
Able to create an OptiX OSN 9800 network by
iManager U2000
Backup database by iManager U2000

OptiX OSN 9800 Products Configuration


Overview
2d
OTC121 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

Describe the FOADM and ROADM features


Describe the FOADM and ROADM application
scope

Target Audience

Understand the FOADM and ROADM

OptiX OSN 9800 operation and


maintenance engineer

functional units and the matching relations of


these functional units

Prerequisites

Configure optical layer services by U2000


Diagram the electrical layer service grooming

Having working experience in the


maintenance of WDM products

model of OptiX OSN 9800


List the boards which have electrical layer

Be familiar with Windows operating system

cross-connect function

Objectives

Configure electrical layer services

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

independently by station
Configure end-to-end electrical layer services

List the main functions and features of OptiX

independently by trail
Outline the equipment operation precautions

OSN 9800
Outline the layout of OptiX OSN 9800 subrack

Perform the basic maintenance operations

Generalize the categories of boards

Replace the boards

List the main functions and features of the

List the items of routine maintenance.


Grasp the basic operation of maintenance on

boards
List different usage of the common OptiX OSN

U2000
Implement routine operation and maintenance

9800 network node Types.


Describe OptiX OSN 9800 network application
modes and main features.

on NMS side

Duration

List key factors in OptiX OSN 9800 networking

3 working days

Explain the principles of various protection


types applied in the OSN 9800 products

Class Size

Describe the characteristics of various

Min 6, Max 12

protection types and their application scenarios

462

7.10.18 OptiX BWS 1600S (repeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and


Maintenance Training
Training Path

restoration/back-up, security/user
management, etc

OptiX BWS 1600S Operation and


Maintenance

OTC59 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

Implement the equipment hardware


configuration

2d

Draw the LTE/REG signal flow of OptiX BWS


1600S system
Implement data configuration, optical power

OptiX NPE (OSN 3500/7500/9500)


Operation and Maintenance

OTC60 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

adjustment, protection configuration and


3d

network expansion through iManager U2000


List the common indices of OptiX BWS 1600S
equipment and perform the WDM products

OptiX SLM 1630/RPT 1660 Operation and


Maintenance
1d
OTC61
Lecture, Lab

testing
Illustrate the application of common
troubleshooting methods, such as optical

Target Audience

power testing, alarm and performance events


analysis, replacement, etc

OptiX BWS 1600S operation and


maintenance engineer

Locate and eliminate faults, get experience


from troubleshooting practice

Prerequisites

Describe the structure, functions and features

Be familiar with Windows operating system

of OptiX NPE equipment


Explain the functions and specifications of

Objectives

different boards

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Outline the capacity and ability of OptiX NPE


equipment

Explain the functions, characteristics of optical

Describe the network topologies, system

components and the key technologies of WDM

applications and network protection

sub-marine system

mechanisms

Describe the characteristics of optical

Implement the service configuration, alarm and

interfaces in WDM sub-marine system

performance monitoring through iManager

Describe the structure, functions and features

U2000

of OptiX BWS 1600S equipment

State the service application and protection

Describe the functions and specifications of

mechanism

different boards

Implement the clock, orderwire, protection

Describe the network topologies, system

configurations and network expansion through

applications and network protection

iManager U2000

mechanisms

Execute the on-site operation, such as board

Perform iManager U2000 operation and

replacement, board or equipment resetting and

maintenance, such as alarms and performance

fiber connection

browsing, parameters setting, database


463

Perform iManager U2000 operation and

Perform iManager U2000 operation and

maintenance, such as alarms and performance

maintenance, such as alarms and performance

browsing, parameters setting, etc

browsing, parameters setting, etc

Illustrate the application of common

Implement the equipment hardware

troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,

configuration
Implement data configuration through

testing, alarm and performance events


analysis, replacement, etc

iManager U2000

Locate and eliminate faults, get experience

Illustrate the application of common

from troubleshooting practice

troubleshooting methods

Describe the structure, functions and features

Locate and eliminate faults, get experience

of OptiX SLM/RPT equipment


Describe the functions and specifications of

from troubleshooting practice

Duration

different boards

6 working days

Describe the network topologies, system


applications and network protection

Class Size

mechanisms

Min 6, Max 12

464

7.10.19 OptiX BWS 1600S (unrepeatered) Sub-marine System Operation and


Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX BWS 1600S Operation and
Maintenance

OTC59 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

2d

OptiX NPE (OSN 3500/7500/9500)


Operation and Maintenance

OTC60 Lecture, Lab, E-Lab

3d

Target Audience

OptiX BWS 1600S operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows operating system


Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Explain the functions, characteristics of optical components and the key technologies of WDM sub-marine
system
Describe the characteristics of optical interfaces in WDM sub-marine system
Describe the structure, functions and features of OptiX BWS 1600S equipment
Describe the functions and specifications of different boards
Describe the network topologies, system applications and network protection mechanisms
Perform iManager U2000 operation and maintenance, such as alarms and performance browsing, parameters
setting, database restoration/back-up, security/user management, etc
Implement the equipment hardware configuration
Draw the LTE/REG signal flow of OptiX BWS 1600S system
Implement data configuration, optical power adjustment, protection configuration and network expansion
through iManager U2000
List the common indices of OptiX BWS 1600S equipment and perform the WDM products testing
Illustrate the application of common troubleshooting methods, such as optical power testing, alarm and
performance events analysis, replacement, etc
Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from troubleshooting practice
Describe the structure, functions and features of OptiX NPE equipment
Explain the functions and specifications of different boards
Outline the capacity and ability of OptiX NPE equipment
Describe the network topologies, system applications and network protection mechanisms
465

Implement the service configuration, alarm and performance monitoring through iManager U2000
State the service application and protection mechanism
Implement the clock, orderwire, protection configurations and network expansion through iManager U2000
Execute the on-site operation, such as board replacement, board or equipment resetting and fiber connection
Perform iManager U2000 operation and maintenance, such as alarms and performance browsing, parameters
setting, etc
Illustrate the application of common troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back, testing, alarm and
performance events analysis, replacement, etc
Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from troubleshooting practice

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

466

7.10.20 OptiX MDS 6630(Opical Power Commissioning) Training


Training Path
OptiX MDS 6630(Optical Power
Commissioning)

OTC123

Lecture, Lab

2d

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM commissioning engineer


Prerequisites

Having working experience in the maintenance of WDM products


Be familiar with Windows operating system
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the main functions of MDS 6630
Outline the optical commissioning procedure by MDS 6630
Perform the basic operations of MDS 6630
Describe the Attention Matters for Commissioning
Master the common methods for troubleshooting
Analyze and handle the common commissioning faults

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

467

7.10.21 OptiX OSN 9800(Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

and QinQ
Describe the classification of IP addresses

OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet) Hardware,


Networking & Application Introduction

OTC176

Lecture

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS


Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP

1d

Describe the basic concepts of PWE3


Describe the OptiX OSN 9800 hardware
List the OptiX OSN 9800 packet boards

OptiX OSN 9800 Packet Service


Configuration

OTC177 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the networking application of OSN

2d

9800 (Packet)
Illustrate the service and protection type of
OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet)

OptiX OSN 9800 Packet Features

Implement the data configuration through

OTC178 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

2d

iManager U2000 for OSN 9800 packet service


and protection
Describe the function and features of QoS in

OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet) Routine


Maintenance

OTC179 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet)


Implement the QoS configuration through

1d

iManager U2000
Describe the function and features of OAM in
OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet)

OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet) System


Troubleshooting

OTC180

Lecture, Lab

Implement the OAM configuration through

1d

iManager U2000
Implement the NMS side routine maintenance

Target Audience

for OptiX OSN 9800 (Packet)


List the common analysis methods of packet

OptiX OSN 9800 packet network operation


and maintenance engineer

network fault locating


Outline the fault handling flow

Prerequisites

Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,

Having working experience in WDM

APS switching failed, OAM errors,etc


Illustrate the application of common

transmission network
Upon completion of OptiX OSN 9800(OTN)

troubleshooting methods for packet network

2nd Line Maintenance Training or having

Analyze common faulty of the OptiX OSN 9800

equivalent knowledge
Be familiar with Windows operating system

(Packet) network

Duration

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

7 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Describe the basic concepts of Ethernet, VLAN

468

7.10.22 OptiX NG WDM T-SDN Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path
OptiX NG WDM T-SDN Operation and
Maintenance

OTC182

Lecture, Lab

3d

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM T-SDN Operation and maintenance Engineer


Prerequisites
Completion of OptiX OSN 3800/6800/8800(OTN) Hardware Description Application and OptiX OSN
3800/6800/8800(OTN)

Products Configuration courses or having equivalent knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Understand the development and origin of T-SDN
Describe the T-SDN structure
Understand the application scenarios of T-SDN
Master the T-SDN commissioning
Master the T-SDN service configuration

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

469

7.10.23 OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (EoO/EoW) Special Topic Training


Training Path

Prerequisites
Having knowledge of OTN, WDM and IP

OptiX NG WDM MSTP Special Topic

technology

OTC160 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

0.5d

Having experience of IP, WDM network


operation and maintenance

Objectives

OptiX NG WDM LAG Special Topic

OTC161 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

0.5d

Describe the application of MC-LAG


Outline the working principles of the MC- LAG

OptiX NG WDM MC-LAG Special Topic

Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of

OTC162 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

0.5d

the MC-LAG
Describe the two aggregation types of the LAG
Outline the working principles of the LAG

OptiX NG WDM ERPS Special Topic

OTC163 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of


0.5d

the LAG
Describe the ERPS working principle
Understand the functions of R-APS Messages

OptiX NG WDM LPT Special Topic

OTC164 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the four timers of application


Describe the LPT working principle

0.5d

Understand the application of LPT


Master the configuration of LPT
Describe the STP/RSTP working principle

OptiX NG WDM STP and RSTP Special


Topic
0.5d
OTC165 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM operation and


maintenance engineer

Understand the functions of STP/RSTP


Describe the alarm of STP/RSTP

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

470

7.10.24 OptiX NG WDM Synchronization Special Topic Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the Physical Clocks (OTN) working

OptiX NG WDM Physical Clocks (OTN)


Special Topic
1d
OTC168 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

principle
Understand the functions of Physical Clocks
(OTN)
Describe the alarm of Physical Clocks (OTN)
Describe the IEEE 1588v2OTN working

OptiX NG WDM IEEE 1588v2OTN


Special Topic

OTC169 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

principle

1d

Understand the functions of IEEE 1588v2


OTN
Describe the alarm of IEEE 1588v2OTN

OptiX NG WDM Physical Clocks (OCS)


Special Topic
1d
OTC170 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the

Physical Clocks (OCS)

working principle
Understand the functions of Physical Clocks
(OCS)

OptiX NG WDM Physical Clocks (Packet)


Special Topic
1d
OTC171 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the alarm of Physical Clocks (OCS)


Describe the Physical Clocks (Packet) working
principle

Target Audience

Understand the functions of Physical Clocks


(Packet)

OptiX NG WDM operation and


maintenance engineer
Prerequisites

Describe the alarm of


(Packet)

Duration

Having knowledge of OTN, WDM and IP

4 working days

technology
Having experience of IP, WDM network

Class Size

operation and maintenance

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

471

Physical Clocks

7.10.25 OptiX NG WDM Network Protection (Packet) Special Topic Training


Training Path
OptiX NG WDM PW APS Special Topic

OTC158 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

2d

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites
Having knowledge of OTN, WDM and IP technology
Having experience of IP, WDM network operation and maintenance

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the PW APS working principle
Outline the PW APS switching conditions
Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the PW APS
Describe the Tunnel APS working principle
Outline the Tunnel APS switching conditions
Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the Tunnel APS

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

472

7.10.26 OptiX NG WDM DCN Special Topic Training


Training Path
OptiX NG WDM Inband DCN Special Topic

OTC173 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1d

OptiX NG WDM Outband DCN Special


Topic

OTC174 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1d

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites
Having knowledge of OTN, WDM and IP technology
Having experience of IP, WDM network operation and maintenance

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the Inband DCN working principle
Understand the functions of Inband DCN
Describe the alarm of Inband DCN
Describe the Outband DCN working principle
Understand the functions of Outband DCN
Describe the alarm of Outband DCN

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

473

7.10.27 OptiX NG WDM Optical Doctor System Special Topic


Training Path
OptiX NG WDM Optical Doctor System
Special Topic

OTC172 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1d

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites
Having knowledge of OTN, WDM and IP technology
Having experience of IP, WDM network operation and maintenance

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the Optical Doctor System working principle
Understand the functions of Optical Doctor System
Describe the alarm of Optical Doctor System

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

474

7.10.28 OptiX NG WDM Master-Slave Subrack Management Special Topic


Training Path
OptiX NG WDM Master-Slave Subrack
Management Special Topic

OTC175 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1d

Target Audience

OptiX NG WDM operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites
Having knowledge of OTN, WDM and IP technology
Having experience of IP, WDM network operation and maintenance

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the Master-Slave Subrack Management working principle
Understand the functions of Master-Slave Subrack Management
Describe the alarm of

Master-Slave Subrack Management

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

475

7.11

RTN 900 Products Training Programs

7.11.1 OptiX RTN 900 Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 System Description

OTF47

Lecture

0.5d

OptiX RTN 900 Network Application

OTF32

Lecture

0.5d

OptiX RTN 900 Installation

OTF18

Lecture

1d

OptiX RTN 900 Commissioning

OTF38

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1d

OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid


Domain)
2d
OTF46
Lab, E-lab

OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration


(Packet Domain)

OTF29

Lab, E-lab

2d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 series installation and commissioning engineer


Prerequisites

Having basic experience of telecommunications equipment installation criterion


Having working experience in the optical transport network and microwave products
Be familiar with Windows operating system
Having equivalent knowledge of digital microwave communication basics

476

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the relation among the different parts of OpitX RTN 900
Illustrate the installation procedures and steps of antenna, ODU/hybrid coupler and IDU
Implement the outdoor and indoor components installation of OptiX RTN 900
Describe the installation criterions for each part of OptiX RTN 900
Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN 900
Describe the system structure, functions and application of every unit
Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet microwave
Describe the networking application under PDH/SDH, hybrid and packet microwave modes
List out the protection technologies in OptiX RTN 900 network
Describe the features and applications of the protection technologies
Finish proper preparations before the commissioning
Perform site commissioning of the OptiX RTN 900
Perform system commissioning of the OptiX RTN 900
Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 900
Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN 900
Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN 900
Describe the basic concepts of IP & MPLS
Outline the steps of RTN 900 service configuration in packet plane
Implement Ethernet service / CES service / ATM / IMA services configuration in packet plane via NMS
Describe the parameters' meaning in service configuration of packet plane

Duration

7 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

477

7.11.2 OptiX RTN 900 1st Line Maintenance Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 System Description

OTF47

Lecture

0.5d

OptiX RTN 900 Field Operations &


Maintenance

OTF33

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1d

OptiX RTN 900 NE Database Topic

OTF34

Lab, E-lab

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 series field maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows operating system.


Having the general knowledge of Microwave basics
Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS and QinQ
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN 900
Describe the system structure, functions and application of every unit
Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet microwave
Outline the general safety precautions of OptiX RTN 900
List the routine maintenance items of OptiX RTN 900
Implement the maintenance operations of OptiX RTN 900
Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 900
Describe the functions of CF card
Routing maintenance of NE database
Backup NE database

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

478

7.11.3 OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the concept and characters of digital

Digital Microwave Communication Basics

OTF01

Lecture

microwave communication
Describe the theory and function of every part

0.5d

in the digital microwave system


List the networking application for digital
microwave system

OptiX RTN 900 System Description

OTF47

Lecture

List the fadings in microwave propagation

0.5d

List the common technologies of antifading


Describe the basic concepts of IP & MPLS
Outline the steps of RTN 900 service

OptiX RTN 900 Network Application

OTF32

Lecture

configuration in packet plane


Implement Ethernet service / CES service /

0.5d

ATM / IMA services configuration in packet


plane via NMS
Describe the parameters' meaning in service

OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid


Domain)
2d
OTF46
Lab, E-lab

configuration of packet plane


Describe the main characteristics of OptiX
RTN 900
Describe the system structure, functions and

OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration


(Packet Domain)

OTF29

Lab, E-lab

application of every unit


2d

Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet


microwave
Describe the networking application under

OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting

OTF35

Lecture

PDH/SDH, hybrid and packet microwave


modes

1.5d

List out the protection technologies in OptiX


RTN 900 network

Target Audience

Describe the features and applications of the


protection technologies

OptiX RTN series operation and


maintenance engineer

Describe the general troubleshooting flow of


OptiX RTN 900

Prerequisites

Outline the methods of faults analyzing and

Having working experience in the


maintenance of Microwave products

locating
Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX

Be familiar with Windows operating system

RTN 900

Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS


and QinQ

Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 900

Having the general knowledge of Ethernet

Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN

Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN 900

Objectives

900

On completion of this program, the


479

Duration

7 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

480

7.11.4 OptiX RTN 900 3rd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

testing
List the common indices of Ethernet service

Hybrid Services Testing

OTF23

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

performance testing
Explain the concept of common testing indices

1.5d

Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service


performance testing
Outline the basic concept of QoS and ETH-

OptiX RTN 900 QoS & OAM Technology

OTF36

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

OAM

1.5d

Describe the working principles of QoS


Outline the QoS functions of the Ethernet
service boards on the OptiX RTN 900

OptiX RTN 900 Clocks & DCN Topic

OTF31

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

List the planning principles of QoS


Describe the configuration flow of QoS

1.5d

Describe the usage of ETH-OAM


Configure clock tracing
OptiX RTN 900 System Control Unit and
IF Feature Topic
1d
OTF30
Lecture

Configure clock protection


Configure SSM byte in RTN 900
Check clock status in RTN 900 network
Manage and configure ECC link
Configure extended ECC

OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting

OTF35

Lecture

Enable/disable ECC link

1.5d

Configure IP over DCC, inband DCC


Configure DCC transparent transmission

Target Audience

Describe the general troubleshooting flow of


OptiX RTN 900

OptiX RTN series senior operation and


maintenance engineer

Outline the methods of faults analyzing and


locating

Prerequisites

Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX

Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line


Maintenance or NMC Operation Training

RTN 900
Describe system architecture and functions of

Objectives

the SCC unit


Outline the new features supported by OptiX

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

RTN 900
Describe the function and application of the

Outline the types and applications of Ethernet


Know the technical background of the Ethernet
and its basic concepts

new features

Duration

Draw the Ethernet frame structure


Describe the function of VLAN and L2

7 working days
Class Size

switching

Min 6, Max 12

State the purpose of Ethernet performance


481

7.11.5 OptiX RTN 900V1R8 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:

Digital Microwave Communication Basics


OTF01

Lecture

microwave communication

0.5d

0.5d

List the fadings in microwave propagation

List the common technologies of antifading

Describe the basic concepts of IP MPLS

Outline the steps of RTN 900 service

OptiX RTN 900 Network Application


OTF32

Lecture

List the networking application for digital


microwave system

OptiX RTN 900 System Description


OTF47

Describe the theory and function of every part


in the digital microwave system

Lecture

Describe the concept and characters of digital

configuration in packet plane

0.5d

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX


RTN 900

OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration


(Packet Domain)
OTF29

Lab, E-lab

application of every unit

2d

Describe the networking application under


PDH/SDH and hybrid microwave modes

OptiX RTN 900 Data Configuration (Hybrid


Domain)
OTF46

Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet


microwave

Lab, E-lab

Describe the system structure, functions and

2d

List out the protection technologies in OptiX


RTN 900 network

Describe the features and applications of the


protection technologies

OptiX RTN 900 Troubleshooting

OTF35

Lecture

1.5d

Describe the SDN feature application

Implement Ethernet service / CES service /


ATM / IMA services configuration in packet
plane via NMS

Target Audience

OptiX RTN series operation and


maintenance engineer

configuration of packet plane

Prerequisites

Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 900

Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN


900

Having working experience in the

maintenance of Microwave products

Be familiar with Windows operating system

Having the general knowledge of IP, MPLS

Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN


900

Describe the general troubleshooting flow of


OptiX RTN 900

and QinQ

Describe the parameters' meaning in service

Having the general knowledge of Ethernet

Outline the methods of faults analyzing and


locating

Objectives

Perform the common troubleshooting for


OptiX RTN 900

On completion of this program, the


482

Duration

Class Size

7 working days

Min 6, Max 12

483

7.11.6 OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Features Training


Training Path

Prerequisites

IP Routing Basic

Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line


Maintenance Training

OTF95

Lecture

0.5d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

ISIS Protocol Introduction


OTF96

Lecture

0.5d

BGP Protocol Introduction

Describe basic structure of IP network

Describe basic knowledge of IP address

Understand what is router and route

Describe the classification of routing


protocols

OTF97

Lecture

0.5d

OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Features


OTF98

Lecture

0.5d

Understand the origin of the IS-IS protocol

Describe the principles of the IS-IS protocol

Describe the principles of the BGP protocol

Implement BGP Route Selection

Understand the model of BGP MPLS VPN

Understand the basic concepts referred to


BGP MPLS VPN

OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Configuration


OTF99

Lab, E-lab

Understand the mechanisms of the route and


label distribution in BGP MPLS VPN

2d

Understand the process of data forwarding in


BGP MPLS VPN

OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN Troubleshooting


OTF100

Lecture

Understand the protection schemes of MPLS


BGP VPN service

1d

Implement L3 VPN configuration on RTN 900

Implement L3 VPN troubleshooting on RTN


900

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 L3 VPN network


maintenance engineer

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

484

7.11.7 OptiX RTN 980L IP Long Haul Microwave Features Training

Training Path

Describe the product positioning of the RTN


980L

OptiX RTN 980L IP LH Features


Description
OTF90

Lecture

List the components and boards of the RTN


980L

0.5d

Describe the function and feature of the RTN


980L

OptiX RTN 980L IP LH Hardware


Description
OTF91

Lecture

Describe the microwave features in OptiX RTN


980L long haul network

0.5d

Describe the protection features in OptiX RTN


980L long haul network

OptiX RTN 980L IP LH Configuration


OTF93

Lab, E-lab

Illustrate the installation procedures and steps


of antenna, RFU, branch, IDU

1.5d

Implement the outdoor and indoor components


installation of OptiX RTN 980L

of OptiX RTN 980L

OptiX RTN 980L IP LH Troubleshooting

OTF94

Lecture

0.5d

Having the general knowledge of Ethernet

Objectives

Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX


RTN 980L

of RTN 900 products

Having the general knowledge of IP and MPLS

Outline the methods of faults analyzing and


locating

Having working experience in the maintenance

Describe general troubleshooting flow of OptiX


RTN 980L

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows operating system

Implement service configuration of OptiX RTN


980L

OptiX RTN 980L operation and maintenance


engineer

Implement radio configuration of OptiX RTN


980L

Target Audience

Describe the installation criterions for each part

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

485

7.11.8 OptiX RTN 980L Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

parts of OpitX RTN 980L

OptiX RTN 980L IP LH Hardware


Description
OTF91

Lecture

Illustrate the installation procedures and


steps of antenna, RFU/branch and IDU

0.5d

Implement the outdoor and indoor


components installation of OptiX RTN 980L

part of OptiX RTN 980L

OptiX RTN 980L Commissioning


OTF149

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the installation criterions for each

1d

Describe the basic concepts of IP MPLS

Outline the steps of RTN 980L service


configuration in packet plane

OptiX RTN 980L Installation


OTF150

Lecture

Implement Ethernet service / CES service /


ATM / IMA services configuration in packet
plane via NMS

1d

Describe the parameters' meaning in service


configuration of packet plane

OptiX RTN 980L Data Configuration


(Packet Domain)
OTF151

Lab, E-lab

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX


RTN 980L

2d

Describe the system structure, functions and


application of every unit

OptiX RTN 980L Data Configuration


(Hybrid Domain)
OTF152

Lab, E-lab

Explain the functions of AM, hybrid, packet


microwave

2d

Describe the networking application under


PDH/SDH and hybrid microwave modes

Target Audience

RTN 980L network

OptiX RTN 980L installation and


commissioning engineer

Finish proper preparations before the


commissioning

Having basic experience of

telecommunications equipment installation

Perform site commissioning of the OptiX RTN


980L

criterion

Describe the features and applications of the


protection technologies

Prerequisites

List out the protection technologies in OptiX

Having working experience in the optical

Perform system commissioning of the OptiX


RTN 980L

transport network and microwave products

Be familiar with Windows operating system

Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 980L

Having equivalent knowledge of digital

Configure TDM services of the OptiX RTN


980L

microwave communication basics

Objectives

Configure Ethernet services of the OptiX RTN


980L

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Duration

7 working days

Describe the relation among the different


486

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

487

7.12

RTN 900 Products Advanced Training

7.12.1 OptiX RTN 900 ERPS Special Topic Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 ERPS Special Topic
OTF129

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 network maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Having knowledge of Ethernet technology and ELAN service

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the ERPS working principal

Understand the functions of R-APS Messages

Describe the four timers of application

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

488

7.12.2 OptiX RTN 900 PLA/EPLA Special Topic Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 PLA/EPLA Special Topic
OTF130

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 network maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the PLA/EPLA working principal

Outline the differences between PLA, EPLA, and LAG

Describe the Relevant Alarms and Events of the PLA/EPLA

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

489

7.12.3 OptiX RTN 900 PW APS Special Topic Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 PW APS Special Topic
OTF131

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 network maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the PW APS working principal

Outline the PW APS switching conditions

Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the PW APS

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

490

7.12.4 OptiX RTN 900 Tunnel APS Special Topic Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 Tunnel APS Special Topic
OTF132

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 network maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the Tunnel APS working principal

Outline the Tunnel APS switching conditions

Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the Tunnel APS

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

491

7.12.5 OptiX RTN 900 LAG Special Topic Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 LAG Special Topic
OTF133

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 network maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the two aggregation types of the LAG

Outline the working principles of the LAG

Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the LAG

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

492

7.12.6 OptiX RTN 900 AM Special Topic Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 AM Special Topic
OTF134

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 network maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the AM working principal

Outline the AM switching conditions

Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the AM

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

493

7.12.7 OptiX RTN 900 Preconfiguration Tool and Operation Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 Preconfiguration Tool and
Operation
OTF135

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 network maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the procedure for Using the Preconfiguration Tool

Outline GUI function

Understand the Relevant operation of the Error Handling

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

494

7.12.8 OptiX RTN 900 1588V2 Special Topic Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 900 1588V2 Special Topic
OTF137

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 network maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the 1588V2 application

Outline the Basic Concepts of the 1588V2

Describe the 1588V2 working principal

Understand the Relevant Alarms and Events of the 1588V2

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

495

7.12.9 iManager U2000 RTN Network Monitoring Training


Training Path
Microwave product and common alarm
overview
OTF142

Lecture

0.5d

iManager U2000 monitoring of the OptiX


RTN 900
OTF143

Lab, E-lab

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 network maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Having working experience in the U2000 operating and maintenance

Having the general knowledge of Microwave

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the typical products of Microwave equipments

Describe the common alarm of the Microwave Link and service

Describe the common performance of the Microwave Link and service

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

496

7.12.10 KPI Analysis of Ethernet Service Training


Training Path
KPI Analysis of Ethernet Service
OTF142

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Having working experience in the U2000 operating and maintenance

Having working experience in the optical transport network and microwave products

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Explain the RMON functions of different boards

Implement the Ethernet service performance monitoring through iManager U2000

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

497

7.13

RTN 300 Products Training Programs

7.13.1 OptiX RTN 310360380 Installation and Commissioning Training

Training Path

Describe the system structure, functions and


application of every unit

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 System


Description
Lecture

OTF80

Describe the relation among the different parts


of OpitX RTN 310/360/380

0.5d

Describe the features and application of OptiX


RTN 310/360/380

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Feature


Description

Lecture

OTF81

Illustrate the installation procedures and steps


of antenna, RTN 310/360/380 and PI

0.5d

Implement the installation of OptiX RTN


310/360/380

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Installation


Lecture

OTF82

Describe the installation criterions for each part


of OptiX RTN 310/360/380

0.5d

Finish proper preparations before the


commissioning

310/360/380

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Commissioning

OTF83

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1d

Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN


310/360/380

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Data Configuration


OTF84

Perform system commissioning of the OptiX


RTN 310/360/380

Lab, E-lab

Perform site commissioning of the OptiX RTN

1.5d

Configure services of the OptiX RTN


310/360/380

Duration
Target Audience

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 installation and


commissioning engineer

4 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Prerequisites

Having basic experience of telecommunications


equipment installation criterion

Having equivalent knowledge of digital


microwave communication basics

Be familiar with windows operating system

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN


310/360/380
498

7.13.2 OptiX RTN 310360380 1st Line Maintenance Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 System
Description
OTF80

Lecture

0.5d

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Field Operations


Maintenance
1.5d
Lecture, Lab, E-lab
OTF85

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 field maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Having a general knowledge of microwave basics

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN 310/360/380

Describe the system structure, functions and application of every unit

Describe the relation among the different parts of OpitX RTN 310/360/380

List the routine maintenance items of OptiX RTN 310/360/380

Implement the maintenance operation of OptiX RTN 310/360/380

Judge the common faulty in OptiX RTN 310/360/380

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

499

7.13.3 OptiX RTN 310360380 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

of antenna, RTN 310/360/380 and PI

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 System


Description
Lecture

OTF80

310/360/380

0.5d

Lecture

Configure services of the OptiX RTN


310/360/380

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Feature


Description
OTF81

Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN

Implement the routine maintenance via NMS

Describe the general troubleshooting flow of


OptiX RTN 310/360/380

0.5d

Outline the methods of faults analyzing and


locating

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Data


Configuration
OTF84

Lab, E-lab

Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX


RTN 310/360/380

1.5d

Duration

3 working days
OptiX RTN 310/360/380 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
OTF86

Lecture

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 310/360/380 operation and


maintenance engineer
Prerequisites

Having working experience in the maintenance


of Microwave products

Having the general knowledge of Ethernet

Be familiar with Windows operating system

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN


310/360/380

Describe the system structure, functions and


application of every unit

Describe the relation among the different parts


of OpitX RTN 300

Describe the features and application of OptiX


RTN 310/360/380

Illustrate the installation procedures and steps


500

7.13.4 OptiX RTN 300 Preconfiguration Tool Operation


Training Path
OptiX RTN 300 Preconfiguration Tool
Operation
OTF136

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 900 network maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Completion of OptiX RTN 900 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the procedure for Using the Preconfiguration Tool

Outline GUI function

Understand the Relevant operation of the Error Handling

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

501

7.13.5 OptiX RTN 320 Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OptiX RTN 320 System Description


OTF138

Lecture

0.5d

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN


320

OptiX RTN 320 Feature Description


OTF139

Lecture

Describe the system structure, functions and


application of every unit

0.5d

Describe the relation among the different parts


of OptiX RTN 320

RTN 320

OptiX RTN 320 Data Configuration


OTF140

Lab, E-lab

1.5d

OptiX RTN 320 Maintenance and


Troubleshooting
OTF141

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the features and application of OptiX

Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 320

Configure services of the OptiX RTN 320

Implement the routine maintenance via NMS

Describe the general troubleshooting flow of


OptiX RTN 320

1.5d

Outline the methods of faults analyzing and


locating

Target Audience

Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX


RTN 320

OptiX RTN 320 operation and maintenance


engineer

Duration

4 working days

Prerequisites

Class Size
Having a general knowledge of Digital

Min 6, Max 12

Microwave Communication

Having the general knowledge of Ethernet

502

7.13.6 OptiX RTN 310 Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Implement the routine maintenance via NMS

Describe the general troubleshooting flow of

OptiX RTN 310 System Description


Lecture

OTF117

OptiX RTN 310

0.5d

Outline the methods of faults analyzing and


locating

Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX


RTN 310

OptiX RTN 310 Feature Description

Duration
Lecture

OTF118

0.5d

4 working days
Class Size
OptiX RTN 310 Data Configuration
OTF119

Lab, E-lab

Min 6, Max 12
1.5d

OptiX RTN 310 Maintenance and


Troubleshooting
OTF120

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 310 operation and maintenance


engineer
Prerequisites

Having a general knowledge of Digital


Microwave Communication

Having the general knowledge of Ethernet

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN


310

Describe the system structure, functions and


application of every unit

Describe the relation among the different parts


of OptiX RTN 310

Describe the features and application of OptiX


RTN 310

Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 310

Configure services of the OptiX RTN 310


503

7.13.7 OptiX RTN 380 Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path
OptiX RTN 380 System Description
Lecture

OTF121

Configure services of the OptiX RTN 380

Implement the routine maintenance via NMS

Describe the general troubleshooting flow of


OptiX RTN 380

0.5d

Outline the methods of faults analyzing and


locating

OptiX RTN 380 Feature Description

Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX


RTN 380

Lecture

OTF122

0.5d

Duration

4 working days
OptiX RTN 380 Data Configuration
OTF123

Lab, E-lab

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

1.5d

OptiX RTN 380 Maintenance and


Troubleshooting
OTF124

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1.5d

Target Audience

OptiX RTN 380 operation and maintenance


engineer
Prerequisites

Having a general knowledge of Digital


Microwave Communication

Having the general knowledge of Ethernet

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN


380

Describe the system structure, functions and


application of every unit

Describe the relation among the different parts


of OptiX RTN 380

Describe the features and application of OptiX


RTN 380

Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 380


504

7.13.8 OptiX RTN 360 Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OptiX RTN 360 System Description


OTF125

Lecture

0.5d

Describe the main characteristics of OptiX RTN


360

OptiX RTN 360 Feature Description


OTF126

Lecture

Describe the system structure, functions and


application of every unit

0.5d

Describe the relation among the different parts


of OptiX RTN 360

RTN 360

OptiX RTN 360 Data Configuration


OTF127

Lab, E-lab

1.5d

OptiX RTN 360 Maintenance and


Troubleshooting
OTF128

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the features and application of OptiX

Configure radio links of the OptiX RTN 360

Configure services of the OptiX RTN 360

Implement the routine maintenance via NMS

Describe the general troubleshooting flow of


OptiX RTN 360

1.5d

Outline the methods of faults analyzing and


locating

Target Audience

Perform the common troubleshooting for OptiX


RTN 360

OptiX RTN 360 operation and maintenance


engineer

Duration

4 working days

Prerequisites

Class Size
Having a general knowledge of Digital

Min 6, Max 12

Microwave Communication

Having the general knowledge of Ethernet

505

7.14

MSTP Products Training Programs

7.14.1 OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Product Overview Training


Training Path

OptiX NG SDH OCS Product Overview

OTA27

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

Non-technical manager
OptiX NG SDH OCS products novice
Prerequisites
NA

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


List the function of transmission network
Describe the network application of the OptiX NG SDH OCS system
Describe the structure of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
List the main cards of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Understand the features of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Duration

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

506

7.14.2 OptiX OSN NG SDH & OCS Installation Training


Training Path
OptiX NG SDH OCS Installation

OTA26

Lecture, WBT

2d

Target Audience

OptiX NG SDH OCS installation engineer


Prerequisites

NA
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the features of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Outline the main boards of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
List the equipment installation procedure
Describe the preparation for installation
State the required equipment room environment and grounding condition checks
Verify the cabinet, cables and component installations

Duration

2 days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

507

7.14.3 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) Commissioning Training


Training Path

the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment


Outline the system protection modes of the

OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware


Description TDM
Lecture
OTA29

OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment


State the main functions of the cards in the

1.5d

OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment


Describe the common SDH network topologies
and their features

SDH Networking and Protection

Explain the protection mechanism of linear


OTA02

Lecture

1d

MSP
Explain the protection mechanism of MS
shared protection ring

U2000 System Introduction


ONU01

Lecture

Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in


ring/mesh topology

0.5d

Analyze the service signal flow before/after the


protection switch takes place

OptiX NG SDH OCS Commissioning


OTA32

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the architecture and main features of


U2000

2d

Describe the directory structure of U2000


Describe the main functions of U2000

Target Audience

Describe the preparation for the

OptiX NG SDH OCS commissioning


engineer

commissioning
List the items for single station commissioning
for OptiX NG SDH OCS system

Prerequisites

Outline the procedures of network

Having working experience in transport


network

commissioning for OptiX NG SDH OCS


system

Be familiar with Windows operating system

Summarize the equipment/network condition

Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics


course or having equivalent knowledge

after commissioning
Accomplish the OptiX NG SDH OCS

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the network applications of the OptiX
NG SDH OCS equipment

system commissioning

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Explain the system structure and features of

508

7.14.4 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
OptiX NG SDH OCS System
Description

OTA28

Lecture

1d

OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and


Maintenance

OTA30

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

0.5d

OptiX SDH Equipment Field Maintenance

OTA35

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment field maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows operating system


Having a general knowledge of SDH basics
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Illustrate the networking applications of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Describe the system structure and features of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Outline the system protection schemes of the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
Outline the operation environment of OptiX SDH series equipment
List the status description of OptiX SDH series equipment indicators
List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH series equipment
Perform the basic maintenance operations of OptiX SDH series equipment
Complete the maintenance records of OptiX SDH series equipment
Outline the function of basic menus of OptiX iManager T2000 LCT
Create topology including create NE/Link/NM
Perform the NE configuration, board configuration, service dispatching and protection configuration for
equipment via OptiX iManager T2000 LCT
Perform the routine maintenance via T2000 LCT

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
509

7.14.5 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training
Training Path

Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows operating system

SDH Networking and Protection

OTA02

Lecture

Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics


course or having equivalent knowledge

1d

Objectives
OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware
Description TDM

OTA29

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

1.5d

Describe the network applications of the OptiX


NG SDH OCS equipment
Explain the system structure and features of

OptiX NG SDH OCS Products


Configuration

OTA31

Lab, E-lab

the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment


2d

Outline the system protection modes of the


OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
State the main functions of the cards in the

OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation

ONU10

Lecture, Lab

OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment


Describe the common SDH network topologies

1d

and their features


Explain the protection mechanism of linear
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and
Maintenance

OTA10

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

MSP
Explain the protection mechanism of MS

3d

shared protection ring


Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in
ring/mesh topology

ASON Basics

Analyze the service signal flow before/after the

OTA07

Lecture

1d

protection switch takes place


Describe the architecture and main features of
U2000

ASON Operation and Maintenance

OTA12

Lecture, Lab

Describe the directory structure of U2000


Describe the main functions of U2000

2d

Accomplish the network protection and SDH


service configuration through NMS
Outline the classification of Ethernet service

OptiX SDH Equipment NMS Side


Maintenance

OTA40

Lecture

Explain the function and applications of

0.5d

different types Ethernet service


List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG

Target Audience

SDH OCS equipment

OptiX NG SDH OCS network operation


center engineer

Describe the functions and application of the


Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH OCS
equipment
Describe the features of the Ethernet boards
510

Accomplish the Ethernet service

Describe the networking characters of ASON


Explain the service characters of ASON

EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS


State the purpose of Ethernet performance

Implement the creation of ASON network

testing

Create SLA services and test the protection

List the common indices of Ethernet service

and restoration of them

performance testing

Conduct the maintenance operation of ASON

Explain the concepts of common testing

network

indices

Explain the operation precaution of ASON

Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service

Explain the fault reported by the ASON

performance testing

network

Implement the Ethernet performance testing

Outline the methods of ASON troubleshooting

and analyze the result


Know the operation environment of NMS

Solve the typical ASON trouble

Duration

List the maintenance tasks

12 working days

Perform the basic maintenance operations


Complete the maintenance records

Class Size

Outline the standards of ASON

Min 6, Max 12

Illustrate the structure of ASON

511

7.14.6 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path
ASON Operation and Maintenance
SDH Networking and Protection

OTA02

Lecture

OTA12

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

2d

1d
OptiX SDH Equipment NMS Side
Maintenance

OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware


Description TDM

OTA29

Lecture

OTA40
1.5d

1d

0.5d

Target Audience

OptiX NG SDH OCS operation and


maintenance engineer

OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation

ONU10 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Lecture

Prerequisites

Having working experience in the


maintenance of SDH products
OptiX NG SDH OCS Products
Configuration

OTA31

Lab, E-lab

Be familiar with Windows operating system


Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics
course or having equivalent knowledge

2d

Objectives
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and
Maintenance

OTA10

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

3d

Describe the network applications of the OptiX


NG SDH OCS equipment
OptiX SDH System Troubleshooting

OTA14

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Explain the system structure and features of


the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

2d

Outline the system protection modes of the


OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
State the main functions of the cards in the

OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and


Maintenance

OTA30

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment


0.5d

Describe the common SDH network topologies


and their features
Explain the protection mechanism of linear

OptiX SDH Equipment Field Maintenance

OTA35

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

MSP

0.5d

Explain the protection mechanism of MS


shared protection ring
Explain the protection mechanism of SNCP in
ring/mesh topology

ASON Basics

OTA07

Lecture

Analyze the service signal flow before/after the

1d

protection switch takes place


Accomplish the network protection and SDH
512

Explain the fault reported by the ASON

service configuration through NMS


Describe the architecture and main features of

network
Outline the methods of ASON troubleshooting

U2000
Describe the directory structure of U2000

Solve the typical ASON trouble

Describe the main functions of U2000

Outline the operation environment of OptiX

Outline the function of basic menus of OptiX

SDH series equipment


List the status description of OptiX SDH series

iManager T2000 LCT


Create topology including create NE/Link/NM

equipment indicators
List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH

Perform the NE configuration, board

series equipment

configuration, service dispatching and

Perform the basic maintenance operations of

protection configuration for equipment via


OptiX iManager T2000 LCT

OptiX SDH series equipment

Perform the routine maintenance via T2000

Complete the maintenance records of OptiX

LCT

SDH series equipment

Outline the classification of Ethernet service

Know the operation environment of NMS

Explain the function and applications of

List the maintenance tasks


Perform the basic maintenance operations

different types Ethernet service


List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG

Complete the maintenance records

SDH OCS equipment

List the common analysis methods of fault

Describe the functions and application of the

locating

Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH OCS

Outline the fault handling flow

equipment

Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption,

Describe the features of the Ethernet boards

error bit, etc

Accomplish the Ethernet service

Illustrate the application of common

EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS

troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,

State the purpose of Ethernet performance

testing, alarm and performance events

testing

analysis, replacement, etc

List the common indices of Ethernet service

Analyze common faulty of the network consist


of OptiX NG SDH OCS series

performance testing
Explain the concepts of common testing

Locate and eliminate faults, get experience

indices

from troubleshooting practice

Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service

Outline the standards of ASON

performance testing

Illustrate the structure of ASON

Implement the Ethernet performance testing

Describe the networking characters of ASON

and analyze the result


Implement the creation of ASON network

Explain the service characters of ASON

Duration

Create SLA services and test the protection

15 working days

and restoration of them


Conduct the maintenance operation of ASON

Class Size

network

Min 6, Max 12

Explain the operation precaution of ASON

513

7.14.7 OptiX NG SDH & OCS Equipment (TDM) 3rd Line Maintenance Training
Training Path

State the main functions of the cards in the


OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware


Description TDM

OTA29

Lecture

Describe the principle and process of TPS on


OptiX NG SDH equipment

1.5d

List the main characteristics of TPS on OptiX


NG SDH equipment
Implement the configuration of TPS on OptiX

OptiX NG SDH OCS Features and


Application

OTA34

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

NG SDH equipment
3d

Describe the feature of power source system


in OptiX NG SDH OCS system
Grasp the protection principle and function of

OptiX SDH Special Topics

OTA36

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

all types of power sources in OptiX NG SDH


OCS equipments

2d

Grasp the principle of cross-connection


clock active/standby switching in OptiX NG
SDH OCS system

OptiX SDH System Advanced


Troubleshooting

OTA37

Lecture, Lab,
Discussion

Grasp the mechanism of cross-connection

2.5d

clock active/standby switching in OptiX NG


SDH OCS system
Describe the principle of SCC active/standby

OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation


Maintenance
4d
OTA42 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

switching in OptiX NG SDH OCS system


List the methods of SCC switching in OptiX NG
SDH OCS system

Target Audience

Describe the traffic flow and service

OptiX NG SDH OCS senior operation


and maintenance engineer

configuration about the complicated networks


Analyze the protection capability about the
complicated networks

Prerequisites

Accomplish the service configuration of the

Completion of OptiX NG SDH OCS


Equipment (TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance
Training or OptiX NG SDH OCS
Equipment (TDM) NMC Operation Training

complicated network and verify the protection


Describe the working mechanism of the L2
switching
Interpret the basic of QoS

Objectives

Outline the key technology in QoS

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe the typical QoS application

Describe the network applications of the OptiX

Interpret the basic of QinQ

Describe the frame structure of MPLS

NG SDH OCS equipment

List the application of MPLS and QinQ

Explain the system structure and features of

Describe the working mechanism of virtual

the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

concatenation

Outline the system protection modes of the

Describe the function of LCAS

OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Illustrate the GFP-F frame structure for the


514

Grasp the working principle of ECC

Ethernet signal
Describe the troubleshooting idea and

Describe the network application of ECC and

methods

how to separate huge ECC network into

Analyze the common faults locating

smaller networks
Illustrate the extended applications of ECC

Outline the procedures of Ethernet

Accomplish the configuration of ECC, verify

troubleshooting
Analyze the failure of the Ethernet service

extended ECC and DCC transparent

Locate the faulty of the Ethernet service

transmission
Outline common ECC command lines

Compare the function of Ethernet port and

Get further understand of the feature of OptiX

service OAM

NG SDH OCS system

Outline the typical application scenario of

Analyze common cases in the real network

Ethernet service OAM

and figure out the problem

Accomplish the OAM testing

Locate the faulty of the failed network and

Locate the fault position when error reports

summarize the key point of troubleshooting

Explain the meaning of clock protection related


synchronization parameters

Duration

Explain the basic principles of implementing


clock protection networking
Accomplish the clock protection configuration

13 working days
Class Size

and verify it while the network fails

Min 6, Max 12

515

7.14.8 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) Commissioning Training


Training Path

OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN

Hybrid MSTP Network Application

OTA46

Lecture

1500/3500/7500/7500II
Outline the system protection schemes of the

1d

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II


Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product
networking

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description

OTA48

Lecture

Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid

1d

MSTP product
Classify the service types of Ethernet
Outline the types and applications of Ethernet

OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation

ONU10 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Check the equipment condition such as power

1d

connections, fiber connections, mounted


boards, etc
Outline and perform the commissioning

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Commissioning

OTA52

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

process for OptiX Hybrid MSTP equipment


Perform the commissioning process of the

2d

network
Describe methods of operation including circuit

Target Audience

provisioning, routing maintenance tasks and

Hybrid MSTP commissioning engineer

fault finding

Prerequisites

Perform commissioning tests on the equipment


Perform commissioning tests on the network

Having working experience in transport


network

Describe the architecture and main features of


U2000

Be familiar with Windows operating system

Describe the directory structure of U2000

Objectives

Describe the main functions of U2000

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Duration

5 working days

Describe the networking applications of the


OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

Class Size

Describe the system structure of the OptiX

Min 6, Max 12

516

7.14.9 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 1st Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN


1500/3500/7500/7500II

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description

OTA48

Lecture

Outline the system protection schemes of the


OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

1d

Outline the operation environment of OptiX


SDH series equipment
List the status description of OptiX SDH series

OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and


Maintenance

OTA30

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

equipment indicators
0.5d

List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH


series equipment
Perform the basic maintenance operations of

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Field Maintenance

OTA53

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

OptiX SDH series equipment


Complete the maintenance records of OptiX

0.5d

SDH series equipment

Target Audience

Outline the function of basic menus of


iManager U2000 LCT

Hybrid MSTP equipment field maintenance


engineer

Create topology including create NE/Link


Perform the NE configuration, board

Prerequisites

configuration, and service dispatching and

Be familiar with Windows operating system

protection configuration for equipment via

Having a general knowledge of SDH basics

iManager U2000 LCT


Perform the routine maintenance via U2000

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

LCT

Duration

Describe the networking applications of the


OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

2 working days
Class Size

Describe the system structure of the OptiX

Min 6, Max 12

OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

517

7.14.10 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) NMC Operation Training


Training Path

Introduction courses or having equivalent


knowledge

Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction

OTA45

Lecture

Objectives
1d

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the classification of IP addresses

Hybrid MSTP Network Application

OTA46

Lecture

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS


1d

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP


Outline the QinQ application scenarios of
OptiX Hybrid MSTP

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description

OTA48

Lecture

Describe the basic concepts of PWE3


Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format

1d

for Ethernet
Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
for TDM E1

OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation

Describe the networking applications of the

ONU10 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1d

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II


Describe the system structure of the OptiX
OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products


Configuration

OTA49

Lab, E-lab

Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN


3d

1500/3500/7500/7500II
Outline the system protection schemes of the
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application

OTA50

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the architecture and main features of


U2000

2d

Describe the directory structure of U2000


Describe the main functions of U2000
Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side


Operation and Maintenance
1d
OTA51 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Configure the protection of TDM plane


packet transport plane for the network and
equipment

Target Audience

Configure the common services for the TDM

Hybrid MSTP network operation center


engineer

plane
Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service

Prerequisites

in the packet transport plane


Outline the QoS model

Having working experience in transport


network

Describe QoS basic concepts


Outline the key technology in QoS

Be familiar with Windows operating system

Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid

Upon completion of OTA01 SDH Basics


and OTA45 Hybrid MSTP Technology

MSTP network
518

Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system

equipment
Perform the basic maintenance operations for

according to the service demand


Compare the function of Ethernet port and

Hybrid MSTP equipment


Complete the maintenance records

service OAM
Outline the typical application scenario of

Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product

Ethernet service OAM

networking

Describe the working mechanism and

Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid

application scene of MPLS OAM

MSTP product

Describe the working mechanism and

Classify the service types of Ethernet

application scene of MPLS-TP OAM


Describe the working mechanism and

Outline the types and applications of Ethernet

Duration

application scene of PW OAM

10 working days

Accomplish the OAM testing


Locate the fault position when error reports

Class Size

Describe the operation environment of NMS

Min 6, Max 12

List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP

519

7.14.11 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

Target Audience

Hybrid MSTP operation and maintenance


engineer

Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction

OTA45

Lecture

1d

Prerequisites

Having working experience in transport


network

Hybrid MSTP Network Application

OTA46

Lecture

Be familiar with Windows operating system

1d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description

OTA48

Lecture

Describe the classification of IP addresses

1d

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS


Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP

OptiX iManager U2000 Basic Operation

ONU10 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Outline the QinQ application scenarios of


OptiX Hybrid MSTP

1d

Describe the basic concepts of PWE3


Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
for Ethernet

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products


Configuration

OTA49

Lab, E-lab

Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format


3d

for TDM E1
Describe the networking applications of the
OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application

OTA50

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the system structure of the OptiX


OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

2d

Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN


1500/3500/7500/7500II
Outline the system protection schemes of the

OptiX Hybrid MSTP System


Troubleshooting

OTA54

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

1.5d

Describe the architecture and main features of


U2000
Describe the directory structure of U2000

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side


Operation and Maintenance
1d
OTA51
Lecture, Lab

Describe the main functions of U2000


Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products
Configure the protection of TDM plane
packet transport plane for the network and

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Field Maintenance

OTA53

Lecture, Lab

equipment
Configure the common services for the TDM

0.5d

plane
Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service
520

Create topology including create NE/Link

in the packet transport plane


Outline the QoS model

Perform the NE configuration, board

Describe QoS basic concepts

configuration, and service dispatching and

Outline the key technology in QoS

protection configuration for equipment via

Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid

iManager U2000 LCT


Perform the routine maintenance via U2000

MSTP network

LCT

Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system

List the common analysis methods of packet

according to the service demand

network fault locating

Compare the function of Ethernet port and

Outline the fault handling flow

service OAM

Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,

Outline the typical application scenario of

APS switching failed, OAM errors,etc

Ethernet service OAM

Illustrate the application of common

Describe the working mechanism and

troubleshooting methods for packet network

application scene of MPLS OAM

Analyze common faulty of the Hybrid MSTP

Describe the working mechanism and

network

application scene of MPLS-TP OAM

Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product

Describe the working mechanism and

networking

application scene of PW OAM

Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid

Accomplish the OAM testing

MSTP product

Locate the fault position when error reports


Describe the operation environment of NMS

Classify the service types of Ethernet

List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP

Outline the types and applications of Ethernet

equipment

Duration

Perform the basic maintenance operations for


Hybrid MSTP equipment
Complete the maintenance records

12 working days
Class Size

Outline the function of basic menus of

Min 6, Max 12

iManager U2000 LCT

521

7.14.12 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) Commissioning Training


Training Path

Describe the system structure of the OptiX


OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware


Description TDM

OTA29

Lecture

Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN


1500/3500/7500/7500II

1.5d

Outline the system protection schemes of the


OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II
Check the equipment condition such as power

OptiX NG SDH OCS Commissioning

connections, fiber connections, mounted

OTA32

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

2d

boards, etc
Outline and perform the commissioning
process for OptiX Hybrid MSTP equipment

Hybrid MSTP Network Application

OTA46

Lecture

Perform the commissioning process of the


1d

network
Describe methods of operation including circuit
provisioning, routing maintenance tasks and

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description

OTA48

Lecture

fault finding
Perform commissioning tests on the equipment

1d

Perform commissioning tests on the network


Describe the network applications of the OptiX
NG SDH OCS equipment

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Commissioning

Explain the system structure and features of

OTA52

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

2d

the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment


Outline the system protection modes of the

Target Audience

OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Hybrid MSTP commissioning engineer

State the main functions of the cards in the


OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Prerequisites

Describe the preparation for the

Having working experience in transport


network

commissioning
List the items for single station commissioning

Be familiar with Windows operating system

for OptiX NG SDH OCS system

Objectives

Outline the procedures of network


commissioning for OptiX NG SDH OCS

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

system
Summarize the equipment/network condition

Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product

after commissioning

networking

Accomplish the OptiX NG SDH OCS

Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid

system commissioning

MSTP product

Describe the architecture and main features of

Classify the service types of Ethernet

U2000

Outline the types and applications of Ethernet

Describe the directory structure of U2000

Describe the networking applications of the

Describe the main functions of U2000

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II


522

Duration

Class Size

8 working days

Min 6, Max 12

523

7.14.13 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 1st Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

1500/3500/7500/7500II
Outline the system protection schemes of the

OptiX NG SDH OCS System


Description

OTA28

Lecture

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II


Outline the operation environment of OptiX

1d

SDH series equipment


List the status description of OptiX SDH series
equipment indicators

OptiX SDH Equipment Operation and


Maintenance

OTA30

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

List the maintenance items of OptiX SDH

0.5d

series equipment
Perform the basic maintenance operations of
OptiX SDH series equipment

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Hardware Description

OTA48

Lecture

Complete the maintenance records of OptiX

1d

SDH series equipment


Outline the function of basic menus of
iManager U2000 LCT

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Field Maintenance

OTA53

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Create topology including create NE/Link


Perform the NE configuration, board

0.5d

configuration, and service dispatching and


protection configuration for equipment via

Target Audience

iManager U2000 LCT

Hybrid MSTP equipment field maintenance


engineer

Perform the routine maintenance via U2000


LCT

Prerequisites

Illustrate the networking applications of the


OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Be familiar with Windows operating system

Describe the system structure and features of

Having a general knowledge of SDH basics

the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Objectives

Outline the system protection schemes of the

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Duration

Describe the networking applications of the

3 working days

OptiX OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II


Describe the system structure of the OptiX

Class Size

OSN 1500/3500/7500/7500II

Min 6, Max 12

Outline the main boards of the OptiX OSN

524

7.14.14 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) NMC Operation Training


Training Path
OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and
Maintenance
Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction

OTA45

Lecture

OTA10Lecture, Hands-on exercise 3d


1d

Target Audience

Hybrid MSTP network operation center


engineer

U2000 System Introduction

ONU01

Lecture

0.5d

Prerequisites

Having working experience in transport


network
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products
Configuration

OTA49

Hands-on exercise

Be familiar with Windows operating system


3d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application

Describe the classification of IP addresses

OTA50 Lecture, Hands-on exercise2d

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS


Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
Outline the QinQ application scenarios of
OptiX Hybrid MSTP

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side


Operation and Maintenance
1d
Lecture, Hands-on
OTA51

Describe the basic concepts of PWE3


Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format

exercise

for Ethernet
Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Hardware


Description TDM

OTA29

Lecture

for TDM E1
Describe the architecture and main features of

1.5d

U2000
Describe the directory structure of U2000
Describe the main functions of U2000

Hybrid MSTP Network Application

OTA46

Lecture

Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products


1d

Configure the protection of TDM plane &


packet transport plane for the network and
equipment
Configure the common services for the TDM

OptiX NG SDH & OCS Products


Configuration

OTA31

Hands-on exercise

plane
2d

Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service


in the packet transport plane
Outline the QoS model
Describe QoS basic concepts
525

Outline the key technology in QoS

MSTP product

Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid

Classify the service types of Ethernet


Outline the types and applications of Ethernet

MSTP network
Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system

Accomplish the network protection and SDH

according to the service demand

service configuration through NMS

Compare the function of Ethernet port and

Outline the classification of Ethernet service

service OAM

Explain the function and applications of

Outline the typical application scenario of

different types Ethernet service

Ethernet service OAM

List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG

Describe the working mechanism and

SDH & OCS equipment

application scene of MPLS OAM

Describe the functions and application of the

Describe the working mechanism and

Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH & OCS

application scene of PW OAM

equipment

Accomplish the OAM testing

Describe the features of the Ethernet boards

Locate the fault position when error reports

Accomplish the Ethernet service

Describe the operation environment of NMS

EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS

List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP

State the purpose of Ethernet performance

equipment

testing

Perform the basic maintenance operations for

List the common indices of Ethernet service

Hybrid MSTP equipment

performance testing

Complete the maintenance records

Explain the concepts of common testing

Describe the network applications of the OptiX

indices
Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service

NG SDH & OCS equipment


Explain the system structure and features of

performance testing
Implement the Ethernet performance testing

the OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment


Outline the system protection modes of the
OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment

and analyze the result

Duration

State the main functions of the cards in the

15 working days

OptiX NG SDH & OCS equipment


Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product

Class Size

networking

Min 6, Max 12

Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid

526

7.14.15 OptiX NG SDH Equipment (Packet+TDM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path
OptiX Hybrid MSTP Equipment NMS Side
Operation and Maintenance
1d
OTA51 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

OptiX SDH Ethernet Operation and


Maintenance

OTA10

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

3d

Target Audience

Hybrid MSTP operation and maintenance


engineer

OptiX NG SDH OCS Hardware


Description TDM

OTA29

Lecture

1.5d

Prerequisites

Having working experience in transport


network

OptiX NG SDH OCS Products


Configuration

OTA31

Lab, E-lab

Be familiar with Windows operating system

2d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OptiX SDH System Troubleshooting

OTA14

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the classification of IP addresses

2d

Describe the basic concepts of MPLS


Describe the basic concepts of MPLS-TP
Outline the QinQ application scenarios of

Hybrid MSTP Technology Introduction

OTA45

Lecture

OptiX Hybrid MSTP

1d

Describe the basic concepts of PWE3


Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format
for Ethernet

Hybrid MSTP Network Application

Outline the typical PWE3 encapsulation format

OTA46

Lecture

1d

for TDM E1
Configure OptiX Hybrid MSTP products
Configure the protection of TDM plane

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Products


Configuration

OTA49

Lab, E-lab

packet transport plane for the network and


equipment

3d

Configure the common services for the TDM


plane
Configure the E-Line/E-LAN/E-AGGR service

OptiX Hybrid MSTP Features Application

OTA50

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

in the packet transport plane

2d

Outline the QoS model


Describe QoS basic concepts
Outline the key technology in QoS

OptiX Hybrid MSTP System


Troubleshooting

OTA54

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the typical QoS application in Hybrid


1.5d

MSTP network
Configure QoS in Hybrid MSTP system
according to the service demand
527

Compare the function of Ethernet port and

Accomplish the network protection and SDH

service OAM

service configuration through NMS

Outline the typical application scenario of

Outline the classification of Ethernet service


Explain the function and applications of

Ethernet service OAM


Describe the working mechanism and

different types Ethernet service


List the main Ethernet boards of OptiX NG

application scene of MPLS OAM

SDH OCS equipment

Describe the working mechanism and

Describe the functions and application of the

application scene of MPLS-TP OAM

Ethernet boards of OptiX NG SDH OCS

Describe the working mechanism and


application scene of PW OAM

equipment

Accomplish the OAM testing

Describe the features of the Ethernet boards

Locate the fault position when error reports

Accomplish the Ethernet service

Describe the operation environment of NMS

EPL/EVPL/EPLAN configuration through NMS


State the purpose of Ethernet performance

List the maintenance tasks for Hybrid MSTP

testing

equipment

List the common indices of Ethernet service

Perform the basic maintenance operations for

performance testing

Hybrid MSTP equipment

Explain the concepts of common testing

Complete the maintenance records

indices

Describe OptiX Hybrid MSTP product

Outline the testing methods of Ethernet service

networking

performance testing

Outline the protection types of OptiX Hybrid

Implement the Ethernet performance testing

MSTP product

and analyze the result

Classify the service types of Ethernet

List the common analysis methods of fault

Outline the types and applications of Ethernet

locating

List the common analysis methods of packet

Outline the fault handling flow

network fault locating

Analyze the typical faults: traffic interruption,

Outline the fault handling flow

error bit, etc

Analyze the typical faults: service interruption,

Illustrate the application of common

APS switching failed, OAM errors,etc

troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back,

Illustrate the application of common

testing, alarm and performance events

troubleshooting methods for packet network

analysis, replacement, etc

Analyze common faulty of the Hybrid MSTP

Analyze common faulty of the network consist

network

of OptiX NG SDH OCS series

Describe the network applications of the OptiX

Locate and eliminate faults, get experience

NG SDH OCS equipment

from troubleshooting practice

Explain the system structure and features of


the OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Duration

Outline the system protection modes of the


OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment
State the main functions of the cards in the

18 working days
Class Size

OptiX NG SDH OCS equipment

Min 6, Max 12

528

7.14.16 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Appreciate the networking applications of the

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Hardware


Networking
1.5d
OTA60
Lecture

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)


Describe the system structure and features of
the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)
Describe the main functions of the boards
used on the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Service


Configuration
1.5d
OTA62 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Outline the system protection schemes of the


OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)
Outline the operation environment of OptiX
OSN 500/550/580 series equipment

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)


Troubleshooting

OTA63

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

List the status description of OptiX OSN


0.5d

500/550/580 equipment indicators


List the maintenance items of OptiX OSN
500/550/580 equipment
Perform the basic maintenance operations of

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Routine


Maintenance
0.5d
OTA61 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 equipment


Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
OSN 500/550/580 equipment
Configure protection attributes in OSN

Target Audience

500/550/580 network, such as SNCP, LMP,

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 operation and


maintenance engineer

RMP etc
Configure services of OSN 500/550

Prerequisites

Having experience in the operation and


maintenance of optical network equipment

/580

Duration

4 working days

Be familiar with Windows operating system


Objectives

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

529

7.14.17 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet)


Hardware Networking

OTA64

Lecture

1.5d

Appreciate the networking applications of the


OptiX OSN 500/550/580(Packet)
Describe the system structure and features of

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Service


Configuration
1d
OTA66 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet)


Describe the main functions of the boards
used on the OptiX OSN 500/550/580(Packet)
Outline the system protection schemes of the

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Special


Topic
1d
OTA67 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

OptiX OSN 500/550/580(Packet)


Outline the operation environment of OptiX
OSN 500/550/580 series Equipment
List the status description of OptiX OSN
500/550/580 Equipment indicators

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet)


Troubleshooting

OTA68

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

List the maintenance items of OptiX OSN


0.5d

500/550/580 Equipment
Perform the basic maintenance operations of
OptiX OSN 500/550/580 Equipment
Complete the maintenance records of OptiX

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Routine


Maintenance
1d
OTA65 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

OSN 500/550/580 Equipment


Configure MPLS APS/MRPS protection
attributes in OSN 500/550/580 network

Target Audience

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 operation and


maintenance engineer

Configure packet services on OSN


500/550/580

Duration

Prerequisites

Having experience in the operation and


maintenance of optical network equipment

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Be familiar with Windows operating system

530

7.14.18 OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet+TDM) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

maintenance engineer
Prerequisites

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Hardware


Networking
1.5d
OTA60
Lecture

Having experience in the operation and


maintenance of optical network equipment
Be familiar with Windows operating system
Objectives

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet)


Hardware Networking

OTA64

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

1.5d

Appreciate the networking applications of the


OptiX OSN 500/550/580(TDM+Packet)

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Special


Topic
1d
OTA67 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Describe the system structure and features of


the OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM+Packet)
Describe the main functions of the boards
used on the OptiX OSN

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM+Packet)


Service Configuration
1.5d
OTA69 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

500/550/580(TDM+Packet)
Outline the system protection schemes of the
OptiX OSN 500/550/580(TDM+Packet)
Outline the operation environment of OptiX
OSN 500/550/580 series equipment

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM)


Troubleshooting

OTA63

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

List the status description of OptiX OSN


0.5d

500/550/580 equipment indicators


List the maintenance items of OptiX OSN
500/550/580 equipment

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (TDM) Routine


Maintenance
0.5d
OTA61 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Perform the basic maintenance operations of


OptiX OSN 500/550/580 equipment
Complete the maintenance records of OptiX
OSN 500/550/580 equipment
Configure MPLS APS/MRPS protection,SNCP,

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet)


Troubleshooting

OTA68

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

LMP, RMP etc attributes in OSN 500/550/580

0.5d

network
Configure services of OSN

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 (Packet) Routine


Maintenance
1d
OTA65 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

500/550/580(TDM+Packet)

Duration

8 working days
Target Audience

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

OptiX OSN 500/550/580 operation and

531

7.14.19 OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path
OptiX SDH Ethernet Advanced Operation
Maintenance
4d
OTA42 Lecture, Lab, E-lab

Target Audience

Ethernet over SDH equipment senior operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Be familiar with NMS


Be familiar with OptiX SDH service configuration and maintenance
Be familiar with the Ethernet service configuration and maintenance
Upon completion of OTA03 Ethernet Basics course or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the working mechanism of the L2 switching
Interpret the basic of QoS
Outline the key technology in QoS
Describe the typical QoS application
Describe the frame structure of MPLS
Interpret the basic of QinQ
List the application of MPLS and QinQ
Describe the working mechanism of virtual concatenation
Describe the function of LCAS
Illustrate the GFP-F frame structure for the Ethernet signal
Describe the troubleshooting idea and methods
Analyze the common faults locating
Outline the procedures of Ethernet troubleshooting
Analyze the failure of the Ethernet service
Locate the faulty of the Ethernet service
Compare the function of Ethernet port and service OAM
Outline the typical application scenario of Ethernet service OAM
Accomplish the OAM testing
Locate the fault position when error reports

Duration

4 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12
532

7.14.20 OptiX ASON(SDH) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path
ASON Basics

OTA07

Lecture

1d

ASON Operation and Maintenance

OTA12

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

2d

Target Audience

ASON operation and maintenance engineer


Prerequisites

Having a general knowledge of SDH basics


Be familiar with NMS
Be familiar with SDH service configuration and maintenance
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Implement the creation of ASON network
Create SLA services and test the protection and restoration of them
Conduct the maintenance operation of ASON network
Explain the operation precaution of ASON
Explain the fault reported by the ASON network
Outline the methods of ASON troubleshooting
Solve the typical ASON trouble
Outline the standards of ASON
Illustrate the structure of ASON
Describe the networking characters of ASON
Explain the service characters of ASON

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

533

7.14.21 TP-Assist Operation and Maintenance Training (Hybrid MSTP)


Training Path
TP-Assist Operation and Maintenance
OTA70

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1d

Target Audience

Hybrid MSTP Maintenance Engineer


Prerequisites

Having basic knowledge for Hybrid MSTP equipment or completed OptiX NG SDH Equipment
(Packet) 2nd Line Maintenance Training
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the application scenarios of TP-Assist features
Outline the application functions of TP-Assist features
Complete TP-Assist configuration and test

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

534

7.15

Transmission Network OSS Training Programs

7.15.1 iManager U2000 Monitoring Training (Transmission Network only)


Training Path

U2000 System Introduction

ONU01

Lecture

0.5d

U2000 Alarm and Performance


Management

ONU02

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

U2000 operator and maintainer


Prerequisites

Having the basic knowledge of network management


Having the basic principle and equipment knowledge of Transmission network
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the architecture and main features of U2000
Describe the directory structure of U2000
Describe the main functions of U2000
Describe the basic concepts in alarm and performance management of U2000
Perform the browse and setting operation for alarm
Perform the basic response operation for common alarm events
Perform the browse and setting operation for performance events

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

535

7.15.2 iManager U2000 LCT Operation Training


Training Path
iManager U2000 LCT Operation

ONU12

Lecture, Lab

1d

Target Audience

U2000 LCT user


Prerequisites

Having the basic knowledge of Windows OS


Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


List the main menus of iManager U2000 LCT
Perform the NE configuration, service configuration for NG SDH equipment via U2000 LCT
Perform the routine maintenance via U2000 LCT

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

536

7.15.3 iManager N2510 OLS Operation and Maintenance Training (Transmission)


Training Path
iManager N2510 OLS System Overview
(Transmission)
ONU16

Lecture

0.5d

iManager N2510 OLS System Operation


and Maintenance (Transmission)
ONU17

Lab, E-lab

0.5d

Target Audience

N2510 Maintenance Engineer


Prerequisites

Having the basic knowledge of NMS


Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe iManager N2510 OLS networking and application
Outline iManager N2510 OLS solution of fiber optic transmission monitoring
Describe iManager N2510 OLS hardware and feature
Describe iManager N2510 OLS function
Perform iManager N2510 OLS operation and maintenance for transmission networks
Perform iManager N2510 OLS test and analysis for transmission networks

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

537

7.15.4 iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance Training for NOC FO


(Transmission)
Training Path
iManager U2000 Operation and
Maintenance for NOC FO
ONU18

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

2d

Target Audience

NOC FO and U2000 Maintenance Engineer


Prerequisites

Having the basic knowledge of NMS


Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the directory structure of U2000
Describe the main functions of U2000
Describe the basic concepts in alarm and performance management of U2000
Perform the browse and setting operation for alarm
Perform the basic response operation for common alarm events
Perform the browse and setting operation for performance events
Outline the function of Huawei network equipment
List the board type
Describe the characteristic of the common boards
List the common alarms of the equipment
List the common operation for FO

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

538

7.15.5 iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance Training for NOC BO


(Transmission)
Training Path
iManager U2000 Operation and
Maintenance for NOC BO
ONU19

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

3d

Target Audience

NOC BO and U2000 Maintenance Engineer


Prerequisites

Complete iManager U2000 Operation and Maintenance Training for NOC FO (Transmission) or
Having equivalent knowledge of NMS
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Explain the concept of security management
Complete the operation of U2000 security management
Explain the concept of data management
Complete the operation of U2000 data management
List U2000 routine maintenance items
Perform operations of routine maintenance
Complete routine maintenance for U2000
List the common analysis methods of fault localization
Locate U2000 faults
Complete NG SDH/ NG WDM common services configuration and management
Complete inventory and report management
Perform Msuite tool common operations

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

539

7.15.6 iManager U2100 Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path
U2100 System Operation and
Maintenance

OTD08

Lecture, Lab

5d

Target Audience

U2100 administrator and operator


Prerequisites

Be familiar with Windows operating system and SQL Server


Having the knowledge of Solaris and Sybase basics
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


List the features and basics of Solaris and Sybase
Describe the basic command of Solaris and Sybase
Describe the system structure, management capacity and menus of iManager U2100
Browse the SDH/WDM/PTN/Hybrid MSTP trail and their alarm through iManager U2100
Create and delete SDH/WDM/PTN/Hybrid MSTP trail through iManager U2100
Check the running status of U2100 and perform the routine maintenance
Perform the U2100 troubleshooting, deal the NMS and network problems with U2000

Duration

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

540

7.15.7 iManager uTraffic Network Performance Monitoring Training (Transmission


Network Only)
Training Path
iManager uTraffic System Introduction

Lecture

ONU20

0.5d

iManager uTraffic Configuration and


Performance Management
ONU21

Lecture, Lab, E-lab

1d

iManager uTraffic Troubleshooting


ONU22

Lecture

0.5d

Target Audience

U2000 Maintenance Engineer and Administrator


Prerequisites

Having the basic knowledge of NMS

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:

Describe the basic concepts in performance management of iManager uTraffic

Perform the browse and setting operation for performance events

Describe the IP/Transmission/Access scenario in iManager uTraffic

Understand the basic parameters in performance management of iManager uTraffic

Describe the iManager uTraffic troubleshooting

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

541

7.16

Transmission Engineer Certification Training Programs

7.16.1 Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device


Training
Training Path
Transmission Technologies and Device

OTH01

Lecture, Lab

15d

Target Audience

Personnel who are going to take HCNA HTTD (Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission
Technologies and Device) exam
Personnel who expect to learn about basic optical transmission principles and Huawei SDH
equipment operation
Prerequisites
Having a general knowledge of telecommunications

Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe SDH working principle
Describe WDM working principle
Describe OTN working principle
Describe Ethernet working principle
Describe the basic concept of MPLS
Describe the basic concept of PWE3
Describe the common SDH network topologies and their features
Explain the protection mechanism of MSP/SNCP
Explain the system structure and features of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
State the main functions of the boards in the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment
Accomplish the SDH network configuration and monitoring through NMS
Accomplish the PDH service configuration through NMS
Accomplish the Ethernet service (EPL/EVPL/EPLAN) configuration through NMS
List the common analysis methods of fault locating

Duration

15 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

542

7.16.2 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier MSTP Transmission


Network Training
Training Path
Building Carrier MSTP Transmission
Network

OTH02

Lecture, Lab

10d

Target Audience

Personnel who are going to take HCNP HTMN (MSTP) (Huawei Certified Network ProfessionalBuilding Carrier MSTP Transmission Network) exam
Personnel who expect to learn SDH network commissioning, maintenance and troubleshooting
Prerequisites

Pass HCNA HTTD (Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device)
exam or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the procedure of the SDH equipment commissioning
Describe the complex Networking of SDH
Replacing the SDH Board
Analyze the discrete services on the NMS
Tests for common Ethernet services indicators
Describe the principle of the clock protection
Describes the notes to do the SDH equipment interconnection
Complete the ECC maintenance
Describes the methods for handling typical faults and alarms to troubleshoot networks in practice
Describes the mechanism of pointer justification
Describes the functions of ASON

Duration

10 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

543

7.16.3 Huawei Certified Network Professional-Building Carrier OTN Transmission


Network Training
Training Path
Building Carrier OTN Transmission
Network

OTH03

Lecture, Lab

10d

Target Audience

Personnel who are going to take HCNP HTON (OTN) (Huawei Certified Network ProfessionalBuilding Carrier OTN Transmission Network) exam
Personnel who expect to learn WDM network configuration, commissioning, maintenance and
troubleshooting
Prerequisites

Pass HCNA HTTD (Huawei Certified Network Associate-Transmission Technologies and Device)
exam or having equivalent knowledge
Objectives

On completion of this program, the participants will be able to:


Describe the function and features of WDM cabinet, sub-rack and boards
Describe the network topologies and signal flow
Implement the data configuration through iManager U2000
Implement the single station and system commissioning step by step through iManager U2000
List the common indices of WDM product and perform the testing
Describe the WDM protection principle
Describe the notice of traffic interconnection
Describe the principle of ALC/IPA/APE
Illustrate the application of common troubleshooting methods, such as loop-back, testing, alarm and
performance events analysis, replacement, etc
Locate and eliminate faults, get experience from troubleshooting practice

Duration

10 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

544

8 Access Network Training Solution


8.1 Training Path
8.1.1

Principle

IP Basis Training
ILT

GPON Fundamental Training


1D

ILT

Broadband PPPoE/DHCP/
Radius)Basis Training

Prerequisites

ILT

VDSL2 Fundamental Training

1D

ILT

VoIP H.248/SIP Basis


Training
ILT

0.5D

0.5D

PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN


Product Interconnection Training
1D

ILT

1D

IPTV IGMP Proxy/


Snooping Basis Training
ILT

Evolution and Trends

FTTx Network Overview Training

FTTO Solution Overview

0.5D

ILT

Technical Manager

ILT

0.5D

FTTM Solution Overview


ILT

10G/40G PON Network


Overview Training
ILT

Technical Manager

8.1.2

1D

0.5D

0.5D

FTTx PON+EoC Solution


Training

MSO CMTS Solution Training


ILT

ODN Overview Training


ILT

0.5D

0.5D

iODN Solution Overview


ILT

0.5D

545

ILT

0.5D

Technical Manager

0.5D

ILT

G.fast Overview Training

0.5D

ILT

0.5D

Planning
Design
Planning
Design
Planning
Design

FTTx Planning Training


ILT

3D

ODN Planning Training


ILT

iDON Planning Training


3D

ILT

3D

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T


Series Planning Training
ILT

3D

MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP)


Series Planning Training
ILT

MSAN UA5000 Planning


Training

2D

ILT

3D

MA5600T Products

Installation and
Commissioning

8.1.4

ILT

Vectoring Overview Training

Planning

Planning
Design

8.1.3

xDSL Access Network Overview


Training

MA5600T Hardware Installation


Training
ILT

MA5600T Commissioning
Training

1D

ILT

546

3D

Installation and
Commissioning

FTTx PON Products

Installation and
Commissioning

8.1.5

MA5600T Hardware Installation


Training
ILT

1D

MA5600T Commissioning
Training
ILT

3D

ODN Installation and


Commissioning Training
ILT

MA5800 System Overview

2D

547

ILT

0.5D

GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C) 2nd


Line Maintenance Training
ILT

U2000 FTTx Service Provision


Training

10D

ILT

4D
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance
(Feature Implementation)
Training

GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd


Line Maintenance Training
ILT

7D

ILT

Operation and Maintenance

U2000 FTTx Monitoring Training


ILT

GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd


Line Maintenance Training
ILT

2D
GPON 3rd Line Maintenance
(Advanced Troubleshooting)
Training

7D

ILT

U2000 FTTx Maintenance and


Troubleshooting Training

GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line


Maintenance Training
ILT

5D

ILT

3D

5D

3D

GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line


Maintenance Training
ILT

3D

MA5600T Uplink Protection


Solution and Configuration
Training

FTTx P2P 2nd Line Maintenance


Training
ILT

ILT

ILT

Operation and Maintenance

3D

ILT

3D

3D

FTTx PON+Vectoring Operation


and Maintenance Training

MSO CMTS Operation and


Maintenance Training

7D

ILT

FTTx PON+EoC Operation and


Maintenance Training
5D

ILT

iODN Operation and


Maintenance Training

ODN Operation and


Maintenance Training
ILT

Broadband Access Network


Security Solution and
Configuration Training

3D

ILT

iODN NMS Administrator


Training
2D

548

7D

ILT

2D

DSLAM Products

Installation and
Commissioning

Installation and
Commissioning

MA5600T Hardware Installation


Training
ILT

MA5600T Commissioning
Training

1D

ILT

3D

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600


Series Commissioning Training

DSLAM SmartAX MA5300


Series Commissioning Training

DSLAM SmartAX MA5100


Series Commissioning Training

ILT

ILT

ILT

5D

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T


Series 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
ILT

Operation and Maintenance

8.1.6

7D

4D

iManager U2000 DSALM


MA5600T Series Operation and
Maintenance Training
ILT

3D

4D

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T


Series 3rd Line Maintenance
Training
ILT

10D

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600


Series 2nd Line Maintenance
Training

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600


Series 3nd Line Maintenance
Training

ILT

ILT

7D

DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU
VDSL Vectoring Operation and
Maintenance Training
ILT

3D

DSLAM MA5616 Operation and


Maintenance Training
ILT

3D

DSLAM SmartAX MA5603T


Vectoring Maintenance Training
ILT

5D

DSLAM SmartAX MA5300


Series 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
ILT

5D

549

10D

Installation and
Commissioning

Installation and
Commissioning

MSAN Products

MA5600T Hardware Installation


Training
ILT

1D

MSAN UA5000 Hardware


Installation Training
ILT

MA5600T Commissioning
Training
ILT

MA5600T 1st Line Maintenance


Training
2D

ILT

1D

MSAN UA5000 Commissioning


Training
2D

ILT

6D

MSAN UA5000 1st Line


Maintenance Training
ILT

2D

MSAN SmartAX
MA5600TVoIP Series
Commissioning Training
ILT

Operation and Maintenance

8.1.7

2D

MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP)


Series 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
ILT

3D

iManager U2000 MSAN


MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and
Maintenance Training
ILT

2D

HONET V6 MD5500 and


UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance
Training
ILT

8D

iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000


Operation and Maintenance
Training

MSAN UA5000 2nd Line


Maintenance Training
ILT

10D

ILT

3D

550

MSAN UA5000 3rd Line


Maintenance Training
ILT

10D

BITS

Operation and Maintenance

8.1.8

ILT

SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line


Maintenance Training
3D

ILT

SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line


Maintenance Training
2D

ILT

3D

OSS

Operation and Maintenance

8.1.9

SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line


Maintenance Training

iManager N2510 Copper


Software Test Operation
Training
ILT

iManager N2510 OLS Operation


Training
3D

iManager N2510 Copper


Hardware Test Operation
Training
ILT

ILT

3D

iManager N2510 Administration


Training
3D

ILT

3D

8.2 Required Training Programs


Access Network For this project, the whole training solution is designed into the following programs.
List of Training Program(s) for Access Network Project
Program
Level

Duration
(workdays)

IP Basis Training

6 ~ 12

Broadband(PPPoE/DHCP/Radius) Basis Training

6 ~ 12

IPTV(IGMP Proxy/Snooping) Basis Training

6 ~ 12

VoIP(H.248/SIP) Basis Training

6 ~ 12

PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product Interconnection


Training

6 ~ 12

VDSL2 Fundamental Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

GPON Fundamental Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

Training Program

Training
Location

Class
Size

Principle

Evolution and Trends


551

FTTx Network Overview Training

6 ~ 12

FTTO Solution Overview Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

FTTM Solution Overview Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

xDSL Access Network Overview Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

ODN Overview Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

10G/40G PON Network Overview Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

Vectoring Overview Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

G.fast Overview Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

iODN Solution Overview Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

MSO CMTS Solution Training

0.5

6 ~ 12

FTTx Planning Training

6 ~ 12

ODN Planning Training

6 ~ 12

iODN Planning Training

6 ~ 12

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training

6 ~ 12

MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Planning


Training

6 ~ 12

MSAN UA5000 Planning Training

6 ~ 12

MA5600T Hardware Installation Training

6 ~ 12

MA5600T Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

MA5800 System Overview

0.5

6 ~ 12

GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C) 2nd Line Maintenance


Training

10

6 ~ 12

GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd Line Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

Planning

MA5600T Products

FTTx PON Products

552

GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

FTTx P2P 2nd Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

FTTx PON+Vectoring Operation and Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Feature Implementation)


Training

6 ~ 12

GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Advanced


Troubleshooting) Training

6 ~ 12

MA5600T Uplink Protection Solution and Configuration


Training

6 ~ 12

Broadband Access Network Security Solution and


Configuration Training

6 ~ 12

U2000 FTTx Service Provision Training

6 ~ 12

U2000 FTTx Monitoring Training

6 ~ 12

U2000 FTTx Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training

6 ~ 12

ODN Installation and Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

ODN Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

iODN Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

iODN NMS Administrator Training

6 ~ 12

MSO CMTS Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

6 ~ 12

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 2nd Line


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 3rd Line


Maintenance Training

10

6 ~ 12

DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU VDSL Vectoring


Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

DSLAM MA5616 Operation and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

DSLAM Products
DSLAM SmartAX MA5603T Vectoring
Training

Maintenance

553

iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation


and Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning


Training

6 ~ 12

DSLAM SmartAX MA5300 Series Commissioning


Training

6 ~ 12

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series Commissioning


Training

6 ~ 12

DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series 2nd Line Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

DSLAM SmartAX MA5300 Series 2nd Line Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series 2nd Line Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series 3nd Line Maintenance


Training

10

6 ~ 12

MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series 2nd Line


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning


Training

6 ~ 12

iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training

6 ~ 12

MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training

6 ~ 12

MSAN UA5000 1st Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

MSAN UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training

10

6 ~ 12

MSAN UA5000 3rd Line Maintenance Training

10

6 ~ 12

HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance


Training

6 ~ 12

iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

MSAN Products

BITS

554

SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training

6 ~ 12

iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and


Maintenance Training

6 ~ 12

iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON)

6 ~ 12

iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM)

6 ~ 12

iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN)

6 ~ 12

iManager N2510 Copper Software Test Operation


Training

6 ~ 12

iManager N2510 Copper Hardware Test Operation


Training

6 ~ 12

iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training

6 ~ 12

iManager N2510 Administration Training

6 ~ 12

OSS

Level Description:: Basic Course : Intermediate Course : Advanced Course : Expert Course

555

8.3 Training Programs


8.4 Principle Training Programs
8.4.1

IP Basis Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

0.5d

Describe the functions of TCP/IP


Describe routing process
Describe the function and process of ARP

MPLS/PWE3 Fundamental

OBA03

Lecture

Describe VLAN forwarding process


0.5d

Describe MPLS service implementation


process
Describe PWE3 service implementation

Target Audience

process

Technical Support Engineers

Duration

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


1 working day

Prerequisites

Class Size
A basic understanding of telecommunication

Min 6, Max 12

network

556

8.4.2

Broadband(PPPoE/DHCP/Radius) Basis Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe function and message of PPP and

Broadband Service Protocols

OBA02

Lecture

PPPoE protocol
Describe function and message of RADIUS

1d

protocol
Describe function and message of DHCP

Target Audience

protocol

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Duration

1 working day

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication

Class Size

network

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

557

8.4.3

IPTV(IGMP Proxy/Snooping) Basis Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe multicast definition and application

IP Multicast Technologies

OBA04

Lecture

Describe multicast network structure


Describe multicast service implementation

1d

process

Target Audience

Describe function and message of IGMP


protocol

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Duration

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication

1 working day
Class Size

network

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

558

8.4.4

VoIP(H.248/SIP) Basis Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe SIP function and position in network

Voice Service Protocols

OBA05

Lecture

Describe SIP typical call flow


Describe H.248 function and position in

1d

network

Target Audience

Describe H.248 message structure and typical


call flow

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Duration

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication

1 working day
Class Size

network

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

559

8.4.5

PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product Interconnection Training

Training Path

Calculation of the optical fiber optical power


attenuation

PON and SDH/MSTP/PTN Product


Interconnection

OBA01

Lecture

Calculation of the sub-optical power


attenuation

1d

Describe a variety of fiber optic connectors and

Target Audience

passive optical devices


Description of the fiber optic cable related

Technical Support Engineers

knowledge

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Description of SDH features and functions

Prerequisites

List SDH network protection


Describe WDM principle and OTN frame

A basic understanding of telecommunication

structure

network

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Duration

1 working day
Class Size

Describe the structure of optical fiber

Min 6, Max 12

560

8.4.6

VDSL2 Fundamental Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

VDSL2 Fundamental

OBA21

Lecture

0.5d

Describe VDSL2 orientation and networking


Describe VDSL2 modulation mode

Target Audience

Describe VDSL2 band plans and profiles

Technical Support Engineers

Describe VDSL2 noise dealing principle

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Describe VDSL2 packet transfer mode

Prerequisites

Duration

A basic understanding of telecommunication


network

0.5 working day


Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

561

8.4.7

GPON Fundamental Training

Training Path

GPON components
Describe the upstream and downstream

GPON Fundamental

OBA22

Lecture

technology
Describe the key performance parameters on

0.5d

distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,

Target Audience

received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.


Describe important concepts about GEM port

Technical Support Engineers

and T-CONT

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Describe service encapsulation and

Prerequisites

multiplexing measures
Describe the QoS and security solution in

A basic understanding of telecommunication

GPON

network

Describe ONT management measures

Objectives

Duration

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe GPON typical application scenarios

0.5 working day


Class Size

Describe the functions and specifications of

Min 6, Max 12

562

8.5 Evolution and Trends Training Programs


8.5.1

FTTx Network Overview Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe FTTx features and orientation

FTTx Network Overview

OBA10

Lecture

Describe FTTx network solution for


FTTH/B/C/O/M scenarios

1d

Describe FTTx service solution, such as high


speed Internet service, NGN/IMS services,

Target Audience

enterprise private line services, mobile back


haul services, etc.

Technical Manager

Describe FTTx OAM solution

Prerequisites

Duration
A basic understanding of telecommunication

1 working day

network

Objectives

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

563

8.5.2

FTTO Solution Overview Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe FTTx features and orientation

FTTO Solution Overview

OBA07

Lecture

Describe FTTx network solution for FTTO


scenario

0.5d

Describe FTTO service solution, such as high

Target Audience

speed Internet service, NGN/IMS services,


enterprise private line services, etc.

Technical Manager
Prerequisites

Describe FTTO OAM solution

Duration

A basic understanding of telecommunication

0.5 working day

network

Objectives

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

564

8.5.3

FTTM Solution Overview Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe FTTx features and orientation

FTTM Solution Overview

OBA08

Lecture

Describe FTTx network solution for FTTM


scenario

0.5d

Describe FTTM service solution, such as

Target Audience

enterprise private line services, mobile back


haul services, etc.

Technical Manager
Prerequisites

Describe FTTM OAM solution

Duration

A basic understanding of telecommunication

0.5 working day

network

Objectives

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

565

8.5.4

xDSL Access Network Overview Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe xDSL network solution

xDSL Network Overview

OBA13

Lecture

Describe xDSL service solution


Describe function of components in xDSL

0.5d

network

Target Audience

Describe xDSL modulation mode


Describe xDSL band plans and profiles

Technical Manager

Describe xDSL service encapsulation process

Prerequisites

Duration
A basic understanding of telecommunication

0.5 working day

network

Objectives

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

566

8.5.5

ODN Overview Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

ODN Overview

OBA11

Lecture

0.5d

Describe ODN network solution


Describe ODN typical equipment

Target Audience

Describe ODN maintenance instrument

Technical Manager

Duration

Prerequisites

0.5 working day


A basic understanding of telecommunication

Class Size

network

Min 6, Max 12

567

8.5.6

10G/40G PON Network Overview Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

NGPON Overview

OBA12

Lecture

0.5d

Describe NGPON features


Describe NGPON implementation principle

Target Audience

Describe NGPON network solution

Technical Manager

Duration

Prerequisites

0.5 working day


A basic understanding of telecommunication

Class Size

network and GPON

Min 6, Max 12

568

8.5.7

Vectoring Overview Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Vectoring Overview

OBA13

Lecture

0.5d

Describe vectoring technology features


Describe vectoring key technology

Target Audience

Describe vectoring network solution

Technical Manager

Duration

Prerequisites

0.5 working day


A basic understanding of telecommunication

Class Size

network and GPON

Min 6, Max 12

569

8.5.8

G.fast Overview Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

G.fast Overview

OBA14

Lecture

0.5d

Describe G.fast technology features


Describe G.fast key technology

Target Audience

Describe G.fast network solution

Technical Manager

Duration

Prerequisites

0.5 working day


A basic understanding of telecommunication

Class Size

network and GPON

Min 6, Max 12

570

8.5.9

iODN Solution Overview Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe ODN Network Composing

iODN Solution Overview

OBG37

Lecture, Lab

Describe ODN Network Maintenance


Challenge

0.5d

Describe iODN Network Structure

Target Audience

Describe iODN Solution Module


Outline iODN advantage

Technical Manager
Prerequisites

Duration

0.5 working day

A basic understanding of telecommunication


network and GPON

Class Size

Objectives

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

571

8.5.10 FTTx PON+EoC Solution Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe traditional cable network Introduction

FTTx PON+EoC Solution Overview

OBA14

Lecture

Describe CMTS introduction and CMTS


network

0.5d

Describe PON+EOC solution overview

Target Audience

Outline the difference between CMTS and


xPON

Technical Manager
Prerequisites

Duration

0.5 working day

A basic understanding of telecommunication


network

Class Size

Objectives

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

572

8.5.11 MSO CMTS Solution Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

MSO CMTS Solution Overview

OBA14

Lecture

0.5d

Describe traditional cable network Introduction


Describe CMTS introduction

Target Audience

Describe MSO CMTS solution

Technical Manager

Duration

Prerequisites

0.5 working day


A basic understanding of telecommunication

Class Size

network

Min 6, Max 12

573

8.6 Planning Training Programs


8.6.1

FTTx Planning Training

Training Path

Outline OLT/ONU product functions and


specification

GPON Planning

OBG10

Outline OLT/ONU hardware architecture and

Lecture

specification

3d

Design GPON network for multiple services


Design hardware system

Target Audience

Plan bandwidth for internet service


Plan bandwidth for leased line service

Planning Engineers

Plan bandwidth for VoIP service

Prerequisites

Plan bandwidth for IPTV service

Be familiar with basic knowledge about

Plan VLAN, IP and site name

telecommunications and data communications

Plan QoS

Be familiar with GPON technology

Design security and protection solution

At least 1 years experience in

Design OAM solution

telecommunication network planning

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Describe GPON network architecture

Min 6, Max 12

Describe GPON network design background

574

8.6.2

ODN Planning Training

Training Path

Describe Closure function and application


Describe Splitter function and application

ODN Overview and Components

OBG39

Lecture, Lab

Describe TB/ATB/CTB function and application


Describe ODN project lifecycle

0.5d

Outline ODN planning process


Outline ODN planning considerations
Outline ODN topology design

ODN Planning

OBG40

Lecture, Lab

Describe ODN splitting strategy

2.5d

Describe ODN protection design


Describe ODN design scenario models

Target Audience

Describe ODN Cable Plan Considerations

Planning Engineers

Perform ODN Cable Route Design

Prerequisites

Perform ODN Cable Core Design


Perform ODN Cable Type Selection

Be familiar with basic knowledge about

Describe ODN civil work methodology

telecommunications and data communications


Be familiar with GPON Network

Outline ODN duct type

At least 1 years experience in

Outline ODN manhole and handhole

telecommunication network planning

Describe ISP typical scenarios and solutions


Outline ISP modules and workflow

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe ODN Case

Duration

Describe ODN architecture


Describe ODF function and application

3 working days
Class Size

Describe FDT function and application

Min 6, Max 12

Describe FAT function and application

575

8.6.3

iODN Planning Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

iODN Solution Overview

OBG37

Lecture, Lab

0.5d

Describe ODN Network Composing


Describe ODN Network Maintenance
Challenge

iODN Components

OBG41

Lecture, Lab

Describe iODN Network Structure


Describe iODN Solution Module

0.5d

Outline iODN advantage


Describe ODN architecture
iODN Planning

OBG42

Lecture, Lab

Describe iODF function and application


Describe iFDT function and application

2.5d

Describe iField component

Target Audience

Describe iODN planning process


Outline iODN topology design

Planning Engineers

Describe iODN splitting strategy

Prerequisites

Describe iODN protection design


Be familiar with basic knowledge about
telecommunications and data communications

Describe iODN design scenario models

Duration

Be familiar with GPON Network

3 working days

At least 1 years experience in


telecommunication network planning

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

576

8.6.4

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series Planning Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

SmartAX MA5600T (DSLAM) Planning

OBL10

Lecture

3d

Design DSLAM MA5600T network to carry


multiple service

Target Audience

Plan DSLAM MA5600T hardware system

Planning Engineers

Plan DSLAM MA5600T service bandwidth


Plan VLAN, IP and site name

Prerequisites

Plan DSLAM MA5600T QoS and security

Be familiar with basic knowledge about

Plan OAM solution for DSLAM MA5600T

telecommunications and data communications


Be familiar with DSLAM technology

Duration

At least 1 years experience in


telecommunication network planning

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

577

8.6.5

MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Planning Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Design MA5600T(VoIP) network to carry VoIP

SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Planning

OBM10

Lecture

service
Plan MA5600T(VoIP) hardware system

2d

Plan MA5600T(VoIP) service bandwidth

Target Audience

Plan VLAN, IP and site name


Plan VoIP interface parameters

Planning Engineers

Plan MA5600T(VoIP) QoS and security

Prerequisites
Be familiar with basic knowledge about

Plan OAM solution for MA5600T(VoIP)

Duration

telecommunications and data communications

2 working days

Be familiar with VoIP technology


At least 1 years experience in

Class Size

telecommunication network planning

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

578

8.6.6

MSAN UA5000 Planning Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

MSAN UA5000 Planning

OBU10

Lecture

3d

Describe system structure


Describe service implementation and solution

Target Audience

Plan hardware system

Planning Engineers

Plan bandwidth for internet service, VoIP

Prerequisites

service, and multicast service


Plan VLAN, PVC,IP and site name

Be familiar with basic knowledge about

Plan V5 or MG Interface

telecommunications and data communications


Be familiar with MSAN technology

Duration

At least 1 years experience in


telecommunication network planning

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

579

8.7 MA5600T Products Training Programs


8.7.1

MA5600T Hardware Installation Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Introduce FTTx network

GPON FTTx System Overview

OBG00

Lecture

Describe the function and structure of cabinet,


frames, boards and cables

0.5d

Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions


Install MA5600T devices cabinet, frame and
board properly

MA5600T Hardware Installation

OBG20

Lecture

Perform MA5600T devices cable routing and

1.5d

termination properly
Identify the cautions and facts which may

Target Audience

affect MA5600T system running due to


improperly installation

Installation technician
Prerequisites

Duration

2 working days

A basic understanding of telecommunication


equipment installation

Class Size

Objectives

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

580

8.7.2

MA5600T Commissioning Training

Training Path

GPON components
Describe the upstream and downstream

GPON Fundamental

OBA22

Lecture

technology
Describe the key performance parameters on

0.5d

distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,


received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.
Describe important concepts about GEM port

GPON FTTx System Overview

and T-CONT

OBG00

Lecture

0.5d

Describe service encapsulation and multiplexing


measures
Describe the QoS and security solution in GPON

GPON FTTx Basic Operation and


Maintenance

OBG30

Lecture, Lab

Describe ONT management measures


Introduce FTTx network

1d

Describe the function and structure of cabinet,


frames, boards and cables
Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions

MA5600T Stand-alone Commisioning

OBG33

Lecture, Lab

Establish the connection and login to the system

1d

Perform the common basic operation, such as


query status of hardware and software, backup

Target Audience

and restore data, system name change and

System and service Commissioning


Technicians

alarm query etc.


Perform the hardware commissioning, stand-

Prerequisites

alone commissioning,
Perform the commissioning verification

A basic understanding of telecommunication and

Perform the hardware commissioning, stand-

data communication

alone commissioning,

At least 1 year operation and maintenance

Perform the commissioning verification

experience of the telecommunication equipment

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Duration

4 working days
Class Size

Describe GPON typical application scenarios

Min 6, Max 12

Describe the functions and specifications of

581

8.8 FTTx PON Products Training Programs


8.8.1

MA5800 System Overview

Training Path

equipment

Objectives
MA5800 System Overview

OBG00

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

0.5d

Introduce FTTx network


Describe the function and structure of cabinet,

Target Audience

frames, boards and cables of MA5800

System and service Commissioning


Technicians
Prerequisites

Describe MA5800 application solutions

Duration

0.5 working day

A basic understanding of telecommunication


and data communication

Class Size

At least 1 year operation and maintenance

Min 6, Max 12

experience of the telecommunication

582

8.8.2

GPON/10GPON (FTTH/B/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the functions of TCP/IP

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

Describe routing process


Describe the function and process of ARP

0.5d

Describe VLAN forwarding process


Describe GPON typical application scenarios
Describe the functions and specifications of

GPON Fundamental

OBA22

Lecture

GPON components

0.5d

Describe the upstream and downstream


technology
Describe the key performance parameters on

GPON FTTx System Overview

distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,

OBG00

Lecture

0.5d

received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.


Describe important concepts about GEM port
and T-CONT

GPON FTTx Basic Operation and


Maintenance

OBG30

Lecture, Lab

Describe service encapsulation and


multiplexing measures

1d

Describe the QoS and security solution in


GPON
Describe ONT management measures

GPON FTTH Triple-play Service Operation


and Maintenance
3d
OBG50
Lecture, Lab

Introduce FTTx network


Describe the function and structure of cabinet,
frames, boards and cables
Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions

GPON FTTB/C Triple-play Service


Operation and Maintenance

OBG51

Lecture, Lab

Establish the connection and login to the

3d

system
Perform the common basic operation, such as
query status of hardware and software, backup

GPON FTTx Troubleshooting

OBG60

Lecture, Lab

and restore data, system name change and


alarm query etc.

1.5d

Describe GPON FTTH service implementation


process

Target Audience

Perform GPON FTTH HSI service

Technical Support Engineers

configuration, maintenance and verification.

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Perform GPON FTTH VoIP service

Prerequisites

configuration, maintenance and verification


Perform GPON FTTH IPTV service

A basic understanding of telecommunication

configuration, maintenance and verification

and IP Technology

Describe GPON FTTB/C networking

Objectives

Perform GPON FTTB/C HSI service

On completion of this program, the

configuration, maintenance and verification


583

Perform GPON FTTB/C VoIP service

Troubleshooting multicast service


Troubleshooting voice service

configuration, maintenance and verification


Perform GPON FTTB/C IPTV service

Duration

configuration, maintenance and verification

10 working days

Troubleshooting hardware and software


system

Class Size

Troubleshooting ONU

Min 6, Max 12

Troubleshooting internet access service

584

8.8.3

GPON/10GPON (FTTH) 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

Describe VLAN forwarding process


Describe GPON typical application scenarios

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

Describe the functions and specifications of


GPON components

0.5d

Describe the upstream and downstream


technology
Describe the key performance parameters on

GPON Fundamental

distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,

OBA22

Lecture

0.5d

received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.


Describe important concepts about GEM port
and T-CONT

GPON FTTx System Overview

OBG00

Lecture

Describe service encapsulation and


0.5d

multiplexing measures
Describe the QoS and security solution in
GPON

GPON FTTx Basic Operation and


Maintenance

OBG30

Lecture, Lab

Describe ONT management measures


Introduce FTTx network

1d

Describe the function and structure of cabinet,


frames, boards and cables
Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions

GPON FTTH Triple-play Service Operation


and Maintenance
3d
OBG50
Lecture, Lab

Establish the connection and login to the


system
Perform the common basic operation, such as
query status of hardware and software, backup

GPON FTTx Troubleshooting

OBG60

Lecture, Lab

and restore data, system name change and


alarm query etc.

1.5d

Describe GPON FTTH service implementation

Target Audience

process
Perform GPON FTTH HSI service

Technical Support Engineers

configuration, maintenance and verification.

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Perform GPON FTTH VoIP service

Prerequisites

configuration, maintenance and verification

A basic understanding of telecommunication

Perform GPON FTTH IPTV service

and IP Technology

configuration, maintenance and verification


Troubleshooting hardware and software

Objectives

system

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Troubleshooting ONU
Troubleshooting internet access service

Describe the functions of TCP/IP

Troubleshooting multicast service

Describe routing process

Troubleshooting voice service

Describe the function and process of ARP


585

Duration

Class Size

7 working days

Min 6, Max 12

586

8.8.4

GPON/10GPON (FTTB/C) 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

Describe VLAN forwarding process


Describe GPON typical application scenarios

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

Describe the functions and specifications of


GPON components

0.5d

Describe the upstream and downstream


technology
Describe the key performance parameters on

GPON Fundamental

distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,

OBA22

Lecture

0.5d

received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.


Describe important concepts about GEM port
and T-CONT

GPON FTTx System Overview

OBG00

Lecture

Describe service encapsulation and


0.5d

multiplexing measures
Describe the QoS and security solution in
GPON

GPON FTTx Basic Operation and


Maintenance

OBG30

Lecture, Lab

Describe ONT management measures


Introduce FTTx network

1d

Describe the function and structure of cabinet,


frames, boards and cables
Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions

GPON FTTB/C Triple-play Service


Operation and Maintenance

OBG51

Lecture, Lab

Establish the connection and login to the


3d

system
Perform the common basic operation, such as
query status of hardware and software, backup

GPON FTTx Troubleshooting

OBG60

Lecture, Lab

and restore data, system name change and


alarm query etc.

1.5d

Describe GPON FTTB/C networking

Target Audience

Perform GPON FTTB/C HSI service


configuration, maintenance and verification

Technical Support Engineers

Perform GPON FTTB/C VoIP service

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

configuration, maintenance and verification

Prerequisites

Perform GPON FTTB/C IPTV service

A basic understanding of telecommunication

configuration, maintenance and verification


Troubleshooting hardware and software

and IP Technology

system

Objectives

Troubleshooting ONU

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Troubleshooting internet access service


Troubleshooting multicast service

Describe the functions of TCP/IP

Troubleshooting voice service

Describe routing process


Describe the function and process of ARP
587

Duration

Class Size

7 working days

Min 6, Max 12

588

8.8.5

GPON (FTTO) 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

technology
Describe the key performance parameters on

GPON Fundamental

OBA22

Lecture

distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,


received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.

0.5d

Describe important concepts about GEM port


and T-CONT
Describe service encapsulation and

GPON FTTx System Overview

multiplexing measures

OBG00

Lecture

0.5d

Describe the QoS and security solution in


GPON
Describe ONT management measures

GPON FTTx Basic Operation and


Maintenance

OBG30

Lecture, Lab

Introduce FTTx network


Describe the function and structure of cabinet,

1d

frames, boards and cables


Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions

GPON FTTO Data/Voice Service


Operation and Maintenance

OBG51

Lecture, Lab

Establish the connection and login to the


system

1d

Perform the common basic operation, such as


query status of hardware and software, backup

Target Audience

and restore data, system name change and

Technical Support Engineers

alarm query etc.

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Describe GPON FTTO networking

Prerequisites

Perform GPON FTTO data service


configuration, maintenance and verification

A basic understanding of telecommunication

Perform GPON FTTO VoIP service

and IP Technology

configuration, maintenance and verification

Objectives

Troubleshooting GPON FTTO data/voice

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

service

Duration

Describe GPON typical application scenarios

3 working days

Describe the functions and specifications of


GPON components

Class Size

Describe the upstream and downstream

Min 6, Max 12

589

8.8.6

GPON (FTTM) 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

Describe the QoS and security solution in


GPON

GPON Fundamental

OBA22

Lecture

Describe ONT management measures


Introduce FTTx network

0.5d

Describe the function and structure of cabinet,


frames, boards and cables
Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions

GPON FTTx System Overview

OBG00

Lecture

Establish the connection and login to the

0.5d

system
Perform the common basic operation, such as
query status of hardware and software, backup

GPON FTTx Basic Operation and


Maintenance

OBG30

Lecture, Lab

and restore data, system name change and


1d

alarm query etc.


Describe GPON FTTM networking
Perform GPON FTTM base station access

GPON FTTM Base station access Service


Operation and Maintenance
1d
OBG51
Lecture, Lab

service configuration, maintenance and


verification
Troubleshooting GPON FTTM base station
service

Target Audience

Technical Support Engineers

Duration

3 working days

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


Prerequisites

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

A basic understanding of telecommunication


and IP Technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe GPON typical application scenarios
Describe the functions and specifications of
GPON components
Describe the upstream and downstream
technology
Describe the key performance parameters on
distance, bandwidth, optical launched power,
received sensitive power, attenuation, etc.
Describe important concepts about GEM port
and T-CONT
Describe service encapsulation and
multiplexing measures
590

8.8.7

FTTx P2P 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

participants will be able to:


Introduce FTTx network

GPON FTTx System Overview

OBG00

Lecture

Describe the function and structure of cabinet,


frames, boards and cables

0.5d

Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions


Establish the connection and login to the
system

GPON FTTx Basic Operation and


Maintenance

OBG30

Lecture, Lab

Perform the common basic operation, such as

1d

query status of hardware and software, backup


and restore data, system name change and
alarm query etc.

FTTx P2P Service Operation and


Maintenance

OBG51

Lecture, Lab

Describe FTTx P2P networking


Perform FTTx P2P Triple-play service

1.5d

configuration, maintenance and verification


Perform GPON service pre-deployment via

U2000 P2P Service Provisioning

OBH50

Lecture, Lab

U2000
Perform GPON FTTB service configuration via

1d

U2000
Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via

Target Audience

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

U2000

Duration

4 working days

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication
and IP Technology

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

591

8.8.8

FTTx PON+Vectoring Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Prerequisites

GPON Fundamental

A basic understanding of telecommunication


and data communication

OBA22

Lecture

0.5d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

GPON FTTx System Overview


OBG00

Lecture

Describe GPON typical application

0.5d

scenarios
Describe the functions and
specifications of GPON components

GPON FTTx Basic Operation and


Maintenance
OBG30

Lecture, Lab

Describe the upstream and downstream


1d

technology
Describe the key performance
parameters on distance, bandwidth, optical

FTTX GPON ONU basic operation


OBF60

Lecture, Lab

launched power, received sensitive power,


attenuation, etc.

1d

Describe important concepts about


GEM port and T-CONT
Describe service encapsulation and

FTTB/C VDSL2 service principle and


configuration
OBF61

Lecture, Lab

multiplexing measures
1.5d

Describe the QoS and security solution


in GPON
Describe ONT management measures

FTTB/C Vectoring service system principle


and configuration

OBF62

Lecture, Lab

Introduce FTTx network


Describe the function and structure of

1.5d

cabinet, frames, boards and cables


Describe FTTH/B/C/O/M solutions
Vectoring service planning and reforming
OBL70

Lecture

Establish the connection and login to


the system

0.5d

Perform the common basic operation,


such as query status of hardware and
software, backup and restore data, system

Vectoring service troubleshooting

name change and alarm query etc.


OBL71

Lecture, Lab

Describe MXU features

0.5d

Describe MXU basic configuration


Describe VDSL2 technology features

Target Audience

Describe VDSL2 key technology

Technical Support Engineers

Describe VDSL2 network solution

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Describe VDSL2 configuration of


FTTB/C
592

Describe vectoring technology features

Describe vectoring troubleshooting

Describe vectoring key technology


Describe vectoring network solution

method

Duration

Describe vectoring configuration of

7 working day

FTTB/C
Describe vectoring planning method

Class Size

Describe vectoring planning cases

Min 6, Max 12

593

8.8.9

GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Feature Implementation) Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

GPON Advanced Operation and


Maintenance

OBG70

Lecture, Lab

5d

Describe Layer2 features


Outline QoS features

Target Audience

Explain multicast features

Technical Support Engineers

Describe network protection features

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Describe security features

Prerequisites

Duration

Completion of GPON 2nd Line Maintenance


Training or having equivalent knowledge

5 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

594

8.8.10 GPON 3rd Line Maintenance (Advanced Troubleshooting) Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Troubleshooting OLT hardware and software

GPON Advanced Troubleshooting

OBG90

Lecture, Lab

System
Troubleshooting ONU

5d

Troubleshooting internet access service

Target Audience

Troubleshooting multicast service


Troubleshooting voice service

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Duration

Prerequisites
Completion of GPON 3nd Line Maintenance

5 working days
Class Size

Training or having equivalent knowledge

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

595

8.8.11 MA5600T Uplink Protection Solution and Configuration Training


Training Path

Describe Smart Link and Monitor Link feature


Describe Ethernet link aggregation feature

Ethernet Protection Fundamental


Overview

OBA20

Lecture

Describe BFD feature


Perform MSTP Configuration on MA5600T

1d

Perform Smart Link and Monitor Link


Configuration on MA5600T
Perform Ethernet link aggregation

MA5600T Network Protection

OBG90

Lecture, Lab

Configuration on MA5600T

1d

Perform BFD Configuration on MA5600T


Perform MSTP Configuration on S93 to
interconnect with MA5600T

S93 Series Switches Ethernet Protection

OBG90

Lecture, Lab

Perform Smart Link and Monitor Link

1d

Configuration on S93 to interconnect with


MA5600T

Target Audience

Perform Ethernet link aggregation

Technical Support Engineers

Configurationon on S93 to interconnect with

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

MA5600T
Perform BFD Configuration on S93 to

Prerequisites

interconnect with MA5600T


A basic understanding of telecommunication

Duration

and IP Technology

3 working days

Objectives

Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Min 6, Max 12

Describe MSTP feature

596

8.8.12 Broadband Access Network Security Solution and Configuration Training


Training Path

Describe 802.1x Configuration on MA5600T


Describe Anti-MAC Spoofing and anti-IP

MA5600T Security Solution

OBG90

Lecture

Spoofing Configuration on MA5600T


Describe User isolation and line security

1d

Configuration on MA5600T
Describe PITP Configuration on BRAS
Describe 802.1x Configuration with BRAS

BRAS Security Solution

OBG90

Lecture

Describe Anti-MAC Spoofing and anti-IP

0.5d

Spoofing Configuration on BRAS


Describe User isolation and line security
Configuration on BRAS

Integrated Security Solution Practice with


MA5600T and BRAS
1.5d
OBG90
Lab

Perform PITP Configuration with BRAS and


MA5600T
Perform 802.1x Configuration with BRAS and

Target Audience

MA5600T
Perform Anti-MAC Spoofing and anti-IP

Technical Support Engineers

Spoofing Configuration with BRAS and

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

MA5600T

Prerequisites

Perform User isolation and line security


A basic understanding of telecommunication
and IP Technology

Configuration with BRAS and MA5600T

Duration

Objectives

3 working days
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Describe PITP Configuration on MA5600T

597

8.8.13 U2000 FTTx Service Provision Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

U2000 System Introduction

ONU01

Lecture

0.5d

Describe the architecture and main features of


U2000
List the main functions of U2000

U2000 Basic Operation and Maintenance


(Access)
0.5d
OBH30
Lecture

Login to U2000 server via client


Add a map and device
Deal with the alarm
Backup and auto save the configuration

U2000 GPON Service Provisioning

OBH50

Lecture, Lab

Add a management user


Perform GPON service pre-deployment via

3d

U2000

Target Audience

Perform GPON FTTB service configuration via


U2000

Technical Support Engineers

Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


Prerequisites

U2000

Duration

General understanding of telecommunication

4 working days

network and GPON

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

598

8.8.14 U2000 FTTx Monitoring Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the architecture and main features of

U2000 System Introduction

ONU01

Lecture

U2000
List the main functions of U2000

0.5d

Describe the basic concepts in alarm and


performance management of U2000
Perform the browse and setting operation for

U2000 Alarm and Performance


Management

ONU02

Lecture, Lab

alarm
0.5d

Perform the basic response operation for


common alarm events
Perform the browse and setting operation for

Access Network Device Introduction

ONU08

Lecture

performance events
Locate the alarm in the network

1d

Explain the networking and application of

Target Audience

Huawei Access network equipment


Describe the functions of Huawei network

Technical Support Engineers

products

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Describe the capacity and features of Huawei

Prerequisites

network products
Having the basic knowledge of network

Duration

management

2 working days

Having the basic principle and equipment


knowledge of Access network

Class Size

Objectives

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

599

8.8.15 U2000 FTTx Maintenance and Troubleshooting Training


Training Path

Describe replacing ONTs


Outline configuring a Service Level for an ONT

U2000 FTTx Troubleshooting

OBG43

Lecture, Lab

Describe Remote MDU Acceptance


Describe Replacing an Ethernet-Upstream

1d

Device Quickly
Describe Replacing a PON MDU Quickly
Describe FTTx Alarm types

U2000 GPON Maintenance

OBH60

Lecture

Perform U2000 FTTx Alarm Analysis

2d

Perform U2000 FTTx Alarm Management


perform U2000 FTTx Network Performance

Target Audience

Monitoring

Technical Support Engineers

Perform U2000 FTTx Network Performance

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Management

Prerequisites

Analysis FTTx common faults troubleshooting


on U2000

Having the basic knowledge of network

Describe FTTx faults diagnose through U2000

management

Describe FTTx faults information collection

Having the basic principle and equipment

through U2000

knowledge of Access network

Describe FTTx case study on U2000

Objectives

Duration

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe FTTx fast operation and maintenance

3 working days
Class Size

Describe upgrading ONTs Automatically

Min 6, Max 12

600

8.8.16 ODN Installation and Commissioning Training


Training Path

Having the basic knowledge of Access network

Objectives
ODN Overview

OBA11

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

0.5d

Describe ODN architecture


Describe ODF function and application

ODN Overview and Components

OBG39

Lecture, Lab

Describe FDT function and application


0.5d

Describe FAT function and application


Describe Closure function and application
Describe Splitter function and application

ODN Installation and Commissioning

OBG44

Lecture, Lab

Describe TB/ATB/CTB function and application


Describe ODN deployment method

1d

Describe ODN test method

Target Audience

Duration

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

2 working days
Class Size

Prerequisites

Min 6, Max 12
Having the basic knowledge of network
management

601

8.8.17 ODN Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Describe ODF function and application


Describe FDT function and application

ODN Overview

OBA11

Describe FAT function and application

Lecture

Describe Closure function and application

0.5d

Describe Splitter function and application


Describe TB/ATB/CTB function and application
Describe ODN common operation

ODN Overview and Components

OBG39

Lecture, Lab

Describe preventive maintenance purpose

0.5d

List the maintenance tools


List of preventive Maintenance items
List of planed maintenance items

ODN Operation and Maintenance

Complete maintenance tasks

OBG45

Lecture, Lab

2d

Outline troubleshooting flow


Analysis the ODN common fault

Target Audience

Locate the ODN common fault

Technical Support Engineers

Complete corrective maintenance tasks

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Describe common fault category

Prerequisites

Outline typical fault troubleshooting method


Complete fault troubleshooting

Having the basic knowledge of network


management

Duration

Having the basic knowledge of Access network

Objectives

3 working days
Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Min 6, Max 12

Describe ODN architecture

602

8.8.18 iODN Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Outline the benefits of iODN solution


Describe U2000 ODN NMS position and

iODN Operation and Maintenance

OBG35

Lecture, Lab

function
Describe U2000 ODN NMS basic operation in

1.5d

web client
Add resource through U2000 ODN NMS web
client

iODN System Introduction

Configure iODN and services through U2000

OBG36

Lecture, Lab

0.5d

ODN NMS web client


Implement troubleshooting in U2000 ODN

Target Audience

NMS web client

Technical Support Engineers

Describe iFiled basic operation in onsite

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

construction
Describe the fiber jump process in and among

Prerequisites

the cabinet

Having the basic knowledge of ODN

Outline remove fiber operation steps

Having the basic principle and equipment

Outline cancel order operation steps

knowledge of ODN

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Duration

2 working days
Class Size

Describe iODN networking and hardware

Min 6, Max 12

Describe iODN solution

603

8.8.19 iODN NMS Administrator Training


Training Path

Describe U2000 ODN NMS ex-interface


Perform U2000 ODN NMS server and client

iODN System Introduction

OBG36

Lecture, Lab

configuration
Describe iField function and applications

0.5d

Describe alarms and events in U2000 ODN


NMS
Describe monitoring network alarms

iODN NMS Administrator Operation and


Maintenance
1.17d
OBG46
Lecture, Lab

Describe setting and handling alarms


Outline analyzing alarm correlation
Describe U2000 ODN NMS security

Target Audience

management

Technical Support Engineers

Describe U2000 ODN NMS log management

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

operation

Prerequisites

Outline U2000 ODN NMS time localization


management operation

Having the basic knowledge of network

Adjusting the U2000 ODN NMS

management

Managing License

Having the basic knowledge of Access network

Managing U2000 ODN NMS database, files

Objectives

and disks

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe method of checking resource usage

Describe ODN Network Composing

Describe how to check running status of

of the server

Describe ODN Network Maintenance

processes and services


Describe method of backing up U2000 ODN

Challenge
Describe iODN Network Structure

NMS data
Outline normal troubleshooting process and

Describe iODN Solution Module


Outline iODN advantage
Describe iODF function and application

typical cases

Duration

Describe iFDT function and application


Describe iField component
Describe U2000 ODN NMS characteristics and

2 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

software structure

604

8.8.20 MSO CMTS Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

and data communication

OBA00

Lecture

0.5d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

MSO CMTS Solution Overview

OBA14

Lecture

Describe the functions of TCP/IP

0.5d

Describe routing process


Describe the function and process of ARP
Describe VLAN forwarding process

D-CMTS Principle

Describe EOC concepts

OBG57

Lecture

0.5d

Describe EOC technologies


Describe traditional cable network Introduction
Describe CMTS introduction

iManager U2000 Service Provision (DCMTS)

OBG60

Lecture, Lab

Describe MSO CMTS solution


1d

Describe FTTx D-CMTS Triple-play service


configuration procedure
Perform FTTx D-CMTS Triple-play service

FTTx D-CMTS Troubleshooting

OBG62

Lecture

configuration correctly based on data planning


Perform the FTTx D-CMTS service

0.5d

provisioning on U2000
Describes how to troubleshoot FTTx D-CMTS
common faults and deal with emergencies in

FTTx D-CMTS Operation and


Maintenance

OBG64

Lecture, Lab

services and functions

2d

Duration

Target Audience

Technical Support Engineers

5 working days
Class Size

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Min 6, Max 12

605

8.8.21 FTTx PON+EoC Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Prerequisites

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

A basic understanding of telecommunication


and data communication

OBA00

Lecture

0.5d

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

FTTx PON+EoC Solution Overview

OBA14

Lecture

0.5d

GPON FTTx Basic Operation and


Maintenance

OBG30

Lecture, Lab

1d

Lecture

Describe the functions of TCP/IP

Describe routing process

Describe the function and process of ARP

Describe VLAN forwarding process

Describe EOC concepts

Describe EOC technologies

Describe FTTx basic concepts and


applications

PON+EOC Principle

OBG56

1d

Describe FTTx EOC product architecture

Describe FTTx EOC MA563x features

Describe how to integrate EOC product in


CATV network

FTTx EOC System Overview

OBG58

Lecture

Describe traditional cable network


Introduction

0.5d

Describe CMTS introduction and CMTS


network

iManager U2000 Service Provision (EOC)

OBG59

Lecture, Lab

1d

Describe PON+EOC solution overview

Outline the difference between CMTS and


xPON

system

FTTx EOC Troubleshooting

OBG61

Lecture

Establish the connection and login to the

0.5d

Perform the common basic operation, such


as query status of hardware and software,
backup and restore data, system name
change and alarm query etc.

FTTx EOC Operation and Maintenance

OBG63

Lecture, Lab

Perform the ONU adding and check the ONU


status

2d

Describe FTTx EOC HSI service


configuration procedure

Target Audience

Technical Support Engineers

Perform FTTx EOC HSI service configuration


correctly based on data planning

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Perform the FTTx EOC service provisioning


on U2000

606

Describes how to troubleshoot FTTx EOC

common faults and deal with emergencies in

Class Size

services and functions

Min 6, Max 12

Duration

7 working day

607

8.9 DSLAM Products Training Programs


8.9.1

DSLAM SmartAX MA5603T Vectoring

Maintenance Training

Training Path

and data communication

Objectives
VDSL2 Fundamental
OBA21

Lecture

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

0.5d

Describe VDSL2 orientation and


networking

DSLAM MA5683T basic operation


OBL72

Lecture, Lab

Describe VDSL2 modulation mode


Describe VDSL2 band plans and

0.5d

profiles
Describe VDSL2 noise dealing principle
DSLAM MA5683T VDSL2 service
configuration
OBL73

Lecture, Lab

Describe VDSL2 packet transfer mode


Describe DSLAM MA5603T features

2d

Describe DSLAM MA5603T basic


configuration
Describe VDSL2 technology features

Vectoring service planning and reforming

Describe VDSL2 key technology

OBL70

Lecture

1d

Describe VDSL2 network solution


Describe VDSL2 configuration on
MA5603T

Vectoring service troubleshooting

Describe vectoring planning method


OBL71

Lecture, Lab

1d

Describe vectoring planning cases


Describe vectoring troubleshooting
method

Target Audience

Technical Support Engineers

Duration

5 working day

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


Prerequisites

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

A basic understanding of telecommunication

608

8.9.2

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

Describe VLAN forwarding process


Describe xDSL network solution

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

Describe xDSL service solution


Describe xDSL service process

0.5d

Describe MA5600T product positioning and


networking
Outline MA5600T product functions

xDSL Technology Fundamental

OBA20

Lecture

Describe MA5600T system features

1d

List device management method


Describe MA5600T cabinet
Outline MA5600T shelf

MA5600T (DSLAM) Overview

Describe MA5600T functions of boards

OBL00

Lecture

0.5d

Outline MA5600T cables and interconnection


Establish the connection and login to the
system

MA5600T (DSLAM) Basic Operation and


Maintenance
1d
OBL30
Lecture, Lab

Perform the common basic operation, such as


query status of hardware and software, backup
and restore data, system name change, alarm
query, etc.
Describe ADSL2+/VDSL2 service

MA5600T (DSLAM) Service Configuration

OBL50

Lecture, Lab

implementation in MA5600T

3d

Describe multicast service implementation


MA5600T
Manage ADSL2+/VDSL2 line profile

MA5600T (DSLAM) Troubleshooting

Complete ADSL2+/VDSL2 service

OBL60

Lecture

1d

configuration
Perform ADSL2+/VDSL2 service operation and

Target Audience

maintenance

Technical Support Engineers

Complete multicast service configuration

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Perform multicast service operation and


maintenance

Prerequisites

Troubleshooting hardware and software

A basic understanding of telecommunication

system

and data communication

Troubleshooting internet access service

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:
Describe the functions of TCP/IP
Describe routing process

Troubleshooting multicast service

Duration

7 working days
Class Size

Describe the function and process of ARP

Min 6, Max 12
609

8.9.3

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T Series 3rd Line Maintenance Training

Training Path

Describe function and message of PPP and


PPPoE protocol

Broadband Service Protocols

OBA02

Lecture

Describe function and message of RADIUS


protocol

1d

Describe function and message of DHCP


protocol
Describe xDSL modulation mode

xDSL Technology In-depth

Describe xDSL band plans and profiles

OBA80

Lecture

0.5d

Deal with noise of xDSL line


Describe xDSL packet transfer mode
Describe triple-play solution introduction

MA5600T (DSLAM) Advanced Operation


and Maintenance
7d
OBL70
Lecture, Lab

Complete triple-play service configuration


Describe and provision xDSL features
Describe and provision layer2 features
Describe and provision QoS features

MA5600T (DSLAM) Advanced


Troubleshooting

OBL90

Lecture, Lab

Describe and provision network protection


features

1.5d

Describe and provision user security features

Target Audience

Describe and provision multicast features


Troubleshoot complex faults in hardware and

Technical Support Engineers

software system

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Troubleshoot complex faults in the Internet

Prerequisites

access service
Completion of DSLAM SmartAX MA5600T

Troubleshoot complex faults in the multicast

Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training or


having equivalent knowledge

service

Duration

Objectives

10 working days
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

610

8.9.4

DSLAM MA5603T/MA5616/MxU VDSL Vectoring Operation and Maintenance

Training
Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe VDSL2 orientation and networking

VDSL2 Fundamental

OBA21

Lecture

Describe VDSL2 modulation mode


Describe VDSL2 band plans and profiles

0.5d

Describe VDSL2 noise dealing principle


Describe VDSL2 packet transfer mode
Describe vectoring technology features

Vectoring Overview

OBA13

Lecture

Describe vectoring key technology

0.5d

Describe vectoring network solution


Describe VDSL2 service implementation
Describe multicast service implementation

DSLAM VDSL Vectoring Service


Configuration

OBL50

Lecture, Lab

Complete VDSL2 service configuration


1.5d

Perform VDSL2 service operation and


maintenance
Complete multicast service configuration

DSLAM VDSL Vectoring Troubleshooting

OBL60

Lecture

Perform multicast service operation and

0.5d

maintenance
Troubleshooting vectoring hardware and

Target Audience

software system
Troubleshooting internet/multicast service

Technical Support Engineers

based on vectoring technology

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


Prerequisites

Duration

3 working days

A basic understanding of telecommunication


and data communication

Class Size

Objectives

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

611

8.9.5

DSLAM MA5616 Operation and Maintenance Training

Training Path

Outline MA5616 product functions


Describe MA5616 system features

MA5616 (DSLAM) Overview

OBL00

Lecture

Describe MA5616 functions of boards


Outline MA5616 cables and interconnection

0.5d

Describe ADSL2+/VDSL2 service


implementation in MA5616
Describe multicast service implementation in

MA5616 (DSLAM) Service Configuration

OBL50

Lecture, Lab

MA5616

2d

Manage ADSL2+/VDSL2 line profile


Complete ADSL2+/VDSL2 service
configuration

MA5616 (DSLAM) Troubleshooting

OBL60

Lecture

Perform ADSL2+/VDSL2 service operation and


0.5d

maintenance
Complete multicast service configuration

Target Audience

Perform multicast service operation and

Technical Support Engineers

maintenance
Troubleshooting hardware and software

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

system

Prerequisites

Troubleshooting internet access service


A basic understanding of telecommunication
and data communication

Troubleshooting multicast service

Duration

Objectives

3 working days
On completion of this program, the
participants will be able to:

Class Size

Describe MA5616 product positioning and

Min 6, Max 12

networking

612

8.9.6

iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T Series Operation and Maintenance

Training
Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

U2000 System Introduction

ONU01

Lecture

0
.

Describe the architecture and main features of


U2000
List the main functions of U2000

iManager U2000 DSALM MA5600T


Series Operation and Maintenance

OBH51

Lab

Login to U2000 server via client


2
d

Add a map and device


Deal with the alarm
Backup and auto save the configuration

U2000 Basic Operation and


Maintenance (Access)

OBH30

Lecture

Add a management user


Perform ADSL2+ service configuration via

0
.

U2000

Target Audience

Perform VDSL2 service configuration via


U2000

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Duration

3 working days

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication

Class Size

and DSLAM

Min 6, Max 12

613

8.9.7

DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

0.5d

Describe the functions of TCP/IP


Describe routing process
Describe the function and process of ARP

SmartAX MA5100 Series Commissioning

OBC22

Lecture, Lab

Describe VLAN forwarding process

3.5d

Perform the hardware commissioning, standalone commissioning, network commissioning,

Target Audience

service commissioning and the commissioning


verification

System Commissioning Technicians


Service Commissioning Technicians

Duration

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication

4 working days
Class Size

and data communication

Min 6, Max 12

614

8.9.8

DSLAM SmartAX MA5300 Series Commissioning Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

0.5d

Describe the functions of TCP/IP


Describe routing process
Describe the function and process of ARP

SmartAX MA5300 Series Commissioning

OBJ22

Lecture, Lab

Describe VLAN forwarding process

3.5d

Perform the hardware commissioning, standalone commissioning, network commissioning,

Target Audience

service commissioning and the commissioning


verification

System Commissioning Technicians


Service Commissioning Technicians

Duration

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication

4 working days
Class Size

and data communication

Min 6, Max 12

615

8.9.9

DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series Commissioning Training

Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

0.5d

Describe the functions of TCP/IP


Describe routing process
Describe the function and process of ARP

SmartAX MA5600 Series Commissioning

OBK22

Lecture, Lab

Describe VLAN forwarding process

4.5d

Perform the hardware commissioning, standalone commissioning, network commissioning,

Target Audience

service commissioning and the commissioning


verification

System Commissioning Technicians


Service Commissioning Technicians

Duration

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication

5 working days
Class Size

and data communication

Min 6, Max 12

616

8.9.10 DSLAM SmartAX MA5100 Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the functions of TCP/IP

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

Describe routing process


Describe the function and process of ARP

0.5d

Describe VLAN forwarding process


Describe System Overview
Describe Hardware Architecture

SmartAX MA5100 Series Operation and


Maintenance
3.5d
OBC20
Lecture, Lab

Describe Functional Features


Describe Networking Applications
Introduce CLI
Perform System Maintenance

SmartAX MA5100 Series Troubleshooting

Perform ATM-DSLAM Service Configuration

OBC21

Lecture, Lab

1d

Perform IP-DSLAM Service Configuration


Troubleshooting ADSL service

Target Audience

Troubleshooting LAN service

Technical Support Engineers

Duration

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


5 working days

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

and data communication

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

617

8.9.11 DSLAM SmartAX MA5300 Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the functions of TCP/IP

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

Describe routing process


Describe the function and process of ARP

0.5d

Describe VLAN forwarding process


Describe product positioning and networking
Describe hardware architecture

SmartAX MA5300 Series Operation and


Maintenance
3.5d
OBJ20
Lecture, Lab

Describe functional features


Describe networking applications
Perform service configuration and
maintenance

SmartAX MA5300 Series Troubleshooting

Perform system maintenance

OBJ21

Lecture, Lab

1d

Troubleshooting hardware and software


system

Target Audience

Troubleshooting ADSL service

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Troubleshooting LAN service

Duration

Prerequisites

5 working days
A basic understanding of telecommunication

Class Size

and data communication

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

618

8.9.12 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the functions of TCP/IP

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

Describe routing process


Describe the function and process of ARP

0.5d

Describe VLAN forwarding process


Describe system networking and positioning
Describe hardware architecture

SmartAX MA5600 Series Operation and


Maintenance
5.5d
OBK20
Lecture, Lab

Describe functional features


Describe networking applications
Perform system daily maintenance
Perform service configuration and

SmartAX MA5600 Series Troubleshooting

maintenance

OBK21

Lecture, Lab

1d

Troubleshooting hardware and software


Troubleshooting ADSL service

Target Audience

Troubleshooting LAN service

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Troubleshooting Multicast service

Duration

Prerequisites

7 working days
A basic understanding of telecommunication

Class Size

and data communication

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

619

8.9.13 DSLAM SmartAX MA5600 Series 3nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

PPPoE protocol
Describe function and message of RADIUS

Broadband Service Protocols

OBA02

Lecture

protocol
Describe function and message of DHCP

1d

protocol
Describe xDSL modulation mode
Describe xDSL band plans and profiles

xDSL Technology In-depth

OBA80

Lecture

Deal with noise of xDSL line

0.5d

Describe xDSL packet transfer mode


Describe and provision QinQ VLAN features
Describe and provision VLAN Stacking

SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced


Operation and Maintenance

OBK70

Lecture, Lab

features
7.5d

Describe and provision PITP features


Describe and provision DHCP Relay features
Describe and provision IPoA to IPoE features

SmartAX MA5600 Series Advanced


Troubleshooting

OBK61

Lecture, Lab

Describe and provision PPPoA to PPPoE


features

1d

Describe and provision Triple-play service

Target Audience

Troubleshooting complex faults in MA5600


system

Technical Support Engineers

Troubleshooting complex faults in ADSL

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

service

Prerequisites

Troubleshooting complex faults in internet

Completion of DSLAM SmartAX MA5600

access service
Troubleshooting complex faults in multicast

Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training or


having equivalent knowledge

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

service

Duration

10 working days
Class Size

Describe function and message of PPP and

Min 6, Max 12

620

8.10

MSAN Products Training Programs

8.10.1 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe SIP function and position in network

H.248 or SIP Protocol

OBA06

Lecture

Describe SIP message and message flow


Describe H.248 function and position in

0.5d

network
Describe H.248 message structure and call
flow

SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series System


Overview
0.5d
OBM00
Lecture

Describe MA5600T(VoIP) Product orientation,


function and networking application
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) features
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) hardware, including

SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Basic


Operation and Maintenance
1d
OBM30
Lecture, Lab

cabinet, shelves, boards and cables


Establish the connection and login to the
system
Perform the common basic operation, such as

SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series Service


Configuration
0.5d
OBM50
Lecture

query status of hardware and software, backup


and restore data, system name change, alarm
query, etc.
Describe VoIP service implementation process
Complete VoIP service configuration

SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series


Troubleshooting

OBM60

Lecture

Perform VoIP service operation and


0.5d

maintenance
Troubleshooting hardware
Troubleshooting software

Target Audience

Troubleshooting VoIP service

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Duration

3 working days

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication

Class Size

and data communication

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

621

8.10.2 MSAN SmartAX MA5600T(VoIP) Series Commissioning Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Series System


Overview
0.5d
OBM00
Lecture

Describe MA5600T(VoIP) Product orientation,


function and networking application
Describe MA5600T(VoIP) features

SmartAX MA5600T (VoIP) Service


Commissioning

OBM33

Lecture, Lab

Describe MA5600T(VoIP) hardware, including


cabinet, shelves, boards and cables

1.5d

Perform the hardware commissioning, stand-

Target Audience

alone commissioning, network commissioning,


service commissioning and the commissioning

Technical Support Engineers

verification

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


Prerequisites

Duration

2 working days

A basic understanding of telecommunication


and data communication

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

622

8.10.3 iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T(VoIP) Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the architecture and main features of

U2000 System Introduction

ONU01

Lecture

U2000
List the main functions of U2000

0.5d

Login to U2000 server via client


Add a map and device
Deal with the alarm

iManager U2000 MSAN MA5600T (VoIP)


Operation and Maintenance
1d
OBH53
Lab

Backup and auto save the configuration


Add a management user
Perform MSAN ADSL2+ service configuration
via U2000

U2000 Basic Operation and Maintenance


(Access)
0.5d
OBH30
Lecture

Perform MSAN VoIP service configuration via


U2000
Perform MSAN multicast service configuration

Target Audience

Technical Support Engineers

via U2000

Duration

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


Prerequisites

2 working days
Class Size

A basic understanding of U2000 and MSAN

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

623

8.10.4 MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation Training


Training Path

Describe MSAN UA5000 product positioning


Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions

MSAN UA5000 System Overview

OBU00

Lecture

Describe MSAN UA5000 system features


Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking

0.5d

Describe MSAN UA5000 frame, boards and


ports
Install UA5000 cabinet, frame and board

MSAN UA5000 Hardware Installation

OBU20

Lecture, Lab

properly

1.5d

Perform UA5000 cable routing and termination


properly

Target Audience

Identify the cautions and facts which may

Installation technician

affect UA5000 system running due to

Prerequisites
A basic understanding of telecommunication

improperly installation

Duration

and data communication

Objectives

2 working days
Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Min 6, Max 12

624

8.10.5 MSAN UA5000 Commissioning Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe MSAN UA5000 product positioning

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions


Describe MSAN UA5000 system features

0.5d

Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking


Describe MSAN UA5000 frame, boards and
ports

MSAN UA5000 System Overview

OBU00

Lecture

Establish the connection and login to the

0.5d

system
Perform the common basic operation, such as
query status of hardware and software, backup

MSAN UA5000 Basic Operation and


Maintenance

OBU30

Lecture, Lab

and restore data, system name change, alarm


1d

query, etc.
Check the equipment running conditions, such
as power connections, fiber connections,

MSAN UA5000 Broadband Service


Commissioning

OBU31

Lecture, Lab

mounted boards, etc.


Perform the broadband system

2d

commissioning, network commissioning, xDSL


service commissioning
Eliminate the fault during the commissioning

MSAN UA5000 Narrowband Service


Commissioning

OBU32

Lecture, Lab

process
2.5d

Perform the narrowband system


commissioning, stand-alone commissioning,

Target Audience

network commissioning, voice service


commissioning

System Commissioning Technicians

Eliminate the fault during the commissioning

Service Commissioning Technicians

process

Prerequisites

Duration
A basic understanding of telecommunication

6 working days

and data communication

Objectives

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

On completion of this program, the

625

8.10.6 MSAN UA5000 1st Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions


Describe MSAN UA5000 system features

MSAN UA5000 System Overview

OBU00

Lecture

Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking


Describe MSAN UA5000 frame, boards and

0.5d

ports
Establish the connection and login to the
system

MSAN UA5000 Basic Operation and


Maintenance

OBU30

Lecture, Lab

Perform the common basic operation, such as

1d

query status of hardware and software, backup


and restore data, system name change, alarm
query, etc.

MSAN UA5000 Field Maintenance

OBU33

Lecture, Lab

Describe the general methods of field


0.5d

maintenance
Perform the alarm query and running status

Target Audience

query by indications of the LED


Perform simple diagnose according to field

Field Technicians

situation and daily maintenance

Prerequisites

Perform component replacement


A basic understanding of telecommunication

Duration

and data communication

2 working days

Objectives

Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Min 6, Max 12

Describe MSAN UA5000 product positioning

626

8.10.7 MSAN UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe MSAN UA5000 product positioning

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

Outline MSAN UA5000 product functions


Describe MSAN UA5000 system features

0.5d

Describe MSAN UA5000 product networking


Describe MSAN UA5000 frame, boards and
ports

MSAN UA5000 System Overview

OBU00

Lecture

Establish the connection and login to the

0.5d

system
Perform the common basic operation, such as
query status of hardware and software, backup

MSAN UA5000 Basic Operation and


Maintenance

OBU30

Lecture, Lab

and restore data, system name change, alarm


1d

query, etc.
Describe ADSL2+/VDSL2 service
implementation process

MSAN UA5000 Broadband Service


Configuration

OBU50

Lecture, Lab

Describe multicast service implementation


process

3d

Manage ADSL2+/VDSL2 line profile


Complete ADSL2+/VDSL2 service
configuration

MSAN UA5000 Narrowband Service


Configuration

OBU51

Perform ADSL2+/VDSL2 service operation and

3
d

Lecture, Lab

maintenance
Complete multicast service configuration
Perform multicast service operation and

MSAN UA5000 Broadband


Troubleshooting

OBU60

Lecture

maintenance
Describe Voice service implementation

2d

process
Complete Voice service configuration
MSAN UA5000 Narrowband
Troubleshooting

OBU61

Lecture

Perform Voice service operation and


maintenance

0.5d

Troubleshooting IPM System


Troubleshooting internet access service

Target Audience

Troubleshooting multicast service

Technical Support Engineers

Troubleshooting Ethernet port

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Troubleshooting PVM System

Prerequisites

Troubleshooting Voice service

A basic understanding of telecommunication


and data communication

Troubleshooting E1 port

Duration

Objectives

10 working days

On completion of this program, the


627

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

628

8.10.8 MSAN UA5000 3rd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

protocol
Describe function and message of DHCP

Broadband Service Protocols

OBA02

Lecture

protocol
Describe xDSL modulation mode

1d

Describe xDSL band plans and profiles


Deal with noise of xDSL line
Describe xDSL packet transfer mode

Voice Service Protocols

OBA05

Lecture

Describe SIP function and position in network

1d

Describe SIP typical call flow


Describe H.248 function and position in
network

xDSL Technology In-depth

Describe H.248 message structure and typical

OBA80

Lecture

0.5d

call flow
Describe and provision IPoA to IPoE features
Describe and provision PPPoA to PPPoE

MSAN UA5000 Advanced Operation

OBU70

Lecture, Lab

features
Describe and provision VLAN features

5d

Describe and provision DHCP Relay features


Describe and provision DHCP multicast
MSAN UA5000 Advanced Troubleshooting

OBU62

Lecture, Lab

features
Describe triple play service solution

2.5d

Complete Triple-play service configuration


Describe and provision hairpin connection and

Target Audience

self-switching

Technical Support Engineers

Describe line test networking and device

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

requirement

Prerequisites

Troubleshooting system
Troubleshooting Internet Access Service

Completion of MSAN UA5000 2nd Line


Maintenance Training or having equivalent

Troubleshooting Multicast Service

knowledge

Troubleshooting VoIP service

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Duration

10 working days
Class Size

Describe function and message of PPP and

Min 6, Max 12

PPPoE protocol
Describe function and message of RADIUS

629

8.10.9 HONET V6 MD5500 and UA5000 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

Describe routing process


Describe the function and process of ARP

IP Network Technologies Fundamental

OBA00

Lecture

Describe VLAN forwarding process


Describe SIP function and position in network

0.5d

Describe SIP typical call flow


Describe H.248 function and position in
network

Voice Service Protocols

OBA05

Lecture

Describe H.248 message structure and typical

1d

call flow
Describe provision xDSL service
Describe provision IMA service

HONET V6 Operation and Maintenance

Describe provision Ethernet service

OBU54

Lecture, Lab

6.5d

Describe provision CES service


Perform V5 interface configuration

Target Audience

Perform PV8/RSP frame configuration

Technical Support Engineers

Perform user configuration

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Perform POTS service configuration

Prerequisites

Perform ISDN service configuration


Perform daily operation and maintenance

A basic understanding of telecommunication


network

Duration

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

8 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

Describe the functions of TCP/IP

630

8.10.10 iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000 Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the architecture and main features of

U2000 System Introduction

ONU01

Lecture

U2000
List the main functions of U2000

0.5d

Login to U2000 server via client


Add a map and device
Deal with the alarm

iManager U2000 MSAN UA5000


Operation and Maintenance

OBH52

Lab

Backup and auto save the configuration

2d

Add a management user


Perform MSAN ADSL2+ service configuration
via U2000

U2000 Basic Operation and Maintenance


(Access)
0.5d
OBH30
Lecture

Perform MSAN VoIP service configuration via


U2000
Perform MSAN multicast service configuration

Target Audience

Technical Support Engineers

via U2000

Duration

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


Prerequisites

3 working days
Class Size

A basic understanding of U2000 and MSAN

Min 6, Max 12

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

631

8.11

BITS Training Programs

8.11.1 SYNLOCK V3 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

network
Describe system structure and features of

SYNLOCK V3 Operation and Maintenance

OSU01

Lecture, Lab

SYNLOCK V3
Outline main functions of boards

3d

Configure different levels of clock source


Configure SYNLOCK V3 hardware

Target Audience

Hand on practice via SYNLOCK V3 network

Technical Support Engineers

management system
Perform SYNLOCK V3 network management

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

system maintenance

Prerequisites

Perform the basic maintenance operations of


A basic understanding of telecommunication

SYNLOCK V3

network

Complete the maintenance records of

Objectives

SYNLOCK V3
Describe the common analysis methods of

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

fault locating
Analyze the typical faults

Understand basic concepts of synchronization


network

Duration

Describe the composition of synchronization


network
Describe the applications of synchronization

3 working days
Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

network
Describe the applications of synchronization

632

8.11.2 SYNLOCK V5 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

network
Describe system structure and features of

SYNLOCK V5 Operation and Maintenance

OSU02

Lecture, Lab

SYNLOCK V5
Outline main functions of boards

2d

Configure different levels of clock source

Target Audience

Configure SYNLOCK V5hardware


Hand on practice via SYNLOCK V5 network

Technical Support Engineers

management system

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Perform SYNLOCK V5 network management

Prerequisites

system maintenance
Perform the basic maintenance operations of

A basic understanding of telecommunication

SYNLOCK V5

network

Complete the maintenance records of

Objectives

SYNLOCK V5

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe the common analysis methods of


fault locating

Understand basic concepts of synchronization


network
Describe the composition of synchronization

Analyze the typical faults

Duration

2 working days

network
Describe the applications of synchronization

Class Size

network

Min 6, Max 12

Describe the applications of synchronization

633

8.11.3 SYNLOCK T6020 2nd Line Maintenance Training


Training Path

Query the device status and alarm via


SYNLOCK V3

SYNLOCK T6020 Operation and


Maintenance

OSU03

Lecture, Lab

Describe the network structure and function of


SYNLOCK V3

3d

Complete SYNLOCK T6020 system

Target Audience

configuration data via SYNLOCK V3


Query the device status and alarm via

Technical Support Engineers

SYNLOCK V3

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Explain the meaning of network

Prerequisites

synchronization
Differentiate between clock synchronization

A basic understanding of telecommunication

and time synchronization

network

List common technologies for network

Objectives

synchronization

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe common synchronization modes for

Outline product positioning of SYNLOCK

Describe clock levels and quality requirements

SDH networks

T6020

of clock at different levels

Describe hardware structure of SYNLOCK

Explain the functions of IEEE 1588v2 clock

T6020
State the functions of boards and interfaces

and its advantages/disadvantages

Duration

List the typical system configuration of

3 working days

SYNLOCK T6020
Describe the network structure and function of

Class Size

SYNLOCK V3

Min 6, Max 12

Complete SYNLOCK T6020 system


configuration data via SYNLOCK V3

634

8.12

OSS Training Programs

8.12.1 iManager N2000 BMS Administration Training


Training Path

the iManager N2000 BMS


Perform server configuration, server startup

iManager N2000 BMS Administration

OBN56

Lecture, Lab

and shutdown
Perform system user management, N2000

3d

user management, NE user Management and


so on

Target Audience

Perform service and process management,


Database management and NTP configuration

Technical Support Engineers

Perform database backup and restoration,

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

routine management, emergency

Prerequisites

management, as well as know how to use


Having the basic knowledge of NMS

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

management tool

Duration

3 working days
Class Size

Describe system structure, orientation

Min 6, Max 12

features, network application and functions of

635

8.12.2 iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Operation and Maintenance Training


Training Path

Northbound TL1 interface


Background of TL1 interface

iManager N2000 BMS Advanced Features

OBN80

Lecture

Describe hardware and software architecture


of iManager N2000 BMS

4d

Describe the functions of each application


components
Describe typical management solution which

iManager N2000 BMS Installation

may cooperate with OSS and third-party

OBN20

Lecture, Lab

1d

application and cases


Describe fault, provisioning, performance,

Target Audience

management and security solution

Technical Support Engineers

Describe the solution and implementation of

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

NBI (North Bound Interface)


Perform NBI operation and maintenance

Prerequisites

Describe the solution and implementation of

Having the basic knowledge of NMS

dual system

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Describe the installation procedure


Install iManager N2000 system properly

Duration

Describe HA solution

5 working days

Describe Watchman principles


Perform Watchman maintenance

Class Size

Describe NMS northbound interface

Min 6, Max 12

Northbound SNMP/CORBA interface

636

8.12.3 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (GPON)


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe network management architecture

iManager N2000 BMS Introduction

OBN00

Lecture

Describe the hardware and software


architecture of iManager N2000 BMS

0.5d

Describe the features of iManager N2000 BMS


Describe the interfaces Provided by N2000
Login to N2000 Server via Client

iManager N2000 BMS Basic Operation


and Maintenance

OBN30

Lab

Add a map and device

1d

Deal with the alarm


Backup and auto save the configuration
Add a management user

iManager N2000 BMS Operation and


Maintenance (GPON)

OBN50

Lecture, Lab

Perform GPON FTTH service configuration via


1.5d

iManager N2000 BMS


Perform GPON FTTB/FTTC service

Target Audience

configuration via iManager N2000 BMS

Technical Support Engineers

Duration

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


3 working days

Prerequisites

Class Size
General understanding of telecommunication

Min 6, Max 12

network and GPON

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

637

8.12.4 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (DSLAM)


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe network management architecture

iManager N2000 BMS Operation (DSLAM)

OBN51

Lab

Describe the hardware and software


architecture of iManager N2000 BMS

1.5d

Describe the features of iManager N2000 BMS


Describe the interfaces Provided by N2000
Login to N2000 Server via Client

iManager N2000 BMS Introduction

OBN00

Lecture

Add a map and device

0.5d

Deal with the alarm


Backup and auto save the configuration
Add a management user

iManager N2000 BMS Basic Operation


and Maintenance

OBN30

Lab

Perform ADSL2+ service configuration via


1d

iManager N2000 BMS


Perform VDSL2 service configuration via

Target Audience

iManager N2000 BMS

Technical Support Engineers

Duration

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


3 working days

Prerequisites

Class Size
General understanding of telecommunication

Min 6, Max 12

network and DSLAM

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

638

8.12.5 iManager N2000 BMS Operation Training (MSAN)


Training Path

Describe network management architecture


Describe the hardware and software

iManager N2000 BMS Operation (MSAN)

OBN52

Lab

architecture of iManager N2000 BMS


Describe the features of iManager N2000 BMS

1.5d

Describe the interfaces Provided by N2000


Login to N2000 Server via Client
Add a map and device

iManager N2000 BMS Introduction

OBN00

Lecture

Deal with the alarm

0.5d

Backup and auto save the configuration


Add a management user
Perform MSAN ADSL2+ service configuration

iManager N2000 BMS Basic Operation


and Maintenance

OBN30

Lab

via N2000 BMS


1d

Perform MSAN VoIP service configuration via


N2000 BMS

Target Audience

Perform MSAN V5 service configuration via

Technical Support Engineers

N2000 BMS
Perform MSAN multicast service configuration

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

via N2000 BMS

Prerequisites
General understanding of telecommunication

Duration

3 working days

network and MSAN

Objectives

Class Size

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

Min 6, Max 12

639

8.12.6 iManager N2510 Copper Software Test Operation Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Describe the function of each functional unit of

iManager N2510 Software Test System


Overview

OBS01

Lecture

iManager N2510 AOS test system


Analyze test item such as SELT, DELT

0.5d

Understand the limits of measurements


Perform the N2510 system login
Perform the System Configuration

iManager N2510 Software Test System


Operation and Maintenance

OBS32

Lecture, Lab

Carry out the line Testing operation

2.5d

Carry out the line analysis operation


Carry out the line Optimization operation

Target Audience

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Carry out the line Evaluation operation

Duration

3 working days

Prerequisites
General understanding of access network and

Class Size

Min 6, Max 12

xDSL technology

Objectives

On completion of this program, the

640

8.12.7 iManager N2510 Copper Hardware Test Operation Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

iManager N2510 Hardware Test System


Overview
1d
OBS02
Lecture

Describe LTS system typical networking


Outline LTS system function features
List part of testing measurement

iManager N2510 Hardware Test System


Operation and Maintenance
2d
OBS33
Lecture, Lab

Describe LTS system typical networking


Complete line resource configuration
Perform DMM, LB, FR and DMT via iManager

Target Audience

N2510
Complete some of the testing demonstration

Technical Support Engineers


Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Duration

Prerequisites
General understanding of access network and

3 working days
Class Size

xDSL technology

Min 6, Max 12

641

8.12.8 iManager N2510 OLS Operation Training


Training Path

Objectives

On completion of this program, the


participants will be able to:

iManager N2510 OLS System Overview

OBS03

Lecture

1d

Describe iManager N2510 OLS networking


Outline iManager N2510 OLS solution
functions

iManager N2510 OLS System Operation


and Maintenance
2d
OBS34
Lecture, Lab

List part of ODN common fault


Describe iManager N2510 OLS function
Perform iManager N2510 OLS operation and

Target Audience

Technical Support Engineers

maintenance

Duration

Operation and Maintenance Engineers


Prerequisites

3 working days
Class Size

General understanding of PON technology and

Min 6, Max 12

related parameters

642

8.12.9 iManager N2510 Administration Training


Training Path

participants will be able to:


Outline the system architecture, the network

iManager N2510 Test System Overview

OBS04

Lecture

position, the networking solution and the


functional structure of iManager N2510

0.5d

Describe the workstation platform solution of


iManager N2510 software test system, such as
PC solution and ATAE solution

iManager N2510 Test System


Administration

OBS40

Lecture, Lab

Describe the interfaces and its function of


2.5d

iManager N2510 software test system


Describe iManager N2510 installation

Target Audience

procedure

Technical Support Engineers

Describe iManager N2510 administration item

Operation and Maintenance Engineers

Perform iManager N2510 administration

Prerequisites

Duration

General understanding of access network and


OS

3 working days
Class Size

Objectives

Min 6, Max 12
On completion of this program, the

643

You might also like